ne { My 1 ny i tit A HARSH “4 i) ti Au fh ores eee = ~ 2-75 = eo Ses ve Demat APRN ADL | RES Al Or Or Shoe Cun i hy) “ tt hy ith “eM . bet es ‘ * “ty a ah rb 408s be bt =O 4-9. “ vee A iaee eee ‘ j } } ; , * Te wii hy! , ; nf } i ’ oer Vek \ MM tra P ire ‘i HNN ~ cs oan ee et rein con os $ er ‘ VA eee Bah —_ y : 4 \ ‘ {i } yf v uy Ag) Nai ee aes al + Wi 7 ( ' ; } i Wily bre rs Kt DATA TatEn et eat uy ONRaHTTT HL HA rsperiataNT ND ) io 4 SEtCUR NTE { vith a Cee Me OO a stot ie) yh vay yp i, 5 by ; Wik ewe wa LM aR Md MLLME ATER PyNe iti tabs SRR STUHR Ue . Mev are) Mi! Wii ba bata! PE ak eats iy } } CTE ) \ ; fh it I , ‘ rt (yu Week? i iaraiinie \ ' to: 5, . al eae Ale) ' PU iy eto Pinal ot Nm aphbry i). bee { \ ie Wy wali s 4 LK ye tet ah NWy8. yw Yk it fiat Ce? aM) EDM GE ba) 4) b q p { ) wit? Maem bs it I i , iy > Dtiayy : A ‘ TAN a 1 Lit Vibe iy i } } On ‘ ’ UM Pa 4 ’ ’ MWe AeA OAttare: > A ’ f Mheoiai) Cae ' WET abe } 4 f\ 2 bi TPES Mel tieretee. WAR Mu shootin of tf § { > ha y : yh } 4/+ ee woe ‘ Mone aret| MIM AS Mt be hd, invdbow wy be ce pal ' , shoe H Seda hota > ie rahe be ve bey 7) Crt REN Mgt Bhat Wy Wa dehy ye te ba teren ah it 49, Ot by he atat) f ALS stots AiO Hate nye 44 ny a iS hn as Neate : re PEM We hen ok eet - x ‘wore WK ban) ttt Uitte atetea tt Muh i eetatiere ny " Hest at ‘ ' ‘ Nh ‘ ] ATH » ' rie oye Sa ber Paneaehe Ops oLeR RA SaaS HUH Mins AMM : Wire HM vit ) *\ vi ot i" ni Mitr Bit R abe thPaboni at be bebe beaes ' Tea tie ih ss Ce bet 7 ni beret ryt , abet ae \ ‘ ty Nassua ‘ rite miei i) eats Vue bi Ny \ wt ees i a +71 Ft hes weet Nath eravere st cata ) TeTecRr aT Are Dire Vath ‘ FOR the PEOPLE FOR EDVCATION FOR SCIENCE LIBRARY O1 THE AMERICAN MUSEUM NATURAL HISTORY ——- -- ~~ Pe ENO Cc OSSEP — AN ILLUSTRATED MONTHLY RECORD OF IN AUN C OLIN IY Se Oikis AND EMP TS Dy S\Cl ey IN| Gleb EDITED BY OUEING wills (CC ACKSIN Gar@N ASSISTED BY Bo WWOUNT SEO: VOL. VII.—NEW SERIES | LONDON 110 STRAND, w.c. WHOLESALE AGENTS—Horacre MARSHALL & SON BERLIN: R. FRIEDLANDER & SOHN ‘MAN HAS SURELY NOT REACHED THE LIMITS OF HIS INTELLECTUAL DEVELOP- MENT, AND IT IS CERTAIN THAT HE HAS NOT EXHAUSTED THE INFINITE CAPA- BILITIES OF NATURE.” Lord Avebury, in “ Pre-historie Times.” “WE HAVE TO ADMIT, WITH REGRET, THAT MOST OF THE REPRESENTATIVES OF WHAT IS CALLED ‘ EXACT SCIENCE’ ARE CONTENT WITH THE SPECIAL CARE OF THEIR OWN NARROW BRANCHES OF OBSERVATION AND EXPERIMENT, AND DERM SUPERFLUOUS THE DEEPER STUDY OF THE UNIVERSAL CONNECTION OF THE PHE- NOMENA THEY OBSERVE.” Brnst Haeckel, in “ The Riddle of the Universe.” 215-GeRI- Ab OUR ANNUAL GREETING. E cannot forbear from asking our readers to felicitate with us upon the success of our past volume. The excellence of many of the contributions has obtained for the magazine congratulations from widely-distributed sources. Added to this has been the satisfaction of recording in our pages descriptions of several animals new to Science. With the conclusion of the volume come changes among our departmental editors through the retirement of Messrs. James Quick, Edward A. Martin, and Harold M. Read, who have so kindly conducted the respective departments of Physies, Geology and Chemistry. To these gentlemen we tender our sincere thanks for their past assistance. Mr. C. A. Mitchell, B.A. (Oxon.), F.LC., has undertaken the last department, and we believe that our readers will greatly appreciate the varied experience that he will bring to bear upon that section of Science. We hope at an early date to be able to announce that conductors have volunteered for the other departments. We have long felt the desirability of paying more attention to the Botanical section of Science, and we are glad to state that two gentlemen, well known as botanists, have been good enough to undertake the honorary departmental editorship. Mr. James Saunders, A.L.S., of Luton, will conduct Field Botany, and Mr. Harold A. Haig, of University College, London, will supervise Structural Botany. We trust that our readers may help to make their columns of universal interest. ; Dr. G. H. Bryan, F.R.S., has generously undertaken to assist with our mathematical columns. We have again to thank our contributors for their valuable articles and notes, and to express our regret that limitation of space has precluded the consideration of numerous other manuscripts. We have also to tender gratitude to our old and to the many new subscribers for the support they have rendered, without which it would be impossible to continue our efforts to popularise Science. 110 Strand, London. May 1901. VOLUME VIIL—NEW Ackerley, Miss M. E,, 260 Adams, Lionel B., 501, 338, 362 Allen, Rey. Francis A., 224 Allen, F. J., M.A., M.D., 74, 223, 231 Baker, George, 159 Barbour, J., M.B., 81, 365 Beardsmore, Thos. S., 315, 372 Beeby, W. H., 23 Bell, Arthur H., 4 Boycott, Arthur H., 255, 287 Bray, Miss E., 54 Bridgman, Frederick James, 254 Briggs, Charles A., F.E.S., 99 Britton, C. E., 127, 149, 159, 356 Brown, "Thomas W.. 252 Bryan, Dr. G. H., FRS., 78, 152, 242, 255, 269, 279, 296 Buckley, G. Granville, 279 Buckton, G. B., F.R.S., 257 Bullen, Rey. R., Ashington, F.L.S., 95, 127, 286 Burbidge, W. H., 184, 215 Burton, James, 352 147, 160, 173, 306, E.G.S., Carrington, John T., 21, 23 (dis), 49, 52, 115, 148, 176, 178, 210, "218, 225, 240, 271, 307, 340, 367 Carter, C. ‘S, 96 Carus-Wilson, Cecil, 319, 372 Clark, John, 317 Cockerell, Professor, F.L.S., 177 Cooke, John H., F.G.S., F.L.S8., 6, 43 Cowan, McTaggart, junr., 24 Cran, W., 183 Dallas, John E. 8., 219, 316 Dawson, W., 121 Deakin, Rev. K, A., 86, 90, 254 Dennett. F. C., 26, 27, 58, 59, 87, 92, 125, 158, 187, 220, 250, 251, 280, 281, 308, 317, 318, 321, 346, 375, 376 Dixon, J. R. L., M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P., 247, 285, 316, 374 Doeg, T. E., 127, 219 Drummond, M., 219 Emmett, H., 159 Farren, Lady Agnes F., 95 Platters, Abraham, 96 Flemyng, Rev. W. W. Filer, F. E., 161 Foulkes-Winks, B., M.R.P.S., 185, 213, 253, 276, 277, 309, SLU, 348, 549, Fuller, F. C., 373 ,219 at 13,252, 377, 375 Abnormal Pears, 219 Actinurus nepluninus, 197 Alcyonium, Polyp of, 215 Amphipod-shrimp, Spinning-leg of, 75 Antedon, Stalked Larva of, 216 Anthocaris bieti, 144; A. charlonia, lL. mesopolamica, 145 Apo-condenser, 244 Apparatus, Boyle’s Law, of Expansion. 51; tion, 41 143 ; 50; Coefficient Simultaneous Rota- CoOni Nas: CONTRIBUTORS. George, C. F., Gyngell, W., M.R.G.S., 204, 230, 286 293 Haig, Harold A., 305, 329 Harris, G. T., F.R.P. S, » L382 Hilton, Thomas, 23 (bis), 54 Hinton, M. A. C., 63 Howarth, Samuel, 127 Hughes, Reginald, J., 17, 97, 145, 218 Jackson, B. Daydon, 256 Jefferys, T. G., 121, 344 Johnson, J. P., 63, 69, 251, 233 Jones, C. H., 218 Keegan, Dr. P. Q., 60, 140, 221 Kelsall, J. E., Rev., 24 Kew, H. Wallis, 36, 75, 130, 168, 228, 263 Lang, Rev. Henry C., M.D., M.R.CS., L.R.C.P. Lond., 10, 39, 72, 112, 143, 170, 199, 237, 261, 299. 336, 360 Leighton, Gerald, M.B., 175, 390 Lewis, R. T.. 128 (bis) Lucas, W. J., 95 Major, F. C., 316 Marriott, William, 31 Martin, Edward A., F.G.S., 25, 62, 124, 156, 186, 221, 218, 221, 249, 287, 319 Martin, Geoffrey, 11, 135 May, Albert, M.D., 254 McDonald, J., 157 McGhie, W. T., 245 Mead-Briggs, T. H., M.A., 1, 41, 316 Midgley, W. W., 167 Mitchell, C. A., BA. F.L.C., 298, 335, 347, 352 , 353, 369. Morton, Henry E. M., 267 Moit, F. T., 219, 316 Mundy, A. T., 351 Murray, Jantes, 159 Mynott, Arthur R., 279 . John T., 314 279 Neeve Nowers, John E., Paskell, W., Pattrick, ee ’R. Phillips, F., 284 Piffard, Bes 23 Poore, A. J., 191 Preston, Henry, F.G.5., , 120 195 ILLUSTRATIONS. Arrenurus caudatus, 2943 A. geminus, 293 5 A. maximus, 231; A. ornatus, Dorsal Surface of Male, 204: Dorsal Surface of Male more Developed, 205 ; Male Dorsal Surface Undeveloped, 204 ; Lateral Sur- face of Male, 204; Palpus Male, 204; Petiole Male, 2064; Petiole of Male not fully Developed, 204 ; Ventral Surface of Pemale, 205; Ventral Surface of Male, 205; A. robustus, 295; A. soari, 294; A. tubulator, Dorsal View, 230; Ventral View, 230 SERIES. Quick, James, 30, 50, 54, 56, 83, 94, 155, 190, 209, 210, 211, 218, 222 Rea, Carlton, 191 Read, Harold, M., F.C.S., 57, 95, 126, 157, 189, 209, 223, 243, a , 305 Rich, Florence, 191 Robarts, ING SHE ela Robinson, J., 60 Saunders, James, A.L.S., 23 Sawer, E. Reginald, 201 Seales, F. Shillington, F.R.M.S., 21, 25, 29, 59, 61, 88, 90, 118,121, 151, 154, 180, 153, 186, 181, 214, 216, 240, 244, 247, 258, 282, 313, 342, 371 Scamell, George, 252 Shepherd, E. Sanger, 65, 108, 163 Sich, Frank, junior, 23 Skelton, T. A., 316 Skinner, Major B. M., R.A.M.C., 33, 105, 134 Smith, Rey. Adam Clarke, 121 Smith, Frank Perey, 14, 45, 106, 138, 165, 166, 177, 206, 235, 265, 303, 333, 358 Soar, Charles D., F.R.M.S., 18, 48, 84. 153, 205 Sopp, E. J. Burgess, F.E.S Stuart- Menteath, Charles 121, 5, 289. 325 1. B2, 255 Terry, John, 372 Thornewill, Rey. Charles F., 219, 379 Turner, H. J., 31 Twopenny, Dora, 24 Verity, Roger; 32, 114 Walker, Col. H. J. O., 86, 127, 191 Walker, John Swift, M.D., 247 Warburton, J.8., 24 Ward, F. R., 54 Watts, F. W., 96 Webb, 8. Albert, 24, 64 Webb, Wilfred M., F.L.S Wesché, Walter, 196 Wheeler, E., 351 Wheldon, J. A., 226 Wheler, Edward G., White, Gilbert, 352 Wilkinson, J. J., 344, 373 Wilson-Barker, Commander D., HUN.R. 351, 355 Wilson, John, 254 ., 20, 24, 181 286 363 ? Winstone, Miss F., 116, 208, 340 Woodward, B. B., F.L.S8., F.G.8., 301, 438, 362 Wright, J. H., 316 Ascia podayricu, 273 { splanchna priodonta, 197 ‘Alax intermedius, Genital Plates of Fe- male, 18; 4. intermedius, Tarsus, 18 Atupus, Earth Removed to show Entire Tube of, 165; External Portion of (2 figs.), 165; in Tube, 166; Locality near Hastings for, 165 Balanus, Cypris Stage of, Ventral View, 185; Mature with Cirri, 185 ; Nauplius Stage of, 184 lV Bacillus tubercuiosis in spntvum, 247 Beech at Esher, Abnormal. 95 Bliekbird’s Baby First Week in Liie, 241 Blade of Leaf, Transseciion across, 331 Bloemioniein, Diagram Showing Geo- logical Strata, 105 ; Disirie: Map oi, 104 Boyle's Law Apparatus, 50 Callidryas purene, 173 Calocalindrus. 30 Camera, 5 by 4, “Bullard.” 349 ; Buicher’s “Mids? 277: < na.” 350: Kodak, No. 2 Bullet, 277; Kodiak, Folding Pocket, 277; “N and G7” special +B” 379: Panoram Kodak, No. 1, 310: “Salex,” 349: the “Tdla,” 349 Camera with Conie Bellows, closed and _ Open, 253 ; with Square Bellows, 254 Cardita planicosta, 99 Centipede, Web of 36 Cephalosiphon limnias, 197 Cochleophorus spinipes (Female, Genital area of), 19: C. spinipes (Male, Ventral surface of), 19; 6. vernalis (Female, Genital area of), 19: C. rernalis (Female, Ventral surface of), 19: (€. vernalis (Veniral surface of Male), 19 Chilosia iustraia, 273 Colias aurora (Male and Female), 299; C. aurortna (Female and Male), 261: €. aurorina, var. lihanotiea, 261: C. diva, 262: C. eogene, C. eogene var.. C. romanovi, 337: C. wiskotti, Female, 237 Colurus defiexus, 197 Cornicularia unicornis (Male), and Palpus viewed from beneath, 304 Coryne vaginata, 185 Cosmarium raljsii, 30 Cover-glass Gauge, 60 = » movable, 152 Crystal Palace, A, 341 Curvipes aduncopalpis, 295 Cwm-glas-bach, Moraine heap ai the foot of, 162; Valley of, 161 Delexseria in Winter, 316 Dendritic Spots in Paper, 259 Diatoms, 254, 285 Diglena. catelina, 197 Disiyla flexilis, 197 Double Star Observation with the Sonih- East Equatotial, 179 Dytisei, British, 325 Datiseus marginalis, 239: D. marginalis, Hind leg of, 246 Enslin, Section of Plane, 33 Euasirum verrucosum, 30; E. didelia, 30: E. cuneatum, 30 Eylais dizereta, Dorsal surface, 203: £. discreta, Eye-plate, 203; E. soari, Eye- plate, 203 Fat-cells, 255 ; from rabbit, 254: crystals or, 253 Ploscularia campanulata, F. cornuta, (Yematle), F. cornuta (Male), FP. ornaia, F. ornata, cilia recracting, 197 Fureularia gibba, FP. longiseta, 197 Ganneis and Young, 53 Genealogical Tree, 211 Glacial Débris, Barmouth, 7 Gnat, Breathing and Swimming Oreans oi Larva, 344; Emergence of, 345: Head paris o7, 345: Larva of, 345; Popa oi, 345 Harveuilla mirabilis, 315 Helicigona lapicida, Loye-daré of, 181 Helix aspersa, Annulus of Dart from, 181 Courting of a Sinistral and Dexiral Specimen of, 181 = Aortensis, Love Dart of, 181 Holy Well, Mecca, Tin Botile of Water Tro, 339 Abnormal Clover Flowers. 191: Cowslip Flower. 23; Equiseti, 96, 127; Lime- tree Foliage, 96 ; Mushroom, 167 : Newz, A,301; Pears. 219: Sparrow, 219 Acetylene Flame, 239 CONTENTS. Ice Groovings near Barmouth Church. 43 Insect Hays and Scales, Developmen: of, 245 Insect Larva, Snare of, 131 Isthmia nervosa, 235 Jupiter (2 figs.), 251: Ociober 17th, 1880, and April 15th, and May, 6th, 1899, 281 Kammatograph, Closed, 270: Ready for Operation. 270 ; Section of Subject Plaie, 270: with Lantern, 271 Lachnus jormicophilus CN.S.), 257 Lamellae of Antennae of Cockchaier, 245 - Cavities on, Seen Veriically, 246 - Cavi- Hes in, seen Sideways, 246 Lawes, Sir John Bennet, Bari, F-R.S., 129 Lepidoecyrinus curvicollis, Test Seale of. 153 Lepisma saccharina, Scale of, 153 Leucophasia amurensis, 172 Hianas, 373, 314 Limnias ceratophylli, 197 Limnochares holoserieca (Dorsal Plate and Hyes), 85: ZL. holosericea (Dorsal Sur- face), 85 : L.holosericea (Mouth Organs and Palpi), 85: Z. holosericea (Female, Ventral Suriace of), 85 Machilis polupoda, Scale of, 153 Mars, February 12 and 21, 1901, 346 Hastigiocerca carinatia, 197 Melicerta ringens, 197 Metopidia solidus (Dorsal View and Side View), 197 Mezozoie Rocks, Anirim Section, 201 Micrasierias oscitans, 8) = WU jenneri, 8) Microscope, Bacieriolozicai, 28: Baker's Plantation, 89: Baker’s Planiation in Case, $3 ; Baker's RIALS. 89: Pausch and Lomb “BB.” 343; New “London” 18; HRosss Siandard, 283: Swiit’s Portable, 118 Widen Aliptica (Dorsal Surface of Female), $5 5 Jf elliptica (Genital Area of Female), 86: If. elliptica (Ventral Suriace of Female), 86: M. elliption (Third Lez of Male, Three Last Sezments 07), $6 Moon. the Pull, 307 : Moraine Heap at the Foot of Cwm-glas, 162 Movable Cover-class, 152 Mushroom, Abnormal, 167 New Fors Kop, 103 Newe, Abnormal, 351 Nova Persei, Position, 321: Spectrum, 323 Obelta geniculata, Portions of Frond. 185 Odonthatia dentata with Tetraspores, 314 Oecistes serpentinus, O. stugis. 197 Oil Condenser, 244 Ovipositor of Wild Bee, 171 Oxuptiia, Characteristics of, 47 Paardeburg Country. Section of, 35 Palpal Organs of Pedanosthetus lividus, 166 Photoomma gibbum, 166 Steatoda bipunctata, 166 Theridion lineatum, 166 Humble Bee, 183: Jaws 7 ” 7 2 Parasite irom or, 183 . Penium digitus, with one Micrasterias crenata, 79 Philodromus, Characteristics of, 16 Pholeus phalangioides, Palpus and Vulva or, 139 Photorraphic Changing Box, 378 Photographic Colour Prints, 108, 109, 111 Photographic Exposure Record and Diary ior 1901. 309 Photographic Wave Study, 225 Photography oi Colour, 163 Pieris cheiranthi,39 ; P.deota, Female, 72 : P.hippa, 11: P. kreitneri, 39; P. mesen- tina Female, 72 ARTICLES, NOTES, ETC. Aculeate Hymenopiera of Suffolk. 22 Adders and Ring-snakes. Relative Fre- quency, exc., 212 Agniculture, Board oi, Scientific Assistance to, 239 Piona latipes. Male, Fourth leg of, 49; P.ornata. Female, Genitaliarea of, 48; P. ornata. Male, Epimera of, 48; P. ornata. Male, Fourth leg of, 48: P.ornata. Pez on palpi, 48 Pionopsis lutescens, $4 Polyarthra plotipiera, 197 Polyommatus aragus, Seales of, 153 Polyp of Aleyonium, 215 Polusiphonia atro-rubescens, P. brodiari, P. wigrescens, 315 Psendo-Scorpion, Spinnine-ducts and Comb of, 225 Pierodina patina, 197 Quarry below New Fort Kop, 103 Quarry on West of Spur, 103 Rhodomela subjusca, with Tetraspores, 314 Root-hair, 329 Roitifers, A Group of, 197 Rotifer tardus, R. culgaris, 197 Sacignia frontata. Male and Palpas viewed irom beneath, 303 : Scales, Markings on Various, 152 Sbeepiick, 119: Nomenclature of parts, 363 Shells, Hocene, 97 Shelis, Typical Recent, 97 Shori-eared Owl, Nest of, 117 Spectrum oi Jupiter, 318 Spectrum Sensitiveness of a Dryplate, 63, 67 Sphacrophoria scripia (male), 273 Spiders, Cephalothoraces of Male, 266 + in Profile 266, 354. 359 Radial Joints of Male Palpi, 334 >> parts oi Male Palpi. 359 Stage, Mechanical, for Diagnostic Micro- scope. 151 Stalked larva of Aniedon, 216 Star, New, Position of, 321. 375 Stearic Acid Apparatus, 355 Stem, Young, Transseciion across, 329 Stephanoceros eichornsi, 197 Stephanops tamellaris, 197 Sitint, Nesi oi, 368 Sioma, Section across a, 331 Stone Curiain at Roxby (lateral view), 194: (showing gutter), 193 Strata, Various, 201 7 Tegenaria atrica, radial apophysis; TZ. atrica, vulva 07: T. domestica, denticula- tion of falees of ; 7. domestica, palpus oi: T. domestica, vulva ot: T. parietina, palpus oi; 7. parictina, denticalation of falces of; 7. parietina, palpus of; T. parictina, vulva oi, 133 Terracolus Jausta, 172 Theridion bimoculatum, Palpus of, 207: J. lineatum (Female, Various parts). 235: T. lineatum (Male, Various parts), 235 ; T. pallens, Palpus oi, Wi: T. pictum, Palpus of, 207 ; T. sisyphium, Palpus of, 207 Thuas, Genital Plates and Veniral Surface, 133 Tipula, Battledorelike Object in Ovi- posizor, 120 : Transpiration, Mechanics of, Diagram io ilinstrate, 331 Turntable, 30 Vaicata cristata, Egg Capsules of 151 Ventriculites, Imagined Reconstruction, 149 Venus, Phases of, 27 Waier-onzel, Hanni of 1 So Nest and Young of 3 ; Weevil, Eyes and Snout of Common, 120 & Gizzard and Antennae of 120 Aonthidiv, 30 - : Xylem and Phloem, Separate Elemenis of, 331 Xysticus, Characteristics oi, Lig Aysticus crisiatus (natural size), 47 Zegris Faustt, 171 American Coal, Value of, 218 Animal Fat. The Nature of, 353 Anodonta cygnea, 279 Aniarciie Expedition, British, 53 Seottish, 150 d Anthropological Institute, 339 Antrim, Geology in, 201 Aphides in Ants’ Nests, 257 Apparatus, New Physical, 50 Aretie Exploration, 150 Argasidae, Tenacity of Life in, 128 Arsenic and Arsenic Eaters, 298 Ash, Fasciated Growth of, 24 ASTRONOMY, 26, 58, 92, 125, 158, 187, 220, 250, 280, 317, 346, 376 Algol, Light Curve, 355 Astronomers, Chapters for Young, 27, 59, 251, 281, 318 Astronomical Society of Wales, 58 Blotter, A Useful, 280 Bruce Gold Medal, 26 “ Cambrian Natural Observer,” 220 Comet ¢ 1900, 280, 317 Comets, 26, 125 Eros, Opposition of, 187 Gold Medal, 317 Greenwich Observatory, Postponement of Annual Visitation, 22; Visitation, The, 87 Jupiter, 251, 280 281, 318, 346; in 1900, 125 - Leeds Astronomical Society, 125 Leonids, 187, 250, 346 Mars, 280, 346 Meteor, A Brilliant, 220; Daylight, 158 Meteors, 125, 187 Minor Planets, 26, 250 ; New, 58, 220, 280, alt, Moon’s Path, 317 Moon, The, 250; Hcelipse of, 26, 375 Nebula, New 220 Nineteenth Century, Short Review of, 250 Nova Persei, 376 Observatory, Brussels, 220 Observatory, Lick, 220, 280 5 Quito, 280 Occultations and Near Approaches, 187, 220, 250 Perseus, New Star in, 524 Saturn, Occultations of, 158 Spectra of Sunand Jupiter, 346 Spectroscopes, 218 Star, New Variable, 375 Stars, New or Temporary, 321 Sun, Annular Eclipse of, 187 Sun, Total Hciipse of, 58, 92, 158 Sun, Total Eclipse of, in May, 1901, 318, 375 Sunset, A Remarkable, 187 Telescope, Paris Exhibition, 26 Variable Stars, Two New, 317 x Star, New, 187 Venus, 27, 59 Astronomical Burnt, 312 Atypus, Notes on, 165 Auk, Great, Eggs of, 55 Australia, Western, Mineral Wealth of, 182 Australian Ceratodus, 279 Autumn, The Mild, 254 Observatory of Seeborg Bacteria, Literature of, 22 Barbastelle Bat in Hants, 24 Barmouth, Geology around, 6, 45 Bat, Long-eared, in Westminster, 177 Bat Swimming, 2+ Becquerel Rays, 255 Beech Tree, Peculiar Growth of, 95 Bee-orchis, Pale-coloured, 54 Bees, Instinct in, 86 » Owners of, Liable for Injuries, 122 Beetles, Some British Diving, 289, 325 “Bilge Keels,’ Medal to Prof. G. H. Bryan, 312 Bird-louse Changing Hosts, 191 Birds at Lynmouth, 1, 41 Birds’ Eggs, Colouring of, 17 5 » Fading of, 54 Birds, Society for Protection of, Prizes Given, 183 Birkbeck Institution, 147 Books 10 READ, 21, 52, 115, 148, 178, 210, 240, 271, 807, 340, 367 Air in Rooms, 240 Aleurodidae, American, 116 Alga Flora of Yorkshire, 240 Alpine Plants, 367 American Association of Economic Entomologists, Proceedings of Twelfth Annual Meeting, 240 CONTENTS. Books 10 READ—continued. Andersonian Naturalists’ Society, Annals of, 240 Antarctic Continent, First on, 340 33 Regions, The, 115 Arsenical Poisoning in Beer-drinkers, 272 Art, Story of, in the British Isles, 367 Astronomy, A Primer of, 307; Modern, 308 Bacteria, 180 Bacteriology of Everyday Practice, 52 Berzelius and Schénbein, Letters of, 21 Bird Friends, Our, 240 Birdland, In, with Camera, 117 Bird Life, Story of, 274 Birds in Northern Shires, Among the, 52 5, Of Ireland, 178 > 5, Siberia, 368 Botanic Terms, A Glossary of, 210 Botany, First Stage, 115 Book of Fair Devon, The, 240 Bournemouth, the Flora of, 116 Brain in Relation to Mind, 180 British Rubi, Handbook of, 149 By Land and Sky, 271 Chamonix, Guide to, 52 Chemistry, History of, 240, 308; In- organic, 308; Introduction to Modern Scientific, 308; Modern, 240, 308; Scientific Foundations of Analytical, 272 Church Stretton, 148 Comparative Physiology of the Brain and Psychology, 340 Construction of Large Induction Coils, 210 Convalescent’s Diet, 340 Coral Reefs, 179 Dartmoor and its Surroundings, 180 Design in Nature’s Story, 180 Devon, Book of Fair, 240 Electric Batteries, 53 Electrician’s Practical Pocket-Book, 368 Electricity and Magnetism, Elementary Lessons in, 54 Elementary Mechanics of Solids, 240, 272 Elementary Practical Physics, 54 ; Science, 340 Elements of Physics and Chemistry, 180 Englishwoman’s Year-Book, 367 Essex Field Club, Museum Handbooks, Nos. 3 and 4, 240 Evolution, Problems of, 210 Experimental Farms, Reports for 1899, 115 Field-glass and oD 6 Canada, Reports of Director of, 240 Faraday, Michael, 307 Field Columbian Museum, 52, 240 Field Geology, Outlines of, 274 Flies, British, 272 Flora of Bournemouth, The, 116 ea Skipton and District, 178 Flowering Plant, 21 Fossil Botany, Studies in, 148 Fungi, Edible British, 274 Godalming, 240 Harlequin Fly, The, 272 Heat and Electricity ? What is, 274 Heredity and Human Progress, 240 Hull Scientific and Fleld Club Trans- actions, 240 Hygiene, First Stage of, 52 x Guide Book to Natural, 180 Imitation, 367 Induction Coils, Construction of Large, 210 Insects, Geological Antiquity of, 210 Lepidoptera of the British Islands, 115 Life? What is, 274 Lilford, Lord : A Memoir, 271 Magnetism and Electricity, 240 Manchester Museum, 116 Marine Biological Association of United Kingdom, Report of, 240 Mathematies, Workshop, 210 Micro-organisms and Fermentation, 21 Microscope, Common Objects of the, 21 ; One Thousand Objects for the, 180 Microscopy of the More Commonly Occurring Starches, 240 Millport Marine Biological Station, 240 Mineralogy, 53 Books t0 READ—continued. Mollusca of British Isles, Monograph of Land and Freshwater, 181 Monthly Review, The, 148 Mosquitoes of the United States, 240 Moss Exchange Olub, Reports of, 178 Nature, A. Year with, 178 PS in Downland, 52 Nature’s Story, Designs in, 180 mn Workshops, In, 308 North Staffordshire Field Club, 53 Object-lessons in Elementary Science for Standards I., II. and III., 179 Objects for the Microscope, One Thou- sand, 180 Observatory, The Royal, Greenwich, 179 Origin of Species, The, 178 Patent Office Library, “Subject List,” No. 3, 240 Photograph Works in Patent Office, 116 Photographic Optics, Contributions to, 180 Photography in Colours, 54. Photography, Works on, in Patent Office Library, 116 Photography, Year-book of, 115 Physics and Chemistry, Elements of, 180 Physics, Elementary Practical, 54 Plant, The Flowering, 21 Prehistoric Times, 115 Psychical Research, Proceedings of the Society for, 240 Queensland, Royal Society of, Proceed- ings, 116 Reports of the Moss Exchange Club, 178 Riddle of the Universe, 208 Royal Observatory, Greenwich, 179 Royal Society of Queensland, Proceed- ings of, 116 School Journey, The, 274 Science, England’s Neglect of, 274 Scientific Roll, Bacteria, 240 Skiptonand District, Flora of, 178 Solids, Elementary Mechanics of, 272 Studies, Scientific and Social, 272 Sun-Children’s Budget, The, 52 Sun, The, Path of, 148 Sydenham, Thomas, 178 Tales Told in the Zoo, 210 Temple Encyclopedic Primers, 21 Tubercles, How to Avoid, 274 Unknown, The, 116 What the World Wants, 274 Whence and Whither, 274 White Cattle, 53 Who’s Who? 340 Workshop Mathematics, 210 Year-Book of Scientific and Learned So- cieties of Great Britain and Ireland, 117 Year with Nature, A, 178 Zermatt, Guide to, 52 Zoology, A Treatise on, 140; Vertebrate, 307 Zoology, Text-Book of, 115, 274 Botanic Terms, Glossary of, 210 Botanical Exchange Club, Report of, 22 Botanical International Congress, 150 Botany and Indian Forestry Department 150 Botany Editor Asked for, 275 Briar-root Pipes, So-called, 122 Britain, Prunus cerasifera New to, 23 British Association, 102, 142 Brown-tailed Moth in Essex, 95 Bushey House for National Laboratory, 239 BUTTERFLIES of the Palaearctie Region, 10, 39, 72, 112, 143, 170, 199, 237, 261, 299, 336, 360 Anthocharis belia, 113; A. belia, var. ausonia, 113; A. belia, var. pulverata, 113; A. belia, var. romana, 113: A. belia, vax. simplonia, 113; A. belemia, 113; A. belemia, var. glauce, 113; A. bieti, 144; A. cardamines, 143; A. carda- mines, var. alberti, 144; A. carda- mines, Var. hesperidis, 143; A. carda- mines, var. et ab turritis, 143; A. charlonia, 143; A. charlonia, var. penia, 145; _ R.M.S.1.27, 89 Bausch & Lomb’s “B.B.,” 343 R. & J. Beck’s New “ Lon- don,” 184 53 Ross’s New “ Standard,” 283 5 Swift's New Bacterio- logical, 28 6 Switt’s New Portable, 118 cf Mechanical Stage for Dia- gnostic, 151 Mosquitoes and Malaria, 151, 183 Mounting in Glycerine, 343 Paraffin Infiltration, Method of, 343 Plants, Number of Species of, 214 Podura and Other Scales, 152 Postal Microscopical Society, 88, 313 Quekett Microscopical Club, 342; Journal of, 59, 282, 344 Rotifera, Method of Preserving and Mounting, 88 CONTENTS. Microscopy—continued. Royal Microscopical Society, 59,119, 214, 244, 282, 313, 342, 371 Sheep-tick Imago, 119 Sheffield Microscopical Society, 342 Stearine and Naphthaline Imbedding, 60 Steel Rails, Causes of Fracture of, 214 Tipula, Ovipositor of, 120, 121 Tubercle in Human Spleen, 246 Vegetable Tissue, New Maceration Medium for, 314 Weevil, Common, Disjecta Membra of, 120 Wild Bee, Ovipositor of, 120 Wood Sections, Preparing, 60 Zoological Specimens, Formalin and Alcohol as Preservatives for, 313 Microscopy for Beginners, 29, 61, 90, 121, 154, 186, 216, 247 Micro-organisms, Colouring of Water by, 332 Millport Marine Biological Station, Report for 1899, 22 Mollusca, 20; of Hampshire, Land and Freshwater, 301, 338, 362; of South Sur- rey, 95; Scientific Investigation of, 286 Molluses Shells, On Colouring of, 97, 145 - Exhibition of Living, 24 Monochromatic Vision, 218 Museum, Mr. Horniman’s, Presented to L.C.C., 312 Mycological Society, British, Transactions of, 91 National Park, Another,in North America, 311 5 Physical Laboratory, 24 ~ Scientific Repository, 20, 55 “Natural Science Gazette” in Hand- writing, 311 “ Nature Study Bulletins,” 212 New Forest, Hydrachnidae in the, 133; Pond Life in the, 132 New or Temporary Star, 521 Newt, Life of a Pet, 260 Nobel Bequest, 164, 195 North London Natural History Society Balance-sheet, 22 Norway, Climate of, 279 Notes and Queries, 24, 54, 95, 127, 159, 191, 218, 254, 279, 351 OBITUARY— Anderson, Dr. John, 122 Anton, Dr. Ferdinand, 220 Atkinson, Dr. Edmund, 22 Bros, W. Law, 212 Chatin, Adolphe, 311 Crowley, Philip, 239 Farnham, Lord, 212 Gray, Elisha, 312 Keeler, Professor, 158 Kingsley, Miss Mary H., 55 Lawes, Sir John Bennet, Bart., 129 Leech, John Henry, 278 Selys-Longchamps, Baron Michel Hd- mond de, 311 Sidgwick, Professor Henry, 150 Simpson, Professor Pierce Adolphus, 122 Staudinger, Dr., 182 Stokes, Sir William, 107 Victoria, Queen, 275 Watkins, William, 55 Williams. Herbert, 311 Observations on Clouds in 1901, 212 Observatory, Biera, Milan, 255 Orange River Colony, Geological Notes in, 33, 103, 134 Orchis, New, 159 Ornithology in Australia, 312 Pacific Ocean Mystery, 283 Palaeolithic Man in the Valley of the Wandle, 69, 177 Paludestrina jenkinsi, 236 Parental Relationship, 175 Paris Exhibition Awards, 150 Phonetics and Ethnology, 32 Photographic Salon, The, 160 PHOTOGRAPHY— Catalogue, Thornton Pickard, 377 Christmas Cards, Photographic, 213 Cloud Negatives, 377 Diary, Photographic, 309 Exposure Table, 252, 276, 309, 348, 377 Gaslight, Printing by. 252 vil PHOTOGRAPHY—continued, Hampstead Scientific Society, 309 Kammatograph, 233 Lantern Slides, 213 National Photographic Record Associa- tion, 252 Negatives, Fading, 276 Novelties, 348 Photographic Convention of the United Kingdom, 276 Photographie Wave Studies, 225 Questions and Answers, Photographic, 213 Loyal Photographic Society, 188, 309, 348 Snow Pictures, 276 Telephoto Lenses, 348 Toning Bath for P.O.P., 276 Toning Solution, 213 ; Uranium, 213 Velox Paper and Developing Cartols, 213 Photography for Beginners, 253, 277, 310, 349, 378 Photography of Colour, 65, 108, 163 Physical Laboratory, Owens College, $3 PHysics— ay Air, Expansion of, 123 Atmospheric Electricity, 190 Becquerel Rays, 222 Birmingham, University of, 123 British Association, Physics at, 155 Electricity and Engineering, Relations between, 30 Galton’s Whistles, 190 Induction Coil Condensers, 94 Interrupter, Webnelt, 123 Kew Observatory, 222 Lichtenberg Figures, 56 London, Physical Society of, 94, 222 Magnetic Flag, A Revolving, 94 Metals, The Structure of, 56, 94 Meteorology, Kites and Balloons in, 56 ane ees Clouds over Physics, Paris Congress, 56 Paris, Electric Tramways in, 56 Photographic Plates, Electrical Dis- charges upon, 123 Radio-active Bodies, 190 Rontgen Rays, 190 Royal Society, The, 30 Society of Arts, 30 Space Telegraphy, Simple Relay for, 222 Spark Discharge, Wavy, 123 Telegraph, New Typewriting, 30 Telephonograph, The, 30 Telephony over Telegraph Lines, 190 Wave-motion Model, 123 Wireless Telegraph, 30, 222 Wires, Extension of, 190 X-ray Localiser, A New, 56 Pieris rapae, Larva in January, 314 Pigeon Post, 229 Plant Life, Enigmas of, 140 >» Names, Irish, 81, 147, 305 Plants, Formalin as a Preservative for, 357 >» Nature Pictures of, 64 s Of South Hants and Dorsetshire, 23 + Spirals in, 226 Pond Life in the New Forest, 132 Postal Microscopical Society, Extracts from Note-books, 119, 152, 184, 215, 245, 284, 314, 344, 372 Potamogeton rutilus in Sussex, 25 Professor’s Petrie’s Scheme, 49 Prunus cerasifera, New to Britain, 23 Quaker Contributions to Nineteenth Cen- tury Literature, 239 Radcliffe Observatory, Telescope for, 202 Rainfall in Britain, 236 Rain-gauge, New Self-registering, 55 Rare Birds, Protection of, 20 Relation of Parent to Offspring, 254 Reptiles in Winter, 300 * Riddle of the Universe,” 208 Royal Institution, 255 ; Hull, Appointment of Curator, 275 Royal Meteorological Society, Report for 1900, 275 Royal Society Medals, 239; Society Pre- sident, 239 Salicornia appressa in Sussex, 23, 329 Salt, Use of, for Health, 312 Sap, Mechanies of Conduction of, 305 Scheme, Professor Petrie’s, 49 Vill Science Appointments, 27: > and Art, A Natural Repository, 20 = and the ae African War, 150 = Gossip, 22, 55, 91, 122, 150, 182, 212, 239, 275, 311, 339, 370 4 Honours for Men of, 17, 339 - Teachers, Conference of, 275 Teaching, Reform in, Needed, 275 Scientific Expedition irom Harvard Uni- versity, 312 Scientific Research by Women, Prizes, 311 Seientifie Roll, 22 Scieniifie Societies, Origin of, 209 Shells, Eresion of, 255 Shock from Meteorite, 239 Silene tialiea in Sussex, 23 Snails ai Bich Altitudes, Colonies of, 256 Snow Orysials, Geometrical, 269 South Aijrica, Protection of Wild Animals in, 22 *< South-Kastern Naturalist.~ 152 South-Eastern Union of Scientific cieties, Meeting-place of, 311 South-Hastern Union of Scientific So- cieties, 24, £4,511 South Hanis and Dorset, Planis of, 23 South London Entomological and Natural History Society, Proceadings for 1899, 22 Sparrows in Frost, 316 Spider, A Cunning, 219 SpipErs, An Iniroduction io British— Agelena labyrinthiea, 140; 4. prompia. 140 Aqroeca brunnea, 14: A. celans, 14: A. celer, 14; A. gracilipes, 14: A. tnopina, 14; A. proxima, 14 Anyphaena acceniuata, 14 Araeconeus crassiceps, 334> A. humilis, S04: A. caporariorum, 334 Argyronea aquatica, 135 Asagena phaleraia, 236 Baryphyma pratensis, 267 Chiracanthium carnijex, 14- C_erraticum, 14: ©. lapidiciens, 14: C. pennyi, 14 Cnephalocotes curius, 334; C. elegans, 334; C. obseurus, 303; C. silus, 334 Coelotes atropos, 139 = C. immacuiaius, 139 Cornicularia cava, 267: C. euspidata, 267; C. vigilax, 267 Crustulina quiiaia, 236; €. sticia, 236 Crypheeca moerens, 138 = €. silvicota, 135 Diaea. devroniensis, 47 + D. dorsata, 47 Diplocephatus alpimus, 360; D. beckii, 360 = D. crustaius, 360; D. fuseipes, 360 ; D. tatrifrons, 360: D. permixtus, 360 : D. pictnus, 360: D. speciosus, 360 Dipoena melanogasta, 235 FHnoplognatha thoraccia, 236 Entelecara acuminata, 3353: E. ery- thropus, 359; E. thoreliti, 359; £. trifons, 359 CONTENTS. SPIDERS —conftnmued. Ppizinus truncatus, 206 Euryopis fiaco-maculata, 236; E. haema- fostiqgma, 236 Evansia merens, 359 Hatmia candida, 167; H. elegans, 167 : Hi. helveola, 167; H. montana, 167: H. nara, 167 Laseola. coracina, 235; L. tnornaia, 235 + LI. prona, 235 ; L. tristis, 235 Diocranum domesticum 14 Lophocarenum tlackwailii, 358; L. men- gli, 358: L. nemorale, 358: L. paral- ielum, 338 Metapobactrus prominulus, 304 Micaria pulicaria, 15 ; W. scintilians, 15 Micariosoma jesticum, 15 > Mf. wirescens,15 Miryrioius pusilius, 304 Misumena truncata, 47 > I eatra, 47 Oxepiiia atomaria, 46: O. blackwallti, 45 = O. flexa, 46: 0. praticoia, 45 = O. sanc- iuavia, 45: O. simpler, 46: O. trux. 46 Panamomops bieuspis, 267 Pedanosiethus lividus, 236 Peponocrantum tudicrum, 334 Philodromus aureolus, 45 ; P. cespiticolens, 45: P. clarki, 45: P. constellaius, 45: P. dispar, 16: P. clegans, 45: P. emarginatus, 45; P. jallaz, 45: P. lineatipes, 45: P. margartiaius, 16: P. misius, 45; P. praedatus, 43: P- cariatus, 45 Phoicomma gibtim, 207 Phoicus phatangiwides, 167 Pocadicnemas pumillus, 304 Prosopotheca monoceros, 266 Savignia jrontaia, 358 Stentoda tipunectata, 236 Styloctetor broccha, 304: S. peniciflatus, S04 Tapinocyba dotosa, 333: T. incurvata, 333: T. morata, 333: T. praecor, 333 ; T. subaequalis, 303: T. subitanea, 333 Tegenaria atrica, 139; T. campestris, 140: T. cinerea, 140; T. domestica, 140: 7. hibermica, 140: T. nobilis, 236 : T. pagana, 120: T. parietina, 139 Teutana grossa, 236 Texiriz denticulata, 166 Thanatus striatus, 16 Theonoe minutissima, 207 Theridion audicum, 26: T. timacu- lafum, Wi: T. deniieulatum, 206: T. jamiliare, 7: T. jormosum, 206 : T. linenium, Wi: T. lepidum, 207 > T. pallens, 207: T. piefum, 206+; T. tepidariorum, 206: T. simile: 207: T. sisephinum, 206: T. tinctum, 206: T. cariaus, 206; T. riparinm, 207; T. vittatum, 205 SPIDERS—continued. Thomisus onustus, 47 Tibellus oblongus, 15 a aged Surciliatus, 267; T. saxicoia, 26 Troxochrus ignobilis, 334: hiemalis. 334 : soabricuius, 303 Wolckenaera jucundissima, 266: W. nudipalpis, 266; W. nodosa, 266: W. obtusa, 266 Awsticus bifasciatus, 46> X. cambridaii. 46; XA. cristatus, 46: X. erraticus, 46 ; X. lanio, 46: X. luciator, 46 > X. Tue- tuosus, 46 > X. lwncens, 46> AX. pint, 46 : A. robustus, 46: X. sabyulosus, 46: X. aim, 46: X. wiaticus, 46 Zora spinamana, 15 SUNS Animals, 36, 75, 130, 168. 195, Sie The Laie, 24 Stevens, Samuel, Collection—Amonni Real- ised, 22 Stone Curtain at Roxby, 193 Stonehenge. Tnjury to, 275 Swallows Nest—Unmsual Site, 27, 95 Symons, G. J. F.B.3., Memorial io, 212 Technology. 247 Telegraphone. The, 279 Ticks, British, 363 Transactions of Societies, 31, 191 Twisted Trees, 219 Vanessn anitopa, 159 Varietal Names, 20 ; Violet, A Hybrid, 127 ° Wave Forms, Studies in, 152 Wave Simdies, Photographic, 225 Weather of 1900, 312 > Chari, British, for 1901, 312 Prophets, Animals as, 4 “Weeping Chrysanthemum,” Curious, 233 Westminster, A Section in, 352 Wheaistone Bridge: Universal, 209 Wireless Telegraphy, Practical Applica- tion, 91 Women Workers in Science, 150 Woodpecker Feeding on Ground, 316, 351 Yorkshire Naturalists, Union of. 71 Zem Zem Water of Mecca, 335 + Zetetic Cosmogony.” 150 Zoological Gardens, Eoypt. Reporé of, 22 ae Tniernational Congress of, Meet- ngs and Subjecis, 312 v, DE. - ae UO Cae NS oe on@goron & ap BIRDS, AL LYNMOUTH. By THomAS H. MEAD-BrIGGS, M.A., F.E.S. HE village of Lynmouth, in North Devon, les at the mouth of the two small rivers, the East and West Lyn, that meet there near the sea. It is from this circumstance that the place receives its name. Lynmouth is situated in Latitude Lynmouth. The hills are higher inland than on the coast. Hollardy Hill, behind Lynton, rises to nearly 800 feet, looking down upon that place more than 300 feet below its summit. Summer House Hill, formerly called Lyn Cliff, is situated From Photo by] [John T. Carrington. HAUNT OF THE WATER-OUZELS, East LYN. 51° 13:50'N., and Longitude 5° 49-40’ W., and is on the south coast of the Bristol Channel, nearly opposite to Swansea, on the Welsh coast, from which it is distant about thirty miles. Our village is surrounded by high hills, only broken by the valleys of the two rivers. The adjoining village of Lynton lies in a hollow, about 450 feet above JUNE, 1900.—No. 73, Vou. VII. between the two valleys of the Lyn, reaches to quite that altitude, and is our highest hill. There is, however, a hill on the east side of the village of Countisbury, distant about two miles from this place, that rises to 1,125 feet above the sea, into which a portion juts, forming a bold headland. Chapman Burrows, five miles inland, reaches an B 2 SCIENCE-GOSSTIP. altitude of. 1.575 feet, being the highest in North Devon. These hills are chiefiy of sandstone on the coast, with some beds of coarse slate a little distance inland. The cliffs on the coast are in many places prettily coloured by peroxide of iron, which causes various shades of red, yellow. and grey, often curiously intermixed. Portions of the cliffs along the coast have from time to time fallen into the sea, but from some cause the rocks on the shore are only covered with algae in isolated places, the rest being smooth and bare. Lynmouth, owing to its northern aspectand high surrounding hills, suffers from an absence of sun- shine in the winter as regards many of the houses. The inhabitants of some of them in the valley of the East Lyn do not see the sun on their residences from the end of October until February 14th, a date eagerly looked forward to by them. Owing, however, to the sheltered position of our valley, myrtles bloom and fruit freely, fuchsias and geraniums live in the open gardens through the winter, and Evonymus japonica also bears fruit in most years. The absence of marshes and sea-sands in the immediate neighbourhood of this place is the reason that the number of species of birds I have seen here are comparatively so few. With the exception of an occasional flock of geese or ducks, flying too high in the air to distinguish the species, and a common sandpiper now and then seen flying along the rocks on the shore, the large groups. of birds to which they belong are absent. The follow- ing list includes those birds I have seen in the Lynmouth district during the last three years :— Turdus viscivorus Lin. Missel-thrush. Common here at all times of the year. The young birds assemble in flocks in the autumn. Turdus musiceus Lin. Song-thrush. Very common. Turdus iliacus Lin. Redwing. My brother (C. A. Briggs) told me that he saw a flock of these birds at Countisbury on September 7th, 1899. I saw a few others at times all through the winter of 1899-1900, which has been the longest and most severe winter since we have been here. I have not noticed this bird in the other winters. Turdus pilaris Lin. Fieldfare. In 1897 Mr. E. B. Jeune, my brother, and I saw three fieldfares flying on the high ground between Countisbury and Glenthorne. In 1899 I saw a few on October 17th from the window of the railway train travelling between Lynton and Barnstaple. I have seen one or two others ai different times. but it is not a common winter visitor. Turdus merula Lin. Blackbird. very common. Sazicola oenanthe Lin. Wheat-ear. On March 25th, 1897, I saw a great number of these birds in the Valley of Rocks, but they were apparently on migration, as only a few subsequently remained to breed. On May 28th there appeared to be only Resident and one there. Next year, on March 22nd, there were several in the Valley of Rocks, and I saw a few on May 23rd. On April 11th, 1900, there was a male in full plumage at Countisbury. and another, later, on the Tors above East Lyn. Pratincola rubetra Lin. Whinchat. May 23rd, 1898, several were in the Valley of Rocks, where the bird is often common. Pratincola rubicola Lin. Stonechat. Resident. On March 22nd, 1898, I saw two in the Valley of Rocks, and one on May 23rd in the same place. This was a male bird, and the female probably had her nest near by. as the male bird would not be driven away. Ruticilla phoenicurus Lin. Redstart. Common here. especially in 1898, when I knew of three nests up the valley of the East Lyn, between Lynmouth and Rockford. Erithacus rubecula Lin. Redbreast. and very common. Sylvia cinerea Bechstein. White-throat. On April 5th, 1897. I saw one sitting on a telegraph wire, on the Barnstaple road. ‘This was the only occasion of my seeing one of these birds until a male and a female appeared in our garden on May 5th, 1900. Phylloscopus rufus Bechstein. Chifi-chaff. Not uncommon. April 4th, 1899, one heard near the Countisbury road; April 8th, 1898, one heard; Resident _ April 15th, 1899, one heard. These are the first dates of hearing this bird in the respective years; but it is not common on the coast of North Devon. Accentor modularis Lin. Hedge-sparrow. Resi- dent and common. Cinclus aquaticus Bechstein. Dipper, or Water- ouzel. This is one of our most interesting birds, and one that gives endless pleasure in observation. on account of its quick movements and rapid fight. It is not uncommon, and resident, though never abundant, in the valleys of the East and West Lyn rivers. These birds chiefly frequent the rocky portions of the streams, though they are often to be seen" on rocks below the point. of junction, and where the river Lyn passes through Lynmouth. They even descend to the tidal region below our house, and hunt about among stones covered by Zostera and other sea-weeds. Our dippers can hardly be described as shy birds, as they take little notice of people walking on the paths by the riverside. In breeding plumage the C. aquaticus of tne Lyn have not the lower portion of the breast of dark chestnut-brown, as described by Mr. Howard Saunders in his manual of British birds. There is a variety named melanogaster, a Scandinavian form, that has been reported from some parts of Britain, to which I imagine our waiter-ouzels belong. These birds breed regularly by both our streams. The accompanying illustra- tions of the “‘ Haunt of the Water-ouzels,” and ofa nest with young, were taken on May 11th last, the latter from a nest found by my brother and SCIENCE-GOSSZP. 3 the Editor of this magazine. When photographed, the nest apparently contained four fully-fledged young ones; but as not more than three could at the same time show themselves through the entrance to the dome-shaped nest, it was difficult to know the number. We have to thank our friend the Vicar of Lynmouth, the Rey. Albert H. Hockley, for photographing this nest under very difticult circumstances. The open beak of one of the young ones is visible in the picture. ‘The nest was con- structed entirely of moss, and was situated about five feet above the summer level of the water. The illustration on the first page, of the haunt of 4) Paris palustris Lin. Marsh-tit. Resident, rather more common than 2. ater, and in the same localities. Parus coeruleus Lin. Blue tit. Resident and common. Troglodytes parvulus K. lL. Koch. Wren. Resident and common. Several are always to be seen in our garden, where they nest. Certhia familiaris Lin. Resident. I have only seen this bird here occasionally. Once or twice one was climbing round the poles of our verandah. Tree-creeper. From a Photo by) NEST AND YOUNG OF WATER-OUZEL. the water-ouzels and site of the nest, is from a photograph by Mr. John T. Carrington. The lady shown in the picture is pointing to the rock, just below the fissure containing the nest. This view shows the sweetly pretty character of one haunt of dippers on the East Lyn. Parus major Lin. Great tit. Resident and common. Parus ater Lin. Cole-tit. Resident. A few seen every year in our garden, where every winter they come for food placed for them in a cocoanut shell suspended from the verandah. Motacilla lugubris Temminck. Pied wagtail. [Rev. A. H. Hockleu. Resident and common. I have often seen the young birds in the summer. Motacilla alba Lin. White wagtail. I pair of these birds on the wall of the esplanade here on April 19th, 1898. ‘They had the mantle of a pure French grey, the same colour as that of an adult Larus argentatus (the herring-gull). I have looked at numbers of IW. dugubris, in the hope of being able to distinguish this form or species (M. alba), but these two birds were strikingly distinct from any others I have seen. I have not observed this bird since that occasion, saw a B2 4 SCIENCE-GOSSIP. Motacilla melanope Pallus. Grey wagtail. Re- sident and common on the banks of the East Lyn. Tt also comes into our garden. The male bird in breeding plumage is a very handsome object on account of the triangular black patch under the throat. Anthus pratensis Lin. Meadow-pipit. Resident and common, especially a little inland. Anthus obscurus La. Rock-pipit. Resident and very common on the coast. The male in breeding plumage is decidedly vinous-tinted on the breast. Muscicapa grisola Lin. Spotted fly-catcher. Resident. I have found the nest here. Hirundo rustica Lin. Swallow. Common; one was seen here on February 13th, 1897. Chelidon urbica Lin. Martin. Common here on arrival and before departure, but they seem to move inland to breed. Cotile riparia Lin. Sand-martin. Common, but seen most plentifully on arrival and departure in spring and autumn. I have not observed it breeding on the coast. Ligurinus chloris Lin. Greenfinch. Resident and common. farduelis elegans Stephens. Goldfinch. Scarce. I caught a young bird in our stable in the summer of 1899, and let it fly again. Carduelis spinus Lin, Siskin. I saw one on November 7th, 1596, flying amongst some fir-trees on the road between Lynton and Lynmouth. This was the only example I have yet seen here. ANIMALS Passer domesticus Lin. House-sparrow. Resident, but not abundant here. The chaftinches appear to take the place of these birds about the houses in Lynmouth. Passer montanus Lin. 'Tree-sparrow. I saw a pair on May 38rd, 1898, near the “‘ Cottage Inn,” on Barnstaple road, near Lynton. I have not seen any others in North Devon. Pringilla coelebs lin. Chaftinch. Resident and very abundant. The males are exceedingly highly coloured in the breeding season. Pringilla montifringilla Lin. Brambling. one male in our garden on June 18th, 1899. Pyrrhiula europaea Vieillot. Bullfinch. Resident and not uncommon. Emberiza citrinella Lin. Yellow bunting. Resi- dent and common. I saw Hmberiza cirlus Lin. Cirl bunting. Resident and fairly common. Sturnus vulgaris Lin. Starling. Resident and common. Pyrrhocorax graculus Lin. Chough. Resident, rare. Occurs in a locality some distance from here, where it breeds annually. Garrulus glandarius Lin. Jay. Resident and common. Hach autumn these birds come to our plantation adjoining the garden for the acorns of the evergreen oaks. Pica rustica Scopoli. Magpie. Resident and common, especially a little distance inland. I have often seen the nests near here. (To be concluded.) AS WEATHER PROPHETS. By ARTHUR H. BELL. F all the proposed methods for forecasting the weather, it is doubtfulif any of them are so curious as the one that suggests that future climatic conditions may be foretold by observing the move- ments of the common leech. One observer states that if a leech is kept in a bottle of water it will be seen to disport itself in ways that closely synchronise with changes in the weather, sinking to the bottom of the bottle when the weather is going to be stormy, and rising to the top when conditions are more promising. Now, so much faith was put in the leech as a weather-prophet that an admirer of its performances proposed to attach a small chain to the creature and cause it to make electric contact whenever it travelled about its jar in response to supposed coming changes in the weather. Enamoured, moreover, of his suggestion, it was further proposed that the electric current thus created should be utilised to set the largest bell in the parish in motion, and so give warning to all whom it might concern that changes in the weather were coming. It cannot, however, be said that any great success has attended this proposition, and the attempt to elevate the leech to the front rank of weather- prophets has not met with general approval among serious students of meteorology. The leech in- deed, like so many other creatures, has nowadays to submit to a rigorous cross-examination; and when dealing with the supposed powers of insects, birds, and animals to forecast the weather it is customary to compare such pretensions with the weather maps and synchronous charts upon which modern meteorology may be said to be based. Popular prognostics, founded on the movements of birds and animals, there are in great numbers ; but itis now possible to say why it is that these prognostics are successful, and how it is that they sometimes fail. Meteorologists compile charts on which are plotted the barometer readings taken at a large number of stations at the same hour over a large tract of country. Lines are then drawn through all places having the same barometer reading, such lines being called isobars, or lines of equal atmo- spheric pressure. An examination of one of these SCIENCE-GOSSIP. 5 isobaric charts, as they are sometimes called, quickly reveals the fact that the shapes assumed by these isobars vary with the type of weather. Thus during stormy, rainy weather the isobars are crowded together, the barometer readings being lowest at the centre of the disturbance, the condi- tions being called “cyclonic.” On the other hand, when the weather is fine and the wind slight in force, the isobars are far apart, and the highest barometer readings are to be found at the centre, the conditions being then called “anti-cyclonic.” Roughly speaking, therefore, all types of weather are either cyclonic or anti-cyclonic ; so in looking at a weather map it will be noticed that the cyclones occupy one part of the country and the anti-cyclones another, and the kind of weather to be expected depends on the relative positions of these two systems to one another. In forecasting the weather, therefore, by the aid of such charts, it is as if one had to foretell the future positions of the pieces on a chess-board ; for the cyclones and anti-cyclones move at varying rates, and it is not surprising, therefore, that in compiling his forecasts the weather-prophet sometimes makes mistakes. A further important fact is that each quadrant in a cyclone, and in an anti-cyclone also, has certain definite kinds of weather associated with it; and it is this circumstance which explains the success of many popular weather prognostics based on the movements of birds and animals, and on such things as haloes and sunset colours. The front of a cyclone or depression, as it is sometimes termed, is always associated with a rising tem- perature and damp weather; while as the storm departs, temperature falls and the wind flies round to a dry quarter. It is therefore not surprising that as the cyclone advances, the dampness of the atmosphere causes certain birds, quadrupeds, insects, and flowers to exhibit an unusual amount of restlessness; the closing of petals on the part of flowers, and unwonted migrations on the part of animals, being solely due to the hygrometric con- dition of the atmosphere produced by a coming storm. There is therefore reason to expect bad weather when these movements are observed, since they simply mean that the front part of a cyclone has arrived, and the usual sequence of rainy weather may be expected to follow. Most people, again, are familiar with the feathery wisp-like cloud called cirrus, which is invariably associated with the forefront of a cyclone. When the weather- prophet sees this cloud he is sure that stormy weather is near at hand. Cirrus, the highest of all clouds, is probably composed of ice crystals, and it is these that act like prisms, causing the haloes which during bad weather form round the sun and moon. Time out of mind haloes have been popular prognostics for stormy weather, and receive sanc- tion from the weather charts, for they simply mean that cirrus cloud is forming, or, in other e) words, that the front of a cyclone has arrived, A similar comparison shows that when people forecast rainy weather from the flaring of lamps and candles, from rheumatic pains, shooting corns, and creaking furniture, the indications are the same; for all these phenomena are to be set down to the credit of the high temperature and in- creased moisture which are associated with the front portion of a cyclonic system. In the same way the bawling of peacocks, the braying of asses, the occasionally excessive quacking of ducks, and an unusual activity and brilliance of glowworms, which are all popular prognostics for rainy weather, probably have gained their popularity from the fact that they manifest themselves at such times as atmospheric pressure is decreasing and moisture increasing. As already mentioned, fine-weather conditions are called anti-cyclonic, and the prominent features . of this kind of weather are dew and mist in the morning, brilliant midday sunshine, with mist again during the evening hours. At such times, also, the barometer stands high, and it is not sur- prising that under the exhilarating influences. of a blue sky and gentle breezes birds fly high and go far afield, and animals and insects show an ab- normal activity. Bird-catchers know that when larks fly high and swallows soar aloft in the em- pyrean a continuance of fine weather may be expected. Owls hooting in the stilly night are not pleasant to those suffering from insomnia; but there is consolation in the thought that such hoot- ings betoken the formation of an anti-cyclone and subsequent fine weather. Indeed, concerning anti- cyclonic conditions there are a very large number of popular prognostics which have reference to fine weather, and some of these proverbs and weather saws have been in use during many centuries. Modern meteorology, moreover, does not seek to discountenance the use of this folk-lore, since it can be shown, as above, that it owes its success to the fact that these prognostics agree with the con- clusions arrived at by more scientific methods. The meaning, therefore, of all these fine-weather prognostics is that the birds, insects, and other animals are active and lively because the atmo- spheric conditions are anti-cyclonic. Cyclones and anti-cyclones, however, are not always of the same size and shape; and as they drift through the atmosphere they get squeezed and distorted, spreading out in unexpected direc- tions. Two cyclones, for instance, may be separated by avery narrow anti-cyclone. Asthis “anti-cyclonic wedge,” as it is sometimes called, passes over the country the birds or other animals commence all those movements which the weather-wise associate with fine weather, and the prophets say that fine weather is coming. Yet, since this wedge of high pressure is so narrow, the fine weather lasts only an hour or so, and cyclonic and stormy weather quickly follows. ‘This is an instance 6 where the popular prognostics fail, and it is by looking at a weather chart whereon the cyclones and anti-cyclones and their relative positions are set forth that the explanation of the failure is revealed. Moreover, in an ordinary way the isobars are circular, but at times they run in straight lines like a series of railway lines, and it is no uncommon thing for one storm area to be divided from another by these straight isobars. It is at such times as these that distant sounds are plainly heard, such as those made by railway trains, canal boats, and waterfalls. Distant objects are also plainly seen, and this unusual audibility and visibility have always been a popular prognostic for bad weather. As we can understand, the prognostic depends on the fact that a cyclone is success of this - SCIENCE-GOSSTP. following closely behind what meteorologists call some “straight isobars.” The cyclone at times, however, shows a disposition to move in unex- pected directions, or to disperse and fill up; and it is when either of these contingencies happens that the prognostics fail. Not only, therefore, do the modern methods of dealing with weather-problems show how it is that birds and animals, and such creatures as leeches, provide dependable weather- prognostics, but they also show why it is that they often fail. It is sometimes said that animals prog- nosticate changes in the weather; but the philo- sophically minded attribute no such powers to them, and the weather charts and isobaric maps demonstrate that at best they are but prognostics- London, 8.W.. May 1900. GEOLOGY AROUND BARMOUTH. By JOHN H. CooKe, F.G.S., F.L.8. EW districts offer so many attractions to the geologist as Merionethshire. The diversity of its rocks gives rise to a great variety of land- scape, from the brown moorland enveloped in gorse and heather, enclosuring pastures of the softest and richest verdure, to the wooded heights of Lylfaen and the rugged barrenness of Cader and the Arrans. It is an_ideal region for a holiday, comprising within a small and easily accessible ‘area a rare combination of barbaric wildness and cultivated repose. The region around the Mawddach is undoubtedly the finest in Wales. In pictur- esqueness it rivals the Bosphorus, to which it bears a striking resemblance; and nothing short of a panoramic view can give any adequate idea of its wonderful variety. In the autumn of 1898 I paid my first visit to this classic region, and in my intervals of leisure I jotted down a few notes on its geological phenomena. These I have now gathered together and embodied in the following short paper, in the hope that they may prove of some interest to future visitors. Merionethshire consists, for the most part, of a broad, oval-shaped mountain boss of coarse quartzose and greenish-grey grits of Cambrian age. Barmouth is situated at the south-western extremity of the boss, and on the line of junction of the Upper Cambrian and the Lingula beds of the Lower Silurian. The strata of Cambrian age which are exposed in the hillsides overlooking Barmouth consist of an alternating series of coarse and fine grits and purple shales dipping from 50° to 60° E.S.E., with intrusive masses of quartz porphyries and of greenstone dikes. The grits are exceedingly compact, and so coarse that many of the angular fragments of quartz which they enclose measure upwards of a quarter of an inch in diameter. They consist generally of fragmental quartz and felspar with an appreciable quantity of greenish chlorite united in a siliceous cement; but they are very variable in constitution and structure within even limited areas. The coarse grits alternate rapidly with conglomerates and fine-grained sandstones, these again with slates and shales. The conglomeratic masses are irregular and pockety, and seldom exceed 3 feetin depth. On the pathway at the back of Moss Bank, overlooking the Barmonth Morfa, the fine-grained grits and sandstones enclose isolated rounded boulders of coarse grit varying from 1 inch fo 18 inches in diameter. The variability of the formation is well shown in this section, and also in a huge boulder which lies on the shore-line immediately opposite the bridge which crosses the railway at Llanaber. The face of the boulder, measuring 3 feet 8 inches in width, indicates seven periods of depositions. each of which possesses marked characteristics that differentiate it from the others. The Barmouth grits do not afford the fossil- hunter many opportunities, as the only evidences of organic life that have hitherto been forthcoming are the tracks and borings of annelids, and, in the direction of Harlech, two species of Oldhamia. The petrographer, however, will find the strata full of interesting points and problems. Two species of felspar occur in the rocks in considerable masses, while the quartz exhibits well-defined, hair-like crystals of rutile as well as liquid cavities containing bubbles. THE NEW E.R.S. WE understand that the usual fifteen can- didates selected by the Council of the Royal Society for election for the year 1900 are as follows :—GEORGE JAMES BurRcH, M.A., Lecturer at University Extension College, Reading; Che- mistry and Physics. T. W. EDGwortTH DAVID, B.A., F.G.8., Professor of Geology in University of Sydney, N.S.W.; Geology. JOHN BRETLAND FARMER, M.A., F.L.S., Professor of Botany, Royal College of Science, London; Botany. LEONARD Hitt, M.B., Lecturer London Hospital Medical College; Physiology. JOHN HORNE, F.G.S., F.R.S.E., Staff of Geological Survey of Scot- land; Geology. JOSEPH JACKSON LISTER, M.A., F.Z.8., Demonstrator, Comparative Anatomy, Uni- versity of Cambridge; Zoology. JAMES GORDON MacGReEGor, D.Sc., M.A., Professor of Physics, Halifax, N.S.; Physics. PATRICK MANSON, C.M.G., M.D., F.R.C.P., LL.D.; Parasitology and Tropical Medicine. THomMAS Muir, LL.D., M.A., F.R.S.E., Superintendent-General Education, Cape Colony; Mathematics. ARTHUR ALCOCK RAMBAUT, M.A., Sc.D., Radcliffe Observer; Astronomy. WILLIAM JAMES SELL, M.A., Demonstrator of Chemistry, University of Cambridge ; Chemistry. W. BALp- WIN SPENCER, B.A., M.A., Professor of Biology, Melbourne University ; Zoology and Comparative Anatomy. JAMES WALKER, D.Sc., Ph.D., Professor of Chemistry, University College, Dundee; Che- mistry. PHILIP WATTS, Director, War-Shipbuild- ing Department, Armstrong, Whitworth & .Co.; Naval Architecture. CHARLES THOMSON REES Witson, M.A., B.Sc., Investigations on Atmo- spheric Electricity ; Physics. ~ EDITORIAL.—Dr. Bryan’s article on “ Desmids ” unavoidably stands over until next month. Mr. Read’s Chemical Department will also commence in the next number. A NATIONAL REPOSITORY FOR SCIENCE AND ART.—The remarkable paper read on May 16th by Professor Flinders Petrie before the Society of Arts on this subject has created considerable dis- cussion. We hope to refer to the subject on a future occasion. PROTECTION OF RARE BiRDS.—We are informed that the British Ornithologists’ Union has passed a stringent resolution forbidding the members from directly, or indirectly, destroying in Britain the nests, eggs, young or parent birds of chough, golden oriole, hoopoe, osprey, kite, white-tailed eagle, honey buzzard, common buzzard, bittern, and ruff. We are glad the Union has taken this course, as it isa sufficient example to others, and an answer to those who accuse naturalists of exterminating rare animals. SCIENTIFIC GLASS-BLOWING.—Some time since we referred to the advantage of an amateur worker, requiring special designs of scientifie glass ap- paratus, being able to make his own. For this purpose the Camera Construction Company, of 38 Eagle Street, London, W.C., have designed a com- plete outfit necessary for glass-blowing, and at a price within the reach of most students. As there are also full instructions for practising the art, this forms a good opportunity for commencing new and interesting home experiments in art-glass work. CONDUCTED BY WILFRED MARK WEBB, F.L.S. Note.—When this column was inaugurated it was hoped that our readers would send in contributions from month to month rather than that it should simply consist of a series of editorial notes. As this may not have been made quite clear, the pre- sent opportunity is taken of saying that the Editor would be glad to receive notes upon all subjects connected with molluscs, and that they may be sent to the office of SCIENCE-Gossip. It often happens that notes upon apparently common inci- dents bring forth interesting discussions.—ED. 8.-G. DURATION OF LIFE IN HELIX POMATIA.—In the current number of the ‘‘ Essex Naturalist” Mr. Benja- min Cole gives some interesting data with regard to the longevity of our largest snail. He says that on June 3rd, 1894, when in company with Professor Meldola, he found two living specimens of the mollusc in question at Newlands Corner, near Goms- hall, Surrey. The snails were quite full grown, but there was no evidence forthcoming of their age when taken. They were subsequently kept as pets, and when active were fed exclusively upon garden lettuce. They hybernated every year, closing up the mouth of the shell with the secreted epiphragm, and remaining shut in from October to about the end of March or the beginning of April. One of the specimens was accidentally killed at the end of two years, but its companion was still alive when Mr. Cole wrote his note, and apparently quite healthy, judging from its weight—being then still enjoying its winter sleep. Presuming therefore that this Helix pomatia was two years old when found, it is now at least seven and a half years oid, and Mr. Cole hopes that it will live much longer. This is an interesting fact, confirming Miss Armit- age’s views on this subject, given at page 323 of the last volume of SCIENCE-GOSSIP. VARIETAL NAMES.—“ Nature,” some weeks ago, pointed out in a few words how open to criticism are those who persist in using “ varietal ” names for what are mere variations. ‘ Variety-mongers”—as Mr. B. B. Woodward, I think it was, long ago dubbed the collectors in question— must feel the comparison very odious which *‘ Nature ” draws between a “ bird man” who rationally talks of ‘‘sports” and the “shell man” who records a white form of a snail under the title of Helix marmorata var. alba nov. A dozen years or more ago the writer expressed himself strongly in these pages and elsewhere, as did also some others, with regard to what is really avariety. The crusade may have done some good, but “varieties ” still flourish. ‘The importance of recording “variations” has been advanced as a reason for recording them all by name ; but perhaps some of our readers could try to bring forward some real convincing reason for the process, which fails to impress the general biologist as necessary. — Wilfred Mark Webb. ch A gE NOTICES BY JOHN T. CARRINGTON., Micro-organisms and Kermentation. By ALFRED JORGENSEN. Translated by ALEX. K. MILLER, Ph.D., F.1.C., and A. EK. LENNHOLM. Third edition. xiii+318 pp., with 83 illustrations. (London and New York: Macmillans, 1900.) 10s. net. This—the third—edition has been completely re- vised, and:a large portion of the book has been en- tirely re-written, with considerable additions, so as to bring the text up to the most recent knowledge of this branch of the very progressive science of bacteriology. There are several new features in the book, including a summary of observations on the behaviour of high-fermentation yeasts in use in brewery-factories. It includes also descriptions of some interesting yeast species discovered in recent years. The organisms occurring in milk and the pure cultures of lactic-acid bacteria in dairies and distilleries are illustrated with new figures. To those who are connected with breweries, distilleries, and dairies, the work will be invaluable, and the general reader who desires a knowledge of the remarkable organisms of fermentation will find this work of great help to a better understand- ing of the subject. Added to the book is a voluminous bibliography, extending to no less than forty-two pages. ‘The absence of an index is not convenient. The first chapter will be useful to microscopists who have not studied these curious organisms, as it contains directions for procedure, and particulars of the apparatus necessary for their culture, microscopical preparation, staining, &c. There are also valuable chapters on bacteria generally and mould-fungi. This latter will be of service to cryptogamic-botany students, as it really forms a modern treatise on moulds that appear among the products of fermentation and alcoholic distillation. ‘These beautiful vegetable organisms are easily obtained, and form pleasing objects for the microscope. Letters of Berzelius and Schinbein. “Edited by GrEoRG W. A. KAHLBAUM, translated by Francis V. Darbishire, Ph.D., and N. V. Sedgwick. 112 pp. 7$ in.x5 in. (London, Edinburgh, and Oxford: Williams & Noreate. 1900.) 3s. Christian Friedrich Schénbein will ever be known as the discoverer of ozone and the inventor of gun- cotton. He was at one time Professor of Chemistry and Physics at the University of Bale, and the centenary of his birth occurred last year. His correspondent, Baron Jéns Jakob Berzelius, was twenty years the elder of the two, and he had a wider range of study than Schénbein, who concen- trated his attention on a narrowly contracted field of chemical and electrical energy. These letters began in 1836, and continued during a period of ereat activity among chemists and physicists. In them are frequent references to the work of F araday and others whose names are familar to every educated person; they are thus of more than .fesses to be, a SCIENCE-GOSSTIP. 21 passing interest, on account of the personal views expressed by the two eminent savants who con- ducted the correspondence. AN INTRO- By ALEXANDER HILL, M.D. The Temple Encyclopaedic Primers. DUCTION TO SCIENCE. 139 pp., 6in. x 4 in., with 6 portraits. ErHNo- LoGY, by D. MIcHAEL HABERLANDT. viii+169 pp., 6in. x 4 in., with 56 illustrations. (London: J. M. Dent & Co., 1900.) 1s. each. The publishers of these short educational works have long been known for the issue of artistic and well-chosen books. ‘This new series will be found handy little volumes to carry in one’s pocket when travelling or for reading at odd intervals. They are well printed, and written by people who know their respective subjects, and will doubtless find a large sale among the public generally. The Flowering Plant. By J. R. AINSwortH Davies, M.A., F.C.P. Third Edition, xv +195 pp., 8 in.+53 in., with 70 illustrations. (London: Charles Griffin & Co., Limited, 1900.) 3s. 6d. The intention of this successful work is to illus- trate the first principles of botany. It will be found useful as a class-book, as it is well arranged and contains an appendix on practical work ; also a second appendix, giving a series of examination questions founded on the South Kensington and London Matriculation systems. Common Objects of the Microscope. By J. G. Woop, M.A., F.L.8. viii +186 pp., 7Zin. x 5 in., with 14 coloured or other plates, and 16 illustra- tions in text. Second Edition, revised by E. C. Bousfield, L.R.C.P. (London: George Routledge & Sons, Limited, 1900.) 3s. 6d.; with plain plates, Is. There are few books more suited to the begin- ner, or more likely to inculcate in him a desire to examine for himself Nature’s BETCINT(ONRS than the late Rev. J. G. Wood’s well-known ‘ Common Objects of the Microscope.” We Saat there- fore the new edition that Dr. Bousfield has revised and largely re-written for Messrs. Routledge. The familiar plates by the late Tuffen West appear as before, but to them have been added two excellent plates of infusoria, rotifera, worms, etc., drawn by Dr. Bousfield. The bulk of the text has wisely been left much as the Rey. J. G. Wood wrote it ; but the reviser has contributed an entirely new chapter on pond-life and a popular account of marine life, anew chapter on the preparation and mounting of objects for the microscope, also an introductory chapter on the practical manipulation of the instrument. This last, however, is some- what inadequate, even with due regard to the scope and aims of the work. Whilst thoroughly sympathising with the reviser’s desire to leave intact the author’s original text, we think it is misleading and unnecessary to illustrate or re- commend to the notice of beginners—into whose hands this volume will largely fall—such an anti- quated and defective microscope as is figured on page 14. The making of microscopes has taken large strides since this book was first written, and a good microscope costs no more than a bad one In all other respects Dr. Bousfield has done his work excellently. The book has been well pro- duced by the publishers, as the print, paper, and binding are all good. ‘The work is what it pro- revision and not merely a re- print.—#", 8. S. 22 SCIENCE-GOSSTP. Ar ee / P= GM WS : Mose ry SSR Vr M2 r ws MONS THE total amount realised at the sale by auction of the Samuel Stevens collection, referred to in our last number (page 379), was £835. This included a few scientific books and the cabinets. MaAnpRaAs has founded a new literary and scientific monthly journal entitled “‘The Indian Review.” We have received a specimen copy, and find it well arranged and brightly conducted. WE are requested by the principal of the Bur- lington Classes to notify that candidates for scientific and other degrees can be prepared by correspondence. On application to 27 Chancery Lane, London, W.C., particulars of the system will be forwarded to applicants. A SPECIAL number of the ‘“‘ Photogram,” No, 77, was issued last month. It is remarkable as being written entirely by men of the city of Birmingham. The contents are of much technical value to photo- graphers. The forty-two pages are beautifully illustrated with thirty illustrations. THE “ Photogram ” Publishing Company are about to issue by subscription “An Index of Standard Photograms.” Particulars may be obtained from Messrs. Dawbarn & Ward,. Limited, Farringdon Avenue, London, E.C. This new work of reference promises to be of much value. WE regret to record the death, on May 4th, of Dr. Edmund Atkinson, one of the older generation of men of science, and at one time assistant to the late Sir Edward Frankland in the laboratory of Owens College, Manchester. Dr. Atkinson was perhaps best known as the translator of Ganot’s “Physics.” Two county lists, useful to entomologists, are being issued by Mr. Claude Morley, F.E.S., of 16 Bath Street, Ipswich. They are the Coleoptera of Suffolk, and the Hymenoptera Aculeata of the same county. The names of species are accompanied by full notes, and exact localities are given for the rarer insects. ANOTHER report from the distributor to the Botanical Exchange Club of the British Isles has been issued. It is dated March, 1900, but refers to the distribution for 1898. The number of specimens sent in for exchange reached 3,273, and were re- ceived from twenty-one contributors. The report contains thirty pages of notes from members upon the plants circulated for exchange, Many of these remarks are of value. IN connection with “The Scientific Roll,” Mr. A. Ramsay has entered upon a systematisation of the literature, no matter how scattered or frag- mentary, relating to bacteria. Mr. Ramsay appeals for obscure references, and desires subscribers to the three volumes, each of about 500 pages. The work will be issued in parts at the rate of one volume per year. The first part is to be issued in September, 1900. Mr. Ramsay’s address is 3 Cowper Road, Acton, London, W. OWING to the absence of so many astronomers who have gone abroad in the hope of observing the total eclipse of the sun, the annual visitation to Greenwich Observatory has been postponed to the end of June. WE are pleased to find from the balance-sheet issued by the honorary treasurer of the North London Natural History Society that the pro- sperous condition was fully maintained during last year. There is a substantial balance in favour of the society, which has fully kept up to a high standard the work done at its meetings. AS not infrequently our readers have applied to us for advice with regard to obtaining protection for inventions, we may refer them and others to Messrs. Rayner & Co., 37 Chancery Lane, London, who pay especial attention to patents of a scientific character. The experience of the firm is useful in such cases. THE International Committee, which has been sitting at the Foreign Office, London, for the past few weeks to consider the question of Interna- tional agreement for the protection of wild animals, birds, and fishes in South Africa, signed, on May 19th, a joint convention aiming at the desired protection. The exact terms of the agreement are to be announced at a later date. It has been suggested that there are no means of enforcing a “close time” for big game in Central Africa. We do not agree with this opi- nion. If a similar system to that in being in the North-West of Canada is founded, there will be little difficulty. ‘There the informer gets a large portion of the fine, and the native Indians are excellent informers. This would equally apply to the negroes. THE Millport Marine Biological Station has issued its annual report for 1899. Considerable progress has been made during the year. This station is under the patronage of the University of Glasgow and a number of other learned and muni- cipal Scotch bodies. Itis managed by an influential committee. The station is now prepared to receive students to work at the tables, or will supply material to those unable to visit the institution. THE Kgyptian Ministry of Finance have for- warded to us the annual report for 1899 of the Ghizeh Zoological Gardens, near Cairo, of which Mr. Stanley 8. Flower, F.Z.8., son of the late Sir William Flower, F.R.S., is the director. During the year 43,567 persons visited the gardens On October 6th, 1899, there were on view 473 animals, representing 132 species, exclusive of large numbers of wild birds and other animals that are encouraged to take up their abode in the gardens. A list of these appears in the report. THE South London Entomological and Natural History Society has issued its Proceedings for 1899. The annual volume continues to increase in importance, this issue containing 136 pages. The report of the council and the ‘balance-sheet indicate a prosperous condition of the Society. Fourteen papers were read at the meetings, several of them, with the presidential acldress, appearing in the volume before us. It is embellished by a plate of some antennae of Psychides. Much use- ful information may be gained from the reports of the bi-monthly meetings. SCIENCE-GOSSIP 23 PLANTS OF SouTH HANTS AND DORSET.—A Flora of the Bournemouth district has been com- piled by the Rev. E. F. Linton, M.A. Mr. Linton’s position as a botanist is a guarantee for the cor- rectness of the information therein contained. A LONDON FIELD-BOTANY CLUB.—Several of our readers have from time to time suggested that a Field-Botanists’ Club should be formed in con- nection with SCIENCE-Gosstp. The Editor will be pleased to hear from any persons who would care to join such a club. Only a nominal subscription of One Shilling per Annum would be required, and meetings might be held either once or twice a month. We are not aware of any place in London where those interested in the study of Field-Botany can meet wholly for the purpose of discussing plants, their characteristics, habits, and identifi- cation. Another object of the Club will be to facilitate exchange of specimens between the members ; also to assist and encourage those who are commencing the study of field or structural botany. The idea is to give facilities for chatty intercommunication between botanists residing or visiting London. On receiving a sufficient number of names, the Editor of SCIENCE-GOSSIP - will call a meeting to discuss the proposal.— Send name and address to John T. Carrington, 110 Strand. London, W.C. LUNGWORT IN HANtTS.—Pulmonaria angustifolia was, at Easter time, in fine blossom, both in a cop- pice and some hedgerows a little to the south-west of Sway station, on the Bournemouth direct line in Hampshire. Apparently those plants that grew in the hedgerows, bordering some moist meadows, were relics of the flora of the woodlands that formerly covered this district.—James Saunders, A.DS., Enton. -POTAMOGETON RUTILUS IN SuUsSEX.—Among the rarer plants found by me in Sussex is Potamoge- ton rutilus from near Rye. It is probably the only station now remaining in Britain where it is known certainly to occur. Mr. A. Bennett recently re- ferred to my finding this plant in the “ Journal of Botany.’—Thomas Hilton, Brighton. ABNORMAL CoWsLip FLOWER.—I send you here- with a very curious aborted specimen of cow- slip (Primula veris), gathered here yesterday in rough pasture ground. There are about a dozen flowers in the “ umbel,” two being very large. In every case both calyx and corolla appear to be represented by green leaflets, among which the ill- developed pistils or stamens can be seen. There is not the slightest trace of the yellow colour so conspicuous in the normal cowslip flower.—Frank Sich, junior, Niton, Isle of Wight, May 18th, 1900. PRUNUS CERASIFERA, NEW TO BRITAIN.— The new Prunus discovered near Hemel Hemp- stead in Hertfordshire, and about which an article appeared in your issue of June1899 (ScIENCE-GossIP, N.S., vol. vi. p. 14), proves to be Prunus cerasifera. Tam just in receipt of a letter from Mr. George Nicholson, Curator of the Royal Gardens, Kew, say- ing that it is probably.a native of the Caucasus. Last year some specimens were removed to Kew Gardens for observation. It is now in full bloom, and I shall be pleased to indicate the spots to any of your readers who may wish to procure specimens. It blossoms some weeks earlier than the ‘“sloe,” and is from this fact alone an interesting addition to our flora.—B. Piffard, Hemel Hempstead, April 20th, 1900 SALICORNIA APPRESSA IN SUSSEX.—This plant, hitherto only recorded as occurring as British in the county of Kent, I found last year growing on the Sussex coast, a long distance from Kent. It is a most interesting find, as this addition to our county flora is also an indication that its range is wider in the South of England than hitherto sup- posed. I have to thank the Rev. HE. 8. Marshall, joint author of the “‘ Flora of Kent,” for checking my identification. He says: ‘“‘ Yes, they are fine specimens of Salicornia appressa, and exactly similar to my Kent plants..—Thomas Hilton, 16 Kensington Place, Brighton, April 3rd, 1900. SILENE ITALICA IN SUSSEX.—On several occa- sions during last summer I found flowering and fruiting plants of the rare Silene italica, or Italian catchfly, on the Sussex downs in the neighbourhood of Newmarket Hill. At the time they were over- looked for Silene nutans, but I have since heard from my friend Mr. Thomas Hilton, of Brighton, that he has found specimens in two other stations on the downs, also east of Brighton. As the plants are not uncommon and well established, far distant from any influence likely to have caused their introduction, the Silene italica growing on the Sussex downs may be looked upon as truly native. We should, I think, now consider this species as a native British plant; it has not thus generally been hitherto ranked. If any botanist will write to me on the subject, I shall be pleased to indicate the habitat.—John T. Carrington, 110 Strand, London, W.C., May 1900, CERASTIUM ARCTICUM, VAR. EDMONDSTONIT.—In the annual report of the Botanical Exchange Club is a note upon the variety edmondstonii Beeby of Cerastium arcticum, Lange. It is from the pen of Mr. W. H. Beeby, who says :—‘‘ When I first gathered this plant in 1886 I brought home roots, and, being very desirous of growing it, also a bag of its native soil. Under these conditions it main- tained the dark purplish-copper colour of its foliage fairly well, until the plants were lost in a removal some few years later. In 1897 and 1898 I brought home seeds and roots, and have the plants growing this time, not in their native soil, but in a mixture of Surrey soils. These plants have entirely lost their original colour, and have become completely green; so that it appears that the only character which separates this variety from the type is merely temporary, and due to habitat. ‘The serpentine gravels of Unst contain a number of minerals, notably chromate of iron, and the colour of the leaves may probably be due to the influence of one of them. The Cerastiwm is by no means the only plant growing on these hills which is affected in this way. J. M. Norman’s ‘ C. latifoliwm’ is, of course, ©. arcticum (C. latifolium proper not being known in Scandinavia or other boreal countries), consequently his reference of C.arcticum to a hybrid €. alpinum x C. latifolium is mythical.” 24 ji SCIENCE-GOSSIP. Sera NATIONAL PHYSICAL LABORATORY.— A question upon the exact position of the building about to be erected for the National Physical Laboratory was asked in the House of Commons on May 7th. Mr. Akers-Douglas, in reply, stated that the new laboratory would be situated quite outside the Kew Gardens. on Crown lands. ‘The building will be so placed as not to interfere with the views, from the Gardens. of the Old Deer Park. FASCIATED GROWTH OF ASH.—I am sending with this a curious specimen of fasciated ash which I thought might be of interest to you. It was found in my woods here by my son, and I do not remember seeing anything quite so peculiar in an ash before, though I suppose fasciated speci- mens are not really uncommon.—Dora Twopeny. Woodstock, Sittingbourne. [The specimen is one of those curious cases of fasciation that sometimes occur in shoots from tree-roots when the leading stem has been cut. A similar case was figured in SCIENCE-GOSSIP, vol. ii. N.S., page 6.—ED. 8.-G.] BARBASTELLE BAT IN HAMPSHIRE.—One of our school children has to-day brought me a living specimen of this rare bat, taken in a barn in the parish. I recognised it at once by the strange way in which the ears meet over the nose and by the very dark fur. I have never found it before, but Dr. Laver of Colchester told me that Dr. J. E. Taylor knew of its occurrence in Hampshire, so that I have always reckoned it among our eleven species of bats—(Rev.) J. H. Kelsall, Milton, Lymington, April 6th, 1900: Bat SwiImMMING.—Until a few days ago I was not aware that bats possessed the power of swim- ming. On the Saturday before Easter last I was walking with a relative, and crossing the Nun’s Bridge at Thetford, when we noticed something unusual swimming across the river. We watched until it landed, and found to our surprise it was a bat. The river Thet is here about 30 feet wide, overhung with trees covered with ivy. The bat was in mid-stream when we first saw it. On the side for which it was aiming a wall rises out of the water, and when it came to this obstruction it at first attempted to climb up, but failing, swam along until it reached a landing-place. I secured the little animal in a very wet condition and placed him up among some ivy to dry. I believe it was a long-eared bat, but am not sufficiently acquainted with bats to be certain. It had long ears, and was larger than others I have handled.—J. S. War- burton, Methwold, Norfolk. AN EXHIBITION OF LivyiInc MoLLuscs.—In con- nection with the collections to be arranged by the Society of Experimental Fish Culture, a series is to be made of living examples of our British Fresh- water Molluscs, which will be on view at the Crystal Palace. These should prove of considerable general interest, and those of our readers who can put their hands upon exceptionally fine specimens might do worse than communicate with the under- signed or the curator, Mr. Edgar Shrubsole, at the Crystal Palace, London, $8.E.— Wilfred Mark Webb, 2 The Broadway, Hammersmith. THE LATE SPRING.—In reading through your note on the late spring of 1900 (vol. vi. 369), I see that you mention that “wild flowering plants are generally backward.” I have noticed this lateness especially in the common Arum maculatum, of which I have not yet found a spathe fully ex- panded. This is, I think, very backward, for they generally commence blooming in the middle of April.—S. Albert Webb, 41 Rothesay Road, Luton, May 4th, 1900. GUINEA-PIGS AND RAtTS.—I have seen it stated that rats bear an antipathy towards guinea-pigs, and that the presence of the latter will drive away rats from a house. As I have also seen this idea refuted. the following incident may be of interest. Not long ago [ gave away guinea-pigs which I had in my possession. The house to which I sent them was infested with rats. I now hear that the rats have disappeared since the arrival of the gninea- pigs. The disappearance of the rats may be due to some other cause, but if so the coincidence would be curious. Could any of your readers inform me if the truth as to this point has been ascertained, and what reasons have been assigned ?—Wc Taggart Cowan, jnr., 53 Ashton Terrace, Glasgon, W. SoUTH- EASTERN UNION OF SCIENTIFIC §So- CIETIES.—The Annual Congress of this body will be held on June 7th, 8th, and 9th at the Pavilion, Brighton, under the presidency of Mr. W. Whitaker, F.R.S., President of the Geological Society ; the Honorary Secretaries being G. Abbott, M.R.C. S., Tunbridge Wells, and Mr. E. Alloway Pankhurst, of 3 Clifton Road, Brighton. The arrangements include (Thursday, June 7th, at 3.30 p.m.) opening of an Exhibition of Photographs and Photographic Apparatus. On the same even- ing, at 8 p.m., the Mayor of Brighton will receive the members of the Congress at the Pavilion, when the President-Elect, Professor Howes, LL.D., F.R.S., will deliver the annual address. On Friday, June 8th, at 10a.m., will be held the Council Meet- ing, and afterwards, from ll a.m. to 1 p.m., papers will be read on ‘“‘ The Skin of Liquids,” by Coote Draper, B.A., D.Sc. ; “ The Structure of the Lower Greensand near Folkestone,” by D. H. C. Sorby, F.R.S.; “On Instincts which in Some Insects produce Results corresponding to those of the Moral Sense in Man,” by F. Merrifield, F.E.S. On Friday, 3 p.m. to 5 p.m., “Dust: its Living and Dead Constituents” (lantern illustrations), by H. Garbett, M.D.; ‘Science at the End of the . Eighteenth Century,” by Arthur W. Brackett, F.S.I.; “On Colouring of Pupae in Relation to their Surroundings,” by F. Merrifield, F.E.S. On Friday evening, 8 p.m., reception of members of the Con- gress by the Mayor of Hove, at Hove Town Hall. On Saturday, 9.45 a.m., Council Meeting; at 10.30 a.m., Delegates’ Meeting ; 12 noon, paper on “‘ The Brighton Raised Beaches and their Microscopical Contents” (lantern illustrations), by Mr. F. Chap- man, A.L.S. On Saturday there will be visits to the Brighton Museum (2.30. p.m)., Brighton Aquarium (3 p.m.), and the Booth Bird Museum at 3p.m. At the last, Mr. Allchin, of Maidstone, will read a paper on ‘ ‘ Protection of Birds in the South- Eastern Counties.” SCIENCE-GOSS/P. 25 Cee | GEOLOGY F MARTIN, F.G.S. CONDUCTED BY EDWARD A. A PRIMITIVE ORNAMENT.—The little globular hydrozoan which is so common in the. Upper Chalk, known as Porosphaera globularis (Millepora, Cos- cinopora), was probably used as the earliest form of ornament by our Palaeolithic ancestors. In as- sociation with the implements that occur in the High-Level Gravels of St. Acheul, near Amiens, large numbers of these rounded bodies were found by Prestwich, suggesting the idea that they had been carefully collected from the chalk, and then strung together, being perforated in such a way as to re- semble beads. At the present time we see the avidity with which the naked savage seizes upon ornamental beads for the purpose of adorning his person, and we seem to see, in this association of these bodies with palaeoliths, the germ of that artistic faculty which afterwards showed itself in the etchings of deer and other animals that have been found on slabs and antlers of the Cave period. THE CRAG DEposrrs.—Mr. F. W. Harmer, F.G.S., read an important paper before the Geological Society on May 9th on “The Crag of Essex, and its relation to that of Suffolk and Norfolk.” He pointed out that the term ‘‘Red Crag,” including, as it does, beds differing considerably in age, is vague, and, when we attempt to correlate the East Anglian deposits with those of other countries, inconvenient. It will be remembered that Prest- wich divided the Coralline Crag into seven zones. Mr. Harmer now divides the Red Crag, the Norwich Crag, the Chillesford Beds, the Weybourn Crag, and the Cromer Forest Bed series, into a series of ten zones—that is to say, all the beds between the Coralline Crag and the Arctic Freshwater Bed (Clement Reid) of Suffolk. The line separating the Older and Newer Pliocene is now drawn by the author between the Lenham Beds, contain- ing Arca dilwii and other characteristic Miocene species of the North Sea or of the Italian Pliocene, and the Coralline Crag, the latter being considered as the oldest member of a more or less con- tinuous and closely connected series of Newer Pliocene age. ‘The palaeontological difference be- tween the Coralline and Walton Crags is shown to be less than has hitherto been supposed. The Norwich Crag occupies an area entirely distinct from that of the Red Crag, no instance being known where the one overlies the other in vertical section: the fauna of the former is, moreover, more boreal and comparatively poor in species. This crag thickens rapidly towards the north and the east, and is believed to form part of the great delta formation of the Rhine. The mammalian remains found at the base of the different horizons of the crag in a remanié bed containing material derived from various sources, are probably derivative from deposits older than the Coralline Crag, formerly existing to the south. ‘The Chillesford (estuarine) and Weybourn (marine) deposits—the latter charac- terised by the sudden appearance in the Crag basin in prodigious abundance of YVellina balthica—re- present separate stages in the continued refigura- tion of East Anglia during the Pliocene period; but the Cromer Forest Bed (fresh-water and estuarine), with its southern mammalia and its flora—similar to that of Norfolk at the present day—clearly indicates a return to more temperate conditions, and must therefore be separated alike from the Weybourn Crag on the one hand, and from the Leda myalis sands and the Arctic Fresh-Water Bed on the other. The two latter seem naturally to group themselves together, and with the Glacial deposits. THE GLOPPA GLACIAL DEPosiTs.—About two miles north-east of Oswestry is a small farm named Gloppa. In the Glacial Gravels about there have been found many species of shells. As these occur at a height of 1,120 feet above sea-level, they have been regarded, together with the shells at similar heights at Moel Tryfaen (1,350 to 1,360) and at Macclesfield (1,150), as evidence of the sub- mergence of the land to these depths at the time of deposition of the gravels. The gravels and sands are said by Mr. A. C. Nicholson, F.G.8., to be spread out around Gloppa, the main mass being comprised ina ridge of eskers about 1,000 yards long. About 60 feet of material were exposed at Gloppa between 1888 and 1891. The gravel con- sists of an agglomeration of erratics of many kinds, Silurian grit and argillite, felspathic traps, granites, etc.,and bears a close resemblance to those at Moel Tryfaen ; the larger ones being striated. Although the bulk of the shells are in fairly good condition, many are broken, rotted, and frag- mentary. A portion of an elephants tusk was also. discovered. The shells found include some not now living in British seas, but proper to Arctic and Scandinavian waters. Such are Leda pernula, Astarte borealis, Dentalium abys- sorum, Natica affinis, Cardium groenlandicum, Trophon clathratus, and others. The majority are now living in British seas, and include Pecten opercularis, Mytilus edulis, Pectunculus glycimeris, Cardium edule, Venus casina, Littorina littorea, etc. Besides eighty-five living species, seventeen derived fossils have been found, of Silurian, Car- boniferous Limestone, Coal-Measure Sandstone, Lias, Gault, and Chalk age. What are we to think of such a deposit? What is the origin of this High-Level Glacial gravel? Mr. Nicholson doubted whether it could have been derived from a Boulder Clay, the nearest deposit of this in the neighbourhood being at a level of only 700 feet. Whatever its origin, the remarkable state of pre- servation of the shells appears to show that these were contemporaneous in age with the deposit in which found. Professor Hull thought that they lived in a sea which contained rafts of ice or small icebergs, and these deposited. the boulders amongst the beds of sand. As submergence of the land took place, the molluscs would live at a successively higher level up the sides of the sunken mountains, whilst the ice-foot with derived Lias and other fossils would also gradually mount, until the fossils were left intermingled with the remains of a contemporaneous fauna. ‘The deposit may indeed have been part of the great termi- nal moraine of Professor Carvell-Lewis, which accumulated where the melting of ice was in progress, and which he drew across England, ap- proaching very near to this spot. 26 SCIENCE-GOSSIP. i iw Ge CONDUCTED BY F. C. DENNETT. Position at Noon. 1900 = Rises. Sets. R.A. Dec. June hm. hm. h.m. Oe Sun .. 9 .. 3.46 a.m... 8.12 p.m... 5.9 .. 22.55 N 19 .. 3,44 50 tenllte -- 5.50 .. 23.26 29 .. 3.47 po fehl) 55 (ee oo. Pabili) Rises. Souths. Sets. Age at Noon. June hm. hm. hm. d. hem. Moon.. 9.. 436p.m... 9.14 p.m... 117am. .. 11 21.10 19 .. 11.35 : ae ao. Solbl piles, 55) 201 2a) 29 2. 6.32-a.m.*. 2:5 pm. .. 9.25 p.m... 2 10:23 Position at Noon, Souths, Semi- RA. Dec. June hm. Diameter. hm. Sh Mercury co 8 oo OB (Dit on PAY ce (GaE on. PELIG IN. WS) 5 BY Ga esl See els. (E33 PE) oq UY GY 35 BPA G4 BNPB) Venus ao 9 oo Peel jeans 35 PAW Se EKO) Se PBL) IS US) o4 ibs Bye AsO, AO ar eeol 55, Wi) oa ae! poe ere Ba UOBH Mars oo WS a6 Skat) hows oo PH! Go ahi SPRL INY Jupiter =» 19. L015) pam. .. 20:7 ©. 16:6 =. 20:0 S! Saturn so IS) sg) (UPR asi 5, teat! aS eH) 22.26 S$. Uranus co dU Gn Wee aya Go YS Weep) oS CilSRs Sy Neptune 00 HE) Gn ar Fin Gn IEE ee BEN) Be OP PiIB} aN) Moon’s PHASES. hem. hm. Ist Qr. .. June 5 .. 6.39a.m. Full .. June13 .. 3.38 a.m. Birt UW 60 oy AD 55 OB Ree Tie ok DT a4 Ie agit In apogee June 5th at 9 p.m.; and in perigee on 19th at 2 a.m. METEORS. hem. May 29-June 4 . -n Pegasids .. Radiant R.A. 22.12 Dec. 27° N June 10-28 508) Cepheids . ay AW) > 13-July 7 .. Vulpeculids.. A + 20.8 2 a> CONJUNCTIONS OF PLANETS WITH THE Moon. ° y June 11 a Jupiter -. Spm. .. Planet 1.29 N. ap ila} aa Saturn Selspan =. » 0.068. aoe ok a6 Mars* oO mast ait WA 1.31 S. ny» 24s) on Venus* nth An sn LEZ OENG a) 8) ef Mereury* Seeman. tf ee DIONE * Daylight. All are above the English horizon. OCCULTATIONS. Dis- Angle Re- Angle Magni- appears. from appears. from June Object. tude. him. Vertex. him. Vertex, ° 2..« Caner on GH) om Eisbligins on ED 65 GER joy 64 WAY 3.. Saturn -. — .- 940 p.m. .. 116 .. 10.52 p.m. .. 283 THE SUN should be watched, as spots are ap- pearing more frequently on the disc. Summer is said to commence at 10 p.m., June 21st, when the sun enters the sign, not the constellation, of Cancer. MERCURY is an eyening star all the month. Starting from close proximity to the sun, it is in conjunction with Neptune at 3 p.m. on June 7th, being 2° 54’ to the north. At 7 p.m. on 13th it is only 3 “3! south of eGeminorum. At 10 a.m. on 22nd it is in conjunction with Venus, being 2° 19’ to the north. VENUS is also an evening star all the month, being at the point of its greatest brilliancy at 6 a.m. on Ist. MARS is a morning star, rising less than two hours before the sun all the month. JUPITER is well situated for the observer, save for its great south declination. It rises closely east of B Scorpii at 7.17 p.m. at the beginning, and 5.10 p.m. at the end of the month. SATURN comes into opposition at 5 p.m. on June 23rd, and so is best situated for observation this month, although English observers will find its great south declination detrimental to good defini- tion. Itis a magnificent object. The major axis of the outer ring is, on June 19th, 42°61'’, and the minor axis 18° 87" so that the southern pole of the planet will be hidden behind the rings, and the northern pole will be apparently lying upon the rings. It will be near uw Sagittari. URANUS is in opposition at 11 a.m. on June Ist, and so is in the best position for observation. It appears as a 5°5 magnitude star to the naked eye, a little east-south-east of the 4:6 magnitude star w Ophiuchi. NEPTUNE, being in conjunction at 11 a.m. on June 18th, is too near to the sun for observation. ECLIPSE OF THE Moon, June 13th.—A very slight partial eclipse commencing with :— Angle from h. m NV. point. First contact with penumbra .. se) Le l6-2iaeme _— shadow 55 .. 3 242 a.m 176° Middle of “eclipse . 5 a0 -. 3 276 am — Last contact with shadow ae -- 3 sl'0am 180° Moon sets 3h. 54m. ‘The eclipse is so slight that the shadow only grazes the limb. THE BRUCE GOLD MEDAL of the Astronomical Society of the Pacific has been awarded to David Gill, C.B., LL.D., F.R.S., Her Majesty’s Astronomer at the Cape of Good Hope. MINOR PLANETS.—According to Professor Bau- schinger, the total number which have been certainly discovered hitherto now reaches 451. THE PARIS EXHIBITION TELESCOPE, which is being belauded before the public as if it were the greatest telescope of the age, is only so by reason of itsfocallength. The great telescope of the Paris Observatory should be its equal in definition and light-grasping power, whilst Dr. A. A. Common’s five-foot silvered-glass Newtonian ought to be a long way its superior in both these respects. ‘The announcements recently published about the ob- servations on the sun were peculiar reading. It is hardly necessary to say that the spectroscope is necessary to see the prominences on the limb. Comits.—Mr. W. F. Denning has been drawing attention to the remarkable fact that during the present century large comets have appeared at intervals of about nineteen and a half years: 1823, 1845, 1862, 1881. The next period falls at the end of the present year ; so far no comet has appeared to keep up the succession. Giacobini’s comet has been a very small one, its total light being equal to between 12 and 13 magnitudes. At the end of June, when its distance will be 128 millions of miles, its R.A. will be about 23h. 47m. and its North Declination 41° 31’, near the centre of the triangle formed by B Renee eae, B Cassiopeia and 8 Pegasi, and having a motion towards the west. SCIENCE-GOSSTIP. 27 CHAPTERS FOR YOUNG ASTRONOMERS. By FRANK C, DENNETT. VENUS. (Continued from Vol. VI. page 377.) MANY observers never see spots on Venus which they can delineate, whilst others have drawn a great amount of detail. ‘That markings really do exist there is not any real doubt ; but whether the mark- ings are of a stable character or only atmospheric is questionable. Observers for the past 230 years have from time to time seen and drawn such spots. Yet among the drawings there is little, if any, of that similarity which one meets with in the case of Mars. Most of those who have studied the planet agree that whilst they have no doubt of the reality of the markings, there is a strange want of definiteness which makes them difficult to secure. ‘The size of the telescope seems to be less necessary in this work than is usually the case. A good, rather than a large, telescope appears to be the important item, combined with persistent observation, so that the transient times may not be missed when our own atmosphere is in good condi- tion and the gaseous envelope of Venus itself equally transparent. Excellent observations have been made when the planet has been seen through a cloud of Aurora, the detail being then remark- ably visible. The spots were carefully observed and charted by Bianchini at Rome in 1726 and 1727 witha non-achromatic telescope 66 feet long and just over 25 inches aperture, bearing a power of 112. He, however, made the mistake of supposing that the rotation period was 24d. 8h. More than a hundred years later, 1839 to 1841, De Vico and six assistants, with the 64-inch Cauchoix achromatic instrument then at the Roman observatory, con- firmed the work of Bianchini so far as the accu- racy of his chart is concerned, save that he added one new spot. An important fact noted was that those who were most successful in seeing the spots were those astronomers who were least successful in detecting faint close companions of brilliant stars. Amongst the dark markings brilliant spots and patches have sometimes been seen. Huggins repeatedly saw a round bright spot. With and Key, in April 1868, observed a small brilliant spot on the limb which appeared as a_ projection. Browning has also seen a bright patch on the disc With frequently observed with an unsilvered glass-" mirror, which reduced the glare of the planet. A similar effect may also be obtained by using a solar diagonal on an achromatic. In using a diagonal, solar or star, it must be kept in mind that the object viewed is inverted, but not re- versed. The accompanying drawings of Venus were made by the writer in February 1881. The one marked A was made on the 11th at 6.45 p.m. The most striking object was the little oval ‘‘sea ” near tiie limb, reminding one of the Mare Crisium on the moon when of similar phase. At 7.5 p.m. it had moved perceptibly nearer to the limb. On the 15th, at 6.12 p.m. and 7.27 p.m.. the drawings B and C were made, the brightish patch near the centre of the disc having much increased in size in the latter. The instrument employed was a 93-inch Calver Newtonian. In 1890 the astronomical world was startled by an announcement by Schiaparelli that the revolu- tion of Venus, instead of taking just less than a day, really occupied between six and nine months. Observations made at Lowell’s Flagstaff Observatory, Arizona, confirmed this opinion. Drawings of the planet which were made give it the appearance almost of a cart wheel. The markings were said to be very evident, though not with the large instruments, but with the smaller, and best of all with the 3-inch. There has been much discussion on the subject, and tried observers, suchas Niesten of Brussels, Stuyvaert, and Trouvelot, have con- sidered their observations and supported the short- time rotation period. Now, apparently, the matter has been set at rest by the spectroscope. Dr. Belopolsky of Moscow finds that the amount of displacement of the lines indicates a short period of rotation. There can be little doubt that the surface we see consists of something analogous to clouds, and is not the real surface of the planet. VENts.—As seen on February 11th and 15th, 1881. The spectroscope makes it evident that aqueous vapour is certainly present in its atmosphere. Respecting the transits of Venus across the sun, little need be said, as anyone now living is never likely to see another. The next transit will occur on the morning of June 8th, 2004, followed by one on June 5th, 2012. The “black drop,” due to irradiation, is a very striking object at the internal contacts, when the planet, instead of appearing round, becomes lengthened out into the shape of a pear. Venus has been seen projected on the bright, yet invisible, corona of the sun. When on the disc many observers have seen this planet sur- rounded by a bright aureole, and having one or two bright spots near its centre. (To be continued.) 28 SCIENCE-GOSSTP. ee re isa OSexi CONDUCTED BY F. SHILLINGTON SCALES, F.R.M.S. PROTHALLIUM OF LycopopDIUM CLAVATUM.— A recent number of the “ Journal” of the Royal Microscopical Society summarises a contribution by Mr. W. H. Lang in the “ Annals of Botany,” 1899, pp. 279-317, in which he describes and illustrates the hitherto unknown prothallium of this club- moss. It is a nearly flat plate of tissue, with numerous rhizoids, its structure closely resembling that of L. annotinum. Of seven prothallia examined, six were female and one male. No archegones were found on the latter, but on two of the female prothallia a few antherids were seen. ‘The archegones and antherids were both confined to the upper surface of the prothallium; each organ developed from a single cell. In the young plant no structure was recognised comparable to the protocorm of L. cernum. The large foot persists for a considerable time after the prothallium has disappeared. ‘The cells of the prothallium are in- fested by an endophylic fungus. The author then discusses the comparative structure of the pro- thallia of species of Lycopodium at present known, and dissents from the view of Bruchmann that they should, on this ground, be split up into a number of distinct genera. BECK’S NEw +-INcH IMMERSION OBJECTIVE.— Messrs. R. & J. Beck, Limited, have sent for our inspection a new ;4-inch homogeneous oil-immer- sion objective which will, we think, prove specially useful to histological students and those workers who do not require a high aperture. The N.A. of this lens, like Messrs. Beck’s cheaper +4-inch, is only 1:0; but its definition is very good, whilst its price, inclusive of oil, is only £3. We think it should be a popular lens, as it is much superior to the water-lenses often used of this power, though a water-lens has facilities and advantages attend- ing its use that make it of service to many workers, especially when dealing with mounts made rapidly for temporary examination only. The objective has a good working distance, and is corrected for the short tube length. SECTION OF LIMESTONE.—Mr. Mason, of Park Road, Clapham, has recently sent us an exception- ally interesting microscopical slide of a section of Carboniferous Limestone from Llanynynech, Montgomeryshire. ‘This section is peculiarly rich in organic remains of unusual variety, and has, we believe, called forth some diversity of opinion amongst those interested in the subject. Apart from this, the slide is a really beautiful one, and we recommend it to the notice of those of our readers who may be concerned with such matters. Swirt’s NEw BACTERIOLOGICAL MICROSCOPE.— Messrs. James Swift & Son have recently brought out and exhibited before the Royal Microscopical Society a new microscope for bacteriological pur- poses that differs in some ways from the model hitherto adopted by this firm. The coarse adjust- ment rack works in a circular groove instead of the usual angular one, this being the arrangement largely used abroad, whilst the fine adjustment is also of the Continental triangular bar form. The drawback to this type of fine adjustment is that it necessarily bears the whole weight of the body of the instrument, and Messrs. Swift have therefore improved on the Continental form hitherto made by the use of their patent differential screw. The milled head of this last is so divided that one division equals ‘003 millimétre, and the index can be shifted to zero toallow of direct readings being made. The draw-tube is graduated in millimétres, and varies the tube-length from 160 mm. to 220 mm. The stage is covered with vulcanite, and is of specially ample size to allow of the use of the largest petric dish, without any risk of the plate slipping off the stage. ‘The right-hand side of the stage is divided BACTERIOLOGICAL MICROSCOPE, into squares as a finder, which enables the ob- server to record the position of a slide for future reference. A full-sized improved Abbé condenser with iris diaphragm beneath the stage is focussed by means of a special spiral focussing adjustment that has proved both convenient and easy of mani- pulation. The base of the stand is Messrs. Swift’s well-known claw-tripod, giving freedom of mani- pulation combined with stability ; and this form of base is greatly to be preferred to the ordinary Continental horseshoe and pillar form. The price of the microscope as described and illustrated, with one eyepiece, Abbé condenser with iris dia- phragm, dust-proof triple nose-piece, 2 inch, 3, and 7s 0il immersion—all of Messrs. Swift’s well-known and excellent ‘‘ Pan-aplanatic ” series—and case is £16, or without the 3;immersion £11. This micro- scope has been submitted to our personal inspec- tion, and we can recommend it to the notice of our readers. SCIENCE-GOSSTIP. MICROSCOPY FOR BEGINNERS. By F. SHILLINGTON SCALES, F.R.M.S. (Continued from Vol. VI. page 375.) OBJECTIVES should be carefully treated, and it should be borne in mind that they are delicate pieces of apparatus. Dew on a lens should be allowed to evaporate ; dust on the back lens should be removed with a soft camel-hair or sable brush ; and if the lenses really require cleaning, a specially soft piece of chamois-leather or cambric should be kept free from dust and used for that purpose only. The lenses should never be unscrewed: that is a matter for a first-rate optician only, and the maker is the proper man. An oil-immersion lens should be carefully and gently wiped immediately after use, and if by any chance any of the oil should have dried on the lens it is best to put another drop of oil on it, and to leave it for a time before wiping clean. Under any circumstances use as little pressure and friction in cleaning as possible. When objectives are in use, but temporarily re- moved from the microscope, they should be laid end upwards on the table to keep out the dust. For this reason it is well also to keep one of the eyepieces habitually in the tube of the microscope. A glass shade is preferable to the ordinary wooden case, except, of course, for travelling, as the microscope is apt to get jarred or knocked about through being constantly taken out of and put into its case. It is well, however, to remember that a microscope should not be allowed to stand in direct sunlight, if for no other reason than that the heat might prove injurious to the balsam or cement connecting the lenses of the objectives. On p. 249 of the last volume of SCIENCE-GOSSIP we gave instructions in the use of Beale’s camera lucida, and what we said then applies very largely to the other forms of camerae lucidae. The type known as “ Wollaston’s ” is not now much used, as it has been superseded by other forms more easy to use. It consists of a small prism placed over the eyepiece, which reflects the microscopic image into the eye. The microscope is inclined horizon- tally, and the eye must be so placed that one-half of the pupil is covered by this prism, and the other half looks directly at the paper placed beneath. The difficulty is in keeping this position, as any ‘ displacement causes an unequal illumination of either the image or the paper. Beale’s camera lucida has not this objection, and is, perhaps, at present the most popular. A makeshift camera on this principle can be made by means of a piece of cork, a cover-glass, and a couple of pins; all that is necessary being to adjust the cover-glass in front of, but at an angle of 45° with, the eye-lens of the eyepiece. The cover-glass gives, however, a somewhat troublesome double reflection ; and this is obviated in Beale’s arrangement, as supplied by the opticians, by the use of tinted glass. The Abbé form of camera lucida is considered by many workers to be the best in the market, but it is also the most costly. An arm projecting from the camera carries a plane mirror, which reflects the image of paper and pencil into a silvered prism placed above the eyepiece, and so into the eye. The paper must lie in the same plane as the object ; and if the microscope is therefore to be used in any but the vertical position, the drawing board must be sloped accordingly. In both this and the Wollaston form provision is made for adjusting the heht by means of tinted glass. Lately ’ 29) a new form of combined eyepiece and camera lucida, made by Swift, Leitz, and other makers, has found great favour on account of its simplicity. It is made in two forms—one for use with the microscope in a vertical position, and another in an inclined position. A prism placed above the eye- lens projects the pencil and paper clearly into the field. Some little practice is also required with this form to get the pupil of the eye placed in such a position over the prism that neither the image of the object nor of the paper overpowers the other. The beginner will find that in all forms of camerae lucidae the secret of success, as we have already pointed out (see SCIENCE-GossIP, vol. vi., N.S., p. 249), lies in the proper adjustment of the illu- mination for both microscope and paper. It is here that the value of an independent lamp for the paper makes itself felt. With low powers the illumination in the microscope is the stronger, and the lamp-flame must be adjusted accordingly, or even a piece of white paper may be placed over the mirror when that is used. With high powers the paper is generally the brighter, and tinted screens must be used, or the light modified. The usual standard for distance between eyepiece and table is ten inches, and this should be adhered to ap- proximately. Any variation will alter the size of the drawing. It may not be superfluous to add that short-sighted people will require to use their spectacles if they are to see the paper and pencil clearly. The pencil should have a sharp point, and the lines should not be drawn too heavily in the first place. With all forms of drawing apparatus the paper must lie in the position for which the camera lucida is designed, as detailed above, or the result will be an elliptical image. The use of the stage-micrometer in connection with the camera lucida will suggest itself to any- one. It is only necessary to replace the object on the stage by the micrometer, taking care not to alter the other adjustments of the microscope, and to note the measurements thus shown upon the drawing. Supposing the portion of the drawing to be measured corresponded with one-hundredth of an inch, as shown on the stage-micrometer, and with one inch when measured with an ordinary rule, the actual magnification is one hundred diameters. If the micrometer be a millimetre scale, it will be necessary to provide oneself witha rule divided in millimetres—or to conyert the English measurements accordingly, either by re- ference to a table or by calculation. For rough purposes the English inch may be taken as 25-4 mm. The use of the stage-micrometer in conjunction with the eyepiece micrometer has been dealt with on p. 248 in the last volume. In making measure- ments by this method when using high powers, difficulty is often encountered in causing the object on the stage or the stage-micrometer to come into exact alignment with the lines in the eyepiece. To obviate this a mechanical stage is a great con- venience, or the form of micrometer designed by Mr. Jackson, with a sight adjustment to the scale by means of a screw. The most perfect form of micrometer eyepiece is the screw-micrometer, containing one fixed and one traveliing wire ; the movement of the latter being accurately recorded by means of a drum, whilst each revolution of the drwm corresponds to one of many serrated teeth in the field of view. (Lo be continued.) No ies CONDUCTED BY JAMES QUICK. WIRELESS TELEGRAPHY.—It is to be hoped that the removal of the wireless telegraph installation at the South Foreland lighthouse and the Goodwin lightship is not a permanent one. It has certainly proved of great practical value, and has demon- strated to a marked degree the utility of the system for signalling to lighthouses and lightships. About a year ago the equipment was installed upon an experimental basis ; but as, apparently, the Trinity House authorities had no funds at their disposal to purchase the instruments, and the latter are wanted elsewhere by the Wireless Telegraph Com- pany, they were removed some weeks since. RELATIONS BETWEEN ELECTRICITY AND ENGI- NEERING.—This formed the subject of this year’s ‘James Forrest” lecture, delivered by Sir William Preece, C.B., F.R.S., before the Institution of Civil Engineers. Feeling keenly that the subject was far too wide a one to be discussed from all points, the lecturer confined himself almost exclusively to the miscellaneous uses to which electricity had been, and was being, put to obtain engineering results. Of the extensiveness and ease of applied electricity Sir William Preece holds as high opinions as anyone. ‘No magician or poet,” he said, ‘‘ ever conceived so potent a power within the easy reach of man.” In treating of the transmission of elec- tricity over great distances he said: “Sitting on the shores of the Atlantic in Ireland, one can manipulate a magnetic field in Newfoundland so as to record simultaneously on paper in conven- tional characters slowly written words. Thus we have bridged the ocean and annihilated space.” If Sir William Preece’s opinion upon the com- mercial success of wireless telegraphy methods is accepted as an authoritative one, possibly the ardour of some commercial men has been damped by a remark made by the lecturer that there was “no commercial business in it.” NiEw TYPEWRITING TELEGRAPH. —This instru- ment, the invention of Mr. W. §. Steljes, is shortly to be put upon the market by the Typewriter 'Tele- graph Corporation, Limited. It is of simple con- struction, and requires no battery power, the electrical energy being generated by a magneto- instrument. In working the instrument a record is made at both ends of the line in the form of a printed copy of the message sent, and, as it can be used in conjunction with telephone lines, both verbal and printefl messages can be sent. NINETEENTH-CENTURY CLOUDS OVER PHYSICS. The Friday evening lectures at the Royal Insti- tution were resumed, after the Easter vacation, on April 27th, Lord Kelvin commencing the present series with a discourse upon ** Nineteenth-Century Clouds over the Dynamical Theory of Heat and Light.” It could not be considered a brilliant one from the experimental and popular points of view ; nevertheless, it is a very valuable one to physicists, coming as it did from such an authority as Lord 20 SCIENCE-GOSSTP. Kelvin. ‘The first cloud referred to was that which came into evidence with the undulatory theory of light. If the ether be assumed to be an elastic solid, as required by this theory, it is difficult to conceive how the earth and other bodies can move so freely through the ether. In spite, however, of the investigations of Young, Michelson, Morley, Lodge, and others, on the relation between ether and matter, leading to the result from which Lord Kelvin saw no possibility of escape, viz. that there is no motion of the ether relative to matter, he persisted in his opinion that matter does not move freely through the ether. The second great un- dissolved cloud over the dynamical theory lay in the Maxwell-Boltzmann doctrine of the partition of kinetic energy. This doctrine also Lord Kelvin, from many recent calculations, is induced to say is not true. At the conclusion of the discourse Lord Kelvin brought forward some considerations respect- ing the structure of the atom and the ether, point- ing out that the ether must be truly imponderable, and quite outside the law of universal gravitation. SOCIETY OF ARTS.—At a special meeting of the Council of the Society of Arts, held at Marl- borough House on May 8th, the Prince of Wales (President) presented the Albert Medal of the Society to Sir W. Crookes, F.R.S., ‘‘ for his extensive aud laborious researches in chemistry and physics, researches which have in many instances developed into useful, practical applications in the arts and manufactures.” THE TELEPHONOGRAPH.—NOo one can deny the advdntages of being provided with a telephone in one’s office or rooms, in spite of the constant irri- tation of the call-bell and the shortcomings of the telephone companies. The telephonograph, how- ever, is to prove an additional boon, in that tele- phonic messages can be received and recorded in one’s absence. This instrument, which is a modi- fication of the phonograph, is provided with a steel band which replaces the wax cylinder of the Edison phonograph; a magnet, controlled by a telephone, being also substituted for the ordinary phonographie style. Currents transmitted by the telephone pass through an electro-magnet and produce consequent poles on the steel band, a somewhat converse operation being employed for reproducing the sound. A long line can, of course, . intervene between the transmitting telephone and the phonograph itself. THE Royan SociteTy.—The gentlemen’s con- versazione of the Royal Society took place on Wednesday evening, May 9th. Among the elec- trical exhibits shown was one by Professor 8. P. Thompson, illustrating the converse to De la Rive’s experiment with a floating battery. Little floating magnets enclosed in glass tubes took the place of the floating battery. An immersed hollow coil carrying an electric current provided the necessary magnetic field, which determined the movements of the magnets. This experiment should be a most useful and simple one to lecturers upon electricity, as it would certainly assist students in grasping the important principles underlying. Mr. P. E. Shaw exhibited his electrical micro- meter, a description of which appeared in this column for last month. Among the candidates recently selected by the Council of the Royal Society for election into the Society are two distinguished physicists, Professor G. J. Burch, M.A., and Dr. James Gordon MacGregor. SCIENCE-GOSSIP. 31 y.—The first SOCIET afternoon meeting of the present session was held on Wednesday, May 16th, at the Society’s rooms, RoyaL METEOROLOGICAL 70 Victoria Street, Westminster, Dr. C. Theodore Williams, President, in the chair. A most interest- ing paper on ‘‘ The Wiltshire Whirlwind of October Ist, 1899,” was read which had been prepared by the late Mr. G. J. Symons, F.R.S8., a few days before he was stricken down with paralysis. This whirl- wind occurred between 2 and 3 P.M., commencing near Middle Winterslow and travelling in a north- north-easterly direction. The length of the damage was nearly twenty miles, but the average breadth was only about 100 yards. In this narrow track, however, buildings were blown down, trees were uprooted, and objects were lifted and carried by the wind a considerable distance before they were deposited on the ground. Fortunately the greater part of the district over which the whirlwind passed was open down; otherwise the damage, and perhaps loss of life, would have been considerable. At Old Lodge, Salisbury, the lifting power of the whirlwind was strikingly shown by some wooden buildings being raised and dropped several feet north-west of their original position. Ata place eighteen miles from its origin the whirlwind came upon a rick of oats, a considerable portion of which it carried right over the village of Ham and de- posited in a field more than a mile and a half away. A paper by Dr. Nils Ekholm, of Stockholm, was also read on ‘The Variations of the Climate of the Geological and Historical Past and their Causes.” In this the author attempts to apply the results of physical, astronomical, and meteorological research in order to explain the secular changes of climate unveiled by geology and history.— VW Gilliam Marriott, Assistant Secretary Y- SoutTH LONDON ENTOMOLOGICAL AND NATURAL HIstoRY SociETy.—M ARCH 8th, Mr. W. J. Lucas, B.A., F.E.S., President, in the chair. Mr. Harwood exhibited a species of Blatta from the Hastern Counties, which was apparently new to Britain. Mr. Adkin, a bred series of Hugonia autumnaria from Bournemouth. Mr. Colthrup, a specimen of Huchelia jacobaeae, with the red areas unusually pale, a very beautifully marked variety of Burrhy- para wrticata, and very small examples of Pieris rapae, including a yellow variety. Mr. Lucas ex- hibited living specimens of the immature stage of Blatta australasia from Kew, and a case contain- ing preserved examples of the whole of the British Cockroaches, with drawings of several species. Mr. Main, living specimens of Blatta americana from Silvertown. Mr. Edwards, living specimens of Phyllodromia germanica, male, female, and im- mature. Mr. Moore, numerous exotic species of Cockroaches. Mr. Tutt, a long and varied series of Epunda lutulenta, taken at Mucking, Essex, by Rev. E. Burrows in 1898-99, and gave notes as to the occurrence and variation of the species. Mr. Lucas read a paper entitled ‘‘ Cockroaches: Natives and Aliens,” illustrating it with numerous lantern slides. MARCH 22nd, Mr. W. J. Liucas, B.A., F.E.S., President, in the chair. Mr. Montgomery exhi- bited specimens. of a second generation and a partial third brood of Coremia designata, and gave mere on their life-history and variation. Mr. N. B. Carr, a varied series of Hibernia leuco- Fie from Lee. Some very beautiful lantern slides on Ornithological subjects were then exhi- bited under the auspices of the Society for the Protection of Birds,,including copies of a number of plates from Lord Lilford’s “ British Birds,” and numerous studies of the nests and haunts of birds by Mr. E. B. Lodge. ApRin 12th, Mr. F. Noad Clark in the chair. Mr. Edwards exhibited a living specimen of Scorpio cwropacis. sent by Dr. Chapman from Cannes. It fed readily upon cockroaches. Mr. Sich, living larvae and cases of Coleophora lineolea from Chiswick. Mr. Noad Clark, photo- micrographs of the ova of (1) Hugonia fuscantaria, showing clearly the serrated edges; (2) Geometra vernaria, in piles as deposited; and (3) Newronia popularis. Myr. Colthrup, specimens of Bombyx quercis var. callunae; and Mr. Tutt gave an in- teresting account of the Lasiocampid moths, to which he had recently been devoting his attention. He showed that they formed a clearly definable section, and contained numerous easily distinguish- able, although closely allied, sub-sections and genera. The various points of view of ovum, larva, pupa, and imago were taken into consideration, and contrasted and compared with allied groups as wellasamong themselves. APRIL 26th, Mr. W. J. Lucas, B.A., F.E.S8., President, in the chair. Mr. Buckstone, specimens of Vriphaena fimbria bred from ova. The larvae had been fed exclusively on cabbage. Mr. Turner, Longicorn Coleoptera—(1) Saperda populnea, taken by Mr. Day at Carlisle ; (2) Rhagiwn bifasciatum from the New Forest ; (3) Clytus mysticus from Brockley ; (4) C. arietis from Lewisham ; together with larvae of (i) Cualli- morpha dominula from Deal, where they were comparatively scarce; (ii) Bombyx quercis from Deal,on garden-rose; (111) Pericallia syringaria from Bexley. Mr. Lucas, specimens of the snake’s-head plant, Fritillaria meleagris, wcluding a white variation from Oxford. Mr. Moore showed a Kaffir necklace made of the so-called “eggs” of the white ant, Zermes bellicosus, but he found they were really the encysted pupae of a species of Coccid of the genus Margarodes, having sub- terranean habits. Mr. Lucas, a specimen of the dragon-fly, Sympetrum vulgatum, a male taken by Mr. Hamm, of Oxford, at Torquay, on August 15th, 1899. This is the second authenticated British specimen, the other being in the collection of Mr. C. A. Briggs, of Lynmouth. Mr. Adkin, a fine bred series of Lugonia fuscantaria, reared from Lewes ova. He stated it was easy to breed when sleeved. Mr. Clark reported that he had received ova of Gonepteryx rhamni which had been found deposited on the stems of the buckthorn. Mr. Harrison reported having seen a dragon-fly, Libel- lula quadrimaculata, on wing at Easter. Mr. Step exhibited a considerable number of Jantern-slides, made by himself, of ‘“‘ Wild Flowers at Home,” and described their characteristics and surroundings at some length. A discussion ensued upon this branch of natural history study. ‘The use of the photo- graphic camera was recommended as an exact record of observations on natural objects.—Hy. J. Turner, Hon. Report Sec. CORRESPONDENCE. We have pleasure in inviting any readers who desire to raise discussions on scientific subjects, to address their letters to the Editor, at 110 Strand. London, W.C. Our only restriction will be, in case the correspondence exceeds the bounds of courtesy ; which we trust is a matter of great improbability. These letters may be anonymous. In that case they must be accom- panied by the full name and address of the writer, not for publication, but as an earnest of good faith. The Editor does not hold himself responsible for the opinions of the corre- spondents.— Ed. S.-G. NATURE PICTURES OF LEPIDOPTERA. To the Editor of SCLENCE-GOSSIP. Srr,—Can any of your readers tell me, through your columns, the process for stamping off on paper the scales of butterilies’ wings, so as to get a counterfeit representation of the species ? ROGER VERITY. Florence. Italy. PHONETICS AND ETHNOLOGY. To the Editor of SCVENCE-GOSSIP. SIR, s there exist any systematic treatment of the connection between these two sciences? Has any divergence in the structure of the yocal organs or of the speech and auditory centres been noticed among various races, especially among the inhabitants of the once-Roman Provinces, who have now developed Neo-Latin into seven principal forms? Have any of their conflicting and contra- dictory phonetic tendencies corresponded with such physiological and racial divergences? To what climatic. or any other non-biological, causes can be attributed the tendency to divergent altera- tion of pronunciation? I should be obliged for any references. especially recent ones. to these points. CHARLES G. STUART-MENTEATH. - 23 Upper Bedford Place, London, W.C., May 11th. 1900. NOTICES OF SOCIETIES. Ordinary mectings are marked |, excursions * ; names of persons Following excursions are of Conductors. § Lantern Tlustra- tions. GEOLOGISTS’ ASSOCIATION OF LONDON. Jone 1.—; “Our Older Sea Margins.” Sir A. Geikie, F-R-S. (in Theatre of Museum of Practical Geology. Jermyn Street, SW. 8 p.m) 2-5.—* Malvern and District. Prof. Theodore T. Groom, ALD.. D.Se., F.G.S. 16,—* Caterham. Godstone. and Tilburstow. BAL ERS: - 23.—*Guildiorl. A. K.Coomara-Swamy, F.G.S. -- 30.—* Silchester. J. H. Blake, F.G.S. SouTH-EssSTERN UNION OF SCIENTIFIC SOCIETIES. June 7-9.—Annual Congress at the Pavilion, Brighton. E. Allowau Pankhurst, 3 Clifton Road, Brighton, Hon. Local Sze. NOTTINGHAM NATURAL Science Rawerise CLee. cr W. Whitaker, June 2.—* The Hemlock Stone. Geology. J. Shepman, F.G.S. + 16.—* Hucknall and High Park Wood. Botany. W. Stafford. Norte Lonpox NATURAL History Socirery. June 1-4.—* New Forest. C. Nicholson, F.E.S. os 4.—* Westerham. L. B. Pron. ae 7.—7 “Reptiles.” F.W. Jones. + 23.—* Cycle Excursion from Blackheath Station. + 24.—7 Debate. Sexual Selection. —* Harefield. R. W. Robins. LAMBETH FIELD CLUB. June 4.—* Broxbourne and Wormley Woods. C.S - i11.—7; Anuual Meeting. 16.—* Woking and Chobham. W. Wright. . Cooper. 132 _SCIENCE-GOSSTP. SoutH Loypon NatTursL History Society. June 4—New Forest. - 16,—Chipstead. July 7.—E. Horsley. Sept. 22.—Paul’s Cray Common. NOTICES TO CORRESPONDENTS. To CORRESPONDENTS AND EXCHANGERS.—SCIENCE-GoOSsIP is published on the 25th of each month. All notes or other com- mnunications should reach us not later than the 18th of the month for insertion in the following number. No communications can be inserted or noticed without full name and address of writer. Notices of changes of address admitted free. BUSINESS CoMMCNICATIONS.—AIl Business communications relating to SCIENCE-GOSSIP must be addressed to the Proprietor of Sc1rENCcE-Gossr, 110 Strand, London. SUBSCRIPTIONS. —The volumes of Screxce-GossiP begin with the June numbers, but S Subscriptions may commence with any number, at the rate of 6% 6d. for twelye months (including postage), and should be remitted to the Office, 110 Strand, London, W.C. EDITORIAL COMMENICATIONE, articles, books ior review, instru- ments for notice, specimens for identification. &c.. to be addressei to Joux T. CARRINETON, 110 Sirand, London, W.C. NoticE.—Contributors are requested to strictly observe the following rules. All contributions musi be clearly written on one side of the paper only. Words intended to be printed in ifalies Should be marked under with a single line. Generic ames must be given in full. excepting where used immediately before. Capitals may only be used for generic. and not specific names. Scientific names and names of places to be written in round hand. THe Editor will be pleased io answer questions and name specimens through the Correspondence column of the magazine. Specimens, in good condition, of not more than three species io be sent atone time. carriage paid. Duplicates only to be sent, - which will not be returned. The specimens must have identiiy- ing numbers attached, together with locality, date and par- tienlars of capture. THE Editor is not responsible for unused MSS., neither can he undertake to return them unless accompanied with siamps for return postage. NOTICE. SUBSCRIPTIONS (6s. 6d. per annum) may be paid at anytime. The postage of SCIENCE-GOSSIP is really one penny. but only half that rate is charged to subscribers. ANSWERS TO CORRESPONDENTS. A. S. H. (Surrey).—Yes, the dipierous fiy is Bombulius major. A. M. (Hayling).— Yes, the nodules on the roots of Nicia s@ica are the product of bacteria, and Known as nitrogen nodules. EXCHANGES. NoticeE.—Exchanges extending to thirty words (including name and address) admitied free, bni additional words musi be prepaid at the rate of threepence for every seven words or less. WANTED, ito exchange this season’s good stuffed specimens. Sheldrakes, golden-eyes. redshank, &c., ior others.—H. Stevens, 23 Mundella Terrace, Heaton, Neweastle-on-Tyne. WANTED, grains of so-called “ ginger-beer plant,” in exchange for rare algae or shells —Miss Stanley, Heathfield, Sussex. WasTED.—London Oat. B. Plants, 9th edition, Nos. 23, 35, 117, 159, 179, 304, 305, 314; 1849. &e. Offered 8, 191. 194, 205, 391, 1047, 1368, 1553, &c.—Rev. C. H. Waddell. Sainifieid, co. Down, Ireland. _ WANTED.—British birds eggs and a large egg _cabinet. Offered, ioreign stamps. books on geology. engineering, and many ior Civil Service candidates—E. Poll 5 New Terrace, Chesham Bois. Bucks. OFPERED.—Rhopalocera of Sikkim (Himalaya). Wanted, European (British excepted), Tropical American, and other Rhopalocera. List of species and other iniormation— Roger Verity, 1 Via Leone Decimo, Firenze. Italy. MossEs.—I wish to exchange mosses. Please send lists of duplicates and desiderata—(Revy.) Hunt Painter, Siirchley Rectory, Shifnal, Shropshire. SCIENCE-GOSSIP. ion) mw GEOLOGICAL NOTES IN ORANGE RIVER COLONY. 3y Masor B. M. SKINNER, R.A.M.C. 1. From ENSLIN TO BLOEMFONTEIN. FEW remarks on the geology of the narrow tract of country lying between Enslin and Bloemfontein may perhaps prove of some interest, even though the notes from which they are taken were jottedjdown often on stray scraps of paper. The country observed was strictly confined to the line of march, the collection of rock specimens being an impossibility, owing to want of any means of carriage. Enslin is on the railway between the Modder and Orange rivers, and consists of a small railway station inared plain. Out of the red plain rise small rounded hills, all of them covered with the same loose rounded boulders ; those on the east of the rail at this spot being celebrated for the battle which occurred on them on November 25th, 1899. The country looks like a vast sea with islands dotted about. The composition of these islands became a matter of interest, They were all of the same pattern, covered with a reddish soil, dotted x x tay Opa ng US play ei oe , > Fie. 1. YAS + Oe as the column of troops wended along they crossed the spurs of boulder-covered high ground, passing along red soil down the talus slope; this thinned down till the white limestone was exposed. The lime would be succeeded by a modérn “pan,” 7.¢. a water-bed, at this season (beginning of February) generally dry, flat, sandy. In those districts where there is an outlet from the hills a dam is built across, and the dam end of the pan contains some water; and where there is water, there are one or two trees and a farm. On the other side of the pan comes the lime, then the red clay soil, then the hill or kop. The foregoing is the structure of the country to Ramdam, about nine miles from Enslin. ‘The travertine here is extensive and contains many erains of garnet. A repetition of this sort of country occurs as far as Waterval Drift. At this spot came an interesting, but disappointing,. series of strata. The Riet river flows past, the “Drift” being the ford across that stream. The river here has cut its way through thin strata of SECTION OF PLAIN NEAR ENSLIN. A. General surface level; x Dolerite; — Stratified rock. with rounded boulders, the tops occasionally pre- senting a cracked and fissured rock-bed from which the boulders had come, while the slopes were so covered with débris that the rock beneath was in- accessible, except that now and then the débris showed a shaly admixture. The red soil, formed by the destruction of the dolerite, has washed down across the plain, the boulders of the hills seldom travelling far, and being always noticeably smaller as the hills are descended. When the boulders in the plain are larger than those at the foot of the nearest hill, experience teaches that they indicate the site of another doleritic prominence now dis- guised by débris. (See fig. 1.) In the centre of the plain the ground is white, and slight cuttings for the railway show that this white soil—which, by the way, has given the homely name of ‘Chalk Farm” to one of the stations a little further south—is a travertine, varying in thickness from an inch to five or six feet, lying on denuded strata of shales, This white formation is a striking feature of the country. Day after day JuLy, 1900,—No, 74, Vou, VII. sandstones, and the disappointment consisted in not being able to obtain a specimen owing to a hurried move. While halting temporarily at a deserted farm-house on the bank, the paving of the verandah was seen to contain on some of the stones, and on a flag-stone, the remains of plants. However, had a specimen been obtained it could not have been carried away, as a 50-lb. kit does not allow of geological additions, As usual, the strata in the river bed and bank were horizontal, or nearly so, the usual characteristic of strata in this country, even though outcrops or dykes of dolerite occurred in the vicinity, as seen when morning broke on a march commenced at 1 A.M. to the next halt at Weydrei, near Jacobsdal. Circumstances did not allow of any close examination of the few exposures of stratified rocks at Klip Drift, the next halt; they were observed to consist of flags with intervening sandy shales. Further up the river, at Klip Kraal, sections of these flags and shales were exposed; but beyond noticing that the shales were very dark-coloured, no close note was Cc ~) taken, as other urgent affairs demanded atten- tion. From Klip Drift the next move was to Bank’s Vlei, and thence to Paardekraal; the hills or koppies seen on the road all show by their boulder- strewn sides that their tops at least are formed of dolerite, and, as usual, the soil below them is red, while in the lower ground the white lime is ex- posed. In the bed of the Modder, just above Paardekraal Drift. the shales and flags are seen to have aslight southern dip—the first deviation from the horizontal, or apparently horizontal, yet seen in this line of country. About a mile further up the river there is a considerable exposure of these rocks, which are ‘“‘ muddy ” thin-bedded sandstones, having a shaly fracture, with intervening layers of sandy shales; the whole varying in colour from a light blue-grey to almost black. In some positions were septaria, often of considerable size, while occasional fossilised sand-cracks were seen. On the north bank, just above the Drift, is the Paardeberg, which being translated is ‘ Horse Mountain.” This is a mass of dolerite; all the koppies on the south are of the same material, the stratified rocks as far as yet seen being confined to the plain-level, where they have been protected from final denudation by their covering of tra- vertine and the red detrital sandy clay. The only exception to this is a mound opposite the Paarde- berg and south of the river, which on one side shows a protrusion of dolerite, and on the other a layer of what appears like chert, lying horizontally on sandstones and shales, whose edges are occa- sionally seen, and covered by similar strata. At the Drift opposite Cronje’s Laager a section was ob- served of bluish-slaty shale, the top of which was denuded, and is now covered by travertine. and this again by light-reddish sandy soil; below the bluish was a dark shale. To the south-east of Cronje’s Laager is a hill called in the map Stink- fontein, but by the British trocps re-named Kitchener’s Kop; this is a mass of dolerite, on the flanks of which are patches of the débris of chert and sandy shales. The appended section is suggested as represent- ing diagrammatically the structure of the country (fig. 2). The dolerite, being a hard rock, has acted as a protective cap to the softer sandy strata, while at the same time it has disguised those strata by its débris. The source of the travertine is not apparent as yet. The age of the strata is not dis- closed by internal evidence, though from the description of the lithological characters of the Karroo given by Professor Green (') they are pro- bably of that period. Marching beyond Kitchener’s Kop, we come to Osfontein Farm; then, after a flank march, to Poplar Grove; and thence on to Roodepoort, noting nothing new on the way beyond the large variety of bulbous plants that may be seen on the alluvial (1) * Quart. Journal Geol. Society,” No. 174, pp. 246 and 248. ‘exposed to water-action. 34 SCIENCE-GOSSIP. flats of the Modder River near these places. In the river bed at Roodepoort is a small waterfall over rocks of dolerite, where it was observed that the spheroidal weathermg was more marked in this position than on the hills—a fact since ob- served in every position where this rock has been The soil during the march to Roodepoort changed to a light buff sand, 25 to 40 feet of which are exposed in the river banks. About six feet above the level of the water- fall mentioned, a narrow layer contained shells of a species of Helix like H. nemoralis and a minute bivalve. In another spot further up the river, in a layer of fine gravel about six feet above the pre- sent river-level, was a small ungulate bone, a speci- men of a bivalve, with broken fragments of a similar shell. In a layer about two feet above this was found a species of Unio. A little further up stream these gravelly layers (sections of small streams?) had disappeared, but three strings of kunkur were seen, evidently deposited by another stream. In the grounds of a farm-house on the river bank were found fragments of rock lying about, evidently brought to this spot for building purposes. Among these were pieces of a dark lime- stone, showing that somewhere not very far away are limestone rocks. This limestone contained minute concretions which at first sight gave the impression of foraminifera. A fossiliferous rock would add to the interest of a region apparently barren of evidence of former life. The next march was past Abraham’s Kraal, halt- ing at Dreifontein, the soil being again red, with occasional exposures of travertine, the koppies boulder-strewn with dolerite as before. The next day saw the column near Kaal Spruit, from which spot the distant hills occasionally showed alter- nating layers of hard and soft rock, this becoming more evident the following day from Venter’s Vallei, though it was not possible to approach near enough to identify the rocks. The stones of which a farmer’s hut at this locality was built showed several varieties of sandstones, exhibiting bedding streaks, but evidently hewn from thicker strata than any seen previously on this line of march. Continuing onwards, the next day the column bivouacked on a mass of dolerite called Brand’s Kop, the following morning marching into Bloemfontein, the country on that side of the Kop being a grass-covered slope towards the town. The source of the travertine (*) forms to the new- comer a subject for speculation, as no rock was (2) In the vicinity of Modder River Station, a spot not in- cluaed in these notes. this travertine was observed interbedded thinly and unevenly with a fine gravel, the main bed of which lay beneath the lime; mm another locality near this was a sand- stone, the upper part of which was interbedded with the traver- tine. At Osfontein, where the travertine lay on a denuded surface of shales, fragments of the shales were imbedded in its lower part, forming a breccia; the same condition was noziced elsewhere, but at this place there was a good section visible in the side of a sluit (a narrow water-channel) cut by man to con- duct water from a spring. SCIENCE-GOSSIP. 3 observed which could have supplied such vast quantities of lime along the 120 miles or so traversed during the march recorded above. ‘The type of strata, leaving out the igneous, was, first, shales; then thin, flaggy sandstones and shales at Waterval Drift ; followed by a preponderance of shales along the Modder River up to Dreifontein ; and, finally, an indication in the hills seen from Venter’s Vallei of thick bands of sandstone, com- pared with the previous flaggy rocks, though the shaly strata preponderated. Taking Professor Green’s lithological description (*), these strata may be set down as ‘ Karroo.” It is to be regretted that no fossils could be found to verify the dia- The manner in which the sandstones become more pronounced at the eastern end of the line would point to an ascent in the geological scale, judged by the same standard, and remember- ing that the country rises slightly from west to east, the strata at the same time being, to all intents and purposes, horizontal, and only disturbed very locally, such disturbance being but once observed, as noted above. This fact points to denudation having occurred from east to west, though the cessation of the travertine towards the end of the march, soon after leaving the Modder River, may indicate that the denudation of the lime rock occurred from the north-east. ‘This travertine was deposited after the denudation of the country had progressed to almost recent conditions, for it always lies on a denuded surface of the rockof the lower.land of the locality—we may call it the valley-rock— generally a shale in the district under review; and as this valley-rock is the lower level of denudation which has progressed downwards from a height that was once considerably above the altitude now reached by the Drakensberg, the deposition of the travertine dates to a period long subsequent to the formation of the highest strata of the country— sufficiently long to allow of the denudation of some 8,000 feet of rock. Professor Green says of the hills in Cape Colony: ‘‘They are all of them purely hills carved out by denudation, and they stand as speaking witnesses of what denudation can do, and of the enormous lapse of time dur- ing which it must have been at work in this country” (*). The highest beds, excepting the volcanic, of South Africa appear to correspond to higher 'Tri- assic beds in Europe. ‘Therefore their period of elevation may be inferred to be fairly remote, and to afford ample time for the denudation which:has taken place, bat which is now probably proceeding at a comparatively slow pace. The red soil, very sandy at the points more remote from the modern centres of its formation, more clayey on the hill slopes, is derived from the weathering of the dolerite; and as the dykes and enosis. (3) * Quart. Journal Geol. Society,” No. 174, pp. 246 and 248, (4) Loe. cit. p. 261. ¢ oun sheets of this material are practically omnipresent, the prevailing colouring of the country is red during the dry season. The fall of the rains rapidly causes the growth of herbage, and converts a barren-looking land into green pastures in a few days. It was mentioned above that in the centre of the plain-lands was usually to be found a pan, which, as far as can be judged from the character of the narrow strip of country passed through, was seldom in the present day covered with water. These pans represent the denudation of the country, and as seen superficially are composed of whitish sand. FIG. 2. SECTION OF COUNTRY NEAR PAARDEBERG. 1. Dolerite; 2. Chert; 3. Sandy shales; 4. Thin sandstones ; 5. Travertine; 6. Debris of dolerite, red sand, and boulders. The section mentioned above in the banks of the Modder River at. Roodepoort may perhaps repre- sent what would be seen were a section possible through one of these sandy pans, and. would point to their formation in recent times. It would show sand, sandy mud, fine gravel, irregularly bedded, with recent and modern shells; it would be inte- resting to get a section through a large dried-up pan like that between Enslin and Ramdam, as the lowest strata might afford some further clue to the geology of the country. In the case of this pan, its site had evidently been cut out of the travertine now on each side of it; how much deeper it had gone it was impossible to ascertain. It is with diffidence these rough notes are sub- mitted; they may possibly prove of some interest as referring to a not very frequented part of the Orange River Colony. ‘The difficulties of the occa- sion and want of transport, necessitating even the omission of a camera from a light scale of equip- ment, must be the apology offered for paucity of details and of illustrations. Bloemfontein, May, 1900. STONYHURST COLLEGE OBSERVATORY. — The “ Results of Meteorological and Magnetical Obser- vations, with Report and Notes of the Director, 1899,” has been sent us by the Rev. W. Sidgreaves, 8.J. It contains the results of an immense amount of careful work, not only at Stonyhurst, but also at St. Ignatius College, Malta. c2 a6 SCIENCE-GOSSIP. By H. WALLIS KEw. I, A CENTIPEDE’S WEB. MONG spinning Myriapods the most notorious, perhaps, is the little slender, elongated centipede, Geophilus, whose web, much enlarged, is shown in the accompanying illustration. The drawing is copied from a figure published by Pro- fessor Fabre in 1855, and represents the web of Geophlus convolcens, of which centipede Fabre kept a number of individuals of both sexes for some time in captivity. At the end of September this naturalist noticed in passages in the mould in which the creatures lived very small nets, formed of cobwebby fila- ments, irregularly crossed, and extending from one wall to the other of the passages. Similar nets were seen also above the mould, between tremity of the body. Numerous attempts were made to ascertain the normal fate of the spermato- phore and the manner in which fertilisation was effected, but without success, for the females, being possibly immature, took no notice of the webs. The observer was satisfied, however, that with this animal there is, in the ordinary way, no individual connection between the sexes: and he suggests that the female may deposit her eggs round the spermatophore, causing it to burst; or, more probably, he says, she may come to the web before laying her eggs and take possession of the spermatophore. : Species of Geophilus are common in this country, and possibly some reader of SCIENCE-GossIP has observed their spinning habits. Fabre’s memoir is in the ‘“‘ Annales des Sciences WEB OF CENTIPEDE (*). sprigs of moss. Near the centre of each net was suspended, free from contact with foreign bodies. a white globule of the size of a small pin’s-head, and this the observer at first believed to be an egs. Under the microscope. however, he saw the globule burst, and recognised in it, to his great surprise, a drop of sperm, with spermatozoa in full activity. Several globules were examined with the same result, and it was clear that they were the spermatophores of the Geephilus. After two or three days the globules first observed dis- “appeared, having been dried up, or devoured per- haps by mites; but new nets were formed, each with a spermatophore in the centre, and so on,- during a month anda half. Therefore, in spite of rapid destruction, five or six were constantly to be seen. These webs, regarded as a sort of nest on which the male lays his product, were believed by Fabre to be spun by the -male, from accessory genital glands, which open at the posterior ex- (1) Web, with spermatophore. of Geophilus convolvens:, much enlarged. After Fabre, “Annales des Sciences Naturelles~: Zool. (4), iii. (1855). pl. IX. fig. 23. Naturelles.” Zool. (4), Ill. (1855), pp. 257-316: and one may refer, also, to Ryder, “Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia.” 1881, pp. 79-86; and Zograf, ** Zoologischer Jahresbericht.” 1883, Abth. 2. pp. $8—92. II. THE SLDME-JETS OF PERIPATUS. Peripatus, one learns, possesses paired slime- glands with reservoirs, the contents of which it can suddenly eject through openings at the tips of a pair of oral papillae, in the form of fine jets of tenacious fluid, whick, hardening quickly, may form “networks of fine threads, looking like a spider’s web ” (*). ‘Originally described as a mollusc, and for years “a Sort of zoological shuttlecock, Peripatus, as most readers will remember, is one of the most remark- able animals in the world. Though now definitely recognised as belonging to the Arthropoda, among which a separate class has been created for it, it has undeniable affinity with higher worms, and is even regarded as a sort of half-way animal between (2) Moseley. “ Encyclopaedia Britannica.” ed. 9. xvii (1284). pp. 115-117. SCIENCE-GOSSTP. 37 worms and Arthropods. Requiring a moist atmo- sphere, and living in shady places beneath bark, decaying logs, &e., the various species have soft, somewhat vermiform bodies, two inches to three inches long, and possess, in addition to oral papillae, a pair of antennae, and numerous pairs of little, soft, conical legs, placed laterally, along the whole length of the body. In manner of pro- gression, and in general form, the creatures have been compared to caterpillars: and naturalists who have seen them alive speak with admiration of their appearance. According to Sedgwick (*), ‘ the exquisite sensitiveness and constantly changing form of the antennae, the well-rounded plump body, the eyes set like small diamonds on the side of the head, the delicate feet, and, above all, the rich colouring and velvety texture of the skin, all com- bine to give these animals an aspect of quite ex- ceptional beauty.” ‘The slime-glands lie on each side of the digestive tract, stretching down nearly its whole length, and having numerous ramified tubes, which twist round the stomach and entangle themselves about the generative organs.. The ducts into which the tubes open are enlarged along the greater part. of their course into sacs or reservoirs, which serve to store up the secretion of the tubes, and to eject it from the oral papillae in the form of jets or threads.(*) According to Moseley, these glands are probably homologous with the silk-glands of caterpillars. The oral papillae, he says, are modifications of the second pair of body-members of the embryo. The ejection of the tenacious fluid has been remarked upon, I believe, by most naturalists who have collected Peripatus. Guilding, who was the discoverer of the genus (°), noticed the habit, in St. Vincent, in Peripatus juliformis ; Gosse saw it in a Peripatus found in Jamaica (°); Belt in one found in Nicaragua (7)— Belt refers to the creature as a Myriapod, but dried specimens subsequently shown to Moseley proved to be Peripatus(*)— Hutton in Peripatus novae-zealandiae (°); Oakley in Peripatus capensis (°); Dendy in a Peripatus collected in Victoria ("") ; Steel in Peripatus leucharti from New South Wales (7%) ; and Ward in Peripatus moseleyi (3) Sedgwick, “Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci.’ (N.S.), xxviii. (1888), pp. 431-493; “Camb. Nat. Hist.,” v. (1895), pp. 3- 26, (4) Moseley, on Peripatus capensis, “Phil. Trans.,” clxiv. (1874), pp. 757-782; Hutton, on Peripatus novae-zealandiae, ~Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist.” (4), xviii. (1876), pp. 361-368, and (5), i. (1878), pp. 204-206. (5) Guilding, * Zool. Journ.,” ii. (1826), pp. 443, 444. (6) Gosse, * Naturalist’s Sojourn in Jamaica,” 1851, p. 66. (7) Belt, ** Naturalist in Nicaragua,” 1874, pp. 140, 141. (8) Moseley, “Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist.” (5), iii, (1879), pp. 265, 266. (9) Hutton, 1876, Z.c. (10) Oakley, “Trans. S. pp. 35-37. (11) Dendy, * Nature,” xxxix. (1889), p. 366. (12) Steel, “*Proe. Linn. Soc. N.S.W.,” xxi. (1896), pp. 94— 103. African Philos. Soe.” iii. (1884) b) +) from Natal('). Moritz, moreover, have recorded ject. One gathers that it is when the animals are alarmed by sudden exposure to light, or when they are irritated or menaced, that they are most com- monly seen to make their discharges. The ejected matter, all the authors agree, is intensely viscid. Gosse compares it‘to birdlime, and Hutton says that it dries so quickly and is so tenacious that the finger is with difficulty removed if stuck with it to the table. ‘The jets stiffen on exposure to the air, according to Belt, ‘‘ to the consistency of a spider’s web, but stronger.” Moritz’s notes, written in 1839, are based on a Peripatus discovered in St. Thomas, and on numer- ous specimens observed in Venezuela. He says that the slime is shot out into threads from both sides of the animal, and that the creatures are in the habit of making the discharge at the moment the stones or pieces of wood under which they are found are lifted, the white slime-threads being usually seen before the animals themselves are noticed. Moritz succeeded on one occasion in observing aspecimen before it made the discharge ; but even in this case he could not see the actual expulsion, which was as quick as lightning. The slime, moreover, was colourless when it first issued forth, the white colour of the threads and their toughness being acquired upon contact with the air ("). Moseley writes that Peripatus capensis also shoots out the fine jets with such remarkable suddenness that it is almost impossible to observe their passage from the animal’s head. The threads thus formed, he says, cross one another in various directions, and form a sort of meshwork, often of considerable complexity, which suddenly appears as if by magic suspended from objects in front of the animal, and has then the appearance of a bit of spider’s web dotted with the dew. When ex- amined under the microscope, the threads are seen to be fine and hyaline, with variously sized, highly refractile, spindle-shaped globules situate at in- tervals upon them ; and they thus much resemble the beaded spiral lines of the snares of Epeirids. Small specimens, Moseley adds, soon exhaust their immediate supply, and cannot be induced, even when squeezed hard, to make more than two or three discharges; large specimens, however, can make at least a dozen discharges one after another ('°). According to Sedgwick ('"), who also observed Peripatus capensis, the ejection results from a sudden contraction of the muscular body-wall, by which means the contents of the slime-reservoirs are driven out with considerable force. Belt gives Moseley, and Sedgwick, observations on this sub- (18) Ward, pp. 424-428. (14) Moritz, “ Archiv fiir Naturgeschichte,” Jahrg. y., Bd. i. (1839), pp. 175, 176. (15) Moseley, 1874, U.c.; “Notes of a Naturalist on the ‘Challenger,’ ” I879, pp. 160, 161; and “ Challenger” Reperts, i. (1888), p. 2865. (16) Sedgwick, /.c. * Journ. Quekett Mier. Club” (2), vi. (1897), 38 SCIENCE-GOSSIP. ** about three inches” as the distance to which his Nicaraguan Peripatus throws its slime; Ward mentions. however, that his fingers have been struck by the slime of Peripatus moseleyi at a dis- tance of six to eight inches, and Peripatus capensis, according to Sedgwick, can souirt its slime to the distance of almost a foot; it is reported, moreover, that Peripatus moseleyi can thus hit an object even at a distance of two feet ('"). The slime of Peripatus capensis, Sedgwick adds, though extremely sticky, readily comes away from the skin of the animal itself ; a fact of-interest for comparison with that recorded of the Cuvierian threads of Holothurians, which, while they do not adhere to the slimy body of their possessors, stick to almost everything else with which they come in contact. ~ Nearly all the species of Peripatus are vivi- parous, the young, at birth. resembling the adults, except in size and colour. The just-born young of Peripatus capensis are usually about half an inch long, and of these Oakley has recorded the interest- ing fact that they are capable, almost from the first, of ejecting “the web of viscid filaments precisely in the manner of their parents.” This the infants do. he says, when irritated, and when placed in spirit. The young of small mothers, presumably of the same species, were very tiny, only % to 4 inch long; yet these, when irritated, made discharges like the rest. Similarly, accord- ing to Ward, the young of Peripatus moseleyi are capable of shooting out slime at the earliest age at which it is possible to test them. From what has been said as to the rapidity of the discharge, it is not surprising that there was at first some uncertainty as to its source. Guilding and Belt supposed it to come from the mouth, and Gosse from the anternae. It is almost impossible, as above noted, to observe the emission of the jets. According to Moseley, however, on close examina- tion with a lens, especially in the case of large specimens, it can be seen that they are projected from the oral papillae ; and there is, of course, no doubt on this point when reference is made to the anatomy of the animal. With regard to the purpose of the discharge, it can hardly be doubted that it is mainly defensive. Moseley observed that when the creatures were pricked about the side or middle, they turned their heads round and aimed the discharge at the place at which the injury was being received; and he further adds, the tenacity of the threads formed by the fluid is so great, and their viscidity so re- markable, that the meshwork of them thrown over an insect or other such enemy would entangle it, and render it powerless for some time, even if it were of considerable size. All the observers above quoted, as we have stated, have remarked upon the viscosity of the ejected matter. Moseley, like Gosse. compares it to birdlime; “whilst I am writing,” he continues, “several flies- have walked (17) Gordon, in Wari. 7c. into some of the fluid whick I caused a large Peripatus to discharge .... the flies are help- lessly stuck fast; and I believe that the fluid is quite sticky enough to hold small birds, though it dries too rapidly to be used for that purpose.” According to Pocock ("5), a Peripatus has been seen, by this means, to overcome a small scorpion. Besides their use for defensive purposes, however, the discharges have also an offensive use. There are statements implying that the creatures habitually strike down small insects for food by shooting slime at them ; but the evidence to this effect is not full, for little is known of the animals’ feeding habits in a state of nature, and it is not evident that the creatures are constantly in need of cap- turing active living prey. Belt, a most conscien- tious naturalist, it is true, has remarked of his Nicaraguan Peripatus that it “had a singular method of securing its prey,” 7.¢. by discharging viscid slime, with which ‘it can envelop and capture its prey, just as a fowler throws his net over a bird;” unfortunately, however, Belt does not mention the grounds on which he bases this statement, and one is not sure that he personally saw prey thus captured. Sedgwick, who kept Peripatus capensis 11 captivity, did not see prey taken in this way. Hutton, however, relates that a Peripatus novae-zealandiae, which he kept in a jar, shot out its viscid fluid at a fly which had been introduced into the vessel; by this means the fly was stuck down, and the Peripatus then went up and sucked out its juices. Steel, finally, who kept numerous specimens of Peripatus leucharti in cap- ~ tivity for more than a year, has recently given attention to this point, the result of his observa- tions being that while the animal does not always use its slime in securing its prey. it certainly does resort thereto when the insect it is endeavouring to secure appears likely to escape. or when it struggles violently, or again when the animal is hungry and wants to make certain of the capture. Under these circumstances, the Peripatus “be- comes animated, raises the front part of its body, and ejects the viscid fluid from both papillae simultaneously.” (To be continued.) AT THE INVITATION of the President of the Royal Meteorological Society, a meeting was held at the rooms of the Society on the afternoon of May 31st to consider the question of a memorial to the late George J. Symons, F.R.S., the distinguished meteorologist and founder of the British Rainfall Organisation. It was resolved unanimously that the memorial should take the form of a gold medal, to be awarded from time to time by the Council of the Royal Meteorological Society for distinguished work in connection with meteorological science. Contributions will be received by the assistant secretary, Mr. W. Marriott, 70 Victoria Street, Westminster. (18) Pocock. “ Royal Nat. Hist..~ vi. (1896). p. 288. SCLEN CEG OSSEP. 39 BUTTERFLIES OF THE PALAEARCTIC REGION. By HENRY CHARLES LANG, M.D., M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P. Lonp. (Continued from page 1\*.) 13. P. melete Mén. Cat. Mus. Petr. Lep. ii. p. 113. © 1857. 42—58 mm. Wings white, no dusky shading at base. F.w.with six black spots extending from apex along ou. marg., often coalescent. A triangular spot between second and third nervules, h.w. with a faint costal spot ; extremities of nervules slightly marked black on ou. marg., @ much more strongly marked, similar to P. napi 9. Neuration marked 7: Pieris kreitneri. with black. U.s. f.w. as above, but with fainter markings. H.w. very pale yellowish-white without markings, the neuration only faintly dusky. Has. Various localities in the Amur, Corea, Japan. VII—VIII. a. var. veris Stgr. The spring form. Has the neuration of the us. h.w. broadly marked with black (R. H.). Has. Amur (Ask. Wlad) Y. 14. P. krueperi Ster. Wien. Ento. Mon. iv. 19 Le. B.H. p. 29, pl. VI. 3. 44—47 mm. Wings white, very slightly shaded at base. F.w. tipped with black and with a row of four or five lozenge-shaped spots along ou. marg.; internal to these is a triangular spot with its base on the costa; and below this, between veins 3 and 4, a somewhat reniform black spot. H.w. with basal and central shading as the result of the markings of the u.s. showing through ; costa witha triangular black spot. U.s. f.w. white, slightly greenish- yellow at base and apex, costal spot of the same colour, the black spot as above. H.w. greenish- yellow, the outer third lighter in colour. The markings of 2 are more intense than in ¢. HAB. Mountains in Greece, Asia Minor, Trans- caucasia. VI. (1) This series of articles on Butterflies of the Palaearctic Region commenced in ScrENCE-GossiP, No. 61, June 1899. a. var. vernalis Stgr. Hor. 1870, p. 34. and lighter than the type. U.s. h.w. green toward base. seasonal IIle—IV. b. var. prisca Steyr. ‘This is the eastern form of the species, occurring in Turkestan, Alai, N. Persia. It is larger than the type. and with greenish markings. c. var. verna Grum. ‘The spring form of prisca, corresponding to var. vernalis. Larger marked with Spring dimorphic form. U.s. h.w. much whiter Var. 15. P.canidia Sparrm. p- 504. 1768. 45—53 mm. Wings white. F.w. apex and upper half of ou. marg. marked with black. With two black spots. H.w. with a black spot on costa, and with a marginal row of four or five black spots. 9 marked asin ¢, but all the spots are much more intense, and the bases are dusky. HAs. Turkestan, Cent. Asia, North India, and China. V—VI. a. var. aestiva Steyr. in litt. The summer form. Whiter, the spots not so intensely marked. b. var. palacarctica Ster. 35—45 mm. A small light form, in which all the markings are much Amoen. Acad. vii. Pieris chetranthi, fainter than in type. H.w. without marginal black spots. Hardly at first sight to be distinguished from P. rapae. ‘The shape of the apical markings, the less pointed outline of f.w., and the larger and rounder spots of the u.s. will be found to be sufficient points of separation. Has. Turkestan. (2a smaller form of var. aestiva.) 16. PB. tadjika, Gr.-Gr. 43-46 mim. This species very: much resembles the var. 40 SCIENCE-GOSSIP palacarctica of P. canidia. It is also very closely allied to P. rapae. The ground colour is some- what purer white than in P. vapae, and the spots blacker and more defined. ‘The black shading at the apices of the f.w. is more extended than in P. rapae in a downward direction. The yellow tint on u.s. has a much greener tinge than in P. rapaec. The g has the f.w. marked as in P. rapae ©. It may be merely a local race of P. rapae, but Grumegrshomail considers it distinct. Has. It was first taken by Grumgrshomail in the mountains of Darwaz and Karategin in South- Eastern Bokhara at 9,000 feet in June. 17. P.ergane H.G. 904-7 (1827). p. 30, pl. VI. fig. 5; narcaca Fer. 33-37 mm. Wings white in the ¢, apex f.w. with a patch of greyish black much more square in shape than that seen in P. rapac. Sometimes one small spot below this, but generally not any. @ with two spots on f.w. and one on costa of hw. U-.s. in both sexes without spots, apices of f.w. and the h.w. pale yellowish dusted with grey towards base. It is very close to P. rapae, of which it may be a jocal race. HAB. Dalmatia and Greece, IV. and VII. Bithynia, VI. and VII. Transcaucasia. Lg. B.E., 18. P. rapae Lin. Syst. Nat. x. 468 (1758). lig BE. pp, 30) pl: Vile nea ve fie. 3 Garva): “The Small White.” 39-50 mm. Wings white. F.w. dusky at the tip, but not so dark as in P. brassicae, nor square as in P. ergane. 3g with a black spot near centre of wing, 9 with another spot in addition nearer to in. marg. Base generally shaded with black, more especially in 2. H.w. rounded, white with a small dusky blackish costal spot. U.s. f.w. yellowish at apex and with two black spots in both sexes. H.w. pale ochre, more tinged with yellow than in P. brassicae. Has. The Palaearctic Region, excepting the Polar portion. Seasonal dimorphism exists in this, as well as in the other species of the genus. There is probably a succession of broods throughout the season, varying in number according to latitude and also altitude, so that in many parts of the region the dimorphism is not so apparent as in the more northern portion, as, for instance, in Britain. Mr. H. Williams, of Southend, in Essex, England, who has paid much attention to this and the next species, has kindly provided me with the following note :—* Both sexes of the spring brood of P. rapae are very lightly marked in Essex, the central spot on the male upper forewing being practically obsolete, whereas in the second emergence both males and females are well marked on the upper sides, and the females are of a more pronounced ochreous tint, and the undersides of both sexes are of a deeper yellow than in the first brood.” Mr. Elwes, in Tr. Ent. Soc., 1899, iii. 316, says :—‘ In Germany, France, and Spain the difference (be- tween the first and second brood) is rather greater (than in England), and in Germany, Poland, and occasionally in England, we have an aberration of the female which is distinctly yellow both on the upper and under sides. In Algeria, where I found it common in the Province of Constantine, and as far south as Biskra in April and May, and also at Gibraltar in April, some of the males are without a trace of the black spot in cell 4 of the fore- wing on the upper side. This is also the case in the one taken at Biisk (Altai).” LARVA. Green, pubescent, with one dorsal and two lateral lines of yellow. On Cruciferae. Gene- rally very common, and often destructive. PUPA. —Ashy speckled with black, often tinged with reddish. a. Var. orientalis Oberth., mandschurica Speyer. “The forewings in the 9 speckled throughout their whole area with black. This variety seems to be an accidental form. Has. Mongolia, Hakodadi, Japan.” (R. & H., p. 124.) I have received a pair of P. rapae from Vladimar Bay (Amur), taken in August, 1897, by Mr. Lambert. The g resembles that of typical P. rapae summer form, but is larger and more strongly marked. The 2 answers somewhat to R. & H.’s descrip- tion as above, but the black does not extend ‘further than to the middle of f.w. The apical blotch and spots are very large. I take these specimens to represent the form orientalis, which appears to be a distinct local variety. R. & H., in their appendix, p. 713, re-describe orientalis so as to exactly correspond to my specimen. The only point of difference is in the size, which is given as smaller than typical rapae; this, however, may be an error. HAB.—Different localities in the Amur and Corea are given, and the date from mid July to end of August. b. var. similis Kroulikowsky. ‘1st generation considerably larger than type. Forewings greyish at the apex, the dis. spots small, grey, often want- ing in the male. The 2 frequently pale yellowish, HAs. Kasan. April—May.” R.& H. 124. ec. “var. messanensis Zell. Summer brood with very large black spots. The grey colouring of the apices of the wings shaded almost to black- Underside h.w. scantily powdered with black. Has. Sicily.” R.& H. 124. d. var. mannii Mayer. Stett. Ent. Zeit. 1851, p. 151. (Sp. prop. an P. rapae et erganes hibr. Staud. Cat., p.3). The apical spot of the forewings deeply indented internally. H.w. beneath with the nervures shaded along their course as in P. napi var. napaecae—from which indeed it requires some care to separate. HAB. Tuscany, Parnassus, Turkey, Dalmatia, Podolia. IV., V. e. var. minor Costa. “A smaller form. 37-39 mm, HARB! Tuscany? “Ra& He 125: f. var. leucotera Stefanelli. Bull. Ent. Soc. Ital. SCIENCE-GOSSIP. qr I. 147. 1869. most represented by a slight grey shading. Apical spot of f.w. obsolete, or at Tunis. IV., V. (. & H.) Has. Italy (Kirby, Cat- 454). q. var. debilis Alph. Body more slender. The apex of forewings lighter grey, often disappearing. In © the spot of the upperside small, in ¢ scarcely or not at all visible. Has. Lobnoor (Mongolia), Amdo, N. Thibet. R. & H. h. var. kenteana Stgr. The g specimen J have was received from Dr. Staudinger, and does not differ very much from the type, except that it is- somewhat larger, and the grey marking at the apex more extended. U.s. lighter and not speckled with black on h.w. HAB. Siberia, Kentei. i. var. immaculata Fologne. The dark shading BIRDS By THomAs H. MEAD- BRIGGS, at the apex of the f.w. and of the base absent HAB. Belgium. R. & H., p. 125. j. var. novangliae Scudd. Bull. Soc. Ent. Fr. (5). Ill., p. 57. 1873. antlers were in part thickly encrusted with cal- careous matter, and the tips of the tines were pyritized. The width of the antlers from tip to tip is 3 feet 14 inches. The right ramus is 13 inches long, and it contains three molars; the teeth of the left ramus are missing. The Forest Bed in which these interesting re- mains were found is frequently exposed along the shore-line at low tide, and numerous relics of the flora and mammalia of the Forest period have - been found by the fisher-folk. Numerous pieces of bog-oak are drifted ashore every winter. Of the former extent of this forest-land little is known. The numerous exposures that have been made from time to time along the coast-line show that it once extended far out into the area now known as Cardigan Bay, and throughout the length of what is now the Welsh coast. It does not come within the scope of this paper to describe the many re- mains of early stone monuments with which this delightfullocality abounds. Mystic circles, logan- stones, cromlechs and temples connected with the old Druidical rites are surprisingly numerous. The student of prehistoric Britain, whether he be geo- logist or antiquarian, will find no disappointment at Barmouth. 19 Ravenswood Road. Redland, Bristol. SOUTH-EASTERN UNION OF SCIENTIFIC SOCIETIES. THE Brighton meeting of the Union was held in the first week in June, and constituted its fifth annual Congress. It was successful and well attended. The President-Elect for the Congress was Mr. G. B. Howes, LL.D., F.R.S. At a recep- tion given by the Corperation to the members, Professor Howes delivered his presidential address. He took for his subject the progress of the study of evolution since the time of Charles Darwin, and spoke on the chemical theory of life. He also referred to the ‘“‘popularisation” of science, and the whole duty of man when scientific. He chided the south for being behind the north in local organisation of science teaching and higher education. The president also reminded his audience that their boasted civilisation was due to the application of science to daily life and domestic customs. Dr. Howes spoke seriously upon the present easy Hfe followed by many youths and maidens, who preferred ‘“‘sport” and luxury to self-education. He foretolda sad future for these young people if their course of conduct was not arrested in time. The address was well received by a large and influential gathering of members and visitors. One of the most interesting papers was by Mr. F. Chapman, A.L:S. on “The Brighton Raised Beaches and their Microscopical Contents.” Mr. Tutt’s motion for holding sectional meetings at these Congresses was not carried. > SCIENCE-GOSSIP. 4 AN INTRODUCTION wt TO, BRITISH @SPIDERS. By FRANK PERCY SMITH. (Continued from page 16.) Philodromus aureolus Clk. Length. Male 5 mm., female 6 mm. The cephalo-thorax is of a dull yellowish-brown colour, with a tinge of red. Along its central part is a more or less distinct bright yellow band, within which is a reddish-brown mark. The legs are long and of a pale yellow tint. The abdomen is pale yellowish-brown, with a series of reddish-brown bars towards the spinners. In some specimens the abdo- men is very pale coloured. This species is common, and may be obtained in abundance by beating furze bushes over a piece of white paper. Philodromus cespiticolens Wlk. (P?. cesp7- ticolts Bl.) This spider is so like P. azzreolus Clk. that its specific distinctness has been questioned. The only observable difference between the two is the form of the radial apophysis of the male palpus. It is very common in similar situations to the last- mentioned species. Philodromus praedatus Cambr. This spider is very closely allied to both P. azveolus Clk. and P. cespiticolens W\k., and can only be satis- factorily distinguished by the form of the radial apophysis. It is rare. Philodromus constellatus Sim. Length. Female 7.5 mmm. Cephalo-thorax dark yellowish-brown, with a pale narrow marginal line. A very rare species. Philodromus emarginatus Schrank. Length. Male 4.2 mm., female 4.5 mm. Cephalo-thorax dark chocolate-brown, paler in front, with pale radiating lines on its sides. Very rare. Philodromus lineatipes Cambr. Length. Male 4.5 mm., female 4.8 mm. Similar to P. emarginatus Schrank, but a little larger ; the radial apophysis is also different in form. Philodromus elegans Bl. Length. Female 6.3 mm. This spider bears a strong resembance to P. auveoleus Clk., but it is much more distinctly and brilliantly marked. It is rare. Philodromus fallax Sund. Length. Female 6 mm. This species may be easily distinguished by its pale, faded appearance. It is rare, and should be looked for on sandy ground. (x) This series of articles on British Spiders commenced in SciencE-Gossip, No. 67, December 1899. Philodromus clarkii Jl. Length. Male 3.6 mm. Cephalo-thorax and legs reddish-brown, with darker spots. Abdomen similar in colour, paler at the sides. A rare and very distinct species. Philodromus variatus Bl. Length. Female 6.3 mm. Cephalo-thorax yellowish-brown, with darker lateral bands. Legs pale reddish-brown. Abdomen yellowish-brown, marked with darker brown, and tinged with dull green on the underside. — 17 46 105 250 2700) 44 Camberwell— Cunard Street (White) -. | 183' — |} 23) 10 | 35 '296 362 12000} 27 Camberwell — Neate Street (Whiite)...... 23 —!|}— 423 363302 366 large Camden Town | spply N.W., Pratt Si. | (Idris & Co.) 114 73 | 314 19! 16 25924103 4320160 ~) (—] bet oo = bo ° ihe! Him ~) R Ny ol 3 5000116 [=r = = WN) Oo ia) Mr) io ie) = or ive wo Q ° plen- 127 ; fal 6000 23 4000 43 3000 583 2500 70 67380 78 3500 210 The figures placed in my hands show the thick- nesses of the various layers quoted from a litho- logical point of view, such as “sand and pebbles” r “blue clay and stones.” These I have grouped together under the names of the usually accepted tertiary formations, according as their composition seemed to agree most closely with those formations as seen elsewhere. It will. however. at once be understood that the grouping of the thicknesses assigned to such beds as the Oldhavens and Thanets may be subject to correction. ‘The rise of the Chalk in the south-east of London is clearly brought out by this table, the Camberwell borings showing small tertiary thicknesses over the Chalk. Any material found which may represent the basement-bed of the London Clay has been included with that formation. At Messrs. Barrow’s, Hornsey Lane. Bermondsey, 1 foot of “pebbles” was met with; at Messrs. Bowron’s, in Park Street, likewise in Bermondsey, there were 6 feet of “dead sand and pebbles.” In the Woolwich Beds the word “rock.” appears occasionally; there were 6 feet at Albert Hall Mansions. At the Pure Water Company’s well in Battersea there was 3 foot of “stone”; at Hornsey Lane, Bermondsey, there were 22 feet of * very ‘hard rock.” Included in the Chalk in tte Hornsey Lane section is a layer of 3 foot of “ green- -coated flints ” at the top of the Chalk.—Edward A. Martin. CORRELATION OF RIVER TERRACES.—One of the most puzzling branches of “drift” geology is that relating to the correlation of the various groups of rocks which make up the Pleistocene system. In dealing with widely separated areas we are satisfied if we can say that two deposits are homotaxial, and as a general rule we make no attempt at arriving at a chronological classifica- tion of the deposits. One of the exceptions to this rule I propose to discuss is the chronological classification of the river-drifts of the Thames Valley. In this case, as every geologist knows, the factor usually taken is the surface level of the terraces or groups, to which the deposits in ques- tion are referable; those occupying the higher elevations being the older chronologically, and those occupying the lower elevations being the newer. So far as any individual district of narrow dimen- sions is concerned, this plan works admirably; but when we come to compare the strata of one district of the valley with those developed in another portion, we find that the surface levels which have proved such trustworthy allies in the former case begin to break down when applied to a large area; hence we become exceedingly con- fused in our comparisons. The reasons for this failure are numerous, and the variations spring from a variety of causes, some of which we will briefly consider. In the first place, if is obvious that the surface level of a patch is constantly changing through the agency of meteorological phenomena, inasmuch as the surface level coin- cides with the contour. Further it is obvious that such changes are not carried on to an equal extent over even restricted areas. for in dealing with such deposits as the gravels and brick-earths, we are dealing with deposits which exhibit ever-changing litholegical characters. At one point we may find an extremely coarse gravel. and a few yards further the same beds are seen to pass into a com- paratively fine sand. Again. in one place the beds may be firmly compacted by ferric hydrate. in another immediately at hand they may be quite loose and incoherent in texture. Another agent of variation may be found in the erosive power of per- colating water acting on the strata upon which the Pleistocene deposits repose. It is sufficient to merely refer to this, at this point, as a fuller consideration of it and an interesting sidelight which it throws will be given in the sequel. If we admit, as I think we must, that the surface levels are essentially unreliable when taken over large areas, it follows that some other character has to be discovered to serve as our principal factor in the case. This cause, I venture to state, will be found in the mean level of the surface of each of the platforms upon which the Pleistocene strata of the different terraces repose. It will be seen that, with certain variations which are hereinafter described, this “basal level” is remarkably con- stant for each terrace. It may be objected that SCIENCE-GOSSIP. 63 this line is one that is too difficult to determine, to be of much practical utility in the field. In the Thames Valley, at any rate, such a difficulty will be found to be purely illusionary, for the following reason. ‘lhe numerous valleys of the side streams which cut transversely through the terraces of the Thames afford magnificent opportunities for the examination of the basal boundaries or levels of the various terraces of drift, All that is wanted is careful and detailed mapping on either side of the valleys to give us the data required. Theinformation thus obtained may be augmented and made of much greater value to us by the details given by junction sections and borings in the districts between the side valleys. A further objection which may be raised is that on the principle of “what is sauce for the goose is sauce for the gander “—namely, that the subterranean erosion of percolating water, which, as I have here pointed out, affects the “surface levels,” must in doing that primarily affect the ‘basal levels.” ‘This is true enough, but in being true it opens up an interesting side development. It is clear that such erosion will affect calcareous strata to a far greater extent than it will argillaceous rocks. As the greater portion of the drifts of the Thames Valley are situated.upon the London Clay, the effect is but infinitesimal upon the utility of our basal levels as a datum line. Where the chalk crops out and the drifts repose upon it, the effects are far from infinitesimal, for we may find patches of older terraces brought down to approximately the same level as those of newer ones, simply through the dissolution of the calcareous platform, that has gone on since Pleistocene times. If we can deter- mine the amount of lowering that has gone on in this manner in the different districts, then perhaps we shall be able to get some idea as to the rapidity of the process. At any rate, many interesting results are likely to accrue from a more general recognition of the importance of the ‘“ basal level” of drift, and from a more general employment of it in our classification. Personally I have of late been determining such lines with good results in several districts in the Lower Thames Valley, which results I hope to publish before long.—Wartin A. (. Hinton, clo J. C. Graham, Esq.,2 Garden Court, Temple, B.C., June 2nd, 1900. NEOLITHIC DEPOSIT NEAR BRIGHTON.—During a visit to Brighton in the early part of this year I came across a small section to the east of the town showing three feet of chalky rain-wash overlying the’ Palaeolithic rubble-drift. As the exposure was half-way up the slope, the deposit was probably much thicker lower down. ‘The chief interest connected with this rain-wash lies in the fact that it is full of Neolithic flakes; while it also yielded a couple of burnt stones. ‘The surface above it is strewn with flint flakes, cores, scrapers, &c., which only differ from the underground speci- mens in being discoloured by oxide of iron and other matter. The occurrence of Neolithic débris in a deposit of this kind is of course no proof that the deposit is of that age ; but in this instance the great abundance of flakes throughout certainly in- dicates that the rain-wash is, in all probability, a Neolithic one. The surface specimens do not supply any evidence, as they may have been derived from the upper part of the deposit. Near the base I obtained several examples of the following land shells, viz.:—Pupa muscorum Lin., Helix aspersa Miill., 7. nemoralis “in., Helicella itala .in., H. caperata Mont., /L. virgata Da Costa, and IT, carthusiana Mill. ‘These mollusea are all living in the immediate neighbourhood at the present day. THelicella virgata is noteworthy, as, although it is known from the Palaeolithic drift of Barn- well and Ilford, it has not hitherto been recorded from any later deposit in Britain ; that is, on the mainland, for it is known from a hill-wash in the Isle of Wight. //elix nemoralis ranges from the Forest Bed upwards; /lelicella itala and ST. cape- rata from the Pleistocene; but Helix aspersa is probably a Neolithic introduction into this country, its earliest known appearance as a fossil being in the Neolithic alluvium of the Lea and Kennet valleys. SHelicella carthusiana also seems to be a late arrival in Britain, though it formerly had a much wider distribution than at present. It is now limited to the chalk downs of the south-east coast, and does not range north of the River Stour, though it once inhabited East Anglia, as shown by its occurrence in alluvial beds at Butley and Felstead. —J. P. Johnson, 150 High Street, Sutton. A NEW TyPE oF Rock.—In a paper read before the Geological Society ong 23, Messrs. J. B. Hill and H. Kynaston dealt with “a new type of rock from Keéntallen and elsewhere.” It was originally described by Mr. J. J. H. Teall under the name of olivine-monzonite, and they regarded it as a type, round which they group a peculiar series of basic rocks discovered in several localities. The rocks consist essentially of olivine and augite, with smaller amounts of orthoclase, plagioclase, and biotite, while apatite and magnetite are ac- cessory. ‘The peculiar feature of the rocks is the association of alkali-felspar with olivine and augite, and the group is related to the shonkinite of Montana and the olivine-monzonite of Scandinavia. The occurrence of the rocks is connected with four neighbouring, but distinct, areas of intrusion. In these areas the new rock is the most basic type, and it occurs in the marginal portions of the areas. Close relationships exist between the different intrusive rocks in each area, so that it may be concluded that these constitute a ‘rock series ” ranging from granite through augite-diorite to- wards the olivine-bearing rocks, in the plutonic phase, and from orthoclase-porphyry and porphyrite to augite-lamprophyre, in the dyke and sill phase. The whole assemblage appears to have been derived by a process of differentiation from one parent magma; and the order of intrusion has been. in the main one‘of increasing acidity. An interesting discussion followed the reading of the paper, but it was felt that the new name of “ Kentallenite ” which had been applied to it was of too local an origin. It was suggested that it should in future be known as *'Teallite,” after the well-known petrologist, the President of the Geo- logical Society. A series of slides were exhibited upon the screen, showing well-developed crystals of olivine and augite, with biotite in irregular patches, and orthoclase, &c., fitting in the inter- stices. GEOLOGY OF NORTH STAFFORDSHIRE. —The Report of the North Staffordshire Field Club for 1899-1900 contains several geological notes and articles of more than local interest. In the report of the Chairman of Section E, Geology, Mr. Barke, F.G.8., makes reference to the re-survey of the North Staffordshire Coalfield and surrounding tracts, now drawing to a close. It appears that several results will be of great interest to geologists. 64 SCIENCE-GOSSZP. CORRESPONDENCE. WE have pleasure in inviting any readers who desire to raise discussions on scientific subjects, to address their letters to the Editor, at 110 Strand, London, W.C. Our only restriction will be, in case the correspondence exceeds the bounds of courtesy ; which we trust is a matter of great improbability. These letters may be anonymous. In that case they must be accom- panied by the full name and address of the writer, not for publication, but as an earnest of good faith. The Editor does not hold himself responsible for the opinions of the corre- spondents.—Ed. S.-G, FIELD-BOTANY CLUB. To the Editor of SCIENCE-GOSSIP. Sir,—It was with great pleasure that I read on page 23 of the June number of your journal that you propose to form in London a society for the encouragement of field-botany, and although I observe you intend to give it the name of “ The London Field-Botany Club,” I trust its committee will permit country members to join. T am sure that others having an interest in field- botany besides myself would be glad to get in closer touch with each other, and I believe that such a club would be the means of regenerating the interest that was formerly so generally taken in our native plants. Wemust all of us feel thankful for the higher system of education brought about by the recognised science ciasses, which have taught us a better knowledge of the structure of plants. Yet we must not allow the morphological teaching to crush our acquaintance with the indi- viduality of our old plant friends, who, I regret to say, now greet most of us each spring-time, with their beautiful blossoms, only to be passed with lordly indifference—because they have not been introduced to us. ARCTIUM LAPPA, Birmingham. NATURE PICTURES OF PLANTS. To the Editor of SCLENCE-GOSSIP. Str,—In the June issue of SCIENCE-GOSSIP Mr. Roger Verity asks if counterfeit representations of the scales of butterflies can be obtained on paper. I have not obtained nature prints of lepidoptera, but the following method of taking off impressions of plants answers admirably, and may be useful to some of your readers. I follow this method with plants: Oil a sheet of fine-woven paper with sweet olive oil; let it stand for about three minutes to soak through, then remove the superfluous oil with another piece of paper, and hang the first up to dry. When the oil is fairly well dried in, take a. lighted lamp or candle and slowly move the paper in a horizontal direction over it, so as to touch the tip of the flame, till the paper is perfectly black. When you wish to take off impressions of plants, lay the specimen carefully on the black paper, face downwards, and a piece of clean paper over it, and rub the plant with your finger equally in all parts for about half a minute ; then take up the plant, being careful not to disturb the order of the parts, and place it on the paper on which you wish to have the impression, Cover it with a piece of blotting-paper, and rub it with your finger for a short time, and you will obtain an admirable im- pression. The principal excellence of the above method is that the paper receives the impression of the most minute veins and fibres. The impressions may afterwards be coloured according to nature. S. ALBERT WEBB. 41 Rothesay Road, Luton, Beds. NOTICES OF SOCIETIES. Ordinary meetings are marked F, excursions * 3; names of persons following excursions are of Conductors, § Lantern Ilustra- tions. NOTTINGHAM NATURAL SCIENCE RAMBLING CLUB. July 14.—” Sandiacre and Stony Cloud. W. Stafford. » 28.—* Attenborough to Stapleford. J. Shipman, F.G.S. GEOLOGISTS’ ASSOCIATION OF LONDON. July 7.—* Thrapston. Rey. Prof. J. F. Blake, M.A., F.G.S. . 14.—* Croydon to Whyteleafe. President and G. bh. Debley, F.G.S. » 21.—* Winchfield and Hook. Dr. P. L. Sclater, F.R.S. NOTICES TO CORRESPONDENTS. To CORRESPONDENTS AND EXCHANGERS.—SCIENCE-GOSSIP is published on the 25th of each month, All notes or other com- munications should reach us not later than the 18th of the month for insertion in the following number. No communications can be inserted or noticed without full name and address of writer. Notices of changes of address admitted free, BUSINESS COMMUNICATIONS.—AIl Business communications relating to SCIENCE-GossIP must be addressed to the Proprietor of SCTENCE-GOsSsIP; 110 Strand, London. SUBSCRIPTIONS.—The volumes of SCIENCE-GossiP begin with the June numbers, but Subscriptions may commence with any number, at the rate of 6s. 6d. for twelve months (ineluding postage), and should be remitted to the Office, 110 Strand, London, W.C. P EDITORIAL COMMUNICATIONS, articles, books for review, instru- ments for notice, specimens for identification, é&c., to be addressed to JOHN T. CARRINGTON, 110 Strand, London, W.C. Norice.—Contributors are requested to strictly observe the following rules. All contributions must be clearly written on one side of the paper only. Words intended to be printed in italics should be marked under with a single line, Generic names must be given in full, excepting where used immediately before. Capitals may only be used for generic, and not specific names. Scientific names and names of places to be written in round hand, THE Editor will be pleased to answer questions and name specimens through the Correspondence column of the magazine. Specimens, in good condition, of not more than three species to be sent atone time, carriage paid. Duplicates only to be sent, which will not be returned. The specimens must have identify- ing numbers attached, together with locality, date and par- ticulars of capture. THE Editor is not responsible for unused MSS., neither can he undertake to return them unless accompanied with stamps for return postage. NOTICE. SUBSCRIPTIONS (6s. 6d. per annum) may be paid at anytime. The postage of SCIENCE-GOSSIP is really one penny, but only half that rate is charged to subscribers. ANSWERS TO CORRESPONDENTS. T. (Grimsby).—Some of your plants are aliens—l, 3, 6 We are not able to name; 2 is Aspenys procumbens; 4 appears to be Echinospermum lappa; 5, Erysimum orientale; 7, Thlaspi arvense. EXCHANGES. NoricE.—Exchanges extending to thirty words (including name and address) admitted free, but additional words must be prepaid at the rate of threepence for every seven words or less. OFrFERED.—A few first-class lantern slides of Carboniferous fossils for other 1. slides of geological structures; also a few good Palaeozoic fossils for exchange.—P. J. Roberts, 11 Back Ash Street, Bacup. Ps WANTED, Carpenter’s ‘ Microscope and its Revelations,” edited by Dallinger, or other works on microscopy. Exchange Cassell’s “Our Earth and its Story,” complete, 3 bound vols., original edition, coloured plates, almost new.—John J. Ward, Lincoln Street, Coventry. WANTED, to exchange Beck’s small erect image microscope, in case, without stand, cost 18s. 6d., type slide of foraminifera, cost 12s., and brass mounting table with spirit lamp, cost 4s. 6d., for a telescope-—H. Ebbage, 11 Hall Quay Great Yarmouth. ES j } | : SCIENCE-GOSSIP. 65 THE By E. HE term * photography of colour” is a wide one, and in this article I propose to deal with only two of its many branches, (@) the photo- graphy of a coloured object in its natural colours, and (d) the representation of a coloured object in a monochromatic print—work somewhat unhappily PHOTOGRAPHY ) OF COLOUR. SANGER SHEPHERD, sent the lights and shades of the object photo- graphed as seen by the normal human eye. For instance, blues apparently dark to the eye photograph as white, and bright yellows are repre- sented in the print as black. ‘The object of ortho- chromatic photography is to obtain in a mono- Baad ll Fic. 2. Fic, 3. Invisalle Wiolet Blue Green Yellow Orange Red Ltra Violet I i t) | Fic. 1. SprcTRuM oF Warr Licu'r (Solar Spectrum), Fic, 2, Visuau Luwiyosrry or SPECTRUM (expressed by a curve). Fic, 3, SPECTRUM SENSI'TIVENESS OF known as orthochromatic or isochromatic photo- graphy. The second of these divisions, the representation of a coloured object in a monochromatic print, is perhaps the more simple problem of the two, and may be dealt with first with advantage. It is well known that when we photograph brightly coloured objects upon the ordinary photo- graphic dry-plate or film, our print does not repre- AuG. 1900,—No. 75, Vou. VII. AN ORDINARY DRYPLATE, chrome print a rendering of all colours more in accordance with the visual impression. Let us think for one moment of what we are trying to do. It is obvious that in photographing a coloured object we have two scales of contrast— firstly, “‘ contrasts of colour,” and, secondly, ** con- trasts of light and shade,” but obviously we cannot represent contrasts of colour in black and white, so that our inquiry is really narrowed down to obtain- dD 66 SCIENCE-GOSSTP. ing a correct representation of the lights and shades of our object. In questions of colour it is always as well to deal first of all with colours in their greatest purity—that is. white light decomposed into its constituents. In fig. 1 we have a drawing of the prismatic spectrum, and in fig. 2 I have represented by a line the apparent brightness or luminosity to the human eye of the various parts of the spectrum, this line indicating by its height above the base- line the varying depths of light and shade. A perfect photograph of the spectrum should then give us a result something like this. but fig. 3, which represents a photograph of the specirum taken upon an ordinary plate, shows us how far away from truth is really the ordinary photograph. We here see that nearly all the photographic action has taken place in the blue and invisible violet, whilst the highest visual luminosity of the specirum—i.e. in the yellow—is represented as black. The difference shown is so great that at first we wonder how ordinary photography can give any representation worthy of the name. Were it not for the considerable amount of white light reflected by nearly all coloured objects in nature, the use of photography for pictorial repre- sentation would be practically impossible. Never- theless, this want of orthochromatism or luminosity sensitiveness is serious in many ways. For in- stance, the ordinary plate does not distinguish the luminous value of blue sky from that of white cloud. but it is more especially when photographing close objects. notably where the colours are brilliant, that the deficiency of the ordinary plate is most felt. Tt is clear, then, from these facts. that what we have to do is to secure such photographic action upon our plates as will give us densities in our negatives directly proportionate to the visual in- tensities of the light reflected from the object, ignoring totally, no matter what they may be, the colours of the object. ‘Now, nearly all photographic emulsions are sensitive fo some extent to all the visible spectrum, but such sensitiveness differs very widely from the eye-luminosity of the curve shown above. There are two methods by which we might hope to improve our resulis. First, by so altering the constitution of the emulsion as to render it more sensitive to green and red ; and, secondly. by filtering or screening down the action of the blue and violet so as to allow the red and green sensi- tiveness of the emulsion to impress the plate in iis proper proportion. With regard to the first method, a very great deal has been done by various workers to improve the sensitive film. In 1873, Professor Vogel dis- covered that certain dyes incorporated with the emulsion had the property of sensitising the result- ing film to the portions of the spectrum absorbed by the dye used. Not all dyes, however, possess this property of increasing sensitiveness, and much laborious experiment was necessary before plates of commercial value were obtainable. In fig. 4 we have the sensitiveness of several commercial brands of plates to the white light of the spectrum represented by curves. The best of these curves— that is, the one nearest approaching the curve of eye-luminosities of the spectrum—is the last shown, namely, that of the Cadett Lightning Spectrum plate. On comparing this, however. with the ideal curve, we find if is still far from perfect, the blue and yiolet still being responsible for by far the greater portion of the photographic action; but one will notice that now we have considerable sen- sitiveness in the green and the red, and by cutting down the blue and violet by a filter. it is possible to secure, with a reasonable length of time of expo- sure, an accurate representation of the speciram. Obviously the construction of a light filter which will cut down the action of the green, blue, and violet in exactly the right proportion is a very difficult matter. The few early experimenters who succeeded in doing this found it a very long and wearisome task; for each trial of a filtering me- dium negatives of the spectrum had to be taken upon the sensitive plate, and then these negatives had to be measured by a photometer, for the amount of light passed. Only a very narrow band of the spectrum could be measured at one time, and twenty or thirty measurements of the diiterent parts of the spectrum were necessary, before we could tell what amount of success had been ob- tained. Such a method, therefore. was of litle use from the commercial point of view, on account of the cost of the necessary skilled labour to con- duct these delicate measurements. Sir William Abney has. however. by the inven- tion of his Colour-Sensitomeiter, enabled us to pro- duce light filters of great accuracy at so reasonable a cost that every photographer can avail himself of their use. It is a well-known fact in photo- metry that, although the eye is a very bad judge of the difference in intensity between two unequal lighis, or of the amount of light transmitted by two unequal densities in a negative, it is an excel- lent judge of the equality of two lights, or of the amount of light transmitted by two equal or nearly © equal densities on a photographic plate. Sir ' William Abney availed himself of this fact in the construction of his sensitometer. The principle of the sensiftometer is as follows :-—Suppose we take a white. a red, a yellow, a green, a blue- green and a blue glass. and mount these in a row in such a manner that we can photograph them through the light filter we are adjusting, we shall have, provided the glasses are suitably chosen, a very fair representation of the spectrum ; with the additional advantage that they will transmit colours which are io some extent mixed colours, and thereby the excess of one spectrum colour may be balanced by the defect of another. If we SCIENCE-GOSSTIP. 67 now photograph such an object, the different opacities of a print, from our negative, compared with the test object will show us very approxi- mately the amount of success obtained. In order to tell with any degree of exactness, however, we have first to measure accurately the luminosity of each of the coloured glasses as compared with the white glass, and then to measure the amount of light passed by each of the patches of deposit in ah nh eh ae OS Se bl ae ee a aS a Se G vy VIOLET. Bur, may be opened or closed whilst revolving at a high rate of speed, and as the sector is divided in degrees, we can measure accurately the difference in the intensity of the two beams. To use the instrument we first balance the two beams until the brightness of the two adjacent patches upon the sereen are equal. Into the path of the direct beam we then place the colotired glass. the luminosity of which The diverted we wish to measure. beam 1 Lumiere B Lumiére A is) Thomas Fig. 4. our negative. In order to measure the luminosity of a coloured glass as against white light, we use the whitest light available, that proceeding from the crater of the electric arc. A beam of this white light is allowed to fall as a rectangular patch upon a screen; a portion of this beam is reflected to one side and caused to form another patch close beside the first, a rod being placed between the two beams so that each beam shines into the shadow of the rod cast by the other (fig. 5). In this diverted beam is placed a rotating sector ; by a mechanical device the apertures of this sector 3 Tsochromatic. Edwards’ 4 Snap-shot Isochromatic. Ilford 5 Chromatic, Lumiere 6 Panchromatic. Cadett 7 Lightning Spectrum. E D (Ot, 253 +REEN. YELLOW. RED. ORANGE. will now appear very much brighter than the coloured beam ; but by reducing the aperture of the sectors, we shall soon reach a point where the reduced light of the diverted beam appears less bright than the coloured patch. By alternately opening and closing the sectors, we shall find a point where the coloured and the white patch appear of the same brightness. We fix the sectors on this point, and, on stopping their revolution, we can read the aperture at which they are set. That such measurements of colour against white light are readable is proved by the consistency between D2 68 repeated measurements of the same glass. The sectors are revolving at abont 4,000 revolutions per minute, and it is only when the motor driving them has been stopped that we can read their aperture , so that it is impossible for the observer to be influenced in his estimation by his knowledge of previous readings ; yet twenty or thirty successive readings of the same glass will not vary more than 1 per cent. By this instrument we measure once for all the brightness of the light transmitted by each of our test glasses as against white light, and from these data it is easy to calculate what pro- portion of light the opacities of our negatives of the test object should transmit. Sir William Abney has also given us the means whereby we may avoid the measurement of each negative. To do this we mount in front of the row of glasses a revolving sector with apertures so arranged that the light coming through each glass of the series may be reduced to equal luminosity— the luminosity of the darkest glass in the series. When once we have this instrument set up, the testing of a light filter is a very easy matter. A photograph taken through the filter under test should give us arow of patches of equal density, and as the eye is a very excellent judge of the quality of the two adjacent opacities, we can tell at once by simple observation the accuracy of our light filter. With regard to the light filter itself, in addition to its power of correcting accurately the imper- fections of the photographic plate, there are two conditions which it must fulfil. First, it must have a fair amount of permanency and durability, and, secondly, it must not affect the definition of the lens. Filters might be made by filling a glass cell with a coloured liquid, but such an arrangement. is not very satisfactory in practice, especially if used out of doors, on account of the risk of accidental] damage or leakage, and the bad effect on definition caused by the circulation of the liquid with every change of temperature. Therefore, for commercial purposes, we are restricted to a coloured film, sealed in optical contact between two pieces of optically ground and polished plate glass. Fortunately, the aniline dyes give us an almost endless variety of absorptions, and a large number of these which have been carefully selected and tested prove to be quite permanent, when protected by being sealed between two glass plates. By using combinations of these dyes in varying depths of tint, it is possible to adjust a filter to almost any curve of the spec- trum. In the early days of orthochromatic photo- graphy a piece of ordinary yellow glass, ground and polished, was used as a substitute for a correct light filter; such glasses, however, cut out the action of the blue entirely, a defect almost as bad as the evil it was supposed to avoid. Some years ago I showed at the exhibition of the Royal Photographic Society a frame of dia- phragm light filters, in which the colour film was SCIENCE-GOSSTP. pierced in the centre, so that a small portion of white light would be mixed with a far larger pro- portion of the filtered light. This, however, was a clumsy device and in the*later filters has been done away with, by using two or more dyed films, so that one dye would reduce the action of the green, and another dye the action of the blue. By respectively varying the depth of tint of these colour films, we can correct for definite regions of the spectrum, and it is only by this device that the production of filters of great accuracy has been made commercially possible. For instance, the Cadett light filter gives practically perfect ren- dering of all colours when used with the Cadett rapid speetrum plate, and yet these filters are but little more expensive than the old pot-yellow glass. An examination of a number of the Cadett light filters and comparison with the photographic test plates reveals several interesting points. For one thing it proves how utterly unreliable is the eye when used as a judge of a light filter. In reality the light filter is cutting out what the eye does not see, the photographic plate being sensitive to luminosities of blue and violet so low as to be quite invisible to the human eye. Perhaps half-a- dozen filters will appear exactly the same to the eye, although differing very widely indeed in their filtering ._power, as shown by the deposits in the respective patches of the test negatives. On the other hand two filters. the differences in the colour of which are distinctly visible to the eye, may exactly correspond in their filtering power as shown by the test negative. When we compare the very wide difference between the curve given by the spectrum on the Cadett lightning spectrum plate without a filter (No. 7, fig. 4) with the ideal curve (fig. 2), we see that the effect of a filter which will sufficiently reduce the action of the blue. so as to allow the reds and greens to impress the plate correctly, must considerably increase the time of exposure neces- sary for securing a negative. With the Cadett ** Absolutus” filter, exposures are increased about forty times, but owing to the extreme speed of the plate, far in advance of any other sensitive surface known, the exposures in the studio are compara- tivély short, and negatives of brightly-lighted land- scapes fully exposed may be obtained in a fraction of a second. Since the “ Absolutus” filter was placed upon the market Messrs. Cadett have introduced another filter, which they term ‘“Gilvus.” This filter is made in precisely the same accurate manner as the “ Absolutus” filter, with regard to its rendering of blue and green, but is not corrected for red. By ignoring the red the filter can be made much more transparent, so that the increased time of exposure is only about four times that required without the filter. This filter proves very valuable in landscape work, and saves a great deal of retouching in portraiture; and where the object photographed SCIENCE-GOSSTP. 69 contains but little bright red, the results are almostas ood as those obtained with the “‘ Absolutus ” filter. A very convenient method of using a light filter is to have it mounted in a little brass cap, which will just slip on to the hood of the lens. When mounted in this form it is only a moment’s work to put the filter into position, and being outside the camera there is little fear of the filter being left unnoticed when using the ordinary plates. If the ordinary leather cap of the lens is fairly free, the thin brass cap in which the filter is mounted will not interfere with its use in exposure. The working operations of the spectrum plate differ very little from ordinary photography, except that owing to their extreme colour sensitiveness they will not bear exposure to so bright a light in the dark room as the ordinary plate ; but, by taking care to shield the dish during the early part of development, the dark room may still have ample illumination. PALAEOLITHIC MAN IN VALLEY Messrs. Cadett have introduced a safe light for use with their plates, which will enable a much brighter light to be used than would be safe with the ordinary ruby light, but such a light, although very convenient, is not an absolute necessity. In development it is always advisable to use a developer which will give negatives of a neutral grey colour. Most of the modern developers are suitable, more especially metol and _ rodinal. Hydrokinone, however, should be avoided, as the image takes some considerable time to appear, and should development be stopped in the earlier stages, there is a liability of the blues being pro- portionally too dense in the negative. With this developer it has been found that the blues of the object appear first, the reds and greens only gaining their proper density after the developer has acted for some considerable time. (To be continued.) OF THE WANDLE. By J. P. JOHNSON. HE fluviatile and other deposits of the valley of the Wandle were described by Mr. W. Whitaker, B.A., F.R.S., in the “Geology of London,” and more recently by Dr. G. J. Hinde in his ‘‘ Notes on the Gravels of Croydon” ('); but no mention is made of the occurrence in them of Palaeolithic implements, and, as far as I am aware, there is only one subsequent record. It is there- fore desirable to draw attention to some further evidence I have obtained of the former presence of Palaeolithic man in this district. In order to illustrate my finds it will be necessary to give a brief account of these deposits, and in so doing to go over some of the ground already dealt with; but I have much to add that is new. The drainage area of the Wandle is bounded on the west by the high ground which divides it from that of the Hog’s Mill and Beverley Brooks on the east by the ridge of hills that separate it from the valley of the Ravensbourne; and on the south by a portion of the great chalk plateau known as the North Downs. Starting from its source at Croydon, the river first runs westwards, skirting the chalk outcrop, to Carshalton, and then turns abruptly north, con- tinuing along the left margin of the valley, until it enters the Thames at Wandsworth. It there- fore flows entirely through a tract of soft Eocene strata. That part of the chalk plateau which constitutes the southern boundary of the above-described district is furrowed by three narrow dry valleys that converge on the river valley at Croydon, and may be considered a southern extension. (1) “ Trans. Croydon Micro, and Nat. Hist. Club,” 1896-7. The Palaeolithic drift occurs in two terraces that are separated from one another by a belt of London Clay, except along the course of the Nor- bury Brook, where they are joined together by a thin strip of gravel, which is probably due to subsequent slippage—a process that would be facilitated by the flow of water in that direc- tion. THE UPPER TERRACE.—The upper and older terrace, which is wholly on the eastern side of the valley, extends in a straight line from Croydon to Wandsworth Common, where it joins on to the Thames gravels of the same horizon. It is clearly a river-drift, and consists in the main of ochreous subangwar flint gravel; but one meets with flints in every condition of wear, from the well-rolled pebble that has travelled a long distance, to the unworn nodule which has scarcely been detached from the parent rock. They are mixed with a varying proportion of sand and loam, all being the débris resulting from the destruction of the Chalk, the Kentish Tertiaries, the London Clay, and the other strata of the district. There are no stones that have not been derived from local deposits, though one or two of them are far removed from their original source. The chert, for instance, which is said to have been detected in this deposit has come by way of the High Level Drifts of the chalk plateau from the outcrop of the Lower Greensand in the Wealden area. No contempo- raneous organic remains have been found in this gravel, for it has been thoroughly decalcified by the action of percolating water. Palaeolithic man has, however, left traces of himself in the shape of ‘‘a fine implement nearly eight inches long” found 70 SCIENCE-GOSSIP. by Mr. A. E. Salter, B.Sc., at Thornton Heath (*). The drift of Wandsworth Common has yielded a large number of flint implements, but it belongs to the Thames rather than the Wandle. THE LOWER TERRACE.—After the formation of what is now known as the upper terrace, the deposition of gravel for some reason or other temporarily stopped, and thus failed to counteract, as it had hitherto, the erosive action of the running water on the channel in which it flowed, so that the subsequent accumulation of gravel took place at a considerably lower level. The lower sheet of gravel not only occupies the river valley, but also extends into the dry valleys to the south. It may be divided into two contemporaneous sections, viz. {a) the angular detritus of the chalk area which comprises the dry valleys and coombes which penetrate the chalk plateau, and (4) the subangular gravel of the Eocene tract. There is one deposit which cannot be definitely referred to either of the above sections. Cloth- ing the eastern end of the chalk slope which extends from Sutton tc Carshalton, between the Upper (or Carshalton) and Lower Roads, and rest- ing on the London Clay at its foot, is a mass of rearranged Kentish Tertiaries. This is evidently the deposit which was exposed during the exca- vation fora new sewer described by Mr. W. W. Watts at a meeting of the Geological Society in 1898. “These excavations are situated at a spot which on the Geological Survey map is coloured as London Clay, and the features of the ground fully justified this conclusion. The excavations. however, have shown that there are loamy and sandy beds of a light yellow colour, some 14 or 15 feet in thickness. At the base these sandy beds become dark and clayey in places, and include flints and pebbles, while below this is London Clay. In the dark pebbly layer were found” various mammalian remains, which Mr. E. T. Newton, F.R.S., determined to be the bones of two or three horses (Zguus caballus), the skull and part of the skeleton of a woolly rhinoceros (Rhinoceros antiquitatis), and a piece of an elephant’s tusk. This deposit, some small sections of which are exposed at the present time, was probably found in the same way as the angular detritus about to be described. THE ANGULAR DETRITUS OF THE Dry VALLEYsS.—South of the railway station at Cars- halton one of those small coombes that form so picturesque a feature of the North Downs opens on to the river valley. Lining this and projecting on to the lower ground is a mass of angular detritus, which is well exposed in the two pits sunk in the triangular piece of land situated between the Shorts. Alma, and Carshalton roads. The larger section is nearly 120 feet long and 15 feet in depth. It shows a confused mass (2) * Pebbly and other Gravels iv Sonthern England.”—* Proc. Geologists’ Assoc.,” vol. xv. (1898). of flints and chalky sand, from -5 to 7 feet in thickness, overlaid by alternations of the same materials charged with chalk shots. The majority of the flints, though broken, are but little worn or weathered, and are almost as fresh as those that still remain embedded in the parent limestone. The fine buff-coloured sand, the abundance of green-coated flints, and of small flint pebbles, being all characteristic constituents of the Kentish Tertiaries, point to the destruction and subsequent incorporation of large masses of these very much older strata, suchas still exist not far away. The only other foreign materials present are pieces of a compact ironstone. I have obtained from here a trimmed flake of Palaeolithic type. Similar angular detritus, in which the sand is replaced by loam—evidently decomposed chalk— covers the whole of the bottom of the Chipstead, Hooley, and Caterham valleys. These are the valleys I have previously referred to as converging south of Croydon. The Caterham Valley sheet contains in addition a great number of boulders of pebble-conglomerate. In a now partially filled-in pit at Whyteleafe rounded masses of chalk were also frequently exhumed, and I once noticed one ‘of those blocks of hard sandstone known as grey- wethers or sarsens. At the bottom of the pit I obtained teeth of the wild ox (Bos primigenius) and of the woolly rhinoceros. Dr. Hinde mentions getting a portion of the antier of a reindeer (Rangifer tarandus) together with remains of the horse and ox, of Rhinoceros leptorhinus, and of the mammoth (Llephas primigenius). Mr. A. E. Salter also records being shown a tooth of the last by the workmen. In the Horniman Museum there is. from Coulsdon, a portion of the jaw of the same species of animal retaining one molar. This deposit is identical with the typical rubble-drift of the Hants Basin, and was undoubtedly formed in the same way. It has, however, been suggested that this detritus is of fluviatile origin, that the Wandle during the lower terrace period extended up the Hooley Valley, and that tributary streams occupied the bottom of the Chipstead and Caterham Valleys. The appearance at intervals of a small stream, the Bourne, in the Caterham Valley would at first seem to support this view. It is indeed quite feasible that a small stream might in time remove much of the soluble limestone from the valley bottom, leaving the imperishable flints little, if at all, worn ; but in this instance the occurrence of mammalian bones at the base of the deposit precludes the possibility. On the other hand, a river strong enough to drag stones along its bed and bury animal remains beneath twelve feet of gravel, would certainly impart a considerable amount of wear to the flints. Hence one is forced to fall back on the suba€érial theory in order to explain the phenomenon (*). (3) See C. Reid, F.R.S., “ Origin of Dry Chalk Valleys and of Coombe-rock [= Rubble-drift].”—“ Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc.” SCIENCE-GOSSTP. 71 In Smitham Bottom, where the three dry valleys converge, the angular detritus presents another facies. ‘This is wellshown in the pits at Purley, where there is hardly any matrix. ‘The flints are weathered, discoloured, and begin to show signs of wear. The only difference between this and the typical rubble-drift is that it has a washed appearance. ‘Though the constituents are the same, there is in addition a quantity of very small, subangular gravel, derived from some older drift such as that filling the “pipes” in the chalk quarry at Purley station. Further north, at Croydon, the angular detritus passes laterally into the river gravel. THE SUBANGULAR GRAVEL OF THE EOCENE TRAcCT.—Beyond Croydon the lower terrace drift takes the form of a rather coarse river gravel. It is similar in composition to the angular detritus we have just been considering. It differs from it, in that the great bulk of the flints are of an ochreous colour and have every corner rounded off through long-continued rolling. There can be no doubt that the same force which produced the rubble-drift in the dry valley supplied the greater part of the flints to the ancient Wandle during the lower terrace epoch, for at that time the river flowed, as it still flows, entirely through soft Eocene strata, which only contain flint in the form of small pebbles. This tract starts with a broad sheet extending east and west between Croydon and Carshalton, and narrows irregularly northwards until it is but an eighth of a mile wide at its junction with the Thames gravels of the same horizon at Wandsworth. This sheet is nearly all on the right bank, there being a very little on the left side between Croydon and Carshalton, and north of this only a solitary patch around Merton and Morden. As is the case with all porous gravels of this type, mammalian remains are very rare and repre- sent only some of the larger animals which existed at the time of their deposition. I have a molar of mammoth from Mitcham, and Dr. Hinde, in the paper already quoted, records in addition the find- ing of bones of rhinoceros, horse, reindeer, and roebuck (Capreolus caprea). It is noteworthy that the reindeer remains both from here and the Caterham Valley are referred to the large form, which is so common in the Thames Valley, and that they therefore belong to the “woodland” group of this species. More important is a Palaeolithic flint implement of the pointed type, which I ob- tained from a section exposed in Miles Lane. It is much rolled, and the edge is very battered through use. It is not perfect, a portion of the base having been broken off before it found its way into the old river bed. I have also a trimmed flake, that I found on the common. In looking over some gravel which had been laid down in a road near Tooting Junction I came across an undoubted Palaeolithic flake. ‘This is of ‘Neolithic to recent times, special interest, as although it is stained a deep ochreous colour it is as sharp as when first struck off the original piece. Unfortunately I could not find out where this gravel came from, though it was doubtless of local origin. NEWER DeEposits.—Newer than the Palaeolithic drift is the comparatively modern alluvium which fills the old bends in the river bed. It consists of sand, mud, and peat ; but little is known of it, and nothing of its contents. It may date from While relics of Palaeo- lithic man are thus so scarce in the valley 6f the Wandie, Neolithic tools are extremely abundant in the surface soil, especially on the chalk slopes, which are literally strewn with flint flakes, cores, scrapers, etc. Sutton, Surrey. YORKSHIRE NATURALISTS’ UNION. PON the invitation of Mr. George T. Porritt, F.L.S., F.E.S., of Crossland Hall, near Huddersfield, the members of this Union, to the number of about a hundred, gathered from all parts of the county, for a meeting at his residence. Favoured by exceptionally fine weather they had the pleasure of exploring the Colne, Holme, and Meltham Valleys. The visit was preceded at about ten o’clock in the morning by an examination of the considerable Natural History Museum con- nected with the Huddersfield Technical College. This was explained by Mr.§. L. Mosley. It includes the late Joseph Whitwam’s Conchological collec- tion and the late Samuel Learoyd’s collection of minerals. Dr. Rawson, F.I.C., the Principal, con- ducted the party over the rest of the Institute. Subsequently the members divided into three sections, the first party under the guidance of Messrs. T, W. Woodhead, F.L.S:, and A. W. Sykes, the second party was conducted by Messrs. Mosley and Bulmer, and the third by Messrs. W. Tunstall, F.E.S., and Harry Mellor. ‘These sections visited the districts above named. At about five o’clock in the evening the whole of the members assembled at Crossland Hall, which is charmingly situated in a wealth of woodland, where they were entertained by the President and Mrs. Porritt. After the repast addresses were given on various subjects by the President, Messrs. E. Hawksworth (Leeds), Dr. Corbett (Doncaster), Lawton (Skelmanthorpe), Law (Hipperholme), J. H. Rowntree (Scarborough), K. McLean (Harro- gate), Crowther (Elland), Tunstall (Meltham Mills), Bayford (Barnsley), Woodhead (Huddersfield), Crosland and Cash (Halifax), the Rev. W. Fowler (Liversedge), and several others. The success of this excursion shows the importance of County Societies being organised in the admirable manner attained by the Yorkshire Union. 2 SCIENCE-GOSSTP. BUSTERELIES, OF THE PALAEARCTIC REGION. By HENRY CHARLES LANG, M.D., M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P. LonD., F.E.S. (Continued from page 41°.) (PLIERIS continued.) 19. P. napi Lin. Syst. Nat. Xk. 468. Leg. B.E, p. 31. ‘The green-veined white.” Pl. VII. fig. 1, pl. XV. larva. 40—48 mm. Wings white, with the bases dusky. The nervures are distinct and black. F.w. with the apices and sometimes the ends of the nervures dusky, and sometimes with, but often without, a small black spot midway between centre and ou. marge. with two black spots as in P. rapae. H.w. with a black costal spot. 2 darkerthan g, having blackish shading along the course of the nervures, U.s, f.w. white, tipped with greenish yellow, nervures conspicuous, two black spots as in the allied species. H.w. pale yellow, with dark scales placed thickly along the course of the nervures, giving the appear- ance of green veins. Pieris deola, 2, This species exhibits a more strongly marked seasonal dimorphism than P. rapac. ‘In the spring brood the apical blotch is greyer and not so pronounced as in the summer brood, and the dark markings are more suffused, whilst the u.s. h.w. is yellower and veined much more distinctly, the dusting of the nervures being of almost equal density to the margin of the wing, but in the summer emergence it becomes very faint towards the margin” (H. Williams). Has. Europe, Asia Minor, Persia, Siberia, Altai. Throughout the season. LARVA. Green with a dark dorsal shading, spiracles marked with red and yellow, on Cruciferae. VI.—IX. a. Var. napatae Esp. The summer brood as above (gen. II. al. post. subt. pallid. Stgr. Cat. 3.) b. ab. bryoniae O. The Alpine form of the species, and probably the survival of a normal primaeval (1) This series of articles on Butterflies of the Palaearctic Region commenced in ScreNCE-GossIP, No. 61, June 1899. condition. dg larger than type, and more strongly — veined. 2 with ground colour yellowish, and the dark markingsvery suffused and with dusky powder- ing more or less distributed between the nervules over the wing area, In a selected series from Davos Plaz in my collection there is much variation in the ground colour, and in the intensity of the dark coloration. HABITAT. The Alps of France, Switzerland and Austria, also Scandinavia, at an elevation of between 4,000 and 5,000 feet. Aber- rations seem to occur in Central Asia and Siberia which seem to be identical with bryoniae ; they are, however, said not to be constant. Some very dusky forms of the 2 occur occasionally in England and elsewhere, which very closely approach bryoniae in. appearance ; the ground colour, however, in these is white. They belong to the Ist generation, and are probably the var. intermedia of Kroulikowsky. c. ab.. flavescens Stgr. Gen. Il. gf creamy yellow inthe ground colour. @ f.w. darker than bryoniae, h.w. light yellow with black marginal spots. This is a well-marked local aberration. The only specimens I have seen are those taken by Miss M. Fountaine at Modling, near Vienna, in the summer of 1897. Pieris mesentina, 9. 20. P. ochsenheimeri Ster. 30—39 mm. The apex of f.w. of g rather broadly black, and this apical patch is continued in a row of marginal triangular spots at the extremities of the nervules. Between the second and third median nervules is a well-defined black spot. H.w. with a well-marked costal spot, and a marginal row of triangular black spots. 2 very like some small light specimens of P. napi var. bryoniae, only the spots and the lines along the neuration are more: defined and the ground colour is white. U.s. eround colour of h.w. and apices of f.w. much browner in tint and less yellowish green than in. either P. napi or ab. bryoniae. SCIENCE-GOSSIP. 73 Has. Namangan, Turkestan, Alai mountains, ‘Taldyk, E. Alai, end of May (R. & H.). I have two specimens from the Alai from (Mr. Elwes) dated June. Two from Staudinger with the locality Pamir. Elwes says that this species seems to re- present bryoniae in the high mountains of the Pamir. On the whole, I think P. ochsenheimeri may be admitted as a good species, though it comes very near to ab. bryoniae. The markings of the g and the white colour of 9, together with the colora- tion of the u.s., seem distinctive. [The following are probably only local forms of Pieris napi and P. oleraceae:—P. venosa Scudd. Proc. Bost. Nat. Hist. Soc. VIII., p. 182. 30—35 mm. Resembles P. xapi, but is smaller, andin g without markings above, very faintly marked in 2? ws. as in P. napi, but markings very light and faint. Has. Alaska, P. frigida Scudd. Proc. Bost. VIII. (1861), p. 4. Stgr. Cat., 1871, p. 3. (P. oleraceae B. vax. ?).] 21. P. eallidice Esp. 115, 2,3.) Lg. B. E. p, 32. pl. VII. fig. 3. : 42—46 mm. Wings white, ¢ with an elongated black spot ‘on f.w. at the end of the* disc. cell. Midway between this and apex a row of small black spots, -of three near costa and one below the second nervule, a marginal row of five small triangular black spots reaching from apex. H.w. without pattern, with the exception of what appears through of the underside markings; base dusky. 2 somewhat larger than ¢ and with the markings greatly expanded, so as to have the following ‘characters. F.w. disc. spot large and sometimes nearly square, marg. and ante-marg. spots forming a broad blackish band enclosing a row of white angulated spots. H.w. with a dusky border en- ‘closing a row of white angulated spots, U.s. disc. spot and apices with greenish yellow: H.w. neu- ration broadly marked with brownish green, en- ‘closing light yellow spaces mostly of’ an arrow- head shape. HAs, Alpine slopes from 5,000 to 8,000 feet in the mountains of Switzerland, France, Austria and the Caucasus. VI-VIIT. according to altitude. The flight of this species is powerful. LARVA. Dark greyish blue spotted with black. ‘On each segment four longitudinal stripes, marked with light yellow spots, IX. on various Alpine ‘Cruciferae. PUPA. Grey, finely powdered with black, and with a yellow dorsal line (Bd.). . a. var. chrysidice H.5., 200, 3, p. 97. Somewhat larger than type, ¢ f.w. with the black spots more strongly defined. Disc. spot with a light centre in both sexes. 9 duskier and more broadly marked. U.s. ground colour nearly white, markings greener. An Asiatic form of the species. Has. Trans- ‘caucasia, Asia Minor, Turkestan, Tarbagtai, Altai (Elwes). VI., VII. b. var. kalora Moore, Larger than type. No white centre to disc. spot f.w. @ more dusky and more broadly marked. U.s. h.w. in both sexes with the darker markings predominating, Hap. Lahoul, Himalayas, 13,000 ft. VI. ‘“T do not see how the line can be drawn between chrysidice, callidice, and kalora of Moore, when a large number are compared, though those from the European Alps are usually more yellowish on the hind wing below.” (Elwes., T. E. 8S. L. 1899, IIT., p. 318.) 22. P. daplidice Lin. Syst. Nat. x. 468.. Lg. B. E. p. 33. Pl, VII. fig. 4. white.” 39-47 mm. 6 f.w. with a black patch at apex extending half-way along ou. marg. and enclosing four white spots alternately from above large and small; at end of disc. cell is a large square black spot with a white line in the centre, where it is intersected by the nervule. H.w. without markings, except some- times a few obscure black marg. spots. The green pattern of the u.s. shows through as a grey shading. 2 generally rather larger than ¢, markings more extended. F.w. with an additional black spot near in, marg. H.w. with marginal and ante-marginal rows of greyish-black spots. U.s. f.w. green spotted with white at apices, disc, spot powdered with green. H.w. green with a central wavy white band, a marginal row of white spots, and three more white spots in the anterior part of wing area towards base. Has. The Palaearctic Region, excepting the Polar portion. IV—IX. Double brooded. It is occasionally taken in England, principally on the South Coast near Dover, etc. These specimens are probably immigrant from the Continent, and are “The ereen chequered- -always those of the summer brood, LARVA. Greyish blue, covered with small black eranulations, with four longitudinal white stripes and a yellow spot on each segment. Legs and ventral surface white. On Cruciferae and Rese- daceae. Ve. VIle. VIII. Pupa. Grey, speckled with black and with reddish stripes. a. var. bellidice.. O.1i. 2,154. Lg. B. E. p. 34, pl. VIII. fig. 2. Smaller than type, markings more grey than black, at least in ¢, U.s. hw. with smaller white spots, and with the green colour much darker. A small form of the first generation. Has. The more southern parts of Europe, South Russia, and Turkestan. IV., V. b. var. raphani Esp. ? persica Biern. light» yellow markings in place of green. Turkestan and Persia. VIII. c. var. albidice Oberth. A name given by M Oberthur to a local variety found in Spain and Algiers. VII—VIII. Smaller, more slender, and whiter than type, the markings of the underside not appearing above. (To be continued.) U.s. with HAB. 74 SCIENCE-GOSSIP. ON THE NATURE OF LIFE. By F. J. ALLEN, M.A., M.D. (Continued from page 13.) WAS travelling when Mr. Geoffrey Martin’s article continuing the discussion on this subject appeared ; I was therefore unable to reply to it immediately; but will now try to answer certain of his objections to my views. Although neglect of the functions of nitrogen is a prominent fault of the older school of biological chemists, there is no ground for attributing to me the opposite fault of neglecting the carbon. In the publication (') referred to in my previous paper I have carefully described its great function as the storer of energy, its deoxidation and subse- quent oxidation being the principal means of the “energy traffic.” I have also given my own views, as well as those of other theorists, concerning the mode in which the carbon is united to the nitrogen and other elements in living and dead material respectively. JI must repeat, however, that lability is a rare quality of carbon compounds, unless nitrogen also be present; and that the highest lability is achieved when the nitrogen is combined with oxygen as well as with carbon. The theory that nitrogen is the central or link- ing element in living substance is not disproved, but rather supported, by the facts which Mr. Martin adduces against it. I have pointed out (*) that ‘‘when nitrogen is the central or connecting element between complex radicles, as in an amine or an alkaloid, the properties are usually pro- nounced ; whereas, when nitrogen is peripherally situated, as in an amide, the properties are usually indifferent.” Considering how weak the chemical attractions of nitrogen are, it is only to be ex- pected that the greater the number of heavy groups connected with it, the greater will be the strain and consequent tendency to rupture. In other words, the central situation of nitrogen tends to produce chemical instability or lability. In such a compound as we are describing, oxygen behaves as a heavy radicle if connected with nitrogen; for the retention of oxygen by nitrogen is rendered difficult by the counter-attraction which the carbon, hydrogen, sulphur, &c., of the same molecule exert on the oxygen. The nitrogenous products whose formulae Mr. Martin quotes are dead substances with peripheral nitrogen. Before the breakdown of the parent living molecule, those nitrogen atoms formed the connecting links by which the radicles held on to the mass, and then the nitrogen was the (1) “ What is Life?” Proc. Birmingham Nat. Hist. and Philos. Soc. vol. xi. part i., 1899. (2) Ibid. ‘“central or linking element.” Central nitrogen is characterised by lability and life, peripheral nitrogen by indifference and death. I have summed up my views with regard to the structure of the active molecule of living substance as follows :—‘‘It is a molecule of enormous size, and, so far as the dynamic(*) elements are con- cerned, its various groups are linked together by many nitrogen atoms, which are placed internally but not in chain. Jt is not a proteid, a cyan- compound, an amide, an amine, nor an alkaloid ;, but something that can yield some of these during life, and others at its death. Death consists in the: relaxation of the strained relationship of the nitrogen to the rest of the molecule. When thus. the silver cord is loosed, the released groups fall into a state of repose. Most of these groups are: proteids, in which the nitrogen is peripheral, triad, and unoxidised, having yielded its oxygen to some: other element ; if, however, such a proteid mole- cule be applied to a living cell, it can be linked on again by its nitrogen, which thus once more becomes central.” : My remarks on silicon do not admit of all the interpretation which Mr. Martin gives to them.. As to silicon life, I raised no objection on the ground. of strong chemical reagents or high temperature, all of which may be present in some parts of the universe but I objected to the suggestion that the- chemistry of the silicates (as known to ws) was. akin to life. Let it never be forgotten that the great phenomenon of life is not chemical complexity,,. but the energy traffic. The deoxidation and sub-. sequent oxidation of carbon involves a very great. accumulation and dispersion of energy, whereas. the changes in silicates involve a comparatively small transfer of energy. There may be some: element which under certain circumstances can rob silicon of its oxygen as nitrogen robs carbon. Such an action would involve a great accumulation. of energy in the new silicon compound, and by an opposite chemical change the energy could be expended in useful work. This is the kind of silicon chemistry that we have to find before we can attribute to silicon a vital ré/e comparable with that of the dynamic elements. For many years I have taught the possibility of such a. function of silicon, but have held it probable that at high temperatures the energy traffic would be. carried on more readily by certain other elements, (3) The elements nitrogen, oxygen, carbon, and hydrogen may be called the “dynamic elements,” because they are the chief agents in the energy traffic. —_— SCIENCE-GOSSIP. such as phosphorus, sulphur, iron, and iodine, whose known chemistry indicates considerable dynamic possibilities. Silicon is still a fairly abundant constituent of the living body, both of animals and vegetables. Its chief function is to give rigidity to the frame- work. There is noreason to think that its chemical reactions contribute sensibly to the energy traffic, or that it ever combines directly with any other element than oxygen. The meteoric theory is the modern version of the nebular theory. It is not customary nowadays to regard nebulae as masses of hot gas. Evidence is in favour of their being collections of matter of all kinds, such as meteoric fragments, dust, and gases, at a low average temperature. Light and heat are produced by collisions of the fragments, but the heat is lost by radiation so long as the material is sparsely distributed. When, however, the material condenses into compact masses, the heat of collision and compression accumulates in the interior of the masses, but escapes more or less from their surfaces. Thus a sphere as large as the sun produces heat enough internally to keep its surface white-hot in spite of loss by radiation. Jupiter can keep his surface perhaps barely red- hot; but a mass.so small as the earth can produce so little heat (in ratio to the loss by radiation) that the surface is only “temperate.” Since the mass of a sphere varies with the cube of the diameter, while the surface varies with the sguare of the same, it is evident that the ratio of radiation to heat-produc- tion must be greater in a small than in a large world. Geological evidence indicates that the earth’s surface has been at about the same tem- perature for many millions of years. It may have been cooler at some period, and it may have been warmer ; but we can hardly believe that the heat- production of our little world could ever have been sufficient to melt the rocks at its surface. A few miles below the surface, however, the temperature may be high enough to melt any known rock: and where great lateral pressure exists, with consequent over-riding movements, fusion may occur quite near the surface. This took place not long ago, when the Alps, a comparatively recent mountain group, were thrown up. Under the stress the silica rose to the melting-point, reacted on the adjacent minerals, and produced the granite which forms the core of the mountains. For further in- formation on the movements of the earth’s crust and the production of igneous rocks, I must refer the reader to the works of the chief exponent of the subject, Professor Lapworth. The nebular or meteoric theory is lucidly explained in recent publications by Sir Norman Lockyer. It is quite probable that in some parts of the universe life originates “in a sea of white-hot fluid”; but geologists are less inclined than formerly to believe in the existence of such a state of things at any time on the earth’s surface. Mean- b~ “> while there is abundant evidence of the mainten- ance of an.equable surface-temperature for a vast period ; and it behoves the biologist to try whether the known conditions would suffice to produce life as we know it. To begin with white-hot matter is to investigate from the wrong end. We must com- mence with known conditions: if these be found insufficient, we may go step by step into the hypo- thetical, and may ultimately arrive at the stage of white heat. For my own part, I am simple enough to believe that the circumstances which support life would also favour its origin. Beech Lann, Link Common, Malvern, July 12, 1900. NOTES ON SPINNING ANIMAIS. By H. WALLIS KEw. (Continued from page 38.) II]. SPINNING CRUSTACEANS. iz will probably come as a surprise to many readers to know that a faculty of spinning obtains among Crustaceans. Such, at least, was the feeling of the present writer on first hearing of the facts now re-stated. SPINNING-LEG OF AMPHIPOD-SHRIMP (*). The Crustaceans to which we refer are those of the order Amphipoda (Amphipod-shrimps), animals of small or moderate size; mostly marine, but more generally known, perhaps, from their fresh- water or semi-terrestrial representatives, such as Gammarus, the fresh-water shrimp, and Yalitrus, the sand-hopper. A very large number of these animals walk, hop, or swim from place to place without making, as far as is known, any definitely constructed home. ‘There is, however, on the (1) One of the third pair of legs of Xenoclea megachir, with the epimeron and gill, seen from the outside, and showing the glandular organ within. (Bnlarged 20 diameters.) a, The tip of the dactylus, showing the perforation. (Enlarged 100 diameters.) After S. I. Smith, “ Transactions of the Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences,” iii. (1874), pl. ITI. fig. 3. b 4 76 SCIENCE-GOSSIP. other hand, a somewhat well-defined group, the members of which construct abodes in which they take shelter and nourishtheir young. Such abodes are of various forms; often tubular, but sometimes bird’s-nest like; others are built with weed and various objects cemented or fastened together, or they may be of mud, while in some cases the creatures’ dig passages in clay, or burrow into timber or even harder substances. It is in the construction of certain of these abodes that the Spinning powers of Amphipodsare chiefly employed ; and indeed I do not know that their threads have any other use. The kinds with which we are con- cerned belong chiefly to the family Corophiidae, at least in the wide sense in which that title was formerly employed; but to conform to the views of recent authorities it is necessary to say that they belong also to Podoceridae, Photidae, and other families, Among the few of these Amphipod-homes to which naturalists have given attention are the fixed more or less tube-like abodes of Amphithoé rubricata. This animal is about half an inch long, and sometimes of a bright crimson colour; and, according to Bate and Westwood, it generally lives in a nest of its own construction, at the roots of Laminariae and other plants, or on the under- sides of stones, at a few fathoms’ depth of water. In making the nest the animal scratches together various available materials; but the point of interest for us is that a minute examination of the collected matter shows it to be united by a quantity of fine threads, which, crossing each other in a confused manner, are closely woven and knitted together. Some individuals in captivity were observed to build nests against the glass of the vessel in which they were kept; and under the microscope these nests were found by the authors just named to be composed of many bits of weed, matted together by means of ex- quisitely delicate threads, which had the appearance of having been spun or twisted, numerous small loops being formed by threads intertwined. Some nests of the same Amphipod received by these authors from Banff consisted chiefly of this fine thread, with which only a very little foreign material was built in with the structure. Of Amphithoé littorina, formerly considered distinct, but now merged with Amphithoé rubricata, the authors describe a nest constructed of bits of weed, sand, etc., bound together by fine threads; but they believed that the creature frequently rolled and cemented together the edges of a leaf of growing seaweed, forming a tube open at each end (°). More curious are the abodes of Janassa capil- lata (Podocerus capillatus), a little Amphipod about a quarter-inch long, and beautifully varie- (2) Bate and Westwood, “ British Sessile-eyed Crustacea,” i, (1863), pp. 418-425; Bate, “ Nidification of Crustacea,” “ Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist.” (3), i. (1858), pp, 161-169, gated in colour. It is shown by Bate and West- wood to build, in diminutive submarine forests, little nests, recalling in an unmistakable manner those of birds. These nests, built and firmly established in the branches of zoophytes and algae, consist chiefly of fine thread-like material, woven and interlaced, Some small extraneous fragments are often bound into the structure; but these, it is thought, are more the result of accident than of intention. In form the nest is somewhat oval, the entrance being at the top. It is evidently used as a place of refuge; but it serves, at the same time, as a true nest, in which the mother protects her brood of young until they are old enough to be independent of her care. Bate and Westwood figure a group of these structures from the Cornish coast, built in the slender branches of a Plumu- laria, and certainly appearing surprisingly like diminutive birds’-nests, though the opening at the top is smaller if proportion to the rest of the structure than in the ordinary form of bird’s-nest. One of the nests from this group, on being opened, was found to be occupied by a mother and a swarm of ,young, the latter evidently of two;ages, and therefore of two broods. The authors received nests of the same Amphipod. from rock-pools near Banff, built in this case in Corallina officinalis (*). Further recalling birds’-nests, not in shape, but from the miscellaneous objects of which they are composed, are the tubes of an: Amphipod allied to Ericthonius difformis, 11 which McIntosh found, besides mud and cement, ‘‘ grains of sand, bristles and spines of annelids, hairs of sea-mice, and many fine horny fibres, apparently derived from the byssi of horse-mussels ” ('*). The small tube-like abodes of ‘the little: Wicro- deutopus gryllotalpa have been studied by SX. I. Smith, of New Haven. Those examined were built amongst small branching seaweeds, and were found to be composed, largely, of a network of fine threads of cement (*), Smith originally described the animal as Microdeutopus minax, but subse- quently referred it to M. grandimanus, which name, according to Boeck and Sars, isea synonym of M.gryllotalpa (°). In Cerapus the tube, instead of being Feet, is free, and is carried about by the animal, like the case of a caddis-larva (7). Some doubt has been entertained as to the origin of this tube, Say having supposed it to be that of some other (3) Bate and Westwood, tom. cit. pp. 442-444. (4) McIntosh, “ Ann, and Mag. of Nat, Hist.” (5) xvi. (1885), pp. 484. (5) S. IL. Smith, “Trans. Connecticut Academy,” iv. (1882), pp. 274, 275. (6) Stebbing, “ ‘Challenger’ Reports,” xxix. (1888), pp. 435- 437; Sars, “ Crustacea of Norway,” i. (1895), pp. 543, 544. (7) Say, on Cerapus tubularis (New Jersey), “Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci, Philadelphia,’ i. (1817), pp. 49-52; Templeton, on Cerapus abditus (Mauritius ?), “Trans. Ent. Soc. London,” i. (1836), pp. 185-190; Sars, on Cerapus crassicornis (Norway), tom. cit. p. 609; Giles, on Cerapus calamicola (Bay of- Bengal), “ Journ, Asiatic Soc. of Bengal,” liv. (1887), pt. 2, pp. 54-59, SCIENCE-GOSSIP. 77 creature appropriated by Cerapus. Smith, how- ever, who examined the tube of Say’s species, found it to be lined with cement, and covered externally with minute pellets, apparently of the animal’s excrement, together with fragments of algae, etc. (*); and it cannot be doubted that the structure is, either wholly or in part. the work of the Cerapus. Inthe case of Cerapus calamicola (Cyrtophium calamicola) Giles has ascertained, curiously enough, that the tube has a vegetable foundation, being, in fact, a short piece of hollow reed, probably trimmed by the animal, and certainly coated, both inside and out, with secreted matter, doubtless laid down in the form of fine threads. In some few of these tubes there was no trace of a vegetable foundation, and it thus appears that the creature is capable of constructing a tube wholly of its secretion. The spinning-organs of these animals do not appear to have been known until comparatively recent years. Say—who,as we have just seen, did not believe his Cerapus to be the maker of its tube—remarked that it had no organ adapted to this task. Bate and Westwood stated, of Am- phithoé, that they had not been able to discover whether the threads were excreted by the mouth, or whether there was a special organ for their production. The honour of discovering the spinning glands belongs, I believe, to Smith; and one learns with surprise that he found them in certain of the creatures’ legs. They are not in the first two pairs, the arm-like hand-bearing gnathopods, but in the two pairs which follow— namely, the first and second peraeopods, which are the third and fourth pairs of thoracic limbs; and it is at or near the tip of the toe of these limbs that the orifice is from which the thread issues. While examining spirit specimens of Xenoclea Smith noticed the opaque glandular structure of the spinning apparatus, filling a large portion of the two pairs of legs named—which legs, he says, in most, if not all, of the non-tube-building Amphi- pods are wholly occupied by muscles. A further examination of the spinning legs of Xenoclea showed that the terminal segment (dactylus) was not acute and claw-like, but truncated at the tip, and appa- rently tubular. Large cylindrical portions of the gland were found to lie along each side of the basal segment, and these two portion suniting at the distal end of that segment, the gland passes through the ischial and along the posterior side of the meral and carpal segments, and doubtless connects with the tubular dactylus. Similar structures were found in the corresponding limbs in Amphithoé maculata, etc. (*); and also in Say’s Cerapus, in which the basal segments of the spinning lees are very large and almost wholly occupied by the glands ('). (8) Smith, Zc. pp. 271-277. (9) Smith, “* Trans. Connecticut Academy,” iii. (1874), pp. 32- 35; “Silliman’s Journal” (3), vii. (1874), p. 601; and “Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist.” (4), xiv. (1874), p. 240. (10) Smith, 1882, 7.c. p. 271. The subject has also received attention from Nebeski, who detected the glands in the first and second peraeopods; as a rule in the basos, the ischium, the meros, and the carpus, from whence ducts let out the secretion at the tip of the toe, with results happily identical with those of Smith. The apparatus occurred in all the Corophiidae examined by Nebeski—namely, species of Micro- deutopus, Microprotopus, Amphithoé, Podocerus, Cerapus, and Corophium, the secretion being used, without doubt, for cementing and plastering as well as for spinning ('!). Giles, writing of Cerapus doubtfully supposed the spinning glands to be in the huge propodal segment of the second gnathopods; but this suggestion, probably erroneous, was not made in opposition to the find- ings of Smith and Nebeski, with whose writings Giles was doubtless unacquainted. Smith, fortunately, has seen the creatures in the act of spinning their threads. In 1874 he watched the construction of the tube in several Amphipods, including a.species of Amphithoé; and has given an interesting description of the proceedings of Microdeutopus gryllotalpa (M. grandimanus)—a particularly favourable subject for observation. When placed in a zoophyte-trough with small branching algae, this Amphipod generally com- menced at once to construct a tube, and it could readily be observed under the microscope. A few slender branches of the alga were pulled towards each other by the antennae and gnathopods, and fastened by threads of cement spun from branch to branch by the spinning limbs above mentioned. The branches were not usually at once brought near enough together to serve as the framework of the tube, but were gradually brought together by being pulled in and fastened a little at a time, until at last they were brought into the proper posi- tion, where they were then firmly held by means of a thick network of fine threads of cement spun from branch to branch. After the tube had assumed very nearly its complete form, it was still usually nothing more than a transparent network of cement threads woven among the branches of the alga, though occasionally a branch of the alga was bitten off and added to the framework. Very soon, however, the animal began to work particles of excrement and bits of alga into the net; the pellets of excreta, as passed, were taken in the enathopods, maxillipeds, &c., broken into minute fragments, and worked through the web, upon the outside of which they seemed to adhere partly by the viscosity of the cement threads and partly by the tangle of threads over them. Excreta and bits of alga were thus worked into the wall of the tube until the animal within was protected from view, and, during the whole process, the spinning of calamicola, (11) Nebeski, “ Arb. Zool. Inst. Wien,” iii. (1880), pp. 111-163, as abstracted by Stebbing, fom. cif. pp. 518-521, 1155 ; “ Zool. Record,” xviii. (1881), Crust., p. 6; “Journ. R. Mier. Soc.” (2), i. (1881), pp. 453-455. 78 SCIENCE-GOSS/P. cement over the inside of the tube was continued. It was clear that the spinning was done wholly with the first and second peraeopods, the tips of which were touched from point to point over the inside of the skeleton tube in a way that recalled strongly the movements of the hands in playing upon a piano. The cement adhered at once at the points touched and spun out between them in uniform delicate threads, which appeared to harden quickly, and did not seem, even at first, to adhere to the animal itself. In a case in which the entire construction of the tube was watched, the Micro- deutopus very nearly or quite completed the work in a little more than half an hour. In the Amphi- thoé, Smith adds, the process of constructing the tube was very similar, though less cement and more foreign material entered into the structure (?”). Giles, who watched Cerapus calamicola under the microscope, one day surprised an individual in the act of repairing the fibrous lining of its reed-tube ; the animal had completely withdrawn into the tube, and was keeping the latter slowly but con- tinuously revolving. The tube was transparent _ enough for the observer to see that the Cerapus remained stationary while the tube revolved ; but he was unable, unfortunately, to make out the exact manner in which the fibre was being de- posited. It may be noted, finally, that this naturalist supposes certain teeth in the animal’s second gnathopods to be well suited for cutting the secreted thread, or for trimming the piece of reed used for the foundation of the tube; and he ~ further suggests that the distal segment of the third peraeopods is admirably adapted for guiding the thread. (Fo be continued.) DESMIDS. By Dr: G. HL BrywAn, ERS. (Concluded From Vol. VI. page 360.) CCORDING to the classification in Dr. M. C. Cooke’s “ British Desmids ” there are twenty- one genera represented in Great Britain. In the following columns it is proposed to give a super- ficial account of the differences between the genera, rather than a detailed description of their botanical features, as the above-named treatise supplies all that is wanted for a fuller study of the desmids. The genera are divided as follows :— Section A. LEIOSPORAE. smooth. Sub-section a. Individuals more or less closely Zygospores usually united in threads or filaments. Genera: Gonatozygon, Sphacrozosma, Onychonema, Hyalotheca, Bambusina, Desmidium. Sub-section 6. Celis free, not united in a fila- ment. Genera: Docidium, Closterium, Penium, Cylindrocystis, Mesotaenium, Tetme- morus, Spirotacnia. Section B. COSMOSPORAE. Zygospores normally warted, spinulose or ornate. Genera: Micras- terias, Huastrum, Cosmocladiwn, Calocylindrus, Xanthidium, Stawrastrum. Commencing with the filamentous forms, the genus Gonatozygon contains three species, all of them apparently local, and considerably resembling confervoid algae with their cylindrical filaments formed of elongated cells. Some of the species of ‘Sphaerozosma and the two British species of Hyalotheca are enclosed in a thick gelatinous sheath which is somewhat difficult to see in un- Cosmarium, Arthrodesmius, (12) Smith, 1882, 7.c. pp. 274, 275 ; ‘‘ Nature,” xxii. (1880), pp. 594, 595. stained preparations, and is practically invisible in glycerine. I have been recommended to use Bismarck brown as a stain, but have not yet had an opportunity of trying that pigment. The envelope may be twice or thrice or more times the diameter of the central filament of cells. While the cells of Hyalotheca are cylindrical, those of Sphaerozosma are aptly described by the late Rev. J. G. Wood, in his “ Common Objects,” as “ looking much like arow of stomata set chain-wise together.” In the single species of Onychonema recorded from Strensall Common, near York, the alternating and overlapping horns are characteristic. Both Hyalotheca and Sphaerozosma are represented in this neighbourhood, the latter genus occurring in the Sphagnum washings from the Nant Ffrancon valley. The widely distributed sole representa- tive of Bambusina has curiously barrel-shaped cells. In Desmidium we have triangular cells placed one above the other, forming a filament in the shape of a twisted prism. To get an idea of this arrangement it is only necessary to take a pile of books and twist them slightly from the top down- wards. This twist gives the appearance of a spiral band formed by the angles of the cells running diagonally across the filament. Passing on to the ‘“‘ free” desmids, we find in Docidium an elongated straight cell divided into two segments by a constriction in the centre, and having the same peculiar bodies at the tips of the cells that are found in the horns of Closteriwm. The genus Closterium contains about forty British species and varieties, two of which are figured in SCIENCE-Gossip for April last (page 325). The » SCIENCE-GOSSIP. 79 crescent-shaped outline is sufficient to distinguish at once most of the species of Closteriwn. Speci- mens of the genus are common in ponds and ditches, and are by no means confined to mountain peat bogs. Ponds in the neighbourhood of London are known in some seasons to yield quantities of them ; and the specimens figured were taken from roadside runnels, the gathering of C. striolatwn forming dense green patches. The large CL dunula or the C. costatwm figured in the April issue, or one of the other larger species form an interesting and fascinating study in the living state. At the tip of either ‘“ horn” is a spherical cavity containing a number of tiny granules in active movement. These exist in all the species of the genus, though they can best be seen with a moderate power in the larger forms. I have, however, slides contain- ing two small species, Closteriwn moniliforme, and the slender C. rostratwm, whose fronds terminate in sharp beaks. These desmids were collected from a ditch on the way to Aber waterfall, and in spite of their having been mounted in glycerine for about a year it is easy to find specimens in the mounts in which the granules have retained their position, and are to be distinctly seen with a half- inch, or even with an inch objective. Another feature is the circulation of the cell-contents. The process of reproduction by subdivision has already been described in a paper in the New Series of SCIENCE-GossIP, and in gatherings where the desmids are abundant specimens in different stages of subdivision are readily found. Mr. Noad ‘Clarke in his photograph of C. costatum on page 325 has succeeded in including one specimen shortly after subdivision, in which the newly formed half of the frond has not nearly reached its full size. Reproduction by conjugation is much less fre- quently met with, and specimens in this state should therefore, if found, be carefully preserved. Next to Closteriwm comes Penium, a genus con- taining, according to Dr. Cooke, nineteen British species, independently of varieties. These all have a simple oval or oblong outline without any irregu- larities (fig. 1); in a few examples the frond is slightly narrowed at the middle, but there is no constriction. The length of the frond is from twice to eight times the breadth ; and the elongated shape, resembling that of diatoms of the genus Pinnularia, should suffice to identify some of the commoner kinds, which have, in fact, a very or- dinary appearance. The specimens from which the photograph was taken are from a Sphagnum bog between Port Dinorwic and Pentir in North Wales, where at suitable seasons they appear to be extremely abundant. Some of the individuals have undergone slight contraction, but this was owing to the material being left standing for some days in a bottle of water before being dealt with, and it did not occur during the process of preparing and mounting. In these, the cell-contents are seen to separate into two. parts, the nucleus being in the centre of the bridge connecting them. Many of the desmids on this slide more large brown globular bodies, covered with fine setae; these cannot, of course, be spores, and it is difficult to imagine what they can be, unless they are parasitic. Careful focussing shows them to be inside the desmids. The species, one of which is figured at BB in the group on page 257 of SCIENCE-GossiIp for February. ‘They are all of much the same shape, and the genus is distinguished from Penium by the constrictions at the middle of the fronds, the ends also having an acute incision. The species is common in Sphagnum washings up the Ogwen Valley. Two other genera, Cylindrocystis containing two species, and Mesotacnium containing three British species, have shortly oval or cylindrical cells with rounded ends, and without constriction, about twice as long as broad. The last of the smooth-spored genera is Spiro- taenia, which can be at once distinguished from all contain one or genus Zetmemorus contains four British Fie. 1. Penium digitus, with one Micrasterias erenala. other desmids by the spiral arrangement of the chlorophyll; the cells are oval and enclosed in a thick gelatinous envelope. One of these, S. con- densata, occurs in some gatherings from the moun- tain bogs near here, but as yet I have found it sparingly. Passing on to the rough-spored genera, the mem- bers of the genus Micrasterias claim attention as including by far the most attractive and beautiful of all the British desmids. J. oscitans (fig. 2) is a representative form of the sub-genus Z¢trachastrum, containing three British forms, while the typical genus, or Humicrasterias, is represented by M. rotata in vol. vi. p. 257, figs. 1 and 2, M. jenneri (fig. 3 below) and MW. crenata (in fig. 1). Fig. 9 shows a group of desmids obtained last summer from a ditch containing Sphagnim on the old road from Bethesda to Ogwen, and well illustrates what clean gatherings can be obtained by the method of 80 SCIENCE-GOSSIP. rocking in a dish or soup-plate, as described in previous papers of this series. In this particular gathering Micrasterias jenneri was extremely abundant, but a few specimens of MW. oscitans as well as of the Xanthidiuwm occur on most of the spread slides. Some of the larger species of Micrasterias are still more graceful, notably MW. radiosa, M. furcata, and M. denticulata, of which the two first occur on an old slide of Joshua’s from Japel Curig, mounted twenty years ago, that lately I succeeded in restoring. Seventeen species of this genus are figured in “ Cooke.” Of the genus Huastrum, the species represented in fig. 4, namely, H. verrucoswm, is a_ pretty example with its surface covered with dots, but it can hardly be called a typical species, as the majority have the frond about twice as long as broad. Figs. 5 and 6 show the outlines, traced with a camera lucida, of the two species, #7. didelta and EL. cuneatum, collected in Sphagnum near Llyn Fig, 2. Fic. 3. Fig. 4. Fic. 2. Micrasterias oscitans. Fig. 4, Fic. 3. M. jenneri. Huastrum verrucosum. Idwal, which appears to be a favourite habitat of the genus. Excluding varieties, Dr. Cooke enu- merates twenty-eight species, mostly characterised by the pyramidal shape of their segments with sinuous outlines. A pretty form is 7. oblongum, with its front of oval shape and either segment deeply 5-lobed, the central lobe being notched at the apex, as in other species of the genus. Cosmocladium is a small genus containing two very local species with the individuals united by dichotomously branched filaments. : The next genus Cosmarium contains at least ninety-seven British species, some of them among the commonest of desmids. A pretty form, C. ralfsii, with smooth cells is represented by a camera lucida outline in fig. 7; it is a large species, frequent in Sphagnum washings from Llyn Idwal, and of a beautiful green tint when fresh. Another form is seen in vol. vi. p. 257, fig. 1, E. Most of the species of Cosmariwm have the cells granulated or dotted, and the segments reniform and broader than long. Some species occur com- monly in almost any ditch or pool, but often associated with so many other forms of pond life that it would be difficult to clean and mount them. In the Easter vacation of 1891 I found in some of the pools on Reigate Heath, Surrey, green masses which proved to be made up entirely of a small species of Cosmarium. A camera lucida outline of a desmid which I refer to, the genus Calocylindrus, is shown in fig. 8, from which it will be seen that the species of this genus have their segments generally more elongated than those of Cosmariwm, and with little- constriction between them ; in some species there is not any such narrowing. The specimens from which the outline was sketched formed green masses in. Fic. 5. Fie. 6. Fie. 7. Fig. 8.. Fig. 5. Huastrwm didelta. FiG.7. Cosmarium ralfsii. Fig. 6. 2. cuneatum. Fig. 8. Calocylindrus. some roadside pools just after a shower of rain, and’ looked as if there was some gelatinous connection holding the individuals together as the masses. floated about in the water. Fig. 9, c, shows a characteristic form of the genus. Xanthidium occurring frequently in the Sphagnum washings from the Nant Ffrancon valley. They are characterised by the spines upon them, the seg-- ments are obtuse, with a deep constriction between them, and ten species are described in “ Cooke.” The name Xanthidia is also given to the curious fossil bodies met with in thin chippings of flint, al Fic. 9. a,a,a, M. jenneri; b, b, M. oscitans ; c, Xanthidium. from their resemblance to the spores of desmids- A closely allied genus A7throdesmus, likewise with: spiny segments, is characterised by the fact that while the species of Aanthidiwm have a circular pro-. jection on both faces near the centre, this is absent from Arthrodesmius. The last of the desmid genera, Stwwrastrim, with over ninety species, exclusive of varieties, is no doubt a puzzling genus and most of the species: are too small to make good drawings or photo-. eraphs. One small species may be seen in end SCIENCE-GOSSIP. | 81 view in fig. 1 p of the February article. ‘The end views of many species reproduce the vast variety of triangular and sometimes quadrangular and polygonal outlines that are met with in the diatom genus Triceratium. In some the vertices of the two triangles formed by the two segments are superposed, in others they alternate with each other, and in others again the angles terminate in elongated processes, giving the desmids a star- shaped appearance, with almost any number of rays from three upwards. In an old Joshua from Capel Curig, in which the cells have lost all their chlorophyll, two specimens are eight- rayed, while a third, evidently of the same species, slide by has nine rays. In conclusion I have to thank Mr. F. Noad Clarke for the excellent series of photographs with which he has illustrated these notes. Plas Gwyn, Bangor, North Wales. July (900. IRISH PLANT NAMES. By JOHN H. BARBOUR, M.B. 1 response to various suggestions made to me after my article appeared on this subject in SciENCE-GossrP for last October, that I should en- large upon it and give the meanings of the Irish words, I now give further details. Before proceeding systematically, itis necessary to say something about the article in order to avoid misunderstanding, and I think the best way to begin is, as “ Inisfail” suggested in his letter to this magazine last November (vol. vi. p. 191), with a short list of the trees after which the Gaelic alphabetical letters are called, although I have introduced some of them later, with a word of explanation on each. A is represented by Avim, strictly the palm-tree, Lat. (‘) palma, but some authorities suggest it is more closely allied to the fir-tree, Lat. abies. The elm is also Ailm, which possibly is a misapplica- tion originally of the Latin. B is from Beit, the birch. Gr. barshon, but it is also by some considered more closely related to Heb. beth. C is Coll, the hazel. D is Dui7, the oak. Lat. Deus. Lat. corylus. Heb. Derech. EK is represented by Hada, aspen-tree. Lat. tremula. Greek, eta. Heb. heth. F is Fearn, the alder. Lat. alnus. Heb. vau. Gis Gort, the ivy. H is used only as’ a mere aspirate in Ir., not a letter. Itis Vat, the whitethorn. I, called Jodha, from Lodha, vuled iubhar, yew- tree. Lat. taxus, and is not dissimilar to Heb. jod, and Gr. iota. Lis Luis, vulgd carthan, the quicken-tree. ornus. M is Muin, the vine. Heb. mem. N is from Mun, the ash-tree. Heb. nun. Lat. Lat. vitis, and like the Lat. fraxinus. (1) Heb., Hebrew; Gr., Greek; Lat., Latin; Eng., English ; Iy., Irish; W., Welsh; Tipp., Tipperary; Linn., Linnaeus; gen., genitive; plur., plural; dim., diminutive; syn., synonymous ; var., variety. A query means absolute doubt only. O diphthong Qi7, from Oi, the spindle-tree. Vulgo feorus. Lat, ewonymus. P is not from any tree, but is known in Ir. as Peat-boq. R represented by fuwis, old Ir. In vulgar Ir. Trom, the elder. Lat. sambucus, and Gr. acte. Sis Swil. Sail, willow. Lat. salix. T is Teine, from Iv. teine, furze. Uis Ur, ubhur, iubar, yew. In the next place, it will be noticed that one Irish name often refers to several kinds of plants, and of course the reverse is common. This frequently happens, and the following are a few instances of generalised names, but some of them haye also been applied to distinct species at times. Seirg, any clover, trefoil. Cluwain, a thistle or spurge. Seisg, a sedge. Colubairt, cabbage. Abal an apple-tree. Ditein is applied to any tare, as well as specially to the corn marigold. Copog, any dock. Codlan a poppy. Mongeae mear is both henbane and hemlock. Saileuac, the violet or pansy. illeog, any water-lily. Cona, the Scotch fir and cotton-grass. Why, I cannot say ; in this lies one of the difficulties of such a paper as this. A few Irish names of not indigenous plants are also mentioned, as I met with them. I might point out that in giving the English names I have often used the most uncommon ones, because some of these are heard only in Ireland, and I might really designate them as Ivish-English names—names which have been given by those country folk who habitually speak English, of the past and present, and I daresay it will be found more interesting to others to know about them than to see the usual English ones given; of the latter I hope from time to time to publish supple- mental lists as they come to hand. My endeavour has been to introduce as much material into as small a space as possible, there- fore in some cases I have had to resort to merely giving the English, more or less literally, of the Irish in brackets; but in other cases I have ex- 82 SCIENCE-GOSS/P. plained myself more fully. Several changes have been made in this article from my remarks in SCIENCE-GossiIP of last October as more correct; for instance, I have given restharrow as Ononis spinosa (Lin.) rather than Avvensis following as I have done this time the ninth edition of the London Catalogue of British Plants. These are most of the points I need refer to. I have followed the London Catalogue so far as I could in my classification, and my material has been gleaned from old books (excluding the Cybele Hibernica) and from the Irish people themselves. PHANEROGAMS. RANUNCULACEAE. NEADCAILLEAC. nead means “ anest”; cailleac, “an old woman” or ‘‘nun.” Therefore ‘‘nun’s nest.” Anemone nemorosa. wood anemone. FEARBAN, “sparkling grass.” BAIRGIN, “a begotten son.” Ranunculus repens. creeping crowfoot. FLEAN UISCE. NEAL UISGE, “river ecstasy.” SNAITE BAITE, ‘‘drowned threads.” LEANANAC, “favourite”(?). LIONAN ABAN, ‘‘a very river snare.” Ranunculus heterophyllus. water crowfoot. FOLOScAIN. word also means “tadpole.” GRUAG MUIRE. gruag, ‘hair of the head.” ‘ Mary’s locks.” Ranunculus awricomus. goldilocks. _ TORACAS BIADAIN. Ranunculus scleratus. celery- leaved crowfoot. TUILE TALMUIN. tuile, “a flood, rain” ; talman, “earth.” FEARBAN. Ranunculus acrisand R. bul- bosus. butter-flower, buttercup, or gold cup. GLAISLEUN, “green grief.” LAISAIR LEANA. lasair, ‘‘a flame”; leana, ‘“‘a meadow.” ‘“ meadow flame” or ‘meadow gold.” LoNAtrG, ‘ jester.” Ramuneulus flammula. lesser spear-wort. GRAIN AIGEIN. grain, “loathing.” Aigein, re- lated to adan, also “a cauldron.” ‘loathing cauldron.” SEARRAIG. GRANARCAIN, modification of Grain aigein. LAca, “a duck.” Ranunculus jicaria. pilewort. PLUBAIRSIN. BEARNAN BEILTINE. bearna, “a gap”; BEALTAINE, ‘a little sun,’ ‘“ May flower.” LUS BUIDE BEALTAINE. “yellow May flower.” Lus Marri, “ Mary’s plant.” Caltha palustris. meadow bouts. CRUBA LUSIN, “the little bird’s-claw flower.” LUSAN COLAM, “the little dove herb.” Aquilegia vulgaris. Columbine. _ FUAT A MADAID. fuat, “hatred”; madad, “a dog” ; with allaid added, ‘a wolf.” Hence “wolf’s bane.” Aconitum napellus. wolf's bane. NYMPHAEACEAE. DUILLEOG BAITE BUIDE. Duilleog is “a little leaf” ; baite, “drowned.” “ drowned yellow leaflet.” CABAN ABAN, “river cup.” LIAC LOGAR, “ hollow spoon.” Nymphaea lutea. yellow water-lily. DUILLEOG BAITE BAN, ‘‘drowned white leaf.” LIAGLOGAR. liag, ‘a blade of an oar”; loga, “splendid.” “splendid blade.” Nymphaea alha. white water-lily. PAPAVERACEAR. BEILBAG. “prince” or “virtue of the month.” BLAT NA MBODAIG. CANLEAC DEARG, “red moth’s cheek.” CoccIFOIDE. 2? possibly derived from kokkos, coccum, Lat. for scarlet. PAIPIN RUAD. ruad, ‘“‘red.” “red poppy.” Papaver rhoeas. corn rose. headwark. CoOLLAIDIN. collaim, ‘I sleep.” Heb. cholom, “a dream.” PAIPIN. Papaver somniferum. white poppy. CEANRUAD or LACA CEANRUAD. ceanruad, “red chief.” Chelidoniwm majus. celandine. FUMARIACEAE. DEARAG TALMAN. ‘earth sadness,” suggestive of “all ends in smoke.” FUAIN A TSORRAIG. CAMAN SCARRAIG. scaraim, “I unfold”; caman, “common.” Fumaria officinalis. fumitory. CRUCIFERAE. BIOLAR TRAGA or TRAIGBIOLAR. Cochlearia officinalis. scrooby AMARAIC. “shore cresses.” erass. BIoRAR or BIOLAR. ‘cresses.” BIOR-FIER. Bior, “edge of water”; fear, “grass.” * brink erasses.” Nasturtium afficinale. water cresses. GLEORAN. ‘‘jollity.” BILLAR or BIOLAR GRIA- GAN. grian, ‘lake.” ‘“lake-side cresses.” Carda- mine pratensis. lady’s smock. MABE ISA GARB RAITEAC. Sisymbrium afficinale hedge mustard. FINEAL MUIRE. “virgin’s fennel.” Sisymbrium sophia. flixweed. GARABOG. GAS NA CONACTA. gas, ‘stalk, stem.” Heb. geza. “the Connaught herb.” PRAISEAC GARB, “rough pottage.” #rassica sinapistrum. chadlock, charlock. : CAL, “kail.” CADAL. COLUBAIRT. “ cole- wort.” . PRAISEAC BUIDE, “yellow pottage.” Brassica oleracea. wild cabbage. : Lus NA FOLA. fola, “ garment”; lus, “‘a plant” or “herb.” LUS A SPARAIN. sparain, ‘‘a purse, pouch.” SRAIDIN, “alane.” Bursa bursa-pastoris. shepherd’s pouch. PRAISEAC FIAD. fiad, “food, meat.” Hence “ pnottage meat.” PRAISEAC NA CCAORAC. ccaorac, “sheepy,’ from caor, “sheep.” ‘“sheep’s food.” Thlaspi arvense. penny cress. treacle-mustard. MEACAN RAGUM. rag, “wrinkled,stiff”; meacan, ‘““a tap root.” Raphanus raphanistrum. wild radish. MEACAN RAGUM UISCE. uisce, ‘‘ water, river.” Raphanus maritimus. water radish. PRAISEAC or RAITEAC TRAGA. raiteac, ‘‘ pride” ; but it may be derived from rait, “fern” or “brake.” Hence “shore pride” or ‘shore brake,” and “shore meat.” Crambe maritima. Seakale. SCIENCE-GOSSTP. 83 RESEDACEAR. mor, “noble, great”; related to Lieseda luteola. wild BUIDE-MOR. W. mawr. “noble yellow.” woad. dyer’s weed. VIOLARIEAE. Biob A LEITID. biod, “a world”; leitid, “a peer.” “a world’s peer.” FANAISGE. aisge, “a present”; fan, “slope.” ‘a present from a slope or bank.” SAILCUAC. a narrow or curled euard. Viola silvestris. dog’s violet. SAILCUAC. Viola odorata. sweet violet. GORMAN SEARRAIG or GOIRMIN SEARRAD. ? pos- sibly from scarad, ‘a separation,” or sgarad, “a fissure.” gorm, “blue”; hence “blue fissures” or “blue streaks.” SAILCUAC. Viola tricolor. herb trinity. kiss-at-the-garden-gate. POLYGALEAE. Lus BAINE or LUS AN CAINE, “the milk herb.” Polygala vulgaris. milkwort. little CARYOPHYLLEAE. COGAL or CAGAL. cogal, “ears of barley,” from place where found. Lychnis githago. corn cockle. COIREAN COILLEAC. 2? coire, ‘““aring,” “ girdle,” or* cavern” ; and coille “sylvan ” ; while coilleac is “a cock.” Lychnis dioica. red campion. bladder flower. CAOROG LEANA, caorog, “‘a spark”; leana, “meadow.” Hence “a little meadow spark.” Lychnis flos-cuculi, meadow pink. wild-williams. FLiIG. FLiop. Fxrioc or Fxruc. fliod, “a wen, excrescence.” Stellaria media. chickweed. TURSARRAIN or TURSACAIN. “ dry bags.” Stel- laria holostea, greater stitchwort. fairy flax (Tipp.). TURSARRAININ, TURSACAININ. Stellaria G7 a- mined. lesser stitchwort. fairy flax (Tipp.). CLUAIN LIN. cluain, “ a plain, lawn”; lin, “ flax.” CABROIS. CORRAN-LIN. corran, ‘ sicklehook.” Spergula arvensis. spurrey, HYPERICINEAR, BEACNUAD BEININ or B,. COLUIMCILLE or B. FIRION. beacnuad, “new bee,” “St. Columcille’s Sane: . . ’ . bee,” “the bees’ fair circle’ (firion). CaAop- COLUIMCILLE, caod, “tear.” “tear of St. Colum- cille.” ALLAS MIuRE. ‘Mary, the most high.” EALA BUIDE. “yellow swan.” Hypericum per- foratum. St. John’s wort. MEASTORG ALTA or CAOTL. Hypericum androsae- mum. tutsaw. MALVACEAR. LAEMAD, Althaea officinalis. marsh-mallow. LUS NA MIOL MOR. miol, “ any animal”; mor, “great, big.” MILMEACAN, “honey root.’ Ocus, “itch.” UCAS FIADDIN or FITRAIN, “ wild nap.” ucaire, “ napper of treize.” Malva sylvestris mallow. Ucas FRANCAC, “French nap plant.” Walva rotundifolia. Awarf mallow. (To be continued.) Gorman and Goirmin, I think, refer to: OWENS COLLEGE NEW PHYSICAL LABORATORY. ae of the constituent Colleges of the Victoria University—the Owens College, Manchester, and Liverpool University Colleze—are indeed fortunate as regards bequests and donations. They apparently vie one with the other in opening new wings and equipping new departments through the generosity of private individuals. On June 29th last an imposing ceremony took place at the Owens College, when Lord Rayleigh formally opened the new Physics Laboratory. ‘This new building is replete with every arrangement one could wish for carrying On experimental research. Space will only permit attention being drawn to a few of these. Extreme ranges of temperature are easily ob- tained, as steam is always available in most of the rooms. An electric furnace is provided capable of producing a temperature of about 6,000° Fahren- heit, while for the other extreme the necessary machinery is installed for making liquid air, which, compressed by means of a pump, produces a tem- perature of 300° below zero. The knowledge of accurate time intervals. which is important in many investigations, renders the possession of accurate clocks, expensive as they are, absolutely imperative. The clock to be placed in the basement of the laboratory will probably be the most perfect clock in the country. It is made by Dr. Riefler, of Munich, and has in its original form been tested in many observatories and found to keep more perfect time than the older types of clock. So valuable a timepiece must of course be kept locked up in a room, and will not be generally accessible, but time is supplied to the different parts of the laboratory by electric trans- mission from a second clock. ‘The lecture-rooms and the larger rooms of the laboratory will all con- tain dials showing time correct to within a few seconds. Special attention has been paid to the optical outfit of the laboratory. One of its features will be a room on the top floor which contains Rowland’s diffraction grating. An idea of the difticulty ex- perienced in constructing these gratings may be obtained from the fact that it occasionally takes three or four years before a satisfactory grating is manufactured. The one supplied to the College has been certified by Professor Rowland as excep- tionally good. The Photographic laboratory is in the basement. The Observatory, placed on the top of the building, contains the 10-in. telescope presented by Sir Thomas 8. Bazlevy. ‘The Electro-technical labora- tory, built and equipped in memory of Dr. John Hopkinson, has been provided, as far as the means at the disposal of the College have allowed, with the most modern form of machinery. Considerable ‘space has been assigned to an electro-chemical —————————— 84 SCIENCE-GOSSTP. laboratory, and as a special lecturer has been appointed in that subject it is hoped that Owens College will take a leading part in its develop- ment. An electric lift connects the different floors, and will serve principally to convey delicate apparatus from one part of the building to another. There will be a small but well-equipped workshop in which instruments can be repaired or even made. The large lecture-room holds, under ordinary circumstances, 210 students. It has a skylight as well as windows looking to the east, and rapidly moving shutters allow the room to be quickly darkened. ‘The small lecture-room serves for ad- vanced lectures, and rooms are provided for storing the ordinary apparatus and also some historical instruments, as, for instance, Joule’s valuable ap- paratus, some of which have been presented to the College. Electric current is supplied from sixty storage cells, which are connected through a large switchboard over fifteen feet long. Thirty circuits diverge from this switchboard into the various rooms. the circuits consisting of aluminium or copper wire, stretched principally under the ceiling of each room and passing through specially per- forated bricks in the walls. Uncovered wires have been chosen for the purpose, as the expense is re- duced and much stronger currents can be sent through the same thickness of wire. The research-rooms are placed principally in the basement and on the ground floor of the building, where the greatest steadiness and freedom from disturbance can be obtained, and it is hoped that. the unusual facilities which in future will be given at Owens College for original research in physics will attract many students. There is also every reason to hope that the John Hopkinson Electro- technical laboratory, with its adjunct the Electro- chemical laboratory, will soon make itself felt in the education of electrical engineers, who will be trained to carry out the highest technical work they may be called upon to perform. JAMES QUICK. BRITISH FRESHWATER MITES. By CHARLES D. SOAR, F.R.M.S. (Continued from page 49.) GENUS PIONOPSIS. HP genus is very Closely allied to Piona. It really holds an intermediate position between Curvipes and Piona. In both male and female its characteristics are the same as Piona, except in the males not having the enlarged fourth segment on the fourth pair of legs, which we found in that genus. Pionopsis lutescens Hermann. FEMALE.—Oval in shape. Length about 1.44 mm.. breadth about 1.02 mm. It is very like the females of Piona. Colour a pale yellow with very dark markings on the dorsal surface, with a bright yellow T-shaped patch in the centre. LEGS.—First pair about 1.36 mm. Fourth pair about 1.72 mm. Of a pale blue colour, claws to all feet, but the claws on the fourth pair are much smaller than the others. EPIMERA.—In four groups, similar to the females of Curvipes and Piona. PaLprl.—About 0.40 mm. long. Pale blue in colour. The last two segments are like fig. 2, page 48. GENITAL AREA.—Is composed of three discs on each side of the genital fissure, let into special plates like we found in Piona and Limnesia, but the two posterior discs are side by side, the first one being just above them, not one above the other like those of Piona ornata (fig. 1, page 48). MALE.—Length about 0.72 mm., breadth about. 0.60 mm. In form it is very much like the male of Piona, but it can be easily recognised by the peculiar structure of the fifth segment of the hind lege (fig. 1), which has six stiff bristles in a row; slightly bent backwards towards the body, in opposition to those we generally find on the legs of water-mites. The length of the fourth leg of the male is about 1.08 mm. PALPI are about 0.40 mm., which is the same length as that of the palpi of the female, but the body of the male being Fic. 1. P.lutescens. Fourth leg of male. so much smaller than that of the female, gives this. mite the appearance of having very large palpi. LocaLities.—Totteridge, Epping Forest, and Norfolk Broads. Not avery common mite. GENUS LIMNOCHARES LATREILLE. This genus is known by the following character- istics:—Soft-skinned. Legs without swimming hairs. Eyes close together. Small palpi. At present I believe there are only two species known in this genus, the one JZ. crinita Koenike having been recorded from Madagascar. and L. holosericea SCIENCE-GOSSIP. 85 Latreille which has been recorded from many parts of Europe. The latter is a very slow-crawl- ing mite, and lives a long time in confinement, Limnochares holosericea Satreille. FEMALE.—Body about 3 mm. in length and about 2mm. broad. They vary much in size, even in the adults, but the measures given are mean. I have taken females extended with ova, as much as 4 mm. long. Colour scarlet, legs inclined to yellow at the joints, but the same colour as body in Fic. 2. Z. holosericea. Dorsal surface, other parts. I can compare the shape of the body to nothing better than a miniature sack, or bag of the softest material, which is more striking still when the mouth organs are well thrust forward. The skin is full of folds which are constantly changing their position, as the little creature moves. The cuticle of the body is very soft, and covered with small round papillae. Lrecs.—First pair about 1.20 mm. Fourth leg about 1.76 mm. They are covered with a great number of simple hairs. A few hairs on the joints are plumose, but the limbs are quite without the long swimming hairs we find on some other mites. ‘This species does not swim, but contents itself Fic, 3, L, holosericea. Ventral surface of female, with sluggishly crawling among the débris at the bottom of the tank. EPIMERA.—Chitinous with a border of thicker skin round each epimeral plate, which is fringed with a quantity of fine hairs. re) Ey&s.— Close together in two pairs, on each side of small chitinous dorsal plates (fig. 3) which are situated (fig. 4) near the anterior dorsal margin. Fic, 4, Eyes and dorsal plate. L. holosericea, Fie. 5, L. holosericea, Mouth organs and palpi. MoutH ORGANS.——(Fig. 5) Are suctorial, with a short palpus which reaches no further forward than the sucker-like mouth. LOCALITIES.— Not very common. I have taken it at Woking, Sunningdale, Folkestone, Red Hill, and in N. Wales. Dr. George has taken them in Lincolnshire. GENUS M/DLA BRUZELIUS. Bopy hard-skinned, with a finely granulated surface; a depressed line on the dorsal surface close to margin. Swimming hairs. Epimera in one group. At present I only know of one species in this genus. Midea elliptica Miller, 1781. Bopy.—Female nearly round, being about 0.64 mm. long and 0.58 mm. in breadth. In colour this is, I think, the most brightly tinted mite we have in this country, when found at its best in Fic. 6. MM, elliptica. Dorsal surface of female. the adult stage. The colouring is due to two causes : first, to the pigment in the skin ; secondly, the contents of the body. On the dorsal surface is a depressed line, which runs a little way in, round the whole surface. Outside of this depressed line the colouring is green and yellow. The eyes, which come in the yellow portion, are a deep red. Inside the depressed line, towards the anterior portion, is a small oval patch, which is white. The remaining part on which are situated most of the dermal glands is blue, which varies much 86 SCIENCE-GOSSTP. in tint. The dermal glands are yellow. Some- times on the white patch just mentioned may be a bright patch of crimson-red, which is found in different positions in different specimens. This Fic. 7. M. elliptica. Ventral suriace of female, latter effect is no doubt owing to the partly digested contents of the inside moving their position. Lzees.—First pair about 0.38 mm. Fourth pair about 0.68 mm. Colour a reddish-yellow. EPIMERA.—In one group ; colour yellow, running into green on the margins. Fic. 8. 4, elliptica. Fic. 9. WV. elliptica. Genital area of female. Three last segments of third leg of male. PALPI.—Second and third segments are rather thick. The fourth are long and thin. GENITAL AREA.—Composed of two plates, with a number of discs on each (fig. 8). MALE.—Very little difference in structure from that of female, except in the third pair of legs, which have the three last segments like fig. 9. The genital area is also different, having the inner plates of a horseshoe form; but the colouring and arrangement of the dorsal surface are the same as in the female. LocaLitiEs.—Rare. Dr. George has found this species in Kirton-in-Lindsey, Lincolnshire; Mr. Scourfield in Epping Forest; myself on Norfolk Broads. (To be continued.) GUINEA-PIGS AND Rats.—In answer to a gues- tion in the June number (ante, p. 24) with regard to rats and guinea-pigs. my sons have a small pheasant aviary, and as it was visited by rats they put some guinea-pigs into it with the idea that they would drive the rats away. Before many weeks the guinea-pigs had been killed, presumably by rats, but possibly by a stoat.—A. Deakin, Cafton Parsonage, Alvechurch. INSTINCT IN BEES. By Liett.-CoLoneL H. J. O. WALKER. N the June number of the last volume of SCIENCE- Gossip (p. 11) Mr. Dickson-Bryson deals with bees under the heading of “Instinct.” Having myself made the hive-bee a particular study, I should like to point out one or two inaccuracies, although the paper itself as yet remains unfinished. It is stated that the “entire population” of the hive “numbers no less than from eight to ten thousand individuals.” This is far below the mark. The summer population of a thriving hive should be about 40,000 bees. A good swarm even should be full 20,000 of these insects. ; A little further on, p. 12, the writer states that 15,000 eggs are laid by the queen in one day, and it is hard to see how he reconciles these two state- ments, the more so that a vigorous queen lays almost continuously throughout the greater part of the year, whenever suitable cells are ready for her. The second statement is quite erroneous. The paragraph begins :—‘In the finished hive nearly 50,000 cells await the eggs of the female.” As a matter of fact, the greater portion of the combs would be filled with brood and stores; and if a tenth part of the given number of cells, which would be equivalent to 200 square inches of comb. were ready for her it would be quite unusual. Again, no matter how many cells were available, she could lay nothing approaching to the number of eggs stated. As many besides myself have observed, it takes a queen about thirty seconds to deposit her egg and get clear of the cell; so that if any number of cells were ready for her and con- tiguous, the eggs laid in twenty-four hours could not amount to more than 2,880, even if the queen were to lay all the time without stopping. She, however, rests for about six hours out of the twenty-four, and has to walk about to look for empty cells, so that it is improbable that she ever lays more than 2,000 eggs, indeed seldom so many. Since writing the above paragraph, I may men- tion that I have at present under observation an exceptionally quick laying queen, whose average is eighteen seconds ; but the time it takes to deposit eggs is small compared with that spent in finding and examining cells. A freshly mated queen lays more slowly. As regards the method of the hive-bee in comb- building, it would seem probable that it came to be adopted by the working, through natural selec- tion, of the principle of economy in wax; for its secretion is not only a constitutional strain on the - - — worker-bee, but involves a large consumption of the honey which it works so hard to win, and of which from 10 to 21 lbs. may be taken to produce 1 lb. of wax. If imstead of the cell-base being angled out so as to form part of those of three cells on the opposite side of the mid-rib it had SCIENCE-GOSSIP. 87 been left flat, it would have been necessary to lengthen the walls of the cells, and one-fiftieth more wax would thus have been expended, whilst the base itself could not have been left so thin for fear of stretching. It is well known to observant bee-keepers that Mr. Dickson-Bryson’s “precise angle” is by no means always maintained in the case either of cell- walls or base-rhombs, even when no reason can be detected for want of exactness. ‘The sizes of the rhombs may be so changed that two of them occupy nearly the whole space, while the third nearly disappears, and a fourth makes its appear- ance.” So says Mr. Cowan in his concise and well-illustrated little book the ‘Honey Bee,” which I would recommend to anyone interested. Finally, although it is not easy to see how natural selection can have ‘influenced bees to pro- duce undeveloped females, it is worth noting that here, too, the principle of economy is involved, seeing that imperfect development is produced by the worker-nurses ceasing after the first three days to feed the larvae with the concentrated and partly glandular food, which they continue to supply in full generosity to those selected for future queens. Lee Ford, Budleigh Salterton. THE GREENWICH VISITATION. HE day for the official visitation is the first Saturday in June; but this year, by an Order in Council, it was postponed until Tuesday, June 26th, owing to the absence of the Astronomer Royal with the eclipse expedition to Ovar, in Portugal. The Observatory is to have better provision against fire, and an open iron railing is to replace the present wooden fence, so that, with an exten- sion of the boundary of the Observatory grounds, the architectural features of the new buildings will be seen more effectively. During the year from May 11th, 1899, to May 10th, 1900, the transit circle was employed in making 10,712 transit ob- servations and 10,001 circle observations. Amongst the latter are 674 determinations of the nadir point and 637 reflection observations of stars. All these observations are completely reduced up to May Ist. “The New Ten-Year Catalogue of Stars, 1887— 1896,” containing 6,892 stars, is printed, with the exception of the Introduction, and that is in the printer’s hands. The re-observation of the stars in Groombridge’s “ Catalogue ” will give material for determining the proper motions of more than 4,000 stars from observations about eighty years apart. The new Altazimuth is now in good working order. One of its pivots has, however, “ fired” badly twice, and had to be re-ground. On the last occasion Y’s of bell-metal were substituted for the Y’s of cast iron. On September 3rd, the object- glass was found loose, and has now been firmly fixed, A large chronograph, for use with this instrument, has been supplied by Sir Howard Grubb and is found quite satisfactory. The 28-inch refractor has been used in the micro- metric measurement of 492 stars, 268 very close doubles, and the rest chiefly those havihg& very minute companions. Amongst the former ¢ Herculis 3, and +5 magnitude was distant 0''6 ; y? Andromedae 3,5; 0'"4; and e Hydrae A.B. 3.5, 6; 0':2. Mr. Newall, having discovered spectro- scopically that Capella isa binary with a period of 104 days, suggested in ‘“‘ Monthly Notices” that possibly it might be within the reach of large telescopes. On fifteen nights between April 4th and May 10th it has been noticed by several ob- servers, who all agree that it is elongated, and, moreover, during the period of observation the position angle of the elongation has changed in accordance with the period mentioned. We believe that the compounds are nearly equal in magnitude, With the Thompson 26-inch Refractor several photographs of double stars, Swift’s comet, and Nep- tune with its satellite, have been taken for micro- metric measurements, as well as plates of the moon, and of Jupiter, Saturn, and Uranus, with their satellites. With the 30-inch Cassegrain several photographs of nebulae have been ob- tained. On May 11th the large mirror was re- silvered for the first time. Good progress is being made in the photographic chart of the heavens with the 13-inch Astrographic telescope. Each chart plate is exposed for 40 minutes, and out of the total number allotted to Greenwich 1,076 have already been successfully taken, only 73 remaining to complete it. The plates for the catalogue are each exposed three times—6 and 3 minutes, and 20 seconds. Of these, 1,103 have been taken, and 46 more are required. During the year 88,000 measures of pairs of images on these latter plates have been made. The photographic spectroscope has been fitted to the 30-inch reflector, and seems to be very satisfactory. Photographs have been taken of the sun on 180 days either with the Thompson or Dallmeyer photo heliographs. Photos from India and Mauritius fill up the gaps so effectuaily that during 1899 there are photos for 364 days. The magnetic observations give the mean de- clination for 1899 16° 34°2 West, and the dip 67° 10’ 13’. No great magnetic disturbances have occurred, and lesser ones were only recorded on 16 days. During the past 58 years August has only once been so warm—in 1857. The photographs of the corona and spectrum of the solar eclipses of 1900 and 1898 were exhibited in the same room, and evoked a great amount of interest. ‘The smaller photos taken at Ovar showed considerable over-exposure from the brightness of the sky. The detail of the corona was not so pronounced as in the Indian photos.—FRANK C. DENNETT. 88 SCIENCE-GOSSIP. = aS IBRD SAE IND, CONDUCTED BY F. SHILLINGTON SCALES, F.R.M.S5. PosTaAL MIcRoscoPicAL Socrery.—During the summer of 1873 a letter appeared in SCIENCE- GossIP suggesting that if twelve gentlemen could be found willing to co-operate in forming a little club for the circulation of microscopic slides, and notes thereupon, it might lead to a very pleasant and profitable interchange of thought and study. This letter was replied to by the late Mr. Alfred Allen, of Bath. The scheme met from the very first with much more support than had been anticipated, a code of rules was quickly drawn up, and in September of that year the Society came into existence with a roll of 36 members. Mr. A. Atkinson, of Brigg, the writer of the original letter in SCIENCE-GOSSIP, was fittingly made the first President, and was succeeded in due course by the late Mr. Tuffen West, with whose name every microscopist is familiar. By that time the Society numbered, we believe, over 100 members, and the membership subsequently increased in an even greater degree. The leading spirit of the Society -was, however, Mr. Allen himself, and in 1882 he added largely to the usefulness and status of the Society by publishing at monthly and quarterly intervals the well-known “ International Journal of Microscopy and Natural Science,” which, besides acting as the Society’s medium, contained many valuable scientific papers. It is understood that the journal was not self-supporting, but Mr. Allen himself willingly undertook its publication until failing health obliged him to discontinue its issue in 1897, after fifteen years of labour thereon. Mr. Allen’s death in the following year (March 24, 1898) was a severe blow to the Society, and it was for a time, we believe, practically in abeyance, until the appointment of a new Hon. Secretary, Miss Florence Phillips. commenced what we hope will prove to be a new lease of life. Unfortunately, since Mr. Allen’s death and the cessation of his journal, the Society has had no recognised medium for publishing the many interesting notes that are entered in MS. memorandum-books that have circu- lated with the slides sent round amongst the members. In consequence, the Editor of SCIENCE- Gossip communicated with the Secretary and President of the Society, and offered to place at its disposal a portion of the space in this journal for the publication of such notes. This suggestion has met with approval, and it is intended to occupy at least one page monthly, in the section set apart for microscopy, for notes extracted from the Postal Microscopical Society’s memoranda. It is hoped that these will contain information as interesting to our readers as to the members of the Society, and will lead to profitable discussion in our columns. Before closing this announcement we desire to draw the attention of our readers, who are workers in the field of microscopy, to the many advantages accruing to membership of the Postal Microscopical Society. Full particulars may be obtained from the Honorary Secretary, Miss Florence Phillips, “Hafod Euryn,’ Colwyn Bay, North Wales. METHOD OF PRESERVING AND MOUNTING ROTIFERA.— The following is Mr. Rousselet’s method, communicated to the Manchester Micro- scopical Society by Mr. Mark L. Sykes, F.R.M.S.: “ Rotifera cannot be killed suddenly by any known process without contracting violently and losing all their natural appearance. ‘J’o kill and preserve them with their cilia fully expanded and in their natural condition, the animals should first be narcotised with a solution consisting of 2 per cent. solution of hydrochlorate of cocain, 3 parts ; methy- lated spirit, 1 part; water, 6 parts. The rotifers should first be isolated in a watch-glass and clean water, and a drop, or two drops, of the solution added at first. After five or ten minutes another drop should be added, and afterwards drop by drop and very slowly, until the animals are com- pletely narcotised. They may then be killed and ‘fixed by adding one drop of a4 per cent. to + per cent. solution of osmic acid. ‘To clear from the solution they must be washed several times in clean water, until all the acid is completely re- moved. The rotifers must then be transferred to a 2% per cent. solution of formaldehyde (23 per cent. of commercial,’ 60 per cent. formalin, and 372 per cent. of distilled water), and should be mounted in this fluid in hollow-ground glass slips. The cells must be well secured after mounting by several coats of cement. The process requires a little practice, and great care should be taken that the animals are always in fluid, and not allowed to become dry in the process of mounting ; but the results are excellent, the objects having all the appearance of living animals, the colours, internal structure, and outward form being beautifully pre- served in situ.” BAKER'S PLANTATION MicrROscopE.—This is a cheap microscope designed for use by planters, — missionaries, and others who have no practical acquaintance with the microscope, for the detection of the ova of intestinal parasites so common in men and animals in the tropics. It is accordingly simplified to the last degree ; there is one objective and eyepiece, giving a total magnification of 150 diameters, and the focussing is done by rotating i 2 eee i BAKER’sS PLANTATION MICROSCOPE IN CASE, the optical tube, which gives a vertical movement by means of a spiral slot and pin. There is a mirror, but no draw-tube, fine adjustment, or condenser, and the stand is a plain non-inclinable one. It fits into a tin case 9x 2x2} inches, which contains also a supply of glass slips and covers, together with a sheet of printed instruc- —— ee SCLENCE-GOSSIP. 89 tions illustrating the eggs of Ankylostome, Round, and Whip Worms, ilharzia and Distome ringeri, also of Amocha coli and Trypanosomes. We do not know what demand there may be in the tropics for an instrument of this sort, but it is certainly de- signed to stand the maximum of bad usage without BAKER’S PLANTATION MICROSCOPE, ill-effect, and should prove sufficient for its purpose. We would scarcely recommend it, however, for any other than the purpose for which it is designed. The price complete is only £2 5s. This and the foregoing microscope are those recently exhibited before the Royal Microscopical Society. BAKER'S R.M.S. 1.27 Microscopre.—Mr. Chas. Baker has recently brought out a new microscope, specially designed for advanced workers, which both in design and workmanship deserves notice in these columns. The stand is of the solid tripod type, which, whilst giving nearly as firm a base, eyen in the horizontal position, as the true tripod, is in some respects preferable to this latter form in the greater facility afforded for getting at_ the sub-stage adjustments when the microscope is used vertically. The limb is of the “Jackson” form with lever fine adjustment, than which we have found none more sensitive or serviceable. Each revolution of the milled head gives a move- ment of ‘11 millimetre Gj; inch). The body has two draw-tubes, giving a variation of tube- length from 120 to 250 millimetres, thus enabling objectives corrected for both the short and the long tube to be used at will. Both draw-tubes are graduated in millimetres, and the lower one is actuated by rack and pinion; a very useful addi- tion when adjusting objectives so as to correct them for different thicknesses of cover-glass, especially in view of the growing tendency to make such corrections by this means instead of by the provision of a correction collar to the objective itself. The body is of a large diameter that should lend itself to photography, and the eyepieces are of the new R.M.S. No. 3 standard size. There isa mechanical stage giving a moyve- ment of 25 millimetres in either direction, and graduated to half millimetres, and the stage is capable of rotation for about 280°, The top plate is provided with three adjustable stops for 3 inch x 1 inch and 3 inch x 13 inch slides with a view to greater facility in recording positions, and if re- quired a large flat plate is available. The sub- stage is of the usual form with centering screws, coarse and fine adjustments, the latter being ex- ceptionally neat and so conveniently placed that both adjustments can be controlled without shift- ine the hand, ‘There are the usual mirrors. All BAKER’S R.M.S. Microscope. the fittings are sprung, and have adjusting screws to compensate for wear. The price of the stand alone, without case, is £16 16s. Ova OF LEPIDOPTERA.—Recently we had the opportunity of carefully examining some hundreds of water-colour drawings of British Lepidoptera. They were the work of our correspondent Mr. E. Wheeler, of Queen’s Road, Clifton, near Bristol, who had faithfully delineated under the microscope the external structure and markings. As in most cases he had made drawings at various periods of the development of the embryo within the egg, this study proves to be one of much interest, as is also the ease with which butterflies and moths may be classified by the external structure of their eggs. 90 SCIENCE-GOSSIP. MICROSCOPY FOR BEGINNERS. By F. SHILLINGTON ScALES, F.R.MLS. (Continued from p. 61.) If the microscope requires adjustment, these adjustments should be made with the utmost care. Most microscopes by our best English makers have the wearing parts sprung so that the adjustments may be readily effected, but even then a little attention to the tools with which the work is done may be recommended. The screwdriver, for in- stance, should be in good condition. It is well also to bear in mind that the lacquer on the brass-work of the microscope, placed there not so much for appearance as for the prevention of oxidisation, is destroyed by alcohol. Finally, our advice to the beginner who may wish to oblige a friend by lending him his micro- scope is—don’t! It now only remains for us to add a few hints on mounting, and these we shall endeavour to make as simple and practical as possible. The beginner must bear in mind that mounting for the ‘microscope has become quite an art, if not a science, and the list of reagents, stains, and media used for special purposes would be quite a for- midable one. Fortunately the requirements of beginners and amateurs, especially those for whom we are now writing, are much more easily dealt with, and we shall confine ourselves to the simplest and most commonly used methods, trusting that as knowledge grows and experience comes with it, the beginner will learn more of such advanced methods from works dealing with the subject. It is of course only with very low powers, and when the nature of the investigation admits of it, that an absolutely unprepared and unarranged object can be examined. For this purpose a pocket-lens is infinitely preferable to the compound microscope with all its complications and. refine- ments. For examination with the latter instru- ment even opaque objects require to be properly displayed, whilst objects to be examined with transmitted or direct light—that is, by means of light that passes through the object—require very careful preparation beforehand. Wooden slips and paper-covered slips are now very rarely used, 3 inch x 1 inch glass slips being now almost universal. These can be obtained from any optician. They should, preferably, have ground edges, and for general purposes should be of medium thickness. ‘They will cost from twopence to five- pence per dozen, according to quality, or less for a larger quantity. If any of them should be found to have scratches or specks in the centre, they should be put aside for making opaque mounts. For exceptionally large mounts slips 3 inches x 14 inch can be obtained. The cover-glasses should be circular, in thickness from ‘006 inch to -008 inch, and might vary in size from 2 inch to { inch diameter. It would be well to provide oneself with a stock of 3-inch, 3-inch, and 2-inch cover-glasses, and to note their thickness at the time of purchase, and, generally speaking, to adhere afterwards to the same standard for ordinary work. High-power work with objectives of very short focus may require thinner cover-glasses to be used. We would also recommend the purchase of a dozen or so slips with excavated cells of various sizes, i.e. with concavities ground in their centres. Before use, all slips and covers must be scrupu- lously cleaned. It is generally sufficient to wash them with hot water and soap or soda; but for special work more drastic measures may be neces- sary. The writer generally uses a fairly strong and hot solution of Hudson’s Soap, with subsequent careful rinsing and polishing with an old cambric handkerchief. The great thing to be avoided is any suspicion of grease, even from the fingers themselves. Cover-glasses must be finally polished with chamois leather, and as they are very thin and of course easily broken, various contrivances such as buff blocks are obtainable for the purpose. With a little practice, however, it is quite easy to hold half the cover-glass in a piece of chamois leather between the finger and thumb, but not edgeways, and to polish the other half, turning the glass round meanwhile. We will first deal with the mounting of opaque objects and of objects that can be mounted dry, this process being comparatively simple. The various apparatus, reagents, media, stains, etc., will be mentioned as we proceed, and their uses wiil then become apparent at the same time. Accord- ingly we shall here require a turntable. This is a circular brass plate about 33 inches in diameter, mounted so as to rotate upon a centre, the upper surface of this plate having concentric rings en- graved upon its surface. These latter serve as a shoo | | TURNTABLE. guide in centering the slide upon the rotating plate. There is also a pair of clips to hold the slide in place. The turntable is mounted on a wooden block or iron stand which serves as a sup- port for the hand. ‘The cost will be about six shillings. We do not recommend the ‘“ self-center- ing” turntables. We shall also need two or more good sable brushes, which are best and cheapest in the long run. These should be about + inch and #; inch in diameter, costing ninepence or one shilling each. Also a pair of steel or brass forceps, * not too narrow, costing one shilling and sixpence, a bottle of gold-size, a bottle of Brunswick Black, and a bottle of gum arabic. All of these are obtainable from the opticians. The usual plan with opaque objects is to place a slide on the turntable, centre by means of the concentric rings, and then run adisk of Brunswick SCIENCE-GOSSTP. gI Black of the requisite size in the centre, rotating the stage meanwhile by means of the forefinger of the left hand and the milled head beneath. As soon as this black disk is dry, a piece of black paper of the same size is cut out and gummed upon it. The black paper should not have a glazed surface. Then upon the disk is built up a cell of the requisite depth to contain the object. As we have before said, however (SCIENCE-GoOssIP, vol. vi. page 375), this method of mounting opaque objects upon a black background is not only unnecessary, but often inconvenient, as it renders the use of transmitted light impossible, if it should be wanted; neither can such slides be examined by means of a Lieberkiihn. We recommend therefore that the black background be omitted, and that instead a similar disk, or two or three disks of various sizes, be put upon thin slips, and one of these can then be placed beneath the slide carrying the object, when it is being examined by reflected light. The cells are made by running a ring of gold- size of the same diameter as the cover-glass that will be used. ‘This is done by means of the turn- table, and is not difficult. It is not advisable to use too full a brush, and the gold-size should be of the right consistency—neither too thick to leave the brush, nor so thinas to run away from position. The tip of the brush is used, and the table rotated not too quickly. For very thin objects one ring will suffice; but thicker objects will need two or three rings, added one on the top of another, each ring being added, however, only when the other is dry. Ifafew such rings do not give sufficient depth, it is advisable to build up the cell by other means. Rings may be cut out of stout paper or thin and good cardboard, then steeped in paraftin and dried. Stout rings of ebonite, glass, tin, etc., can be obtained from the opticians. It is only neces- sary to attach these to the slide by means of a ring of gold-size, pressing down the ring firmly, and even giving a very slight twisting motion to make sure of there being no air- -bubbles to prevent perfect contact, If the cells of e@old-size when dry should not be quite level, they can easily be rubbed down on apiece of very fine emery laid on a flat surface. The object itself must be fastened in place by means of a drop of gum placed upon the slide Care must be taken that this drop of gum is hidden by the object, unless that is impossible. Thin objects, such as wings, petals, leaves, etc., may generally be kept in place merely by the pressure of the cover-glass. Very minute objects, such as pollen grains for instance, are made to adhere by means of a thin film of very weak gum, which is placed on the slide and allowed to dry. Breathing upon the slide will then moisten the film of gum sufficiently to cause the pollen to adhere when placed thereon. In every case, however, it is of the utmost importance that the gum and gold-size should be allowed to dry thoroughly before the cover-glass is put on, or the remaining moisture will settle on the under side of the cover-glass, and utterly spoil the slide. » 23 Mercury* 5 p.m. .. ~ .o9 N. a Daylight. 7 Below English horizon. OCCULTATIONS. Angle Angle Magni- Dis From Re- Strom Aug. Star. tude, appears, Vertex. appears. Vertex. him. © him. 2 ZOE a5 lb} 55 0.42a.m... 81 .. 5.10 a.m... 236 1.24a.m... 346 MEV 65 feleixoibwin,. HHO) 44 UY so Abba 46 Chi oe THE SuN still has interesting groups upon its surface at frequent intervals. MERCURY is in inferior conjunction with the sun at 8a.m.on August Ist, after which it is a morning star all the month. ‘This planet reaches its greatest elongation, 18° 32’ west, at 2 p.m. on the 19th, when it rises an hour and three-quarters before the sun, and is in good position for observation. VENUS is a morning star all the month, reaching its greatest brilliancy at 8 am.on the 14th. It rises at 2.20 a.m. on August Ist, and at 1.21 a.m. on the 31st. MARS is also a morning star, rising about forty minutes after midnight at the beginning of the month, and about eight minutes after at the end. Its appearance, with a 2-inch telescope, is little more than that of a large star. JUPITER is an evening star all the month, but is in poor position for observation. It comes to the meridian half an hour before sunset on the Ist, and sets at 11.35 p.m., whilst on the 31st it sets at 9.41. It is almost stationary near the beautiful and easy double star 8 Scorpii. SATURN is likewise an evening star southing about two hours later than Jupiter, and so is in better position for the observer. Its widely open rings make it a splendid object. URANUS is nearly 2° farther south than Jupiter, and comes to the meridian about twenty-eight minutes later. THE ECLIPSE OF THE SUN.—Further details of the observations are now appearing. On Thursday, June 28th, there was a joint meeting of the Royal Society and the Royal Astronomical Society to receive the preliminary reports of the Expeditions. On the previous evening anumber of accounts were given at the meeting of the British Astronomical Association. The Astronomer Royal, at Ovar, described the corona as very distinctly inferior in brightness, structure, and rays to the one seen in the Indian eclipse—appearing, indeed, quite a different object. Sir Norman Lockyer, at Santa Pola, considered the corona a repetition of that of 1878. Mr. Geoghegan, with Dr. Downing’s party at Plasencia, 140 miles south-west of Madrid, observed the shadow-bands for about two minutes before totality, and again for a similar time after. Mr. Maunder’s party were at Algiers, and the photographs were very successful. A remarkable feature, not previously noticed, was the presence of dark rays in the corona, quite distinct from mere rifts. Mercury was visible on many of the photographs. Although some of the plates had a longer exposure than those employed in India, none of them exhibited so great an extension of bright rays as were then portrayed. Mr. Crom- melin, of the same party, observed the contacts on a projected image formed by a 3-inch Dollond achromatic, and for 20 seconds before totality witnessed the phenomena known as Baily’s Beads. Mr. C. L. Brook, with the same party, observed the shadow-bands, or, as he suggests, ripples, three and a quarter minutes before totality. Mr. Evershed went some 25 miles farther south, to Mazafram, to get to the south edge of the limit.of totality to have a better opportunity of observing the flash spectrum. He succeeded in obtaining some good photographs notwithstanding that he got just a little too far south. At Elche, Mr. E. W. Johnson saw the shadow-bands for two minutes before totality. Some of the observers note that the longest ray reached nearly to Mercury, about 2° distant from the sun’s centre. SCIENCE-GOSS/P, 93 4 4 nf CONDUCTED BY HAROLD M. READ, F.C.S. MANUFACTURE OF ARTIFICIAL PEARLS.—In view of the enormous trade now carried on in artificial pearls, the method of preparing the mother-substance for their manufacture is of interest. This mother-substance is worked up in the Lauscha district, and other glass-making centres of Thuring‘a, from fish-scales imported from the Baltic. ‘I'he scales are first thoroughly washed with fresh water to remove impurities, then shaken up with a further quantity of water for about two hours, and finally the whole is sub- jected to pressure in a linen bag. ‘The silvery lustrous runnings are collected and set aside. This treatment is repeated until the scales have lost their silvery appearance, become transparent, and hard to the touch, The runnings are put aside to clarify, while, to prevent putrefaction, ammonia is added and the mixture kept at as low a tempera- ture as possible. ‘The sediment is now washed repeatedly with water, until the washings are quite clear, Thereupon the lustrous residue is bottled off, and the water gradually removed by successive washings in alcohol, During this treatment the extract assumes the consistency of butter, but it still retains its pearly lustre. For use, the butter- like mass is mixed in small quantities with a hot aqueous solution of gelatine. If the ‘‘ pearls” are to be coloured, a spirituous solution of an aniline dye is incorporated with the gelatine, SUGAR AN AID TO THE GROWTH OF PLANTS.— During the last two years some most interesting work has been carried out at Nottingham College, by Mr. J. Golding, on the influence of saccharose or cane-sugar on the growth of plants. The aim of the experiments—the results of which have recently been published—was to compare the increased yield produced by sugar on plants draw- ing all their nitrogen from the air, with that obtained in the case of plants drawing their nitro- gen ina combined form from the soil. If the energy for the nitrogen-fixation comes from the break- ing-up of the sugar, those plants which have to fix all their nitrogen might naturally be expected to benefit more by sugar applied to their roots than those which have their nitrogen presented in a combined, and hence more readily assimilable — form. Briefly stated, the results of the investiga- tion show that the leguminous plants with healthy root-nodules or nitrogen-fixers benefit by the application of small quantities of sugar to their roots. Further, even in the case of those plants which are devoid of root-nodules, but are supplied with an abundance of combined nitrogen, an in- creased yield is noticed after the application of sugar to their roots. At the same time, it is found that where the plants are starving for want of nitrogen, the addition of sugar is actually injurious; in fact it is possible to kill plants by the use of too much sugar. ‘These results confirm those obtained some months ago by Winogradsky and Oméliansky, who found that one part of grape-sugar in 500 entirely prevented nitrification. PROFESSOR NILSON.—On July 5th the Chemical Society paid fitting tribute to one of their distin- guished members, the late Professor Nilson, in a memorial address delivered by one of his co- workers, Professor Otto Petterson. The lecture was delivered in English, and in a style which might well be emulated by many Englishmen. Nilson’s life was sketched from his leaving his father’s farm in Gottland, a detailed account being given of his training with the great Swedish chemist Berzelius, his researches in pure chemistry at Upsala University, and his work as Director of the Agricultural Department of the Swedish Go- vernment. It was in the latter office that Nilson showed not only his exceptional capacity as a thinker, but also his skill as a chemist, and his patriotic enthusiasm for his motherland. CONVERSION OF PHOSPHORUS INTO ARSENIC.— Last month I referred to a paper by Fittica dealing with the alleged preparation of metallic arsenic from phosphorus. Ascathing criticism of Fittica’s work by Dr. Clemens Winkler has appeared in the “Berichte,” and an excellent translation of this paper is published in the ‘‘ Chemical News.” After pointing out the utter fallacy of Fittica’s assertions, and the fact that the percentage of arsenic obtained corresponds almost exactly with that ordinarily found in commercial phosphorus, Dr. Winkler con- cludes with a paragraph which will be heartily welcomed by all students whose efforts are directed towards the discovery of truth. The remarks may so well be applied, not only to chemistry but to every branch of science, that I reproduce them :— “Tt would appear as if in inorganic chemistry a dangerous tendency showed itself of late to enter into speculations without those careful investiga- tions which have hitherto distinguished German chemists. Cases are multiplying which tend to show that a theory is first formed, and that one seeks to find what one wishes to find; or that, in the words of the physiologist Czermak, one starts from ‘erroneously observed facts, and thus falls into mistakes. The reason must be sought, to a great extent, in the fact that the art of analysis is being regrettably neglected. I intentionally say the ‘art, for between analysing and analysing there is the same difference as between artists’ and stonemasons’ work. One cannot expect analytical aptitude from the physicist, whose field of investigation begins more and more to extend to inorganic chemistry as electrolysis develops ; and he, within his field of investigation, is able to discover useful, even great, facts. But physical chemistry is in no way synonymous with inorganic chemistry; for the latter, far from being a finished department of science, embraces problems in infinite number which must be solved upon an entirely different road from that indicated by the ion theory. The really successful carrying out of inorganic chemical investigations is possible only to him who is not only a theoretical chemist, but also an accomplished analyst; not only a practical, mechanical work- man, but a thinking and forming artist, who sees clearly the theories of the operations, to whom the knowledge of proportion is a part of himself, and who in all his doings is led by a sense of order and neatness, but especially by a desire for truth.” 94 | SCIE NCE-GOSSIP. CONDUCTED BY JAMES QUICK. THE STRUCTURE OF MerTAts.—in a paper read before the Royal Society on May 31st last, further resulis have been given of the investigations of Professor Ewing and Mr. Rosenhain upon the crystalline structure of meials. The first part of the work was briefly described in these columns last month. The authors have examined the changes of crystalline structure which take place in various Meials ati comparatively low tempera- tures. It was noticed thai a piece of sheet lead when etched with dilute nitric acid exhibits a strong crysialline siructure, with large crystals. This was afterwards found io be due toa slow process of annealing or recrysiallisation at ordinary atmospheric temperatures. The phenomenon was investigated by taking, at low magnifications, a series of micro-photographs of certain marked areas in the surface of a specimen, in order io waich the change which went on through lapse of time, or after application of some thermal treatment. Ifa piece of cast lead is greatly strained by compres- sion, the original large crysials, after being con- siderably flattened, are driven’ into and through one another. A piece of lead sirained in this way and kept for nearly six months in an ordinary room, without any special thermal treatment, was found io be undergoing continuous change during that time. A series of photographs of this specimen, iaken at intervals during the six months, showed that a great number of the small crystals crew larger at the expense of their neighbours. In similar specimens which were kepi at 200° C. the growth was much more pronounced. Experi- ments were also made at 100°C. and 150° C., which led to the general result that crystalline erowth will occur at any temperature from 15° C. or. 20° C. up to the meliing-point of lead, and that in general the higher the tempera- ture the more rapid is the initial rate of change. A striking feature observed im several specimens was the large and rapid growth of one or two indi- vidual crystals. In many instances such individuals grew until they were some hundreds of times larzer than their neighbours. Generally the most ageres- sive crystals were found near the edges of the specimen. It was also noticed thai a crystal which had already grown considerably was at times swallowed by a more powerful neizhbour. Mr. Rosenhain puts forward an hypothesis to explain the phenomenon by suggesting that the meiallic impurities present in a _ Inetal ‘play an imporiant in the action. When a metal solidifies from the fluid state. the metallic impurities finally crysial- lise as a film of what is known as entectic alloy between the meial crysials. lt is thought then that the observed changes of crystalline structure which go on, whilejthe piece is in the solid state, are accomplished by the agency of these entectic films between the ‘crystals, in dissolving metal from the surfaces of some crystals and depositing it on others. Several observations and experiments confirm this view. A REVOLVING Macngric FLAG.—A very pretty lecture-room experiment has recenily been de- scribed, to demonstrate the existence of a magnetic whirl in the interior of a conductor carrying a cur- rent. The conductor itself consists of a beaker of mercury, the “ flag ” being asmall magnet attached with one end at right angles to a glass rod _ pivoted along the axis of the beaker. The: magnet is there- fore capable oi rotation in a plane at richt angles to the direction of the current. A hole is bored through the bottom of the beaker to admit an electrode making contact withthe mercury. The return cir- cuit is afforded by a copper vessel into which the beaker tightly fits, the external field due fo the cur- rent also being thus eliminated. The earth's magnet-— ism is also neuiralised by permanent magnets. The glass rod is weighted to obtain neutral equi- librium. Upon passing the current through, the flag rotates with uniform velocity, the north-seeking pole following the lines of force. PuysicaL Sociery or Lonpon.—The final meeting for the present session of this Society was held on June 22, Mr. T. H. Blakesley, vice-presi- deni, occupying the chair. Dr. Harker read a paper entitled “ Notes on Gas Thermomeiry,” by Dr. Chappuis. The author discards hydrogen as an absolutely reliable thermomeiric substance at high temperatures, due to its attacking the walls of glass receivers, and uses a consiant volume nitrogen thermometer. He obiains a value of 445.2° C. as boiling-poimi of sulphur, and criticises Callendar and Griffith’s value of 444.53° C. In ithe discussion upon the paper Professor Callendar, Mr. Glazebrook, and others took pari. Professor Callendar remarked that he was unable to agree with the correction to his observations suggested by Dr. Chappuis. Two other papers were read, one by Professor Callendar on behalf of Mr. H. M. Tory on “A Comparison ot Impure Platinum Thermometers,” the other by Professor 8. Young, D.Sc. FERS. on “The Law of Cailleiet and Mathias, and the Critical Density.” The Society then adjourned until Ociober next. Iypuction Com CONDENSERS —The discovery and applications of the Rontgen rays have given _ tise to a great increase in the manufacture and sale of induciion coils. The article in the “ Philo- sophical Magazine” for February last by Mr. K. BR. Johnson upon condensers in induciion coils will therefore be of interest. Asis well known, if a con- denser is connected across the “ break ” in the pri- Mary circuit of an induction coil, the extra induced current fiows through it. If the maximum E.M_F. in the condenser is very great, a spark occurs at the break and the oscillations in the circnit are diminished. If the capacity of the condenser is: very large, the maximum condenser E.M_F. is small, as is also that at the break. No spark then takes place. The efficiency of the coil is therefore increased by increasing the capacity of the con- denser, so long as the discharge by spark at the break is diminished. When this spark is entirely suppressed, the efficiency of the coil is greatest, and the secondary spark-length a maximum. If the condenser capacity is still further increased. the spark-lengih diminishes, owing to the maxi- mum E.M_F_ in the condenser being decreased. as well as the current in the circuit. mais eit ES a eS a ee ——— SCIENCE-GOSSTP. Now Du Hauron took his negatives through red, ereen, and blue filters, but in making his triple superimposed prints he did not print from the red- filter negatives in red ink, but in a greenish-blue colour; similarly he printed from the green-filter negative in a pink colour, and from the blue-filter negativeinayellowcolour. A little consideration will Sago al SNS \\ Be LF RI UT I NN \\ a oo eS pel FIG. show us the reason of this change. In the experi- mentof the three overlapping discs of red, green, and blue light shown in fig. 7 we mixed all three lights and produced white light ; when, however, we super- pose coloured prints we are not adding one coloured light to another, but rather adding dark- ness, abstracting the light passed by the print LET nearest the eye from that passed by the other print. Think for one moment what we do when we paint, say, a streak of blue paint on a piece of white card: the white card is reflecting light of all colours to the eye, the streak of blue paint absorbs a part of the white light, the red and green rays, and makes the card appear darker, because the Test object representing squares of white, red, green, blue and yellow glasses, and black. Blk | 4 | Negative of above test ob- B ject taken through the red light filter. Negative taken through the green light filter. Negative taken through the blue-violet light filter. Print from the negative taken through the red light E filter, printed in cyan blue pigment _ transmitting green and blue-violet light or minus red. Print from the negative taken through the green light filter, printed in pink pigment transmitting red and blue-violet or minus green. Print from the negative taken through the blue- violet light filter, printed in yellow pigment trans- mittiog red and green light or minus blue. The result of superimpos- ing prints E, F, and G. paint only reflects the blue rays to the eye. There- fore, in printing upon paper or in superposing trans- parent prints for lantern slides, we print, not in the primary colours red, green, and blue, but in their The red-filter negative we print complementary of red complementaries. in a colour transmitting the red—i.e. minus red, that colour which with Ii2 light will form white. This we see from fig. 7 is cyan blue, a light greenish shade of blue. The green- filter negative we print, not in green. but minus green. a pink or light magenta colour ; and the blue- filter negative we print, not in blue, but in minus blue or yellow. Each of these three colours, there- fore, reflects two and absorbs two of the three primary colours used by Clerk-Maxwell to form white light. 1 Fig. 8 shows us the result of printing overlapping discs in these minus colours. The yellow printed over cyan blue forms green, the yellow printed over the pink forms red. the pink printed over cyan blue forms pure blue. and where all three overlap in the centre of the diagram all three colours are absorbed, and we get no light reflected to the eye— black HE, F,and G, fig. 9. represent prints from the test-object negatives printed in the minus colours, and H represents the remainder of the BUTTERFLIES OF THE SCIENCE-GOSSIP. white light reflected from the white paper after undergoing absorption by the pigments superposed upon it. and is a correct colour copy of the test object A. We must remember that the diagram fig. 9 represents what happens when we photograph colours in great purity. In photographing from Nature the negatives are not nearly so widely different one from another as they are represented here; because in Nature objects always reflect a certain amount of white light, and therefore are represented by some amount of deposit in all three negatives. Figs. 10, 11, and 12 are prints from an actual negative of a brightly coloured poster (see p. 108). A is the print from the red-filter negative, -B from the green-filier negauive, and © from the blue-filter nesative. (To be continued.) PALAEARCTIC REGION. By HENRY CHARLES LANG, M_D., M-R.C.8., L-R.C.P. Lonp.. FES. (Continued from page 73°.) (PIERIS continued.) 23. P. chloridice. Hab. 712, 5. 34. Pl. VIL. fig. 2. 27—41 mm. Wings white. Fw. with ou. mare. slightly con- cave. The mars. band consists of blackish dashes to the number of about five, rmnning from the margin inwards ; internal to these there is in 9 a black band running downwards from the costa. The discal spot is white in the cenire. 2 with the usual black spot near the in. marg.. but it is somewhat famtly marked. Hw. white and un- spotted in g, but with small mare. black spots inQ, Uvss. fw. arranged as in P. daplidice, but the green colour of the ou. marg. is of a much more delicate tint. H.w. ofthe same tint of lich bluish-green. with white spots arranged as in P. daplidice, but longer and narrower; specially SO are the marginal spots. Has. S.E. Russia, Sarepta, Province of Oren- bourg ; Ural; Turkey: W. Asia; Amasia and Tokat (Asia Minor); Steppes of Kadomya; Persia: Pamir ; Transalai ; Amdo ; Altai, Barabinsky Steppe. Kurai, Tchuja Steppe (Elwes). V., VI. Second brood Vile. at 6000 ft. Bashkaus down to 2.000 ft. “These differ only in their size from those of the first generation.” (Elwes, T.E.S., Sept. 1899.) Le. BE. 24. P. iranica Biernert Diss. p. 26. Stgr. Cat. 422. . 36 mm. (4) This series of articles on Butterflies of the Palaearctic Region commenced in ScIENcE-Gosstp, No. 61, June 1899. Somewhat like P. daplidice, but smaller. Apices of f.w. with black rays, enclosing rounded white spots. Hw. with black streaks and submarginal spots. Neuration of us. marked with yellow. Has. Pamir—Persia. V., Vi. A rare species. occurring at high elevations. ~ Genus 11. ANTHOCHARIS Boisd. Moderaie-sized or small butterflies, having the antennae short and with a distinct club. Palpi projecting beyond head and hairy. Subcosial nervyure with five branches. Wings more or less rounded as in Pieris, o« a white or yellow colour. Fore wings with a black apical patch, and with a black discoidal spot. Hind wings chequered or striped beneath with green, yellow or orange. and sometimes with silvery patches. Larvae green, narrowed at the extremities. Pupae boat-shaped, with wing-cases proportionately large. This genus is represented in England by the common “orange-tip” butterfly, which has the wings tipped with bright orange-yellow in the 4g: whereas the ¥ is merely white and black above. - The genus may well be divided into two groups (in respect of the Palaearctic species) thus -— I. Fore wings without orange tips in either sex, ground colour white or yellow. Only the drst branch of the subcostal nervure thrown off before the end ofthe cell. This is the genus PhyWocharis of Schatz. A. h. wings siriped beneath. 1. A -belemia. 2. ., fallout. SCLENCE-GOSSIP. B. h. wings spotted beneath, a. Wings white. 1. A. belia. 2, tagis. b. Wings yellow. 1. A. charlonia. 2. ,, levaillantii. os mesopotamica. II. Fore wines with orange patches at apex, at least in ¢@, two branches of subcostal nervure thrown off before the end of the cell. A. Wings white in both sexes. 1. A. cardamine. eo WHO B. Wines white only in 9. 1. A. gruneri. 2. ,, damone. eupheno. euphenoides. 1. A. belemia Esp. Pl. VIL. fic: 3. 36—41 mm. Wings white, f.w. rather pointed at tip, costa with small black spots. At the extremity of disc- oidal cell a black spot. H.w. somewhat more angular than in the other species; with stripes and not spots beneath of white or silvery on a deep bright-green ground easily distinguishing this species from any other Palaearctic Antho- charis. HAB. §. Spain, Portugal, Algeria. cording to latitude. LARVA pubescent, yellow finely speckled with black, with three rosy-red longitudinal bands, on Cruciferae (Boisd). a. var. glauce Hub. 546, 7. Le. B. H. p. 36. Pl. VIII. fig.4. A seasonal dimorphic form of second generation. Differs from type merely in its some- what larger size—the markings of upper side less intensely black. The us. h.w. with the white stripes much less defined, and the green markings brownish, with but a slight tinge of green. IV., V. distribution as in type. WAKO), 5 pes, 18 We jo 80, IRI, BI@= 2. A. falloui Allard. Ann. §. Fr. 1867. Cat. p. 3. 35—37 mm. A single g specimen in my collection, received from Dr. Staudinger from Algeria, resembles glauce, but is smaller and more faintly marked. The disc. spot f.w.is much narrower, and not marked with white. It seems to replace the other forms in the hotter and more arid portions of Algeria bordering on the Sahara. III. Ster. 3. A. belia Cr. Pl. 397. 56—43 mm, Wings white. F.w. with a black tip spotted with white, a large quadrate black discoidal spot, and having the costa spotted with black. H.w. white. U.s. F.w. tip greenish-yellow, marked Pap. Exot. C1782.) 113 with pearly or silvery blotches. H.w. dark-green, more or less mixed with yellow and marked with a number of white or silvery spots, mostly rounded inform. 9% larger than g, and with the spots us. h.w. less often silvery. Hap. South Europe, North Africa, Asia Minor. III.—V. LARVA yellow, spotted with black, with lateral and dorsal pink-red stripes. Feeds on Biscutella. a var. ausonia Hub. 582, 3. Lg. B.E. p. 37. Pl, VIII. fig. 6. Larger and paler in coloration than the type. F.w. without costal row of black dots. U.s., h.w. with the green colouring replaced by yellowish; spots more irregularly arranged and without silver markings. Second generation ; in the more southern parts of habitat, the differ- ence from the type is most strongly marked. HAs. asin type. V.e.—VIL.e. b. var. simplonia Fir. B. 73, 2 (1829). Lg. B. E. p. 37. Pl. VIII. fig. 7. More heavily marked than type, especially at apices f.w. Basal half of costal f.w. without black dots, which are generally re- placed by a narrow black line meeting disc. spot. U.s., hw. of a dark green, white spots small and not silvery. An Alpine form. Has. The moun- tains of Switzerland, Riviera, Austria, and Pied- mont, Wl Vil: e. var. pulverata Christ. R. H. p. 134. The white spots at the apex f.w. smaller. U.s., hw. with more numerous and smaller white spots. HAB. Schahrud, Persia; Tekke, Osch. IY. d. var. romana Calb. R. H. p. 134. 38—44 mm. From the description in R. H. this form appears to be very close to ausonia, but is larger and lighter. I have not seen a specimen. HAB. The Roman States. 4, A. tagis Hub. 565, 6. Lg. Pl. VIII. fig. 8. d38—38 mm. Very much resembles the allied species last described, but the white spots on the black apical patch f.w. are much smaller. The disc. spot is narrower than in . belia. U.s. f.w. apices broadly marked with bluish-green in ¢, yellowish in 2 with very faint white spots. H.w. ground colour bluish-green in 6, yellowish in 2, having the appearance of being dusted with dark scales. White spots very small and few compared with those seen in A. belia. Has. Portugal and Andalusia; Elvas, Seville, Cadiz, Granada, Valencia, etc. It does not seem unlikely that small specimens of A. belia from Spain and Portugal have often been considered as belonging to this species. The coloured figure in my own former work is by no means satisfactory ; and does not give a proper idea of the peculiar cloudy and undefined character of the markings of the u.s. h.w., which are very distinct from those of PRAT, MWe WV LARVA. Pubescent, green, very finely speckled 114 with black, with a lateral white stripe, above which is ared one. Feeds on Jbheris pinnata. V1., VII. (Boisd.) a. var. bellexina Boisd. Ind.p. 2. Lg. B. E. p. 38. Smaller than typical tagis. F.w. with larger white spots at apex, disc, spot narrower. U.s. how. ground colour of a lighter and more yellowish-green, with more numerous and well- defined white spots. HaAB. The Basses Alpes and other parts of South-Hast France. At Digne, at about 2,000 feet altitude, it is common in many places VE; avi b. var. insularis. Stgr. Cat. 1871, p.4. Apex of f.w. paler, spots of underside very small, disc. spot f.w. narrower than in bellezina. HAs. Corsica and Sardinia. This and the last variety are locai races of A. tagis, or else two forms of a distinct species. They always seem to me to differ from typical tagis almost as much as does A. belia. e. (var.) pechi Ster. R.H.p. 135. 32—33 m Seems to be a small and dark form of A. tagis. Has. Lambessa, Algeria. IV., V. d. (lvar.) tomyris Christoph. R.H. p. 135. 35—36 mm. A form described as occurring at Askabad, Caucasus; with greyish-green. coloration in place of dark-green or yellowish. I have not seen specimens of these two latter forms; they may be distinct species. 5 (To be continued.) TWO NEW VARIETIES BUTTERFLIES. PIERIS RAPAE, VAR. Rossi. OF EING a member of the Italian Entomological Society, I have received the ‘‘ Transactions” for April-June, 1900, and have been interested in a catalogue of Professor P. Stefanelli, a zealous collector of Lepidoptera in Tuscany. He describes therein a new variety of the common garden white butterfly, Pieris rapae. Thinking that the readers of SCIENCE-GossIp who, like myself, study the articles on the ‘‘ Butterflies of the Palaearctic Region ” by Dr. H. C. Lang, would like particulars of this new variety, which must be added to the list of varieties of P. rapae given by H. C. Lang in SCIENCE-GossIP for July, 1900, I translate Professor P. Stefanelli’s description :— “ Pieris rapae var. rossii Stefanelli. I have here separated from var. mannii, giving it a different name, this form, which is really a summer modi- fication of that variety, because of the marked characters of the 2 sex. “ MALE.—Size of summer brood of typical P. rapae, i.e. much larger than that of var. mannii. External margin of f.w. more rounded than in that variety. Upper side: All the markings much larger than in var. mannii and deep black. The medium spot on fw. nearly always with external margin slightly SCIENCE-GOSSIP. concave and with the rest of the margin shading off into the white. Wings white at the base. Under side: First black spot of f.w. very dark and generally square or rectangular. H.w. bright yellow slightly suffused with brown. “‘ FEMALE.—Corresponds in size to typical 2 of summer brood. External margin asin g. Upper side: markings of f.w. deep black as in ¢@, but larger. The triangular apical spot with the internal border very convex. First spot markedly square and often indented; it generally is joined to the external border by one or two black streaks, some- times joined by a slight black shading. Thesecond spot is nearly always lunular with its concave side turned towards the base. Under side: first spot of f.w. shaped somewhat the same as on upper side. Tip and a portion of external margin of a fine yolk yellow. H.w. of the same colour slightly suffused with black. “ HABITAT.—Near Florence. Common enough in July and at the beginning of August on the hill of Fiesole, where in 1875 I found it for the first time and where thenceforth I have captured it every year. A fine 9 which I observed with pleasure in the collection of Mr. Roger Verity was by him found near the -Forte dei Marmi, near Pisa, July 27th, 1899.” - I may add to Professor Stefanelli’s description that the general aspect of P. rapae var. rossii 2 is similar to that of Pieris cheiranthi 2. I have this summer made a special study of var. rossii in the © locality near Pisa, in the pine woods, and. have had the fortune of capturing a good number of fine specimens. I should be very glad, as far as lam able as a private collector, to send specimens to students of Rhopalocera in exchange for other species; and if any one finds specimens corresponding to my de- scription in other parts of the world, I should be grateful to them if they would let me know, as well as of the variety of the Clouded Yellow (Colias edusa). Professor Stefanelli also describes a new form of Colias edusa as follows :— CoLias EDUSA AB. g¢ FAILLAE (STEFANELLI). MaLe.—tThe same as typical C. edusa ; but with the antemarginal stripes of both the anterior and posterior wings streaked with yellow along all the nervules which cross them. HABITAT.—Found sometimes often and some- times rarely near Florence from April to November, in company with Colias edusa. ROGER VERITY. 1 Via Leone Decimo, Florence. [taly. UNIVERSITY COLLEGE. LoNDON.—The Senate of this College has appointed, as Principal, Professor George Carey Foster, B.A.; F.R.S., F.C.S. He is a Fellow of the College and Professor of Physics, and has been member of the Senate and Examiner of the London University. SCIENCE-GOSSTP. NOTICES BY JOHN T, The Text Book of Zoology. Part I., Mammals. vii+138 pp., 95 in. x63 in. Part IT., Birds, Reptiles, Fishes. vi+166 pp., with numerous illustrations. (London: Adam & Charles Black, 1900.) 3s. 6d. each part. This work, which is largely used in the schools and colleges of Germany, is treated from a bio- logical standpoint. It has been translated from the German by Rudolf Rosenstock, M.A., and is edited by J. 'T. Cunningham, M.A. Considering the range of the subjects included in these parts, and the room occupied by the many illustrations, the author has fairly covered the subjects. In the earlier portion of the work will be found physio- logical details, and these are followed by classifica- tion, commencing with the anthropoid apes. The classification is by no means the most modern, and this is unfortunate, as the general appearance of the work and low price will cause a wide circula- tion. The nomenclature is in the same category, which is surprising, considering the English editing, where opportunity occurred to bring it even with modern works. The two parts will be followed by one on Insects, the three constituting a complete volume. Pre-Historic Times. By the Right Hon. Lord AVEBURY. Sixth Edition, revised. xxxii+616pp., with xl plates and 243 illustrations. (London: Williams & Norgate. 1900.) 21s. The fact that this well-known standard work has reached a sixth edition is evidence of its value to general readers, as well as to ethnologists and archaeologists. The present issue has been revised and brought up to recent knowledge, but the general plan of the work is maintained. This is explained by its full title—viz. ‘‘ Pre-Historic Times as illustrated by Ancient Remains and the Manners and Customs of Modern Savages.” The many and beautiful illustrations are most helpful in better understanding the plain but accurate letterpress. Lord Avebury is to be congratulated on this new edition, which is sure to further popu- larise a fascinating subject for investigation by cultured people. CARRINGTON, sy OTTO SCHMEIL. The Antarctic Regions. By Dr. KARL FRICKER. Xli+292 pp., 95 in. +64 in., with 12 plates, maps, and 46 other illustrations. (London: Swan Sonnenschein & Co., Limited, 1900.) 7s. 6d. The recent revival of antarctic exploration has naturally brought forward new literature of the subject. Among the modern books on the Southern ice regions, with accounts of attempts to penetrate the great frozen cap, one of the best we have seen is that now before us. It gives an extensive review of what has been done in times past towards the exploration and investigation of the flora and fauna of those regions. The book is divided into sections—I. Position and Limits; II. History of Discovery ; III. Conformation of the Surface and Geological Structure; IV. Climate; V. The Ice; Jor 1900. IT5 VI. Faunaand Flora ; VII. Discovery; VIII. The illustrations are The Future of Antarctic Bibliography of the subjéct very striking, and doubtless give a good idea to the reader of the fantastically wild character of the ice-shapes and more stable land-contours. This book should have a wide circulation, as within the next few years we shall doubtless hear much from the Antarctic. The Lepidoptera ‘of the British Islands. By CHARLES G. BARRETT, F.E.S. Vol. VI. 388 pp., 9 in.x6 in. (London: Lovell Reeve & Co., Limited. 1900.) We have already on several occasions noticed this extensive work. The present volume includes the remainder of the Trifidae, following with the families Sarrathripidae, Gonopteridae , and Quadri- fidae, the Deltoides, the Brephides, concluding with the commencement of the Geometrina, which are carried as far as genus 9, Halia. There is an appendix of additions and corrections to the former volume as well as the present. Heperimental Karms. Reports for 1899. 443 pp., 10 in. x 63 in., with many plates and illustrations in text. (Ottawa: $8. E. Dawson. 1900.) Dr. William Saunders, LL.D., F.R.S.E., F.L.8., the Director of the Canadian Experimental Farms and editor of these reports, is much to be con- eratulated upon their fulness and usefulness, ex- tending even beyond the Dominion, whose Govern- ment publishes them. The year’s work which these reports summarise has evidently been successful and voluminous. Among the more interesting articles is one on hy} pridisation in the genus Pyrus, with the object of obtaining a hardy apple- ‘like fruit that will stand the intense cold of winter in the North-West Territories. There are several plates of the trees and the fruit which has resulted from these experiments. The whole report teems with interest in scientific agriculture and horti- culture, subjects that have been for many years past successfully investigated under the direction of Professor Saunders. Year-Book of Photography and Amateurs Guide 674 pp., 7 in.x4 in., with numerous plates and other illustrations. (London: ‘* Photo- eraphic News ” Office, 1900.) 1s. net. The editor, Mr. E. J. Wall, F.R.P.8., isto be con- eratulated on the excellence of this year’s issue. It is really a marvel of usefulness and cheapness. The illustrations alone are worth far more than the cost of the whole book. Its literary pages are full of valuable hints for amateurs, and there are a number of most instructive articles. ‘The whole production shows evidence of care and judgment in its preparation. Hirst Stage Botany. DSc.) Ph.D., ELS. vir-+ 2 trated by 236 figures. 1900.) 2s. This is another volume of the “* Organised Science Series,” and its intention is to be a guide for the elementary stage of the Science and Art Depart- ment. It refers only to the flowering plants. Dr. Ewart’s reputation, formed while he was Deputy Professor of Botany in the Mason University College, and later as Extension Lecturer of the University of Oxford, is a sufficient guarantee of the correctness of these early lessons in structural botany. We can recommend it to any of our readers who are commencing to take an interest in the organisation of plant life. oh ALFRED J. EWART, 52 pp., 7in. x 5 in., illus- (London: Wiebe Clive: 116 The Flora of Bournemouth. By EDWARD F. Linton, Oxon. viii+290 pp., 73 in. x 5 in., with map. (Bournemouth: H.G. Commin, 1900.) 8s. 6d. This is a valuable addition to the local lists of plants of this country. It is not confined to Bournemouth proper, but to a twelve-mile radius and the Isle of Purbeck. The district is one of considerable interest to botanists, as it contains no less than 1,137 plants out of 1,218 that occur in the county of Hampshire, including the Isle of Wight. several of which are rare. The introduc- tion to this work occupies a couple of dozen pages, and treats upon topography, climate, geology, and other important features connected with the locality and the plan of the book. The flora con- tains a phanerogamia and some of the cryptogamia as represented by equiseta, club mosses, and blad- derworts. Of course the work is simply a list with localities, and not one descriptive of species; but the stations mentioned are numerous, and the book as a whole will be found a necessity for field botanists visiting the interesting district to which it refers. Royal Society of Queensland Proceedings. Vol. xv for 1899. -161+xxv pp., 93 in.x 53 in. Mlustrated by 3 plates. (Brisbane: G. Pole & Co. 1900.) There are various interesting papers which were read during 1899 before the society. These treat of several subjecis, including ‘“‘ Hniomology oi a Tea-Tree Swamp,” “‘ Besinnings of Life.” * Nature and Origin of Living Matter,” “List of Minerals from North Queensland,” ** Description oi Some Caves near Camaoweal,” “ Life History of Mos- quito,” with illustrations, “New Species of Lepi- doptera.” and the Presidential address. In this he advocates the greater attention in Australia, on the part of authorities of public libraries, to books on scientific subjects. There is difiiculiy of ob- taining such volumes by scattered students in thinly populated districis. Manchester Museum. Report for 1899-1900. 280 pp.. 10in.x6in. (Manchester: J. E. Cornish, 1900.) 6d. The Manchester Museum at Owens College is one of the most progressive in the country. Every year we hear of additions and improvements. The period covered by this report is no exception. A new room, measuring 45 ft. x 50 ft.. has been made to hold the “Dresser” Collection of Birds, which are arranged in dust-iight cabinets. It is lit by electric light. In other departments additions have come by exchange with the Musée d'Histoire Naturelle in Paris and elsewhere. The geological museum has been improved and the imporiant collections of mollusca made by the late Mr. Layard, his anthropological collection, and the ** Schill ” collection of Lepidopiera are now features at Owens College. The Section of Botany has also Increased. Altogether Mr. Hoyle, the Director ot the Museum, and his siaff are to be congratulated on the year’s work. American Aleurodidae. By A. L. QUAINTANCE, M.S. 79 pp.,10 in.x6 in. Eight plates and 16 illustrations. (Washington: Government Printing Office. 1900.) This is an important addition to the knowledge of a little-known group of animals. A number of new species are described and figured by the author, who has supplied excellent drawings for reference. Anyone working at this group in Europe should not fail to get this work. SCIENCE-GOSSTIP. The Unknown. By M. CAMILLE FLAMMARION, sili + 487 pp., 9in. x 52 in. (London and New York: Harper & Brothers, 1900.) 7s. 6d. This book is a translation of the French work **L’Inconnu.” and is an endeavour to reduce the study of what is usually called “ Spiritualism ” and the “Occult” to a scientific basis. M. Camille Flammarion, who is the popular French astro- nomer, very justly points out that “the unknown of yesterday may be recognised to-morrow as truth.” -It is essentially unscientific to condemn any proposition as impossible which has not been thoroughly investigated and disproved. Compara- tively a short time since, Auguste Comte limited the study of astronomy to the distances and move- ments of planets and stars. ‘‘ We can never,” he said. “find out what is their chemical composi- tion.” Five years after his death in 1857, spectral analysis had shown the chemical composition of the planets, and stars were classed in the order of their chemicalnature. The book beforeus deals with Telepathic Communications, Hallucinations, the Psychic Action of One Mind upon Another, Dreams, Divination of the Future, and Magnetism. The examples given of the use of hyprotism for medi- cinal purposes are similar to those described by M. Bernheim in his work on “Suggestive Thera- peuties.” The instances of psychic force are care- fully collected and set before the reader. Whether M. Flammarion can be held to prove, as he claims, that psychic forces exist which “‘can transmit thoughts and impressionsto human beings at a dis- tance, without the intervention of the senses,” he at any rate deserves the thanks of all thinking people for the painsiaking and scientific manner in which he has treated a subject that charlatanism or actual fraud have done much in the past to drag into disrepute, and prevent earnest thinkers from investi- gaiing in a systematic manner. We would, how- ever, suggest that the incidents related would be oi greater value if the names and addresses of those testifying were more often given for authen- ticity. In fact. the letter “X.” so commonly used in French newspaper reports, is rather too much in evidence to inspire confidence: The book is ended by a chapter entitled “‘ Conclusion,” in which the author sums up his views. Though not deny- ing the possibilities of some of his hypotheses, we fear there is a tendency on his side too readily to accept mere statements on subjects which from their nature render difficult accurate investigation. The whole matter is one of great interest to human beings. To what extent other animals are affected by psychic forces we have no trustworthy means of ascertaining ; neither do we know whether they are the result of the recent institution of a “new sense” due to man’s Civilisation, ora ‘“ dying sense ” which may be becoming obsolete.—F. W. Works on Photography in the Library of the Patent Office. 62 pp., 6 in. x 4 in. (London: H.M. Stationery Office. 1900.) 6d. We are glad to observe this, the first of a bio- graphical series of the various subjects included in that useiul institution, the library of the Patent Office in London. This number includes not only the works on photography, but also on the allied arts and sciences. The present list comprises 557 works, including seventy-three serials, wholly or in part photographic, and representing 1,300 volumes. To this is added a key to the classification of headings. : SCIENCE-GOSST/P, In Birdland with FWield-qlass and Camera. By Oniver G. PIKE. xvi+ 280 pp., 74 in. x5 in., with 83 illustrations. (London: T. Fisher Unwin.) 6s. As a writer on country lore, the author of this book gives promise of future good work, but needs experience and a closer attention to the style of classical English writers. He evidently possesses a natural aptitude for describing the beautiful side of nature, though at present he is rather colloquial, and his chapters would be improved by a less epistolary vein. ‘The photographic reproductions 117 YVear-Book of Scientific and Learned Societies of Great Britain and Ireland. 296 pp.,9 in. x 5X in. (London: Charles Griffin & Co., Limited. 1900.) Zs. 6d. wn This most useful publication, founded in 1884, should be more widely known, and in the library of every learned society. Year by year its value increases, as it not only contains a directory of scientific and learned societies, but also lists of the papers read before them during the previous session, in fourteen of the leading departments of research. he Year-Book is divided into fifteen NEST OW SHORT-EARED OWl. From “In Birdland.” add greatly to the appearance of the book, which, as a whole, is very readable. One point of interest lies in the fact that many of the observations have been made in suburban London. We can recom- mend “In Birdland,” to the general reader. By permission of the publisher we reproduce one of the illustrations representing a nest of short-eared owls. Some of the pictures are decidedly pretty, yet a little more attention is necessary in focussing the backgrounds. sections, so that any subject may be readily con- sulted independently of more general societies’ work. On referring to some of the earlier annual volumes of this publication, one cannot help being struck with the steady increase in the information gathered by its editor. It is much to be regretted that the information necessary for this Year-Book has not been supplied by so many as about fifty societies. We hope their secretaries will soon amend their ways, and add to its completeness. CONDUCTED BY F,. SHILLINGTON SCALES, F.R.M.S. FORMALIN AS A PRESERVATIVE.—A 3 per cent. solution of formalin is preferable to spirits of wine for preserving certain species of insects, as it does not affect their colours. I find, however, that specimens so preserved and afterwards dried deposit an oily dew, or in some cases crystals, on the slide and cover-glass if mounted as dry objects for the microscope. Washing appears to have little or no effect. Can anyone tell me how to obviate this without discolouring the specimens?—Z#. G. Wheler, Swansfield House, Aliwick. MANCHESTER MICROSCOPICAL SociEry.—The Transactions and Annual Report of this Society for 1899 have reached us, and we again congratulate the members on the work they have done, and on their position. The Society is the most enterprising and successful of any microscopical society in the provinces, and well deserves its success. The membership during the year appears to have been well maintained. The Council speak of the attend- ance and the interest in the meetings as being in every sense satisfactory. ‘The Extension Section appears to have delivered no fewer than thirty-seven lectures in the neighbourhood of Manchester during the winter: by so doing they have benefited many outside their own membership, and doubtless added to the popularity as much as to the usefulness of the Society. We commend this scheme of extension to the notice of other societies. one of which, the well-known Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union, has, we believe, a similar scheme in hand. The President of the Manchester Society for the year is Professor Sydney J. Hickson, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., of Owens College, and his presidential address on z0o- phytes is the first paper in the report. Perhaps the most important paper is one by Mr. F. W. Gamble, of Owens College, on ‘‘'The Power of Colour-change in Animals,” a subject in which the author is specially interested, and concerning which he and Mr. F. W. Keeble have been able to make original investigations. ‘The most interesting papers to our readers will be one on ‘“ Collecting Lepidoptera,” by Mr. H. G. Willis, from which we would have liked to make extracts had space permitted, and another on ‘ Arboreal Aphidae,” by Mr. A. T. Gillanders. Amongst other papers we may parti- cularise one on ‘‘ Termites and Ants of West Africa,” by Mr. Mark L. Sykes, and another on ‘The Pol- lination of Flowers,” by Mr. Charles Turner. There are several excellent plates. Mr. C. F. Rousselet’s ‘Method of Preserving and Mounting Rotifera” is given in full; and as this method has been brought prominently before microscopists, we reprinted it in our last issue. The Report can be obtained, post free for 1s. 9d., from the Hon. Secretary, Mr. E. C. Stump, 16 Herbert Street, Moss Side, Manchester. A list of the Extension Section’s lectures can be obtained from Mr. George Wilks, 56. Brookland Street, Eccles New Road, Manchester. SCIENCE-GOSSIP. Swift’s NEw PoRTABLE MICROSCOPE.—Messrs. James Swift & Son have recently brought out a new folding microscope for travelling, for bedside diagno- sis, or for field work. It is furnished with both coarse and fine adjustments, the latter being markedly superior to those usually fitted to microscopes of this type. The optical tube carrying the objectives | | SWIF?’S PORTABLE MICROSCOPE IN CASE. | i is made to slide in its fitting so as to allow very low power objectives to be used. There is a draw- tube permitting of a total extension of tube-length to 7 inches. The stage is larger than usual, and carries a sub-stage ring fitted with Abbé condenser and iris diaphragm. The back leg is divided so as to pass over the fine adjustment screw when folded, whilst the stage is hinged and lies flat against the Swirl’s PORTABLE MICROSCOPE. body of the microscope. The microscope packs thus into a leather case. about 9 x 3x 3 inches, and there is room for two objectives, live-box, small bottle, and sundry minor apparatus, as shown in our illustration. ‘The whole microscope is beauti- fully finished in bright brass, and is, we think, one SCIENCE-GOSSIP. of the best travelling microscopes we have seen. The price of the stand, with one eye-piece and the necessary case, but without objectives or other apparatus, is £5. RoyaL MicroscopicaL Sociery.—At the meet- ing on June 20th, the President, Mr. Carruthers, F.R.S., in the chair, Mr. C. H. J. Rogers exhibited a modification of the Rousselet compressor, in which two thin india-rubber bands, sunk into grooves, were employed to keep the cover-glass in position. The advantage of this modification is the facility with which a broken cover-glass can be replaced. Mr. Chas. Baker exhibited an acromatic substage condenser which wasa modification of Zeiss’s model of the Abbé condenser, the N.A. being 1-0, aplanatic cone 90°, lenses <4-inch diameter, working distance + inch. With the front lens removed the con- denser is suitable for use with low-power objectives. A short paper by Mr, E. B. Stringer on a new pro- jection eyepiece and an improved polarising eye- piece was taken as read. Miss Loraine Smith contributed a paper on some new microscopic fungi, and Mr. Bennett in commenting thereon referred to the proposed cultivation of fungus parasites on certain insects, especially on the Continent and in Australia and America, with a view of getting rid of insect pests, locusts, and others. The President then read a paper, and gave a lantern demonstra- tion on the structure of some palaeozoic plants. EXTRACTS FROM POSTAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY'S NOTE-BOOKS. [In accordance with the announcement in our last issue we commence the publication of extracts from the note-books of the Postal Microscopical Society. Beyond absolutely necessary editorial revision these are printed as written by the various members, without alteration or amendment. Cor- respondence on these notes will be welcomed.— Ep. Microscopy, §.-G. ] SCALE FROM LEAF OF LEMON-TREE.—The scale insects, Coccidae, members of the order Hemiptera, sub-order Homoptera, belong to that division of the sub-order which is distinguished by having only one joint on the tarsus.(') ‘The females are common on many plants, and are found both on leaves and bark. They appear as small, brown, waxy, convex lumps, more or less elliptical according to species. If the brown case be lifted, one sees a small fleshy mass, with eggs, and usually a cottony substance. The fleshy mass is the female, which dies as soon as the eggs are laid. The eggs hatch into a small, active larval insect with eyes, legs, antennae, and a sucking mouth. After a time these insects fix themselves to a leaf or the bark by means of their sucker. If they are to become females they excrete the waxy shell, throw off all legs and processes, lay their eggs,and die. If they are to develop into males, they draw in their legs and become chrysalids, with a process on each side containing the future wings. The adult males are seldom seen. The male and larva are figured in Miss Ormerod’s- book. A friend of mine is now trying by an ingenious contrivance to obtain speci- mens of the males and larvae. He has run the branch of a rose tree, not cut off, into a lamp chimney, and packed the ends with cotton wool. He thinks that when the scale eggs on the branch (1) Query—apparent joint ?—[Ed. Micros, ] 119g hatch out he will find the larvae inside the glass. The second slide shows a scale in which a parasite, probably an ichneumon fly, has laid its egg, and the grub has hatched and eaten all the scale eggs. The grub is shown lying by the side of the scale. The scales thus attacked are usually of a lighter colour than the rest. SHEEP-TICK IMAGO.—A tick is a degenerate fly that has lost its wings. (*) ‘The sheep-tick passes the larval state inside the body of the mother. ‘The pupae may be found in little brown shiny cases about three millimetres in diameter. If these are broken open the fully formed tick is seen inside. These are better adapted for mounting than the SHEEP-TICK. adult insect which has already sucked blood. ‘The spiracles should be noticed, especially the thoracic ones; also the toothed claws and the tree-like formation between them, answering to the pad on the foot of the house-fly. APHIS WItH YOUNG.—The peculiarity in this slide is that the winged female in November ought by all rules to be oviparous. The fact of this one being viviparous at that time of year shows how circumstances modify natural habits. ‘The chrys- anthemum from which this aphis was taken was in a greenhouse; had it been in the open air the aphis would have laid eggs—at least, if entomologists are to be believed. In the slide showing the pupal aphis the wings are still seen confined in their cases. Both larval and pupal aphides produce young; a phenomenon known as Poedogenesis. Aphides during the summer are viviparous and produce their young parthenogetically. In the autumn the union of the sexes takes place and the result is, not living young, but eggs. ‘The species of aphides are very numerous. ‘The aphis which spins the wool on apple trees has no cornicles. Aphides, like Coccidae, are of the order Hemiptera, and sub-order Homoptera, but belong to that divi- sion of the sub-order which has two joints on the tarsus (Dimerae). (2) The “sheep-tick” here alluded to is Melophagus ovinus, belonging to the family Hippoboscidae, order Diptera. The ticks proper belong, of course, to the Acari, and come under the head of Arachnida. Jrodes reduvius (Vide S.G., Vol. VI.. 0.s., p. 5) is also known as “ the sheep-tick.” [Ed. Micros.] 120 OVIPOSITOR OF TrpULA.—This is a curious organ of the ‘“ Daddy-long-legs,” but the parts are not arranged on the slide as in nature. There are 250 (#) species of ZYipula known. They lay their OVIPOSITOR OF TIPULA. egos in the ground or on the surface in batches of The eggs are black. The grub pro- is known 200 or more. duced from the egg as the ‘leather BATILEDORE-LIKE OBJECT IN OVIPOSITOR oF TIPULA. jacket,” and is very destructive. This last remark applies to only two of the 250 species. I should very much like to know what those Dendieielonre: like objects lying near may be. PARASITE FROM HUMBLE BEE.—These are mites and near akin to spiders. They have eight legs and are therefore not insects. The crab-like toothed jaws are curious. I do not know the name > G17 LEA JAW OF PARASITE OF HUMBLE BEE. this mite, but it cannot be mistaken for Stylops spencui, parasitic on bees and other Hymenoptera, which used to have an order all to itself (Strep- sipteraY, but which is now included amongst Coleoptera. DissECTA MEMBRA OF COMMON WEEVIL.—It is no use mounting this very hard and opaque beetle whole, as one camnot see anything in that way. The weevils are an order of Coleoptera, the common weevil being an example, and are furnished with long snouts. Hence they are also called Rhynco- (3) There are over 1,000.—[Ed. Micros.] SCIENCE-GOSSIP. phora=snout bearers. ‘The really distinguishing mark of the order is the elbowed antenna. These common weevils are found in immense numbers in the wheat imported from Calcutta and from Aus- GIZZARD AND ANTENNAE OF COMMON WEEYIL. tralia, and infest granaries and mills. They bore a hole in the wheat grain with their long snouts, which are furnished with a row of teeth at the tip, by a sort of turning movement, and in this hole the egg is laid. The hole is then plugged with gum secreted by the female, and the grain looks none the worse. The egg hatchesin afew days. The EYES AND SNOUT OF OOMMON WEEVIL. change from larva to pupa, and from pupa to imago, takes’ place within the grain. The imago eats its way out. They are said to breed only “when the temperature is above 65° F. It is a remarkable thing that they never injure the germ of the grain, which therefore grows as well when it has served as a nest and home for this little pest as previously. The eyes at the base of the snout should be noticed, and also the gizzard. OvIPOsIrOR OF WILD BEE.—I do not know the name of this bee. There are, I believe, over 200 species of wild bees in England. This is large, long, and black, one that I have never seen except in the autumn, and which seems especially to frequent the common red fuchsia. The organ is undeniably curious, but lacks the finish generally found in nature.—(Rev.) &. 8. Pattrick. REMARKS. APHIS WitH YouNG.—Is it certain this speci- men was in a viviparous (as stated in the notes) condition when mounted? May it not have been in an advanced ovo-viviparous condition at the time, with the outer substance of the ova very thin and delicate, so that each was smashed up in the bursting of the insect by pressure? Do not some SCLENCE-GOSSIP. of the young still show appearances of having por- tions of outer envelopes around them? Are not the “ battledore-like objects ” mentioned in the notes, ova, still having the filaments adhering to them which attached them to the ovary ?—W. Danson. PARASITE FROM HUMBLE BEE.—This belongs, no doubt, to the family Gamasinae. I have a number of species of this family in my possession, but not this particular one. Several species are found parasitic on beetles and bees. I think, on referring to a written description 1 have by me, that it is Gamasus coleoptratoruwm, Linn., and if so, to bear its name, it ought to have been found on a beetle instead of a bee. Shuckard does not men- tion it in his “ British Bees.” I have measured the body of one of these on this slide, and it is =: of an inch long; but in my description of G. coleaptratorum it should be only +4, so the cor- rect name is doubtful.— Charles D. Soar. I have kept this box a few days over time, as I was much interested and pleased with its contents. The scale leaf mounts are very instructive, and it is a subject which has been coming to the front lately. ‘The position of the ovipositor isnot shown OVIPOSITOR OF WILD Bun. -correctly in the slide, and I have taken a photo of the same object from my own cabinet to show its true position. I have tried to find out what the three little affairs are, but cannot get any informa- tion. I see Mr. Dawson suggests that these battle- dore-like objects are ova, still having the filament attached. I donot think so, for this reason. In Mr. Pattrick’s slide there are three out of position. In my photo there are also three, but in position, and it seems hardly likely that there should be exactly three ova in two different objects. In Knowledge, of November, 1894, there was a good account of the Crane Fly, or Daddy-long-legs, by Mr. Butler. He says, ‘‘'‘The hinder part of the body of the female tapers regularly to a hard and sharp point. This acute tip is the hardest part of the body, and necessarily so, as it has to do the hardest work. It constitutes an egg-laying instrument of superior quality, and is composed of four pieces disposed in pairs. On the upper side are two long and pointed pieces which form the sharp tip, and are used as borers, and underneath these is the other pair, considerably shorter and blunter, their 121 function being to guide the eggs in their passage into the hole prepared for them by the pair of borers.” ‘he whole apparatus, therefore. is some- thing like a combination of an auger and a spoon. The photo will make this clear. When egg-laying the creature balances itself on its two hind lees and ovipositor, whilst the fore front legs are up in the air. I send also photos of Sheep-tick and ovipositor of Wild Bee. Is this the ovipositor ? It is a strange one.—T7. G. Jefferys. OViposITOR OF ‘TIPULA.—Had there been only two of those battledore forms one might have suggested that they were the “ halteres ” or abortive wings of the Tipula, but as there are three, that suggestion will not do. The viscera attached show that they are connected with some of the internal arrangements.—(fev.) Adam Clarke Smith. MICROSCOPY FOR BEGINNERS. By F. SHILLINGTON SCALES, F.R.M.S. (Continued from p. 91.) Instead of gold-size other cements may be used ; but we have found gold-size, especially if old, most satisfactory, save for certain fluid mounts. Bell’s Cement is excellent, and so is Ward’s Brown Cement, whilst Mr. Cole recommends Watson’s Special Club Black Enamel. Marine Glue is to us an abomination, and we have long discontinued its use. Under any circumstance it must be applied hot. We have dealt at considerable length with mount- ing opaque or dry objects because it is the easiest, and forms a natural introduction to mounting in pre- servative media. There are many more or less specialised methods of the latter, but it will be sufficient if we confine ourselves to two—namely, Canada balsam and glycerine jelly. These two methods, and especially the first, are used univer- sally. Objects or sections may need careful pre- paration beforehand, but we will deal with these methods afterwards, assuming here that, as fre- quently happens, no such preparation is necessary. Canada balsam is best purchased ready for use, in which case it will be obtained as a solution in benzole or xylol. It should be kept in a wide- mouthed bottle, provided with a glass rod for dropping the contents upon the slide, and with a closely-fitting cap instead of stopper. The bottle must be kept closed as much as possible. Glycerine jelly is practically a mixture of glycerine and gelatine which liquefies when warmed. It can be obtained in shilling bottles fitted with an ordinary cork. The first important distinction to be noticed between them is that whilst objects mounted in Canada balsam must be freed from every trace of water, those mounted in Glycerine jelly must be first soaked in water or some aqueous medium. In both cases a mounting-table and lamp should be provided. The table in its simplest form is a plate of brass about 4 x 3 inches, standing on four legs about 3 or 4 inches high, and it will cost about 3s. 6d. The lamp is asmall glass methylated spirit lamp, with a glass top, such as is used in laborato- ries to go beneath the table. This can be purchased for ls. The actual process of mounting in Canada balsam may be carried out as follows. We will 122 assume that the object has received a final soak- ing in turpentine. Having carefully cleaned both slip and cover-glass, the latter is taken up in a pair of forceps, and, the siide having been breathed upon to slightly moisten it, the cover-glass is placed on the slide and pressed there to make it stay in position. ‘The slide is then placed on the table and the lamp lighted and put beneath. In less than half a minute the plate will be sufficiently warm—the heat should be no greater than will allow of the finger being placed on the end of the slide. A drop or two of balsam is then placed on the cover-glass which is on the slide, care being taken that it does not overrun the margin of the former. Into this the object is then lowered or slid by means of a section-lifter (a cover-glass held in a pair of forceps may serve) and a needle set in a handle. Care should be taken to get the object right down under the balsam and close to the cover-glass. The object should then be examined with a pocket-lens to make sure that its position is satisfactory, and to see that no air-bubbles are visible in or around it Itis then placed under a watch-glass or other cover to protect it from dust, and put aside for twelve hours to harden. It will be found that the balsam skins over very rapidly on exposure to the air, and no time, therefore, must be lost. The warming of the slide partly ob- viates this. After hardening for twelve hours it is as well to make an examination under the lowest power of the microscope before proceed- ing further, to make sure that the object itself is properly in position and free from air-bubbles or contained air. The slide is then again placed on the mounting-table, and the insertion of a needle will readily release the cover-glass. Warm as before, apply a fresh drop to the centre of the hardened balsam, lift with a pair of forceps, reverse quickly, and lower gently down upon the slide, pressing down carefully so as to squeeze out the excess of balsam and to carry any air-bubbles with it. The cover should now lie flat on the slide. It is better to have a slight excess of balsam rather than a deficiency. In case of the latter a drop must be put against the cover-glass, when it will quickly run in by capillary attraction. Small bubbles, other than any embedded in the object itself, may be neglected, one of the advantages of Canada balsam being the readiness with which it will absorb these. ‘There are certain objects. how- ever, which are most difficult to free from larger bubbles than the balsam can absorb. In such cases it is advisable to again heat the mounting- table, whilst holding the cover steadily, but not too heavily, in position by pressing on its centre with the handle of a dissecting-needle, until the balsam is seen to boil. At once remove the lamp, but hold the cover-glass steady until the balsam seems to have set again. By this means, though it needs caution, the bubbles will be driven clear of the cover-glass by the ebullition of the balsam. Wire spring clips can be obtained for a penny each, and it is advisable to slip one of these on before putting the slide on one side to harden. ‘This may take twenty-four hours, or it may take a week, accord- ing to the amount of balsam used or exuded. Under any circumstances it is well not to hurry matters. The excess can then be removed with a sharp knife nearly up to the cover-glass, and the remainder cleaned up nicely with a rag dipped in turpentine, methylated spirit, or benzole. (To he continued.) SCIENCE-GOSSTIP. Ae THE death of Professor Pierce Adolphus Simpson, M.A., M.D., of the Glasgow University, removes an eminent teacher of medicine and askilled botanist. He died on August 11th at the age of sixty-three. By the death of Dr. John Anderson, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S., etc., there passes away, at the age of sixty-six, a well- lenaavia zoologist and a ourien Superintendent of the Indian Museum, Calcutta. Dr. Anderson published some important literature upon science and travel in Asia. DOUBTLESS some of our readers have kept ants, bees, and wasps for scientific observation. It is. well thy should know, in regard to bees at least, the County Court judge at Basingstoke has decided Wier Lion, that any person suffering through the stings of bees. kept by another person has Tight of action for damages against the owner of the bees, who ac- cordingly judgment for damages, THE reports of British Consuls often form interesting reading. A recent one by Mr. michael, in the Consular service at Leghorn, deals with the so-called briar-root industry. root pipes, as probably most of our readers are aware, are made from the root of Hrica arborea, which flourishes on the mountain slopes of the So pier Northern Mediteranean and its islands. is, of course, a corruption of the French bruyere, heath or broom. Although it is not likely this heath will be exterminated by the industry, it is one that will probably exhaust itself through lack of material within another decade. WRITING to the Zimes on August 13th last, Dr. Mortimer Granville draws attention to a statement which has been going the rounds of the press relating to the alleged recent causative relations between phantiasis.” 1878 the late Dr. Spencer Cobbold read a paper summarising what was then known subject to the Medical Society of London. Dr. filaria Granville does not consider that the recently pub- lished information adds anything to what he and others placed before the Medical Society, the Quekett Club, and other scientific bodies more than twenty years ago. WiItH that aptitude, so usual among our American cousins, of turning to advantage the excitement of a passing event, Nature has been made to contri-- bute to the amusing side of the forthcoming Presidential election. This will turn upon the silver and gold standards of currency question, the former being represented by Mr. Bryan and the latter by Mr. McKinley. We have received a packet of literature from the Jumping Bean Company, who have introduced these well-known seeds into the controversy. Some have been gilded and others silvered. One each of these are sold with a race track for ten cents. the gold bean wins the course. > in a case brought before iim, gave Car-- The briar-. “discovery of and. ele- He points out that as far back as. on the The amusement. is obtained by watching whether the silver or SCIENCE-GOSSIP. CONDUCTED BY JAMES QUICK. UNIveRSIty OF BIRMINGHAM.—The principal- ship of the. recently constituted University of Birmingham has been given to Professor Oliver J. Lodge, D.Sc., F.R.S., Professor of Experimental Physics, University College, Liverpool. Professor J. H, Poynting, D.Sce., F.R.S., has been nominated Dean. In Dr. Lodge, Liverpool loses a man whose remarkable energy and deep knowledge of physics have more than preserved the required status of the college. Professor Poynting’s sphere of work will not change, as he has hitherto occupied the Chair of Physics at the Mason College, Birming- ham. ELECTRICAL DISCHARGES UPON PHOTOGRAPHIC PLATES.—Images may be produced upon a sensi- tive plate by means of an induction coil, using two needles as poles. ‘The positive needle should touch the plate, the negative needle should be fixed about half a millimétre away. A sheet of metal below the plate will facilitate the action. Tne image produced consists of numerous small black lines, resembling arrows directed from the positive to the negative pole. It is formed without develop- ment, and is probably due to the fusion of the silver bromide and of the medium, and after pro- longed action to the reduction of the bromide. If iodide of gold is substituted for bromide of silver, the image consists of continuous brown lines con- nected by many branches. WAVE-Morion MopEn.—A striking method of illustrating wave-motion is the following :-——An ordinary mercury tray about 70 50x10 centi- métres has its smooth bottom painted white, and is then filled to a depth of about half a centimétre with water slightly darkened with ink. The discoloration of the water must be such that the bottom of the tray is clearly visible through the layer of liquid when at rest. If now a round vessel of about 8 to 10 centi- métres diameter is placed in the tray a circular wave is set up spreading outwards. The motion of this wave can be clearly followed, as the thickness of the liquid at the crest of the wave being so much greater than in the trough, the appearance is that of a dark band travelling over a lighter back- ground. Removing the disturbing cause gives a second wave; and if the vessel is kept moving with a period of one or two seconds, a train of waves of the same period is produced. Many other interest- ing effects can be shown, such as interference, reflection, and refraction. Plane waves can also be produced by substituting a rectangular block for the round vessel. EXPANSION OF AIR,—A simple apparatus for the determination of the co-efficient of expansion of air can be arranged by taking a glass U-tube 3 or 4 millimétres bore, the limb containing the air being about 30 centimétres long and closed at the end. ‘The second limb is about 50 centi- métres long and open at the end. The bend of the 123 sulphuric acid to a depth centimétres. Another glass-tube is slid into the longer limb of the U-tube and dips into the acid, This tube serves as a plunger, and is used to adjust the level of the acid to the same height in each limb. The maximum temperature during experiments should not exceed 50° C., as above that value the vapour-pressure of the acid would have to be taken into account. ‘The acid, however, has an advantage over mereury, as it keeps dry the air under examination. ‘The U-tube is placed successively in water baths at various temperatures, the plunger being adjusted each time, and the measurement of volume made on withdrawal from the bath. The results obtained with the above arrangement are in close agree- ment, even if made by elementary students. tube contains strong of 10 WEHNELT INTERRUPTER.-—Much work has been done in connection with this recently introduced and valuable interrupter for induction-coil dis- charges. Investigations have shown that the interruptions are irregular, amounting to 17 per cent. in the case of the original pattern Weh- nelt instrument, and 24 per cent. with Simon’s pattern. ‘These irregularities have been discovered in an interesting manner by taking a number of mutoscopic impressions of the spark in the liquid when the break was in action. It has thus been shown that if a regular interruption is needed for any particular class of experiments, the electrolytic form must be discarded for a mercury-jet break or a turbine arrangement. It has not been possible until recently to use the Wehnelt break with a low voltage, and various theories have been put forward to account for this. Assuming that it is the oxygen accumulating at the anode which prevents tke interrupter being thus worked, any process that counteracts that accumulation must lower the minimum E.M.F. required. ‘This assumption has been put to the test by making a jet of dilute acid impinge against the electrode. With such an arrangement 24 volts suffice. to obtain an in- terrupted current of great steadiness. When the pressure from the jet becomes too high, the current becomes continuous. The impinging jet affords the break another advantage, in that it keeps the whole instrument cool. Wavy SPARK-DISCHARGE.—Those who have not seen the spark-discharge produced upon an induction coil when worked in conjunction with a Wehnelt break have an astonishing sight to witness. ‘The torrent of sparks produced and the accompanying roar are radically different from the discharge obtained with any form of spring or mercury break. When the distance between the points is reduced, the torrent of distinct sparks changes to a solid flame, curving from one terminal to the other. The frequency of the break can be so increased that the note emitted by this flame-discharge is quite shrill. Intermediate between the above two effects, another peculiar form of spark is obtained when the dischargers are a point and adisc. It consists of a large number of thin spark-lines branching out from the point and extending towards the disc like a brush. Every one of the lines has a sinusoidal wave-shape, due in reality to a spiral form of the spark-path. When the sparks are successively photographed by a mutograph, it is seen that they are very similar in outline, but that they are successively displaced with respect to each other in the direction of the disc. 124 SCIENCE-GOSS/P. CONDUCTED BY EDWARD A. MARTIN, F.G:S. CLASSIFICATION OF FossiIL CEPHALOPODS.— The cephalopoda constitute a class of molluscs of immense interest to geologists, and well repay close study, since amongst them are classified the nu- merous ammonites and belemnites which are so characteristic of Mesozoic times. The class as a whole is divided into Tetrabranchiata and Di- branchiata. The former include the ammonites and like forms, and survive alone in the pearly nautilus. The latter, the Dibranchiates, include three sub-orders, two of which are found fossil— Belemnoidea and Sepioidea—whilst the third, Octopoda, is very rarely found so in late Tertiary, and includes the living argonaut, the female of which has a delicate, single-chambered, spiral shell. The Belemnoidea are now extinct, except the genus Spirula, whose internal spiral-chambered shell is found in tropical seas. A complete belemnite consists of three distinct parts: (1) the guard (osselet or rostrum), bearing at its anterior extremity a conical cavity, into which fitted the (2) chambered phragmacone. This is composed of a series of chambers (loculi), and the septa are pierced by the siphuncle. The wall of the phrag- macone is prolonged on the dorsal side into a plate called the (8) prodstracum, and this corresponds to the ‘‘pen” of the cuttlefishes. The Sepioidea are plentiful, ranging from Jurassic to the present day, the common cuttlefish (Sepia officinalis) being a well-known species. In this, the prodstracum, or pen, is so developed as to be of equal length with the mantle, and is the cuttle-bone of com- merce. The two other parts which were found in the belemnite are here rudimentary, the chambered phragmacone and the guard being scarcely recog- nisable. There is no siphuncle. Introduced in Triassic times, the Dibranchiates culminate in the Jurassic and Lower Cretaceous, and suddenly de- cline before the commencement of Eocene times. The Tetrabranchiata include the ammonites, the nautilus, orthoceras, ancyloceras, etc., the only surviving form being the pearly nautilus. It comprises two orders, the Nautiloidea and the Ammonoidea. The calcified points of the jaws of these forms of cephalopod are sometimes found fossil in Triassic and Neocomian strata, and are known as riyncolites and rhyncoteuthis. Aptychus is a name given to Jurassic and Cretaceous fossils which, for a long time undefined, have now come to be regarded as the opercula of ammonoid forms. They consist of two plates, the name anaptychus being given to the fossil when consisting of a single plate only.—Z. A. Martin. THE RED CRAG.—Mr. F. W. Harmer proposes to divide the Red Crag into three divisions—viz. Waltonian, Newbournian, and Butleyan—each being distinguished alike by the difference of their faunas and by the position they occupy. ‘The first, with its southern shells, is confined to the county of- Essex; the second, containing fewer southern and extinct, and a larger proportion of northern and recent species, occupies the district between the Orwell and Deben and a narrow belt of land to the east of the latter river; whilst the third, in which Arctic forms like Cardium grocn- landicum are common, is found only further to the north and to the east. It will thus be seen that these Crag deposits arrange themselves in horizon- tal and not in vertical sequence, assuming always a more boreal and more recent character as they are traced from south to north. They are the littoral accumulations of a sea retreating, not con- tinuously, but at intervals, in a northerly direction. All the beds are believed to have originated in shallow and land-locked bays, successively occupied by the Red Crag sea as it retreated northwards, which were silted up one after the other with shelly sand. Mr. Harmer suggests that the con- ditions under which the Red Crag beds originated seem to exist at the present day in Holland, where sandy material brought down by rivers, with dead shells in great abundance from the adjacent sea, is being thrown against and upon the coast, prin- cipally by means of the west winds now prevalent. From meteorological considerations, it seems prob- able that strong gales from the east may have prevailed over the Crag area during the latter part of the Pliocene epoch. No other explanation of the accumulation of such vast quantities of dead shells on the East Anglian margin of the North Sea at that period can be suggested. At the pre- sent day the eastern shores of Norfolk and Suffolk are almost destitute of such débris. Westow HILL GRAVELS.—In SCIENCE-GOssIP of April, 1899, I notice that the plateau or high- level gravel of Westow Hill, Upper Norwood, in Surrey, is referred to on the authority of Prestwich as being but little more than a patch. Recent exca- yations have shown that the gravel is here of con- siderable extent, and in a direction north to south along Church Road it cannot be far short of a mile in length. The following observations were made when electric wires were laid from the top of South Norwood Hill along the Church Road to Upper Norwood. The excavation in which the wires were laid was about four feet deep, but in some places somewhat deeper. From Grange Hill to All Saints’ Church there was little or no “soil,” the road-material resting upon a sandy loam. Midway between the two was a peculiar patch of pinkish-coloured loam with rounded pebbles. On turning down Church Road orange gravelly loam commenced to prevail, but opposite to the entrance to the churchyard a quantity of green earth was thrown up, containing rounded green-coated flint pebbles. On passing the exit of Upper Beulah Hill the orange gravelly loam again set in, and continued, resembling Croydon gravel. This I have at other times noticed in the same road when excavations have been made for drains, etc., as far, at least. as Westow Street. As the work proceeded in Church Road, from the base to the top of the trench showed a fine dark yellow clayey sand, which from ‘‘ Northwood” to “ St. Ives” contained a large number of rounded flint pebbles. From “ St. Ives” to “ Windermere” the trench was in a pure sand, with scarcely any clayey admixture at all. The cutting continued along Westow Street-to Westow Hill, being through an impervious clayey sand, with here and there stones and pebbles.— J. A. Martin. \ SCIENCE-GOSSIP. 125 CONDUCTED BY F. C. DENNETT. Position at Noon. 1900 Rises. Sets. R.A. Dee. Sept. Am. him. him. Sina OMNI NT) eLDeBu Aun s) O:oo) Pils! vil WL.2. 8 vein O.Ol Ne. 17 .. 5.39 «. 6.10 11.38 2.20 N. 27... 5,55 Biel (Deki) fo UGH sn (URI ISE Rises. Souths. Sets. Age at Noon. Sept. him. hm. h.m. d. hm. Moon.. 7.. 5.19p.m. .. 10.43 p.m. .. 2.55 a.m... 13 8.7 Wists, — Re ES EST da BHO amen ae Ge aes teb// OT ae Die ase. 2-20) Ph we O.00)D-De ss) von hOre Position at Noon. Souths. Semi- R.A. Dec. Sept. dim. Diameter. hm. Sh MOTCUTY se 1 «. L139 am. .3% 20 2. 1044. 10.0 N. : i/ oo WAY Seema RREUEA itp ee SANs 2h ca MUL THIS Go DEMISE IRE 56 taped IS ener ei) Meee S.O0NaNlaws. loa i eu Cole resell (2) Ne iffh-ae EE AgTAS co UNI! na TMD oe Dae 1O.DO ail sweler LUo mma Oral care PLUS tte) heey Lil tee, (Gh: ALIN roe 2G!) tae 7040) te iiulte oa on Sie se Pe AO cake oe NO a IT Se RT al COMETS: ey teas : GRAIN ee eh Uh cet S44 Demis een St! ole. & 21.46 S: RVemrune sen 0 Lv) sen GLO) SMe Usb ss oso Glee) 22.4: Ni Moon’s PHASES. hm. hm. Ist Qr. .. Sept. 2 .. 7.56a.m. full .. Sept. 9 .. 5.6.a.m. SLO enat LO ce (GeO CD t IUERO ci, 53 20 ce OC Pm. In perigee September 9th at 6 p.m. ; in apogee on 24th at 4 a.m. METEORS. him. 2) Aug. 21-Sept. a .. e Perseids Radiant R.A. 4.8 Dec. 37 N. 25- ‘Sept. 2 -. y Pegasids A cS OU lon EN: Sept. 1-7 ay, Andromedids ., Ae) PBIBID) BS) chet INE » «1-24 . € Taurids.. _ gr ANG ey woeee Ns CONJUNCTIONS OF PLANETS WITH THE Moon. Oh Sept. 1 Jupiter Sa thyowans Planet 0.51 N. a 3 6 Saturn on Gee 6c As EDI oe nes Ao Mars* .. Noon at tb DN py ale) ote Venus? OUD. eee a RD OUIN. tig ate Mercury? stv stshaghey lop 3) | 09 N. ast eg Jupiters iy.) -9)/a.my a OStaNNe ¥ Day light. + Below English horizon. OCCULTATIONS. Angle Angle Magni- Dis- trom Re- From Sept. Object. tude. appears. Vertex. appears. Vertex. him. w him. s Saturn . —.. 7.16pm... 126... 8.11pm... 206 7.35 p.m... 66 .. 8.50pm... 263 5.40 a.m. .. 226 3 Ae f Sagittarii 5°0 .. 3 3 10.34 p.m... 314 1 3 13. * Arietis 5:6 .. 4.27 am... 59 .. ABP) US Tard 47.56'47, 19:43pm... 99) -. THE SuN should be watched for the spots that sometimes become visible. MERCURY is a morning star in Leo at the begin- ning of the month, and an evening star in Virgo at the end, being in superior conjunction with the sun at 5 p.m. on September 13th. VENUS reaches its greatest elongation, 46° west, at 6 p.m. on 17th, and so is a magnificent object in the morning sky, rising about 1.30 a.m. all the month. MARS is a morning star rising near midnight all the month, but his tiny disc makes him a poor object for observation. JUPITER may be looked for as soon as it is sufficiently dark. SATURN should be observed as soon after sunset as possible. The occultation on September 3rd should be watched, (See ‘“ Occultations” on this page.) URANUS is now too near the sun for satisfactory observation. NEPTUNE may be found almost in the same straight line with » and 7 Geminorum, and pro- duced about as far again westward as the distance between them. THE LEEDS ASTRONOMICAL Society. — The “ Journal and Transactions” of this useful Society during the year 1899 has been sent to us. Some of the papers are very full of interest and instruction. ‘The Planet Me ao y as a View Point,” by the President, Mr. C Whitmell ; “Jeremiah Hor- rocks and the ieee of Venus,” illustrated by a photographic plate, by Mr. A. Dodgson; and ‘+ Astronomical Theories relating to Stonehenge,” with two photographic views, by Mr. Washington Teasdale, may be specially mentioned. Mererors of striking appearance have recently been seen. On July 17th, at 8.47 p.m., in bright twilight, too bright to exactly describe its path, a fireball, thought by Mr. Denning to be a Scorpiid, having a double head, was observed at many places in the North of England. ‘The trail it left was visible for three-quarters of an hour. Another brilliant meteor was observed from Slough, Croydon, &c., at 11.33 on July 18th, and from its extraordinary motion was described by Professor A. §. Herschel as “about the queerest he ever saw. CoMETS.—Giacobini’s comet at the beginning of September will be situated in the southern portion of Hercules to the north of a Ophiuchi, but too faint to be seen with common telescopes. A comet was almost simultaneously discovered on the morning of July 24 by M. Borelly, of Marseilles, and Mr. W. R. Brooks, of the Smith Observatory, Geneva, N.Y.. At that time it was said to be a beautiful telescopic object, having astellar nucleus, about 8th magnitude, and a small broad tail. It was discovered closely east of the 5th magnitude star, 38 Arietis, but had travelled rapidly north through Perseus to Camelopardus by August 15th, near the star y, and is said to be decreasing in brightness. According to the elements calculated by Herr Moller, of Kiel, the comet was nearest the earth about the end of July, and perihelion was passed on August 3rd. It is known as 1900, 2. In the middle of August the nucleus was readily visible with a telescope of less than 2 inches aper- ture. With 103 inches aperture Mr. Brooks finds it to be duplex, but not clearly separated. JUPITER IN 1900.—There is a white spot on the northern side of the north tropical belt, bedding deeply into, if not actually breaking through the dark belt. The Rev. T. E. R. Phillips first saw the object in 1899, on January 26th, when it had a longitude of 85:3°, System II. It had, on July 28th, 1900, a longitude of 325°9°, so that in eighteen months it has lost about 120° of longitude, rela- tively to the zero meridian of System II. This would give a rotation period of 9h. 55m. 50°6s. The object is shown well by Wray’s 3 in. SCLENCE- Gossip Telescope. 216 SCIENCE-GOSSIP. CONDUCTED BY HAROLD M. READ, F-.C.S. THE Society or CHEmicaL Ixpostry.—The Tecent annual meeting of the Society of Chemical Indusiry was more than usually inieresting, in that, for the first time in its history, the members were addressed by a President from the United States. In the selection of Professor Chandler of New York the unity of men of science throushont the world is again exemplified, and the Society has not only done honour to itself, but has given to English members the opportunity of meeting one who is amongst the leaders of chemical thought across the Atlantic. The subject of Pro- fessor Chandler's address was the development and present position of Chemisiry in the United Siaies, from both its scientific and technical aspecis. Ii would be unfair to attempt to give an abridemenit of an address, the salient points of which will long Temain in the memory of those who were so fortunate as to hear it. One of the mosé striking conirasts to which allusion was made was that while, when Professor Chandler commenced the study of chemistry, there were only four schools of science in the United Siaites, to-day they are so numerous he could not give the precise number. The Society finished its annual meeting with a izip to Paris. one of the most interesting features of the excursion being a visit to the factory of the Société Anonyme Anglo-Francais Parfums Parfait at Courbevoie. where the members saw the applica- tion of ozone in the synthetic preparation of such perfumes as vanillin, heliotropin, coumarin, and other scenis. GLass Pavine BLocks—During recent years an industry of considerable importance has sprang up in France in the manufacture of paving blocks, imitation eraniie, etc., from waste glass. Réaumur pointed out in 1827 that when fragmenis of glass are soitened by heat and then compressed into a mass the glass undergoes considerable change in its physical properties, becoming deviirified and opague. also showing a marked increase in hard- hess and capacity for resisting shock or crusking. After seventy years Réaumur's discoveries are being utilised. and two factories in France are now engaged in making this new material. It has already been tried for paving at Nice. and is said to give satisfactory resulis. The applications of such a substance are so varied that we may, before jong. see a huge development of the indusiry. OSTWALD'S ** FOUNDATIONS.” —We are extremely glad to notice the appearance of a second edition of Ostwald’s “ Foundations of Analytical Chemistry.” Tt is only a few years since the first edition was published, and we may take the present edition as an earnest of the fact that the scientific treatment of analytical chemisiry is being more and more recognised. A striking feature of present-day ana- lysis—we refer to that carried out by the ordinary -stndent—is the slipshod and often slovenly manner in which the work is done, and salts “spotted. There is, no doubt, a tendency in the half-trained mind to endeavour to escape the stern morals which the true s spirit of scientific work exacts: any means of repressing this backward tendency is to be heartily welcomed. Ostwald’s “« Foundations” certainly does not appeal direct to the students fresh to chemistry, but. none the less, its indirect effect through the medium of a teacher is bound to make itself evident. Though we do not consider the ionic hypothesis as the be-all and end-all of chemistry, we cannot but draw attention to the vast fields opened up by this new treatment of analytical chemistry. The book is delightful read- ing. the equations involved in the theoretical part are extremely simple, and the treatment of what we may call the “ practical ” part is very thorough. The last chapter of the book is one of the most interesting. In it Ostwald draws attention to the great discrepancy which holds in the stating of analyses of inorganic compounds, as compared with organic ones ; while.in the latter case, the analyses are given in absolute percentages of the elements present ; in the former the analyst endeavours to group his elements into proximate constituents, in accordance with the old dualistic hypothesis of Berzelius. EXAMINATION OF FLESH Foops. — “Flesh Foods.” their chemical, microscopical, and bacter- iological examination, by C. Ainsworth Mitchell, B.A, F.CS. (336 pages with illustrations and frontispiece. London: Charles Griffin & Co. Limited. 10s. 6d.). has been recently published. In the preface to this work the author states thai “it has been his endeavour to collect and sum- mnarise records of investigation scattered thronugh- out English and foreign scientific books and periodicals,” and the present work is evidence how well he has succeeded in his task. It is a veritable dictionary, and a work which those who are engaged on the subject will heartily welcome. Not the least pleasant feature is the enormous number of references to original papers. The arrangement of the subject matter and the printing are both excellent. LiqgUiD FUEL.—In conseguence of the high price of coal, the French Society of Civil Engineers have been again discussing the calorific values of various petroleums. They publish the following table of proportions oi carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen in various hydrocarbons, the calories being per ke: Calorifie S | ae L | power | | Light petroleam oil —)) gpg, | qaqg7 __ | Rietionn (0a oe ee 10,913 Refined De ak .. 85491) 14216 0-293 | 11,047 Petroleum spirit .. eo 80383 | 15:101 4316 11,086 Crade pemoleam —.. 5 83012 | 13-889 37090 11,094 Licht oil from Baka | 86-700 1734 j— 10,843 Peat cron ee Cat) 84906 | 11-636 — 10,328 Ozokeriie from Boryslaw oe 83510 14440 — 11,163 Recent investigations show the necessity for ex- ceeding care in their conduct. To obtain the theoretical calorific power and the highest tem- perature of combustion, the supply of air furnishing the precise amount of oxygen is a necessity, as is, also. the most intimate possible contact between the atmosphere and the fuel. a we SCLIENCE-GOSSIP. 127 A Hyprip VioLer.—At Prestwood, in the vi- cinity of Great Missenden, Bucks, is a small remnant of common-land, where grows, among the ordinary heath-land plants, the dog violet (Viola ericetorwn) and the common wood violet CV. riviniana). There is nothing unusual in this cir- cumstance, nor in the further fact that here these two violets hybridise with each other. What, however, is worthy of note, is the plentifulness of the hybrid form, and the unusual luxuriance it here attains, forming great patches many feet in diameter. These large patches present a singular appearance, as the apetalous flowers, by means of which violets are chiefly propagated by seed, are invariably sterile, and in their brown shrivelled state contrast greatly with the dark-green foliage. —C. BH. Britton, 35 Dugdale Street, Camberwell, SL. VAGARIES OF LIGHTNING.—An oak-tree, about 40 feet high and with a stem of 32 inches dia- meter, was struck by lightning near here on July 27th last between 3 and4p.m. The bark of the stem was almost completely stripped off below the branches, and scattered in fragments round the tree. The largest fragment, 6 feet x1 foot, lay near the tree, but some pieces were hurled to a distance. I weighed three portions, and paced the distances. No. 1 weighed 634 ounces, and was thrown thirty-five steps; No. 2 weighed 1} ounce, and went forty paces; and No. 3, which weighed 2+ ounces, reached twenty-six paces. The trunk shows a split completely through, and the lightning entered the ground between two roots, its passage being evidenced by the split. On August 15th, 1899, at Little Stukeley, Hunts, on the Manor Farm, during a heavy thunderstorm, the electric fluid struck a tree (an elm, I think) and killed a fine young horse which was sheltering underneath. The tree was split down to the point where the lightning entered. Below that point it was unin- jured. My mother used to relate two curious facts that happened i in the ‘fifties,’ in Bermuda. One was the lightning entering her kitchen and passing along the dresser-hooks, leaving only the handles of the jugs hanging on the hooks. The other was more serious, and resulted in the death of the David Island ferryman. ‘The electric fluid passed down one leg and tore the iron nails out of his boot. His little son, or grandson, though also in the boat, was uninjured. —(Rev.) R. ‘Ashington Bullen, PLS. F.GS., Aveland, Surrey. SMALL DUCKWEED IN FLOWER.—As the pro- duction of flowers by the duckweeds is reputedly rare, I venture to mention that I was out last month in the neighbourhood of Norton Heath, Essex, with a friend, who was so fortunate as to find Lemna minor in flower. A small quantity of duckweed, brought from the roadside pond where we found it flowering, and placed on the surface of water in an earthenware basin, developed floWetiag for several days afterwards. If no flowers were visible, it sufficed to place the duckweed in the sunlight for a few hours, when the minute flowers would appear as whitish specks at the edges of the fronds. I suspect that the flowers of duck- weeds are by no means sorare as they are generally considered.—C. #2. Britton, 35 Dugdale Street, Camberwell, London. ABNORMAL EQUISETA.—Referring to Mr. Flatters’ inquiry last month (ante p. 96), | spent some time this spring in collecting fertile heads of Eyuisetum maximum for a friend. Amongst them were a few with divided spikes; but, as far as I remember, not more than two spikelets.—((ol.) HZ. J. O. Walker, Lee Ford, Budleigh Salterton. ABNORMAL GERMINATION OF LEMON.—A few weeks back there was brought under my notice an instance of a lemon, perfectly sound and healthy in appearance, which, on being cut open, was found to contain numerous vigorously-growing seedlings. Germination had evidently taken place some con- siderable time previous, as the root was well de- veloped, and the same was the case with the young stem. The growing organs had forced their way into the hollow axis of the lemon, and along this the roots were growing. I have never seen before nor read of an occurrence of this kind affecting lemons, and do not know whether this is very unusual or not. ‘These seedlings are now growing in a large pot protected by a bell-glass.—C. £. Britton, 35 Dugdale Street, Camberm ell. DEILEPHILA LIVORNICA. — A specimen of this rare hawk-moth was captured at rest upon a garden wall in the village of Offenham, near Evesham, on Sunday, April 29th, 1900, by L. §. Smith, Esq., who brought it to me alive two days after- wards. When first taken it appeared to be quite freshly emerged from the pupa, and although two days’ struggling with a pin through it has rubbed off some of the beauty, it is still a very fair cabinet specimen. I made inquiry of Mr Smith as to whether any plant-roots had been imported from abroad amongst which the pupa might have been concealed ; but he says nothing of this sort has been introduced into the garden, so that I think this must be a genuine British example.—T7. JL. Doeg, Evesham, May 4, 1900. UNUSUAL SITE FOR SWALLOWS’ NEST.—Reply- ing to the note by your correspondent, Lady Farrent, in SCIENCE-Gossip of August (azfe p. 95), with regard to the building of swallows in occupied rooms, I have pleasure in stating that many years ago my wife, when at school in France at Ste. Foy la Grande, Gironde, occupied, along with quite a number of other young ladies, a large dcrmitory, the windows of which were always left open, thus giving the swallows fine opportunity of ingress and egress. The roof not being underdrawn, besides making a picturesque display of rafters, yielded many a tempting angle dear to the graceful little migrants ; whose return each spring was looked for with greatest interest. The young ones of the previous year that had been decorated with the blue ribbon were recognised among the welcome euests, and who now, with much fussy twittering, at once took their part in building or repairing the habitations for the generation soon to be. There was probably less fear manifested by the swallows than by several of the young ladies when they bethought them of the sad fate of Tobias as recorded in the Apocrypha.—Samuel Howarth, 26 Grange Crescent, Sheffield. ) “ee 128 SCIENCE-GOSSIP. TENACITY OF LIFE IN ARGASIDAE.— With refer- ence to the remarkable tenacity of life shown by some of the Argasidae, it may be of interest to note that I have now in my possession a living specimen of Ornithodorus savignyi which has certainly sur- vived without visible means of subsistence for a period of at least 19 months. It was sent tome by post from Cape Colony in January last, the sender informing me that it had not, to his knowledge, had any opportunity of feeding during the previous 12 months, and it has since been kept in the corked glass tube in which it travelled. When undisturbed it remains in a quiescent and appa- rently torpid condition, but resumes its normal activity as soon as it feels the warmth communi- cated to the tube when this is handled.—2&. T. Lewis, 4 Lyndhurst Villas, Baling, W. TELESCOPIC EXAMINATION OF INSECTS.—Every student of natural history must have experienced the difficulty which arises when attempting to make close observations of the movements and habits of insects under natural conditions. Any approach to them which is sufticiently near to be of much service to the unassisted eye, and certainly the use of a hand-lens, has the instant effect of causing them to suspend their ordinary avocations and to be upon the alert with all their instincts of self- preservation fully armed. It is easy, of course, to examine a captured insect under a lens, and inthis way to make out the details of its structure ; but observations of this kind, though useful as far as they go, convey but little information as to the ways of “insects at home.” I have, however, myself derived so much instruction and enjoyment from the use of a small telescope for this purpose that I venture to recommend it to others of similar tastes as the best means yet adopted. The instru- ment I use is an achromatic of 3-inch aperture, giving perfect definition of objects at a distance oi 3 feet over a field of 6 inches in diameter, with a magnifying power of 63 times linear. or about 40 times superficial. It measures. when closed, 6% inches, weighs only 33 oz., and can be car- ried in the pocket without appreciable increase of one’s burden. With such a glass it is possible to watch, without disturbance. the busy proceedings of the wood anis, the actions of butterflies and bees upon flowers, the attacks of ichneumons upon aphides, etc., the mode of stridulation in grass- hoppers, and the ways of numberless other insects, which could not be observed if once the individuals became aware of the presence of an intruder. At the distance of a yard, an object appears magnified considerably beyond its natural size, and is as distinctly seen as if under a hand-lens of 6 inches focus. If when in the country a higher magnifying power is required for close examination. the draw- tube of the telescope is readily available for the purpose. being practically a compound microscope of about 1 inch focus.—R. T. Lemis, 4 Lyndhurst Villas, Ealing, W. NOTICES OF SOCIETIES. Ordinary meetings are marked 7, excursions * ; names of persons Jollewing excursions are of Conductors. Lantern Illustra- tions §. Norte Lonbon NaturaL History Sociery. Sept. 6.—7;* Fruits and Seeds on their Travels.” H. W. Worsley-Benison, F.L.S. - 15.—*Epping Forest. S. Austin. 20.—7 “The Tree in its Relation to Primitive Thought.” Mrs. H. M. Halliday. D NOTICES TO CORRESPONDENTS. To CORRESPONDENTS AND EXCHANGERS.—SCIENCE-GossIP is published on the 25th of each month. All notes or other com- munications should reach us not later than the 18th of the month for insertion in the following number. No communications can be inserted or noticed without full name and address of writer. Notices of changes of address admitted free. EDITORIAL COMMUNICATIONS, articles, books for review, instru- ~ ments for notice, specimens for identification, &c., to be addressed to JOHN T. CARRINGTON, 110 Strand, London, W.C. SUBSCRIPTIONS.—The volumes of SCTENCE-GossiP begin with the June numbers, but Subscriptions may commence with any number, at the rate of 6s. 6d. for twelve months (including postage), and should be remitted to the Office, 110 Strand, London, W.C. Notice.—Contributors are requested to strictly observe the following rules. All contributions must be clearly written on one side of the paper only. Words intended to be printed in italics should be marked under with a single line. Generic names must be given in iull, excepting where used immediately before. Capitals may only be used for generic, and not specific names. Scientific names and names of places to be written in round hand. : THE Editor will be pleased to answer questions and name specimens through the Correspondence column of the magazine. Specimens, in good condition. of not more than three species to be sent atone t:me, carriage paid. Duplicates only to be sent, which will not be returned. The specimens must have identify- ing numbers attached, together with locality, date and par- ticulars oi capture. THE Editor is not responsible for unused MSS., neither can he undertake to return them unless accompanied with stamps for return postage. CHANGE OF ADDRESS. WILFRED MaRK Wess, F.LS.. from Hammersmith to “ Oastock,” Campbell Road, Hanwell. W. EXCHANGES. NoTicE.—Exchanges extending to fhirty words (including name and address) adm‘tted free, but additional words must be prepaid at the rate of threepence for every seven words or less. MonsIEUR RowussEat. La Mazurie, par Aizenay, Vendée, France, offers recent shells. fossils, minerals (including bert- randite }, rocks and planis in exchange for similar objects. Fosstns AND SHELIS.—Thke Rev. John Hawell, M.A., F.G.S., Ingleby Greenhow Vicarage. Middlesbrough, offers British and foreign fossils and recent shells ior other fossils. Reskin’s “ Munera Pulveris.” “Time and Tide,” and * A Joy for Ever.” as new, exchanged for “Story of Onur Earth,” or ofters.—W. D. Nelson, 22 Kirk-wynd, Kirkcaldy. BRITISH DRAGON-FLIES.— Wanted, all species oi British dragon- fliex : state name ii possible and condition. Name requirements. —H.D Gower, 55 Benson Road, Croydon. CONTENTS. PAGE Ox CoLouRING OF MoLitscs’ SHELLS. By REGINALD J. HucGuHes. Illustrated ae zc 5 Be Bay 2c MossEs OF LYNMOUTH DisTRIcT. By CHARLES A. BRIGGS, RES. =: o2 Se sc se So ee THE BRITISH ASSOCIATION oe 2 : ae -- 102 GEOLOGICAL NOTES IN THE ORANGE RIVER COLoNy. By Major B. M. SKINNER, R.A.M.C. Illustrated .. Bos ihBe SPIDERS FROM HastTINGs. By FRANK Percy SmiTH .. 106 THE PHOTOGRAPHY OF CoLtocuR. By E. SANGER SHEP- HERD. Jllustraied .. = ot 35 << va -L0S BUTTERFLIES OF THE PALAEARCTIC REGION. By HENRY CHARLES Lane, M.D. Illustrated ae oe es md It B, Two NEW VARIETIES OF BUTTERFLIES.. .. Se BS tilat Books TO READ .. ae 2 a5 ac a ve ile MicRoscoPY—SCcIENCE GOs=IP .. 35 2 <6 118; 122 PHysicsS—GEOLOGY =e a0 =< Se ae 123, 124 ASTRONOMY—CHEMISTRY ss = =: $5 125, 126 NOTES AND QUERIES sc s: =: ac se veh, er NoTICES—EXCHANGES .. se =: oe fe ae ee soap eee nt a a oars SCIENCE-GOSST/P. SIR JOHN B* the death, on August 31st, of Sir John . Bennet Lawes. F.R.S., LL.D., D.C.L., D.Sc., F.C.S., first baronet, the world at large is poorer by the loss of an unselfish investigator in the science of the chemistry of agriculture, and one with world-wide reputation. The experimental farm at Rothamsted, in Hertfordshire, is known wherever agricultural chemistry is in practice. Sir John Lawes was the eldest son of Mr. John Bennet Lawes, of Rothamsted, where he was born on December 28, 1814, and succeeded to the estate at the early age of eight years. Educated at Eton, in 1832 he went to Brasenose College, Oxford, where he studied for three years. Even then the chemistry of vegetation had attracted his atten- tion, and on his return to Rothamsted he began what afterwards became his life’s work. In the early stages he secured the services of a young chemist named Dobson, their experiments being conducted in flower- pots. Mr. Lawes then ap- plied the results of these investigations to fields on his farm and, they proving successful, patented the process, and commenced to manufacture at Deptford, and later at Barking, on premises occupying no less than 100 acres of land, what became known as “super- phosphates” for artificial manure. This industry he fostered until 1872, when he disposed, for a sum of 300,000/., of his interest in the business, and confined his whole attention to the researches in which he was so eminently success- ful. It is interesting to note that the type of trade he thus founded has grown to be worth upwards of a couple of millions sterling each year in this country alone. In 1843 Dr. Joseph Henry Gilbert joined Lawes as an assistant, the result being that he, like Sir John, has been honoured for the sake of science, and has become the celebrated Sir Henry Gilbert, Director of the Rothamsted Laboratory. It is gratifying to find that that institution will be continued in future under pro- vision made by Sir John Lawes, he having placed at the disposal of trustees the laboratory and certain other premises, with an endowment fund of 100,0002. This occurred in 1889, so that the splendid work inaugurated by Sir John will not be Oct. 1900,—No. 77, Vou. VII. Photo by) BENNET Sir JouN BenNET LAwes, Bart., F.R.S. [29g LAWES, BART. interrupted by his lamentable death. in the trust deed instructs the management to select and despateh, from time to time, a qualified lecturer to the United States of America to spread in that country a knowledge of the successful results attained at Rothamsted. One clause committee of Sir John’s name is so intimately associated with Rothamsted that it is not generally known that he was at one time one of the most important manu- facturers of chemicals in this country, he haviny owned and most successfully conducted a factory for produging tartaric and citric acid at Millwall, on the river Thames. We believe that Rothamsted was the pioneer station for the systematic investigation of agricul- tural chemistry and modern farming. It still maintains its position as one of the more im- portant in the world. The fields occupied by the in- experimental vestigations occupy about forty acres of land. ‘The experiments have not been entirely confined to the vegetation alone, but fur- ther, on its effect on pro- fitable feeding of farm animals. As might be expected from a businesslike and systematic mind such as that of Lawes, most care- ful record was kept of the work done from the early days of his undertaking. The first published re- port appeared in 1847; the subsequent issues now reaching nine volumes. Sir John was more a man of practice than theory, and consequently his literary remains are chiefly in the form of papers on the science and practice of agriculture than long treatises. These scattered papers number 120, and from 1847 to a recent date were collected and bound in three quarto and six octavo volumes. These Sir John presented to various institutions throughout the world. He was a frequent con- tributor to the agricultural newspapers, and his communications [Barraud, London over always commanded deserved attention on account of their practical value. Such simple but effective advice was given in his articles that they were received with respect by even the most unprogressive country gentleman or farmer. Such a brain as that of Sir John bound in time to receive public recognition. Lawes was This 130 SCIENCE-GOSSIP. took the form of honorary degrees given by Uni- yersities. and his election as a F.R.'S. in 1854. In 1877 Edinburgh conferred the LL.D., in 1892 Oxford its D.C.L., and in 1894 Cambridge the honorary D.Sc. It was in 1882 he received his baronetcy, and in 1893 the station, on commemorait- ing its jubilee, was honoured by the knighthood of Dr. J, H. Gilbert. As we have said, the Rothamsted Agricnlinral Station still continues at work. It will be managed by a committee nominated by the Royal Society, the Royal Agricultural Society, the Chemical Society, and the Linnean Society. Sir John’s personal character was of the most amiable and enthusiastic; but his enthusiasm was tempered with shrewd businesslike common sense. In the baronetcy he is succeeded by his son, a well-known sculptor. NOTES ON SPINNING ANIMALS. By H. WaLLis Kew. ( Continued From page 73.) TV. SNARES OF INSECT-LARVAE. has often been said that spiders are the only animals capable of spinning snares for the capture of prey; and it is certainly true that there is no natural object in the world making even a tolerably near approach to the spiders perfect snare. A few other animals, however. are known to spin structures to help them in catching their prey; and among these are certain larvae of caddis-flies of the family Hydropsychidae. The Hydropsychid larvae generally live in running water, and are sometimes found in places where the current is very rapid. Unlike most caddis-worms, they are believed to be mainly pre- daceous. (1) The cases in which they live are fixed, not portable like many of the common caddis-cases of our ponds; and some are remarkable from ihe fact that they have at the mouth a raised net of silken meshes, small, but of good size relatively to the rest of the abode. This net almost certainly has the function of arresting edible matters, iving insect-larvae, etc., chiefly those carried down siream by the current. Miss C. H. Clarke (whose observations were communicated to the Boston Society of Natural History by Hagen in 1882) has described cases and nets of this kind—the work of larvae of Hydro- psyche—found in abundance in swift streams near Boston, Mass. The structures varied considerably. but the typical form was that of a tunnel. without basal wall, loosely attached by its edges to a stone or other object. At the mouth of the tunnel, always facing the current, was a vertical frame- work with a net stretched across it. The tunnel was usually about half an inch long, and composed of sand or bits of plants. The framework of the little net, formed of vegetable bits, was occasionally stayed or held in position by silken cords siteich- inz from it to suitable points on the stone. Some- times it had the form of a simple arch, at others of a complete ring, and it was stiff enough io (1) M‘Lachlan, “ Trichsptera of the European Fauna” (1874+- 18380), p. 349. retain its position when removed from the water. In a certain stream. where the stones were covered with mud, leaves, and rubbish, large communities of these larvae were observed. Looking down upon the stones, numbers of dark holes might be seen, facing the current. often in rows, side by side, stretching obliquely across the stone: and when removed for examination, the delicate net, sup- ported by its framework, could be observed across each hole. The accompanying illustration is a copy of that given by Miss-Clarke. The larvae are strong little creatures, and Miss Clarke concludes that the use of the net is for catching food. It was obvious that without wholly leaving its house the creature could remove from the net anything edible lodged there by the current (°). Similar structures, also the work of larvae of Hydropsyche. have been described by Howard, who found them in numbers in a swift stream near Washington. They occurred on stones tilted so as to bring a portion of the surface close to the top of the water, and were placed, preferably, at the edge of slight depressions, so that the tubular portion, or Case proper. was protected from the full force of the current. The tube was strong, covered with particles of leaves and twigs, and open at either end. It was furnished. anteriorly, with a broad funnel-shaped expansion, woven in wide meshes with strong silk, and supported at the sides and top by bits of twigs and small portions of the stems of water planis. The structure varied in size; the mouth of the funnel, which in every case was nearly ai right angles with the tube. was in some instances not more than 3 mm. in diameter, while (2) Clarke, “Proc. Boston Soc. of Nat. Hist.” xxii. (1882), pp. 67-71: and “ Psyche.” vi. (1891), p. 157. A figure, natural Size, accompanying the latter paper, gives the impression of a Structure somewhat less definite than that shown in ithe enlarzei figure here copied; and the net (compared with the Size of the case) hardly appears so large A figure given by Sharp (“ Camb. Nat. Hist.” v., 1895, p. 483)—modifiel from a redrawing of Clarke’s enlarged figure by Riley (“Report U.S. Department of Agriculture,” 1886, pl. ix.. fig. 5}—shows a rather large net of wide meshes, and by an oversight it is noi stated io be enlarged. SCIENCE-GOSSIP. 131 in others it reached 10 mm. On the surface of a stone about 18 inches across, 166 of these cases were counted. In the same stream, larvae of Simulium were abundant ; and as they were found in plenty on the stones on which the cases of the Hydropsyche occurred, Howard concludes that they furnished the principal food of the latter creature. He thinks it certain that numbers of the larvae of the Dipteron would be washed into the funnel-shaped nets ; and the owners of the nets, ensconced within, appeared to be waiting for prey to be thus brought to them(*). Further, on Simuliwm-covered rocks at Ithaca, N.Y., Howard again found nets and tubes of Hydropsyche in numbers. ‘The nets differed somewhat from those just described, and the observer supposes that they were the work of a different species (*). Previously to the publication of these facts, Fritz Miiller had recorded the occurrence of a net-making Hydropsychid-larva in Brazil, and had established for it the genus Lhyacophylax. Its cases, he says, are rather rude canals, covered with irregularly interwoven vegetable fibres and each has, at its mouth, a funnel-shaped verandah, covered with a principally made on specimens in captivity. When a larva is placed in a vessel of water, he says, it at once begins to explore its new quarters, and eventually selects a site for its dwelling. This is made of silken threads, and when completed the structure consists of a tube considerably longer and broader than its gecupant, and open at both ends. It is supported and strengthened by a mesh- work of silken threads, which spread out for a considerable distance, and are attached to surround- ing objects. From time to time the larva turns in its case, and even leaves it for a short space. Generally, however, it remains quiet inside, appa- rently on the alert for prey: “Tf a Chironomus or other small aquatic larva approaches, it is almost certain to get entangled in the network of silken threads. At once the Caddis in its retreat perceives the presence of a possible victim. ‘The long hairs which cover the body are possibly tactile, and reveal slight disturbances of the silken network. The Plectrocnemia then pro- ceeds warily to determine the cause of the disturb- ance. Should the Chironomus be entangled near the middle of the tube, the Caddis-worm does not hesitate to bite its way through the side, and its AN INSECT-LARVA’S SNARE (5). beautiful silken net. The creatures live in rapid rivulets, and the entrance of the verandah is always directed up stream, “so as to intercept any eatable things brought down by the water.” The cases are placed on stones, and a number are generally built close together, so as to form transverse rows. Miiller mentions having once seen, ona large stone, about half a dozen parallel rows, of which one alone was composed of some thirty cases (°). We have, further, interesting notes by T. H. ‘Taylor, on the larva of Plectrocnemia, another Hydro- psychid, which occurs in swift streams on a stony bed. When a stone was lifted out of the water its under-side was found to be covered with patches of mud from which the larvae emerged and began to ‘crawl about ; the patches were held together by a binding substance, and were evidently the retreats of the larvae, Taylor’s observations, however, were (3) Howard, in Riley, 7.c., p. 510. (4) Howard, “ Insect Life,” i, (1888), pp. 100, 101. (5) Case and net of the larva of a caddis-fly (Hydropsyche), enlarged about four diameters. After Clarke, “ Proceedings of the Boston Society of Natural History,” xxii. (1882), p. 67. (6) F. Miiller, * Trans. Ent. Soe. London,” 1879, pp. 131- 144, jaws very soon quiet the struggles of the prey. There is some resemblance between the snare of the Plectrocnemia and the web of a Spider, but the Plectrocnemia is effectually concealed by the mud which clings to its retreat. In captivity it forms a web which is free from foreign particles, and allows all its manoeuvres to be observed ” (*). The contrivances about the tubes of Hydro- psychids now described make the most satisfactory approach to the unique position of the snare-spin- ning spiders, of which the writer has yet heard. Their function cannot reasonably be doubted, and it is interesting to note that they are unhesitatingly referred to as “snares” by Sharp as well as by Taylor. The threads are probably not viscid ; but even in the case of spiders viscid lines occur only in the snares of one or two groups. The silk-glands of caddis-worms are often of great development; and the spinneret, like that of larvae of Lepidoptera, Diptera, and Hymenoptera, is oral. (To be continued.) (7) Taylor, in Miall, “Nat. Hist. of Aquatic Insects,” 1895, pp. 265-267, EF ” 132 POND-LIFE. IN THE NEW By G T. Hares, F-.R.PS., GENERAL POND-LIFE. peaee no one appreciates a visit to a fresh district more than the naturalist, especially when the change is quite distinct topographically. In such a case he may hope to meet with forms in his particular branch of natural history hitherto unknown to him; and possibly many that exist in his own district only as rarities are here quite common, owing to a much more favourable en- vironment. Another point in favour of visiting various, and especially widely differing localities, is that the worker obtains a sounder knowledge of the geographical distribution of the group he is working upon, and the especial conditions under which particular species are found most freely. The Easter vacation of 1899 was spent on the Norfolk Broads by the little party of microscopists who annually brave the inclemencies of that early season. Rich and varied is life in the slow-flowing streams and placid expanses of water, whose sole mission now seems that of mirroring the tall rushes and aquatic plants that fringe their sides. The Easter of the present year was spent in the shelter of the New Forest, where patriarchal trees stand close. guarding one from the cold, searching winds of the early English springtime. Brocken- hurst was made our headquarters, and, generally speaking, the district around is prolific in- ponds within a radius of five miles. These vary in their character, according to their situation, very advan- tageously to the student of pond-life. Some are deep forest ponds, others roadside duck ponds, and yet others the remunerative heathland ponds, a perfect Elysium for the algologist, with their varied and beautiful desmids, and general life of fresh- water algae. Easter is rather too early for abundant pond collecting. especially when preceded by such a cold, dull spring as that of 1900; hence the results obtained on our excursion are not very striking. As, however, it is desirable to know the forms which exist at each period of the year. Easter collecting is not altogether useless; and, again, an even brief record is always useful to succeeding workers. It is a desire that naturalists visiting the New Forest may pay some attention to its varied pond life that has induced us to give in detail our own limited results. The Rotifera, so attractive a class to the micro- scopist, seem well represented in the Forest ponds. Conochilus rolvoxr, now apparently growing scarce around London, is here in profusion, principally in the clear ponds of the heath lands. A small duck pond near Balmer Green was especially prolific in Rotifers, and contained some particularly fine SCIENCE GOSS/P. FOREST. AND C. D. Soap, F-RMS. Synchaetae. Annurea aculeata seemed to be the cosmopolitan of the Forest, for it occurred every- where in profusion. Luchlanis triquetra was an- other very common species, and several species of Asplanchna were not infrequently taken, as were several of the genus Brachionus. From a pond by the side of the Lymington Road we took Daphnia bearing a commensal Brachionus in large quanti- ties. probably Brachionus rubens. The pond was little better than a concentrated syrup of Daphnia, and as each Dapinia was quite laden with this particular rotifer, it may be readily imagined that the environment, from some cause or other, was eminently satisfactory to the Brachionae. Among the sedentary rotifers Flosculeae were abundant and generally distributed, as was Velicerta ringens. Melicerta conifera seemed to favour the heath ponds, though it also occurred sparingly in the forest ponds. Ophrydium versatile was our best find among the Infusoria ; it was floating about in the boggy ditches in masses as large as awalnut. The genus Stentor was abundantly represented, including the somewhat sporadic S. niger. The form most fre- quent among the Mastigophora was Dinobryon sertularia, unless one includes Volvox globater in this order. Volroa was certainly one of the most frequent forms of pond life in the Forest; its delicate green spherules were to be met in all kinds of water. The Rhizopoda would undoubtedly well repay careful attention in the Forest district, as the ponds seem specially rich inthem. Actino- sphaerium eichornii is most abundant, as also Actinophrys sol. Arcella vulgaris and Difflugia pyriformis were, of course, abundant; and in various ponds we found the beautiful Heliozoon A canthocystus turfacea. Hydra vulgaris and H. viridis were the repre- sentatives of the Hydrozoa, and in a large pond on Beaulieu Heath the orange variety of HA. vulgaris was very plentiful. This variety is only occasion- ally met with. and its colour is due, almost cer- tainly, to symbiotic algae, not, as is often imagined, to any specific difference. In this particular pond all the entomostracans were of the same orange tint. The colour was extremely vivid, often ap- proaching scarlet in its intensity. A tube full of deep orange hydra and entomostracans presented a very beautiful appearance. The Forest ponds were especially rich in ento- mostracans : but, as our knowledge of them is par- ticularly slender, their specific enumeration must be left until such time as a specialist in this class visits the district. It was our good fortune. how- ever, to take one specimen of the extremely rare » SCIENCE-GOSSIP. Chirocephalus diaphanus. Indeed, the capture may be looked upon as a re-discovery of this species in England, for it is so long since an indi- vidual was taken that its present existence was regarded as doubtful. In NOW OOMOL “Natural Science ” is an interesting note on ‘‘ The Apparent Disappearance of the British Phyllopods,” in which the writer calls attention to the dis- appearance of Chirocephalus with other Phyllopoda, It is noteworthy that the locality for Artemia salina was only three or four miles from the spot where we took Chirocephalus. A brief notice of the principal forms of the fresh- water algae must suffice to call attention to the richness of the Forest ponds in this direction. As hinted above, the desmids constitute a prominent feature of the flora of these ponds, especially such as are situated on the open heaths ; many species of the genera Closteriwm, Micrasterias, Buastrum, and Hya'otheca will be found. Batrachospermum moniliforme is not uncommon, while the beautiful Draparnaldia glomerata may be seen in profusion. Living diatoms form a not unimportant unit in the pond life of the Forest, and the order Confervoideae is largely represented. Such, excepting the Hydrachnidae, which Mr. Soar describes, is our modest contribution towards al enumeration of the various forms of * pond- life” occurring in the New Forest, a record, perhaps, hardly worth the making in itself, but published as an incentive to other workers to explore the ponds in this district for material for their own particular groups. It may be some groups are poorly represented in the Forest, but even then it is interesting to know that such is the case, especially if one gleans some idea of why the environment is unfavourable to them. On the other hand, our experience goes to show that eminently successful work could be done on many prominent groups. So far the New Forest has been regarded chiefly as an entomologist’s ground, but careful collecting may show that it is equally desirable in other directions. vol. G. T. HARRIS. HYDRACHNIDAE IN THE NEW FOorREs?. The New Forest is the happy hunting-ground of all entomologists, and as we know that the larval stages of the Hydrachnidae spend a great part of their time on the early and adult forms of aquatic insect life, we concluded it would also bea ood field for mite-hunting, but we have been dis- appointed, the number of species found being very small. This can, however, be accounted for more or less, as the ponds, mostly shallow, had the appearance in some cases of having been com- pletely dried up during the drought of last summer. This, of course, would be fatal to all freshwater mites. Then the weather at Easter was cold and windy, so that all mites that could do so had no 133 doubt hidden themselves in the mud, in the deepest parts of the ponds, where it was impossible to get at them with the ordinary collecting appara- tus. If this last suggestion is correct, another visit during the summer months would give a much better result. Anyway, we think it will be as well to give a list of what,was found, as it will form a beginning in the knowledge of their local distri- bution in that part of Hampshire, and the list can be added to from time to time, as the New Forest gets more systematically worked. Sub-family HYGROBATINAE.—1l. Curvipes fusca- tus Hermann. ARS y Oger) SR 1)" A beret oS CONDUCTED BY HAROLD M. READ, F.C.S. PRACTICAL INORGANIC CHEMISTRY. — “ The Modern System of teaching Practical Inorganic Chemistry and its Development” was the subject selected by Professor W.H. Perkin, jun., for the presidential address to the Chemistry Section at the recent Dritish Association meeting at Bradford. The president took as his keynote the question as to whether the modern method of teaching chemistry had kept pace with the enormous strides made in science during recent years. He questioned whether the introduction of chemistry into the syllabus of so many schools had so far resulted in the making of a student capable of grasping the underlying principles, or of showing that originality of thought, the absence of which is fatal to the final success of everyone. So much of the present-day teaching consists of filling a student’s mind with bare facts, -to be utilised in the examination-room, that the time for laboratory work and the possibilities of sound deductions are reduced toa minimum. ‘The student may, during the later part of his training, acquire a sound knowledge of his subject, but he has been so handicapped previously that he has not the time to make use of the opportunities which come too late. The result is that, though the student may acquit himself to the satisfaction both of his teacher and of himself, yet when he attempts to venture beyond the cut-and-dried facts with which his knowledge has been ‘bolstered up” he is helpless. No doubt originality of thought is not bestowed with any too lavish a hand ; but none the less, a methodical laboratory training, supplemented by the text-book and fostered by the teacher, would help to make up for that which Nature has omitted. In endeavouring to cover the examination field a fearful amount of valuable time is wasted, and therefore, as specialisation is inevitable, owing to the vastness of the general subject, Professor Perkin would have it begun as soon as the broad facts of the science have been assimilated. He suggests that the written examination should be curtailed, while more time is given to practical work, so that the latter may be made profitable, instead of being wasted, as it now is, to a great extent. The ad- vantages of making students take the attitude of discoverers are so manifest, and the results already obtained by the substitution of this new method for the old system of qualitative analysis are so striking, that we look to the address of Professor Perkin to mark the new era, the commencement of which has been so long delayed. We are pleased that our remarks of last month about the disgraceful system of ‘ spotting” salts should have been so borne ‘out by Professor Perkin’s com- mentson present-day teaching. We cannot deny the dangers inherent to any drastic change in a system which has so long held sway, but no one will doubt its advisability. CONDUCTED BY F. C. DENNETT. Position ai Noon. R.A. Dee. him. ° 3 Sun =. 12.31 3.26 S. ASS). 2 Oe - 146 12.44 Rises, Seis. Age at Noon Get hm. ham. d. hem. Moo .. 7 -. £33 pm. p-m. .. : 7 0.6 am. a.m. .. 27 10.43 am m. Position at Noon. Souths. Semi- R.A. Dec. Oct. him. Diameter. hem. ae Mercury... «2. 7... OA9 pm .. 29" .. 1351 12.225 17 i. 14 pm... 27" 3, 1446 .. 186 Was) ois pm: 31” .. 15.36 .. 22.11 Venus. <. = @ «or 91 am: $38” 104 .. 11:39 N. 17 se, 9 aa So O90. 1047s Sas 27 ess 9S anne BAe 0) Sa as Pett eg oo ieee Cal Pemk A 5S) ee et ee Jupiter .. -. 17 .. 249 pm -<. 153". 16.32 .. 2128 S. Saturn” 22 V2 Ut -- 4 Ni pa WA A802 24s Grants -) 22 aes 4250 pam ESA 2 16:33) 2 LoS NEURE =. 9 5 2190S, = Daylight. th horizon. OCCULTATIONS AND NEAR APPROACH. Angle Angle Dis- jrom Re- trom Oct. Object appears. Vertex. appears. Vertex. hm. ° hm. S 7.. «xPiscium 50 ..1 7 2.29 am: .. 236 lls. @ Tfanri 46. «= «4% 9.25 p.m. .. 346 ASC 30 .. 636am. .. 16 7.23 am... 286 14 .. yGeminoram 40 .. 3.0 am... 68 .. 3.43 p.m. .. 353 17 .. aCancri 43 .. 0.17 am. 91 .. Near approach. BI ie re 50 .. 526am. ..173 .. 630a.m... 269 29... dSagitiarii 49 .. 827 p.m. 7 $.46 p.m. .. 292 Tse Son— times be seen. MERcURY is an evening star all the month, Teaching its greatest elongation, 23°46’ east, at 4 a.m. on October 30th, setting rather more than an hour and a half after the sun at the end of the month. Its path takes it from a little north of groups may some- SCIENCE-GOSSIP. Spica Virginis at the beginning of the month, to closely south of 6 Scorpii at the end. VENUS is a morning star all the month. Its path starts from a point about 6° west of Regulus, being closely south of that star on October 7th, and on 31st passes very near to f Virginis. It rises at 1.45 a.m. atthe beginning of the month and rather over an hour later at the end of October. MaRS rises at 11.44 p.m. on October Ist, and about 25 minutes earlier at the end of the month. Tits path lies almost wholly through the constella- tion Cancer, about the 24th inst. entering a very barren portion of Leo. JUPITER is an evening star, but too near the sun for satisfactory observation. It sets at 7.50 at the beginning of the month, and at 6.10 at the end. Jupiter is in conjunction with Uranus at 10 p.m. on the 19th, passing 25’ to the north. SATURN sets at 9.14 p.m. on the Ist. and 7.24 on the 31st. so must be looked for as soon as the dusk will permit. URANUS is now oui of reach of our vision. NEPTUNE is still on the western borders of Gemini, close to Orion, and Taurus. Ii rises about 9.12 p.m. at the beginning of the month and two hours later at the end. THE So~aR EcLipse.—Aliogether the finest photographs are said to have been taken by Mr. Charles Burckhalter, with a 4-inch lens of fifteen feet focus. A novel arrangement was some time since invented by him by which it was possible to give different times of exposure to different paris of the same photograph. A plate exposed for eight econds received :-— w 320 and 8-00 seconds. 004 023 176 32’ 60’ and 110’ Exposure at 16’ 2) distance from the sun’s limb. The result is that every part of the sun’s surroundings, from the prominences to the outer corona, are shown in beautiiul detail. Mr. Burckhalier is the director of the Chabot Observatory, in California, and his eclipse expedition was made pik by the muni- ficence of Mr. John Dolbeer, of San Francisco. DayLicHtT MeTeor.—Anoither of these remark- able objects was seen on Sunday, September 2nd, at 6h. 52m., p.m., just before sunset. at places so far separated as Edinburgh and Wiltshire. THE OCCULTATION OF SATURN on September 3rd seems to have been well seen by some observers, who were struck by the great difference in the brightness of the planet and of the moon. From one station the moon and planet presented the appearance seen when objecis lying at the bottom of a rapidly rushing stream are being examined. PROFESSOR KEELER, the director oi the Lick Observatory. was. we are sorry to hear, snatched away by apoplexy on August 12th, at the early age of forty-three. Previously to succeeding Prof. Holden, in 1898. he had attracted wide attention as director of the Allegheny Observatory. Some of our readers will possibly remember that on p. 100 of our third volume we noted the late professor's demonstration at that observatory of the character of Saturn’s rings, photographically showing, by the displacement of the lines of the spectrum, that the inner portions of the ring were revolving faster than the outer sections. The plates had an exposure of two hours. This gréat work was accomplished in 1895. SCIENCE-GOSSIP, nose CATOCALA FRAXINI IN ENGLAND.— A specimen of this rare moth, known under the English name of “The Clifden Nonpareil,” is stated to have been found by a lady on sandhills at Blakeney, Norfolk, apout the last week in August. It is probably a migrant from the Continent. LARVAE OF LyYCAENA BAgTICA.—I have had the pleasure this summer of finding the larvae of Lycaena baetica feeding wpon the bladder-senna (Colutea arborescens), and I am now breeding some fine specimens of this handsome little tailed-blue butterfly, This plant is not common in our island, so that the butterfly larvae doubtless feed, as elsewhere in Europe, on seed-pods of other Legu- minaceae.— George Baker, 11 Saumarez Street, Guernsey: September sth, 1900. FASCIATED COTONEASTER.—I am sending you a remarkably fine case of fasciation. It occurred near Abergele, North Wales, on a shrub of Coton- easter, Wherein the lower portion of the stem is normal until within about ten inches from the top, when it begins to broaden and flatten to about three-quarters of an inch wide. ‘The small branches on the portion of the stem anterior to the fascia- tion are changed into leaflets. The broadening divides near its base, forming a short flat branch in the fasciated portion, both being curled at the ends.—H. Hmmett, 33 Selwyn Strect, Shelton, Stoke- on- Trent. VANESSA ANTIOPA.—The year 1900 appears to have been favourable to the migratory butterflies, as in addition to the invasion of “ Clouded Yellows,” mentioned last month, numerous specimens of the “Camberwell Beauty” (Vanessa antiopa) have been noted. Among the localities are Herne, in North Kent (August 18), Yattendon, Berks (August 18 and September 5), Newlands, North Sussex (August 26), Lindfield, Sussex, Bedding- ton, Surrey (August 31), Watling, Oxfordshire (August 19), Holt, Norfolk (August 30), and in Huntingdonshire (August 19). These are doubt- less all migrants from the mainland of the Con- tinent. We do not know of any trustworthy instance of the larva of this species occurring in this country during the last half-century New Orcuts.—In the Rey. E. F, Linton’s “ Flora of Bournemouth,” referred to ante, page 116, men- tion is made of the one thing that prevents this work being a mere, howeyer admirably complete, list of plants and localities, and that is the de- scription of anew form of Orchis, whichis separated from the spotted orchis under the name of 0. erice- torum, i. sub-sp. It is described as a plant of moist places and bogs on heaths, and is said to range from the extreme north of Britain to the south coast, and is also found in Ireland and the Channel Isles. A number of characters are enumerated as distinct from typical Orchis macu- data, but whether these are of such value as to Says. give sub-specific rank to this heathland form is a doubtful matter ; though, indeed, the Rey. EB, F, Linton seems to be of the opinion that it should take specific rank, if further study shows its dis- tinctive features-to be constant. Whatever may be its status, Orchis ericetorum Linton is certainly a plant to be looked for next season, and in this connection I may mention that during the past summer my friend, Mr. Jas. Holloway, brought under my notice a very distinct-looking form of Orchis maculata, found growing in bogs in Epping Forest, which I now think may prove to be the Orchis erieetorum. The variability of Orchis maculata has in the past received notice in the pages e SCIENCE-GossIP, notably in the article by Dr. G. H. Bryan in 1896 (vol. iii., n.s., p. 175), ieee are figured examples of variation of the labellum,. Some of the figures no doubt illustrate Orchis ericetorum, which is, I believe, certainly indicated in the first paragraph of the second column on p. 175.—C. #. Britton, 35 Dugdale Strect, Camberwell. COLEOPTERA NEAR CARLISLE.—Having during the last few months taken some interesting beetles in this district, 1 thought a few notes on same might be of interest to some of your readers. Nebria gyllenhalii is common under stones in our mountain streams. Lebia chlorocephala by pulling grass tufts in winter; not common. TZaphria nivalis running on roads; two specimens only. Anisodactylus binotatus occurs locally under stones and running on roads in spring. Bembidium rufescens, B. aeneum, B. minimum, B. decorum, B. tibiale, B. atrocoeruleum, and B. saxatile are all locally common. J. schiippelii, B monticola, B. lunatum, B. stomoides, and B. paludosum are rarer, and generally extremely local. Agahus guttatus is common, and A. femoralis is also common, but local. Conosoma immaculatus occurs rarely in putrid fungi. Zachinus collaris was very abundant in flood refuse. In about an hour I got some seventy specimens. Bolitobius atricapillus, B. trinotatus, and B. pygmaeus occur in fungi. Staphy- linus erythropterus is sometimes found running on roads and at tree-roots in winter. Stenus guttula is common near water. Pselaphus heisei and Tychus niger occur among Sphagnum moss. Choleva longula, one specimen sitting on a blade of grass. Paramecosoma melanocephalum, not uncommon in grass tufts and flood refuse. Avatis ocellata, some- times beaten commonly from fir-branches. Athous niger, uncommon, generally by sweeping. Podabrus alpinus and Aneistronycha abdominalis are local and rare Telephorus figuratus is very local, but abundant about the end of June. Barynotus moerens iS not uncommon on Dogs’ Mercury. Pissodes pini, fourteen specimens found sitting on the undersides of fir-logs. Apion carduorum, A. striatum, A. senieulum, A. frumentarium, A. nigri- tarse, and A. humile are common, and A. affine. A, gyllenhalii, and A. viciae are local. Rhynchites aeneovirens, not common, were beaten from haw- thorn. Grammoptera tabacicolor and G. ruficornis both occurred, the latter very commonly. Lema melanopa occurred occasionally by sweeping. Chrysomela hyperici is rare. Cryptocephalus labia- tus, one specimen beaten from birch in June. Taken all in all, this year up to that month has been favourable for the Coieopterist, some groups—as the Longhorns, for instance-—being more in eyi- dence than is usual.—Jas. Murray, 11 Close Street, Carlisle. 160 SCIENCE-GOSSTIP. THE PHOTOGRAPHIC SALON. THE eighth annual exhibition of the Photographic Salon was opened at the Dudley Gallery of the Eeyptian Hall, London, on September 21st, and con- tinues until November 3rd. This collection affords an almost unique opportunity of comparing the methods of applying the different styles and pro- cesses of artistic photography as used throughout the world. There are upwards of two hundred and fifty pictures shown, and the average merit of this year’s collection is markedly in advance of its pre- decessors. The *‘Salon” was founded and has been maintained by a private society of leading persons interested in artistic photography. It is known to themselves as “The Linked Ring.” NOTICES OF SOCIETIES. Ordinary meetings are marked 7, excursions * ; names of persons Following excursions are of Conductors. Lantern Mlustra- tions §. MANCHESTER MtsEtM., OWENS COLLEGE. * The History of Gold, Tin, and some other Metals.” Prof. W. Boyd Dawkins, F.R.S. » 14—* Hilland Valley.” Prof. W. Bord Dawkins, F.RS. Norte Lonpon NatuRsL History Socrery. Oct. +—7 Pocket-book Exhibition and Microscopical Evening. >, 13.—* Horniman Museum, Forest Hill. «= 18.—7 ~ The British Flora in Relation to those ot Neighbour- ing Lands.” C.S. Nicholson. NOTTINGHAM NATURAL SCIENCE RAMBLING CLUB. Oct. 27.—Annual Meeting and Corversazione. KENSINGTON POPULAR SCIENCE LECTURES. Oct. 18.—§ * The World when Young.” Rev. J. O. Bevan, M.A.. FSA. F.2.8. « 25—§*The Chemistry of the Earth’s Crust.” Cecil Carus-Wilson, F.R.S. Edin, F.R.G-S:. F.G.S. Noy. 1.—§ “How Rocks are made.” Cecil Carus-Wilson. > 5—S$* The Life of the Pasi.” F. W. Radler. F.G-S.. ete: - 15—§~*Land and Scenery.” H. R. Mill, D-Sc., LLD.. R.S. Edin. é Prof. Ashley Carus- Wilson, M.A., Assoc. M.Inst. O.E., M.Inst. E.E. Kensington Town-hall, at 4.45 p.m. LAMBETH FIELD CLUB AND SCIENTIFIC SOCIETY. Cet. 1—y; *My Friends, the Whistlers and Croakers.” W. Harvey-Piper. —* Brockwell Park. Mr. H. J. Siidmersen. > Ld. —Gossip Meeting. Display of Fungi. Noves on Meteors. + 22.—* Annual Soirée and Exhibition. Mr. E. NOTICE TO READERS. In consequence of pressure on. our space, Mr. E. Sanger Shepherd's continuation of the “ Photography of Colour” and other important articles unavoidably stand over. ANSWERS TO CORRESPONDENTS. E.R. D. (Salisbury).— We tear the electric lamp you kindly submit is t00 cumbersome for the use of imsect-colleciors, as it occupies one hand. Have you seen the little electric lamps attached to a coat button-hole, used by omnibus ticket-imspectors in London? They are much more applicable. Ii is nearly seven years since the address of SclENCE-GOsSIP was in Picea- dilly. J. H. B. (Chatham).—The spider is Epeira diademata Cik., the common “ garden spider.” The species is subject to great varia- tion in point of colour, so it is only natural that extra large or pnusually coloured indiviauals should be considered as rarities. The most tangible specific distinction of this spider isthe vulva (on the underside of the abdomen, towards its fore part). This organ under a hand lens appears to consist of two dark dots, from which springs a long semi-transparent projection which bends down towards the spinners. Formalin is not suitable for spiders. They have to be pulled abont for purposes of examina- tion and identification, and if preserved in formatin solution the legs, palpi, and other paris get brittle and break of. Use methylated spirit.—F. P. 8. k. B. (Hailsham).—Ladie=’ tresses (Spiranthe 2s aviumnalis). NOTICES TO CORRESPONDENTS. To CORRESPONDENTS AND EXCHANGERS.—SCIENCE-GOSSIP is published on the 25th of each month. All notes or other com- munications should reach us not later than the 18th of the month for insertion in the following number. No communications can be inserted or noticed without full name and address of writer. Notices of changes of address admitted free. EDITORIAL COMMUNICATIONS, articles, books for review, instru- ments for notice, specimens for identification, &c.. to be addressed to JoHN T. CaARRINGTON, 110 Strand, London, W.C. SUBSCRIPTIONS.—The volumes of SclIENCE-GossiP begin with the June numbers, but Subscriptions may commence with any number. at the rate of 6s. 6d. for twelve months (including postage). and should be remitted to the Office, 110 Strand; London, W.C. Notice.—Contributors are requested to strictly observe the following rules. All contributions must be clearly written on one side oi the paper only. Words intended to be printed in italics should be marked under with a single line. Generic names must be given in full, excepting where used immediately before. Capitals may only be used for generic, and not specific names. Scientific names and names of places to be written in round hand. THE Editor will be pleased to answer questions and name specimens through the Correspondence column of the magazine. Specimens, in good condition, of not more than three species to be sent atone time, carriage paid. Duplicates only to be sent. which will not be returned. The specimens must have ideniify— ing numbers attached, together with locality, date, and par- ticulars of capture. THE Editor is not responsible for unused MSS., neither can he undertake to return them unless accompanied with stamps for return postage. EXCHANGES. ENTOMOLOGISTS ANNUAL, complete set, and Inany other entomological works; exchange oe shells, canaries, fancy pheasants, or glass-topped boxes.—C. S. Coles, Pheasaniries. Hambiedon, Cosham, Hanis. Microscopy.—Animal hairs, about sixty varieties; what ofiers 2? Mounting material not required——J. T. Holder, 77 Erlanger Road, St. Catherine’s Park, London, SE. BoTanNicaL.—Offered, Lond. Cat. B. Planis 264, 701, 798, 1,063. 1.285, 1,619, 1,786, 1,870, 1,926. 387, 615, $00, $47.—A. Hosking, £8 Norwich Street, Cambridge. Drsatox slides in exchange for other objects, or works on Microscopy.—H. Platt. Priory Villa, Victoria Road North, Southsea. CONTENTS. Sik JOHN BENNET Lawes. (Portrait) as Se ==) ee NoTES oN SPrsytNG ANDEALS. By H. Wattis Kew. THustrated .. te ss a s: Sa) SUE! PonD-LIFE IN THE NEw Forest. By G. T. zene F.R.P.S., and C. D. Soar, F.2.M.S. Jilustrated. .. 132 GEOLOGICAL NOTES IX THE ORANGE RIVER CoLony. By Major B. M. Skinner, R.A.M.C. Jilustrated .. Be bee ON THE NATURE oF LIFE. By GEOFFREY MARTIN rex ibis: AN INTRODUCTION TO British SPIDERS. By FRANK Percy Sate. Illustrated se = = ze » 138. Esiemas OF PLant Live. By Dr. P. Q. KEEGAN -. 140 BUTTERFLIES OF THE PALAEARCTIC REGION. By HENRY CHsRLES LAanc, M.D. IIlustrated =A 5 ae / D4 Os CoLovRING oF MoLitscs’ SHELLS. By REGINALD J. HUGHES 3e ae : 2s ae a5 aa ee TRISH PLANT NAMES. By ee H. BAaRsour, M.B. ae LT Books TO BESD .. = a: zc ac a -. 148 SCIENCE GOssIP .. ae ac a2 ac == -. 150 Microscopy 32 2 a: SC =: ss se) Jot Puysics—GEOLOGY 3: = S: as a 155, 156 CHEMISTRY .. =e a: Sc == ac =5 popliteal ASTRONOMY—NOTES AND QUERIES -. «. =: 158, 159 NOTICES—EXCHANGES .. os =: ss oe -. 160 Wanted, 219, 324, 342, 350, 384, ba. SCIENCE-GOSSIP. 161 SCENERY OF LLANBERIS PASS. Ben Hemel, FILER. ‘ Bee those who do not habitually speculate on the causes which have produced the present configuration of the country, generally have their interest awakened when passing through mountainous districts, and nowhere, perhaps, in Great Britain more than when amongst the moun- tains and valleys of North Wales. Indeed, the varied nature of the rocks, their extreme antiquity, their crumpled and contorted bedding, and the Photo by Fie. 1. very evident traces of later glacial action, cannot fail to attract attention. These features are, perhaps, most marked amidst the grand rock scenery in the neighbourhood of the Llanberis Pass. There is in the following notes no claim made to anything of an original quality, but they may possibly be of assistance to those who visit the district for the first time, and need a little guidance. The Pass of Llanberis, which lies in a north- westerly direction, reaches at its south-east end an elevation of 1,160 feet, and slopes away north- west down to 340 feet above sea-level at the town of Llanberis. Along the whole of this length—a distance of about five miles—there can be seen Noy, 1900.—No. 78, Vou. VII. ice-rounded rocks, perched blocks, and ice-ground furrows, showing that a glacier of great size once descended the pass, fed by tributary glaciers; the signs of the latter being most prominent in the two great hollows of Cwm-glas and Cwm-glas-bach. A short distance along the road from Llanberis the vertically bedded cliffs, on the right, sweep up to the ridge of Llechog, at the foot of which, near the road, is a series of beautifully rounded rocks, [A. W. Dennis. VALLEY OF OWM-GLAS-BACH, FROM THE LLANBERIS Pass. their sides scored with striae, sometimes so deep as to be more like horizontal gullies, with the finer scratchings on their inner surface remaining still fresh and sharp. Here and there perched blocks are left. In many cases their situation leaves no doubt as to the agency which dropped them into position, as it would be impossible for the broken debris of the cliff behind to have reached their present resting-places. Bordering the lake on the left hand, the rocks curve down to the water's edge ; their weathered surfaces showing still the mamuimillated outlines characteristic of glaciation. Continuing along the pass through the little village of Nant Peris, there presently opens out on the right the tributary valley of Cwm-glas-bach. At G 162 its near western end, overlooking the river, is a large bluff having its rounded top liberally scat- tered with perched blocks. ‘This lies just outside the picture of Cwm-glas-bach, to the right. ‘The mammillated rocks of Cambrian grit show clearly in the foreground, and extending high up the hill- sides can be seen the rocks smoothed by the grind- ing ice, although now much broken up by weather- ing. The destructive effects of frost will, of course, be most apparent on the lower faces of the rocks which front down the valley, and these broken faces unfortunately are most prominent in the photograph, so the pictorial result is not so striking as the reality. Evidently a tributary SCIENCE-GOSSIP. tending down the valley are a series of moraine heaps, some of them of great size, placed more or less concentrically, and scattered with enormous blocks. This can be reached by the easier but less interesting track which ascends Snowdon from Lianberis. The path forks just a little distance before reaching the small lake, and the right-hand branch, which is a road to the abandoned copper- ore workings near the lake, can be followed. Returning once more to Cwm-glas-bach, and continuing up the Llanberis Pass, the more inter- esting valley of Cwm-glas is soon reached. This is separated from the former valley by the buttress which is seen descending on the left-hand side of Photo by] FIG. 2. [A. W. Dennis. MORAINE HEAP AT THE FOOT OF CwM-GLAS. VIEW FROM THE NORTE-WEsT. descended here from the ridge above to join the main glacier of the pass. We found no striae in this Cwm, although I believe they have been seen there. An easy ascent can be made here; and on crossing the shoulder at the top, it is only a short scramble down into Cwm-Brwynog on the north-west of Snowdon. Perhaps the most impressive evidence of the vast amount of material transported by the old glaciers can be seen at this spot. At the head of the valley, the peace of which is now disturbed by the snort and smoke of the mountain railway, stand the dark and almost inaccessible cliffs of Clogwyn-dur-Arddu. Sheltered in a hollow at their base, at about 2,000 feet elevation, lies a small blue lake, Starting from this lake and ex- the photograph. The rugged scenery of this grand valley has throughout been modified by the glaciers which once swept over its craggy slopes. Situated at the further end of the Cwm and not far from the road is a remarkable mound, partly overgrown with grass and scattered with angular blocks. The most probable explanation of its formation is that it was deposited at the termina- tion of the Cwm-glas glacier, when, owing to the amelioration of the climate, the main glacier of the pass had disappeared. Referring to the photo- graph which was taken when looking up the pass, the glacier descended from the right hand. The house in the foreground shows by comparison the immense size of the mound. Blackfriars Road, London, October 1900. SCIENCE-GOSSIP. 163 THE PHOTOGRAPHY OF COLOUR. By E. SANGER SHEPHERD. : (Concluded from page 112.) E have considered the theoretical conditions necessary for securing a record of the colours of a natural object. Let us see how we may best carry our knowledge into practice. First, with regard to the most convenient appa- ratus for taking the negatives. We may mount our three coloured light filters in little brass caps, so that they may be easily slipped over the front Fie. 13. PHOTOGRAPHY OF COLOUR. of the hood of the lens, and place our plates in three dark slides in the ordinary way, but changing the dark slides and light filters between the suc- cessive exposures takes up time, and there is the liability of shifting the camera during the opera- tion. A very little experience in making tri- chromatic negatives in this manner will quickly convince the photographer of the inconvenience of so many operations, and the early investigators soon turned their attention to what was at that time avery popular piece of apparatus with the portrait photographer—the ‘“ Repeating Back.” By mounting a frame at the back of the camera, furnished with a dark slide long enough to take three plates’ side by side, the plate may be easily changed by sliding the plate-holder along to stops. Such an apparatus is represented in fig. 13 attached to an ordinary quarter-plate camera, and fig. 14 represents the separate parts. The back proper, A, is fitted to the camera by means of a panel cut to match and interchangeable with the dark slide, so that the attachment can be taken on or off in a few seconds; in this back slides a frame B, in which the blue-light filter c, the green-light filter D, and the red-light filter B are mounted. At the top and bottom of the frame are brass plates, which serve to hold the double dark slide F, which takes one long plate 8” x 32/’, so that the dark slide and the colour filter can be changed together by one movement. ‘There are three depressions in the side of the colour-filter frame B, into which the pin of the spring latch H drops when the filters are central with the opening in the back, A. Such a piece of apparatus is very compact and will enable the photographer to obtain perfect negatives of a very large variety of landscapes, portraits, still life, ete. ; subjects, and as it can be attached to any piece of apparatus that will project a sharp image upon the plate, it is per- fectly satisfactory for photo-micrography, polari- scopic and spectroscopic work. ‘The apparatus occupies only a space of 143”’ x 5!’ x 12", and forms but a small addition to the landscape photo- grapher’s outfit. For special purposes there are many other forms of camera available. For in- stance, where a large number of colour photo- graphs are required from fiat surfaces, paintings, coloured book illustrations, maps, ete., a camera may be used furnished with three rectilinear lenses, when all three exposures can be made simul- taneously, the work being quite as easy as ordinary Fig. 14. PHOTOGRAPHY OF COLOUR. photography. Such a form of camera cannot, how- ever, be used for ordinary work from objects in relief, as the points of view of the lenses are separated, and the prints from the three negatives when superposed would not register correctly. In order to take three negatives of such objects simul- taneously, a more complicated camera, furnished with one lens and a set of reflectors behind it, G2 - 164 dividing the beam of light into three portions, is necessary, The Repeating Back is. however, the general favourite of the amateur, as it is so simple in operation and occupies so little space. In taking the colour negatives. one point only has to be remembered. The negatives through the three filters will require different exposures, for, as we saw (page 111), a white object must be repre- sented by equal density in ‘all three negatives. With each Repeating Back the makers furnish the relative times of exposure for each filter; for in- stance, the red filter negative may take nine seconds, the green three seconds, and the blue three seconds, and whatever exposures are necessary for our subject they must be given in this pro- portion. Diiferent batches of emulsion may vary slightly in colour-sensitiveness. and it is very easy _ for the amateur to test his ratio by photographing such an object as a sheet of white blotting-paper roughly crumpled and pinned upon a black surface. A single negative. exposed and developed, will show at once if any alteration is required. t only remains then to describe the method of printing the separate sensations, and mounting them in superposition. The minus red or greenish- blue printis made upon a gelatino-bromide of silver emulsion plate, and after development ihe silver deposit is replaced by ferro-cyanide of iron, the metallic silver acting as a mordant. This sub- stitution product is the particular tint of greenish- blue required, and the image is a yery delicate one of great beauty. The prints from the green and blue filter negatives are printed together upon a strip of special film of thin iranspareni celluloid which has undergone a process of air-drying, in order to ensure freedom from unequal contraction. The celluloid is coated with a soluble gelatine film containing a trace of bromide ot silver. The film will keep indefinitely, and it is rendered sensitive for use by immersion in a solution of a chromaie salijin the manner of carbon tissue. The gelatine film being. however, very much thinner than ordinary carbon tissue, all the usnal difficulties of drying, insensitive- ness, etc., are absent, and as the celluloid side oi the film is placed in contact with the film side of the negative, so that the exposure takes place through the celluloid film, no transfer with iis attendant difficuliies is necessary. The image is a visible one and can be examined irom iime io iime. ithe exposure being complete when all the details are distinctly seen, as a light brownish-grey image. very similar io an undeveloped plaiinotype print. The printed film is then washed out in warm waiter, the trace of silver bromide enabling us io see when the development is complete. the image held over a dark surface appearing as a delicate white print in low relief. The silver bromide, having served its purpose, is dissolved ont by a solution of hypo-sulphate of soda, and the resulting low relief in clear gelatine washed and dried. The two prints which have so far been treated together are SCIENCE-GOSSIP. now cut apart, and the print from the green-filter negative stained in a pink dye-bath, so as to get a pink print which allows red and blue light to pass. The print from the blue-filter negative is stained ina yellow dye-bath so as to get a yellow print, which will allow red and green light to pass. When the two prints are dry, they are placed in superposi- tion upon the greenish-blue print and our picture is finished. As the two film prints are reversed prints, in consequence of our printing through the film, and the greenish-blue print is a direct one. the two most important components of the triplet —the greenish-blue and pink prints—are mounted in actual contact, and as the third print, the yellow, is only separated from them by one thickness of very thin celjuloid, the finished print behaves in every way as a single picture. Lantern slides made in this way are as itrans- parent as the best hand-coloured slides, although, of course, infinitely superior in delicacy and accu- racy of colouring. They may be shown in an ordinary lantern, without the necessity for any extra attachment ; the mixed jet limelight giving perfectly satisfactory discs up io about 12 feet in diameter. With the electric-arc light picimres of 20 feet diameter or more can be easily shown. For projecting pictures naturally, the whitest light available should be used—preferably the eleciric are, but the mixed oxyhydrogen limelichi, if a small jet is used, will give a very satisfactory light. although the pictures will be a little warmer in colouring than they would be as seen by daylight. For home exhibition, on a disc up to two feet in diameter. a double acetylene-gas burner will prove quite satisfactory. , Before concluding it is desirable io correct an oversight that appeared on line 6 from the top of page 112. The sentence should read: “Hach oi these colours therefore transmits iwo, and absorbs one, of the three primary colours used by Clerk- Maxwell to form white light.” : London, October 1900. THE NOBEL BEQUEST.—Just before going to press we have been furnished through the Board of Hducation, which has received them from the Foreign Office. with copies of the official statutes and regulations of the Nobel Bequest. The large amount of annual interest accruing will be divided equally into five annual prizes. Three of these apply to scientific research. They are: (1) To the most important discovery or invention in the do- main of the physical sciences; (2) to the most important discovery or improvement in chemistry ; (8) to the most important discovery in physiolosy or medicine. The competition is open to the world, and. it is believed. will be held for the first time in 1901. Next month we shall probably give further details with regard to these valuable prizes. : Two New Mrvor PLANETS were photographic- ally discovered by Professor Max Wolf and Herr Schwassmann, ot Heidelberg, on 15th and 21st of September. SCIENCE-GOSSIP. 165 NOTES “ON ATYEUS. By FRANK PERCY SMITH. TYPUS affinis Bichw. (A. sultzeri Bl., A. piceus Sultz.), commonly known as the ‘ trap-door spider,” is one which, although very local and for, seldom seen unless carefully searched has Fie. 1. Locality near Hastings for Atypus. attracted a good deal of attention. During the early part of this year I had occasion to visit Hastings, a well-known locality for this species, and was fortunate enough to ob- tain a number of adult fe- males. Mr. Con- nold, Hon. Sec. of the Hastings T 4 Cae Natur en His Fic. 2, External portion of tube of tory Society, Atupus at knife point. accompanied me, and took the photographs here reproduced. The greatest difticulty experienced in the photo- graphing was that of bringing the lens within a short distance of the ground, and at the same time preserving the steadiness necessary for a com- paratively long exposure. After a considerable amount of manoeuvring, however, the pictures were taken, and with far better results than I anticipated, considering the accuracy required to portray such obscure structures. Two of them represent the tubes as they appeared when first discovered. A third photograph shows a tube with the earth removed so as to expose its entire lene th. The fourth ‘shows the hillock from which was taken the nest indicated by means of a penknife. On returning to London I at once visited Hamp- stead Heath, Mr. F. Enock’s famous hunting- ground, but was unable to find a single specimen in this locality. On October 9, however, whilst collecting on Wimbledon Common, I noticed a mound of sandy earth, which from its structure, aspect, and vegetation at once suggested the idea of looking for Atypus. During the half-hour of daylight which I had at my disposal, I carefully investigated the mound, and had the satisfaction of finding the remains of an old tube. Living spiders would probably have been found had the light permitted of further search. A few notes on the creature’s structure and habits may be of use. ‘The female is about half an inch in length, exclusive of the falces and spinners ; the male is considerably smaller. The falces are extremely prominent and very powerful, and the movable fang is capable of motion in a vertical plane. In all other British spiders the fang moves either in a horizontal or an oblique plane. The spiracular openings are four in number and are very distinct. ‘The eyes are eight in number and are closely grouped on the anterior part of the caput. Two groups of three eyes each are in the form of a triangle, and the two remaining eyes; which are the largest of the eight, are placed transversely between these triangles. The female spider constructs a tube, partly buried in the earth and partly lying upon it, This tube varies in length ac- cording to the age of the spider, and is often 12 inches long or even more, when the creature is adult. The ex- External portion of tube of another Afypus. Fia. 3. ternal |part of the tube is in- termixed with fragments of sandand debris, and, after hav- ing been ex- posed to atmo- spheric influ- ences for some time, is most difficult to de- tect. There is no _trap-door. The spider lies in wait in some part of the tube, the external portion being connected with the crea- ture’s spinners by means of a number of deli- Earth removed to show the entire tube of Atupus. Fig. 4. 166 SCIENCE-GOSS/P. cate threads. As soon as any insect ventures to walk upon the tube, the spider, apparently receiving some intimation of the fact by vibration of the silken threads. at once rushes to the spot, seizes the victim through the substance of the tube, and drags it bodily in. The rent thus made is shortly afterwards mended from the inside. Ti is very interesting to note that when an errant male alights upon the tube he is not seized, although the female has no apparent means of seeing what is going on. He then proceeds to beat with his legs upon the external tube, but siill the female remains at the bottom. After waiting some time he ap- parently becomes impatient. and, tearing up the Fié. 5. Section showme Afypus im ibe. fabric with his powerful falces, he enters the tube’ The pair often live together for some months, at the end of which time the observer is surprised to see the remains of the male brought to the surface and pushed through the tube. It is not a case of “ death from natural causes,” as careful investiga- tion has proved that the male is devoured by his loving wife. After this tragedy has terminated, the female retires to the widest pari of the tube, and lays about a hundred spherical eggs. The female guards the young spiders. which bear a strong re- semblance to their parenis, until they are large and strong enough to leave the imbe and start homes of their own- 15 Cloudesley Place, Islington, NV. AN INTRODUCTION TO BRITISH SPIDERS. By Frank Percy SMITH. (Continued from page 140.) GENUS TEXTRIX SUND. This genus may be easily distinguished from its allies by the curve of the hinder row of eyes having its convexity directed forward. The spiders included in the genus are usually found amongst loose stones and rocks, more especially on decaying walls, where they spin a web very similar to that of the genus Tegenaria. Textrix denticulata Oliv. (7. Jycosina Bl.) Length. Male 6 mm., female 7.5 mm. The general colour is brown. The legs are of a pale yellow tint, distinctly annulated with dark brown. The abdomen has a bread central band of a bright reddish colour, edged with yellowish and speckled with dark brown. This is a well-distributed though not common spider, and is easily distinguished Fic. 1. a. Palpal organs of Pholcomma gibbum: 6. Palpal organs of Sicateda bipunctata: c. Palpal organs 01 Pedanostahus lividus: d. Palpal orzams of Theridion Tineatum. by the bright colouring of the abdomen. On account of the peculiar position of the eyes it may be at first mistaken for one of the Zycosidaz, but the length of the superior spinners is a sure indication of its true systematic position. A doubtful species, which may be a young example of 7. denticulaia Oliv., has been described by Rev- O. P. Cambnidge as Textrix boopis. SCIENCE-GOSSIP. 167 GENUS HAHNIA KOCH. The spiders of this genus are easily recognised on account of their short form and comparatively small size, but more so by the curious arrangement of the spinners, which are placed in a nearly straight line upon the under side of the abdomen. Hahnia elegans Bl. (Avelena elegans Bl.) Length. Male 3 mm., female 3.5 mm. The general colour of this species is a bright orange or yellowish-brown. The abdomen is dark brown, with a series of broken angular bars of a yellow colour. It is not common. Hahnia nava Bl. (Agelena nava Bl.) Length. Male 2 mm., female 2.3 mm. Cephalo-thorax nearly black. Legs brown. Abdo- men dull blackish. The spinners have the appearance of being annulated, owing to the pale colour of their joints. . This is a rather rare spider. I have recently taken it at Hastings. Hahnia montana Bl. (Agelena montana Bl.) Length. Male 2 mm., female 2.5 mm. This species may be distinguished from 4. xava bl. by its paler and more yellowish colour, also by its being less hirsute. It is not common. Hahnia candida Sim. Length. Male 1.5 mm., female 1.8 mm. This species may be distinguished from 4. woz/ana Bl. by its smaller size and paler colouring. It is very rare. Hahnia helveola Sim. Length. Male 3 mm., female 3.5 mm. This species may be distinguished from 4. sortana Bl. by its larger size, its less distinct markings, and by the greater length of the abdominal pubescence. It is very rare. FAMILY PHOLCIDAE. The spiders included in this small family are very easy to distinguish. The legs are extremely long and slender, the body is cylindrical, and the eyes are arranged in three groups of 3, 2, 3. The eyes of the lateral groups are large, and the central eyes are small; in some exotic species the centrals are absent. GENUS PHOLCUS WALCK. The eyes in this genus, which is the only one of this family represented in Britain, are eight in number. The falces are very small and weak. Pholcus phalangioides Fuessl. Fig. 16. Length. Male 7 mm., female 9 mm. This extremely curious spider is by no means common, but when found it cannot well be mistaken. It spins a loose web in the angles of walls in out- buildings, cellars, etc., and when anything touches its snare it rapidly retracts and extends its legs, thus throwing the whole fabric into violent motion. This curious performance, which is indulged in by a number of other spiders such as Epeirids and Theridiidids, may be for the purpose of eluding an enemy, as the creature becomes almost invisible when in motion ; or, more probably, for the purpose of entangling its prey. This process seems to reach its maximum with regard to violence of motion in Pho/cus ; but a neater and more scientific method is indulged in by ypézotes paradoxus. This little creature makes a triangular web with viscid lines crossing from side to side, the base line being produced on each side and fastened to any neighbouring projection. The animal sits at the apex, which is attached by a strong line to some twig, and gathers up a length of this line into a coil, thus drawing the web tight. As soon as an insect touches the web the spider releases its hold, thus allowing the whole structure to be thrown forward against the captive. If necessary the process is repeated several times, and the spider then rushes down one of the lines and seizes its hopelessly entangled victim. This spider has been recently taken, in plenty, in the New Forest (see SCIENCE-GossiP, March 1go0). I have received Pholcus phalangioides from Norwich and Hampshire ; and the Rev. E. N. Bloomfield tells me it used to be very common at Guestling Rectory, near Hastings. (Zo be continued. ) ABNORMAL MUSHROOM. AN unusually-shaped mushroom (Agartcus canzipes- tvs) with three pileoli on one stem was collected at Corby, near Kettering, on August 28th last, by Mr. Lumby. I enclose a photograph of the example, as it is of such rare occurrence to find monstrosities s ABNORMAL MUSHROOM. of this character among the fungi. It will be observed that the gills are all turned to the outside. Of course one cap is not visible in the picture, but it was perfect as the rest. W. W. MIDGLEY. Chadwick Museum, Bolton, October 5th, 1900. Novre.—Onur readers will remember that we figured a monstrosity somewhat like Mr. Lumby’s specimen, in SCIENCE-GossIP, vol. iv., n.s., page 272. In that case the specimen was double and not a triplet.— [EDuS:-G.] 168 SCIENCE-GOSSIP. NOTES ON SPINNING ANIMALS. By H. WALLIS Kw. (Continued from page 131.) V.. SPINNING BEETLES. AMONG the few insects capable of spinning in a the imago state are the water-beetles of the family Hydrophilidae—well known in the person of Hydrophilus piceus, the great harmless water- beetle of the aquarium. Here the females spin cocoons or silken bags, sometimes of complex structure, in which their eggs and newly-hatched larvae are enclosed and protected. The egg-cocoon of Hydrophilus piceus is nearly an inch broad. somewhat roundish, slightly nar- rowed and truncated anteriorly, where it is fur- nished above with a spike or “‘ mast,” recalling the horn on the anal segment of a hawk-moth cater- pillar. The structure is spun from a paired spin- neret at the hinder extremity of the beetle. When complete it floats at the surface of the water, usually attached. to a leaf or some small floating object, and always with the spike above the sur- face. The young larvae, which remain in the cocoon for a while after hatching, finally escape near the base of the spike, where the cocoon is only slightly closed. This floating nest,and the manner in which it is spun, were described by the cele- brated Lyonnet ; and later, in 1809, Miger, who also had witnessed the spinning of the cocoon, published his often quoted memoir and illustra- tions ('). The beetle observed by Lyonnet was kept in a trough, where it was supplied with filamentous algae, floated on the water by means of wooden shavings. Before long Lyonnet saw the beetle setting about the formation of a cocoon. She ex- tended the hinder rings of the body and opened the last of all, exposing a cavity in which was seen a whitish disc, giving off two small prominences side by side, each enclosing a delicate tube about a line in length, stiff towards the base, but flexible and elastic towards the tip. These two tubes formed the spinneret. ‘They always moved to- gether, but each contributed a separate thread. Lying back downwards near the surface of the water, beneath or amongst the algae, the beetle began to weave one side of the cocoon; and as the work proceeded she was careful to press and flatten the growing structure, moulding it with her fore- feet against her body, and thus giving it the form of a flattened arch. After the first section, which formed the upper side of the cocoon, was finished, the insect turned over and wove another piece, (1) Lyonnet and Miger have recently been quoted at length by Miall, op. cit., pp. 61-86 ; and it is from this source that the present notes of the work of these authors are derived. exactly the reverse of the first, to form the under- side. The two curved pieces were now woven together, and thus the body of the cocoon was constructed. .The work so far had occupied about an hour anda quarter. For about two hours the beetle remained still with her body buried in the cocoon, from which, however, it became evident that she was gradually withdrawing. She was in fact laying her eggs. She now withdrew her body completely, and began to spin about the open mouth of the cocoon, gradually narrowing and closing it. Afterwards she proceeded to spin the spike, which gradually rose above the water. ‘The work was complete in five hours, after which the cocoon was left floating. Miger relates that he kept several specimens of this beetle in a vessel of water with aquatic plants, and that at length he saw a female spin a cocoon. She attached herself to the under-side of a floating leaf, clasping it with her forelegs and applying her abdomen to its under surface. The two tubes of the spinneret could be seen to be pushed in and out with rapidity, while a gummy liquid was passed from them and drawn out into threads: and these, being attached to the leaf, gradually surrounded the tip of the abdomen, forming at length a semicircular pouch in which that part of the beetle was enclosed. After about ten minutes the beetle turned sharply round, letting go the leaf and bringing her head downwards, but with- out withdrawing the abdomen from the cocoon. The leaf was now held by the hindlegs only, one being placed on each side of the cocoon. The insect continued to work steadily for nearly an hour and a half; and, through the transparent wall of the cocoon, Miger could see the movements of the spinneret, until at last the gradual addition of threads made the structure opaque. The beetle then laid her eggs, and afterwards closed the cocoon slightly, and began to form the spike. The tips of the wing-cases, which were a little opened, were brought to the surface of the water, and the spinneret was seen to be in continuous and rapid motion. The spinning of the spike took more than half an hour, at the end of which time the completed spike—which, as Miger sup- posed, served to supply the cocoon with air—rose considerably above the water. The whole work occupied about three hours. J. Fullagar, among more recent observers, men- tions having seen the Hydrophilus piceus spin her cocoon in an aquarium. He gives a sketch show- ing the beetle holding the unfinished cocoon between the hindlegs, and another showing the SCIENCE-GOSSTIP. completed floating structure slightly attached to a bit of weed (*). A. G. Laker also has given particulars of the same beetle’s cocoon, of which he found a number of specimens in a pond near London. They varied considerably in size and shape, but averaged about 114 lines long by 10? lines broad, the height to the tip of the spike being about 17 lines. ‘The walls were composed of a substance very like paper ; but the part immediately below the spike was of a loose silky material, which, though this part was submerged, was not impervious to water. It was by breaking through this material that the young larvae ultimately escaped. ‘The interior of the cocoon contained similar loose material, as well as the eggs, of which there were fifty to sixty. The cocoons were remarkably buoyant; but they usually floated attached to confervae, to long grass growing in the water, or to the under-side of floating: leaves. The spike was of a substance somewhat thicker and stronger than the rest of the cocoon, and was hollow throughout the greater part of its length, except that it was crossed and recrossed inside with a dark thread-like substance. The observer compares it to a horn stuffed with tow (°). There are in various parts of the world a number of other species of Hydrophilus, but the writer has not seen observations on their spinning-work, ex- cept in the case of the great American Hydro- philus triangularis, I am not aware that the spinning process has been watched in this species ; but the cocoon itself has been carefully described. Garman, who obtained half-a-dozen cocoons from the surface of a small pool, says that the outside is smooth, of a light brown colour, and much resembles the egg-cocoon of the common black and yellow Epeirid spider of North America. Viewed from above or below, the outline is circular, with a diameter of about 20 mm, The spike, unlike the rest of the cocoon, is of a horny nature. Its base expands into a hatchet-shaped plate, the spike being formed, in fact, by the narrowing and folding back of this plate until its edges almost meet. The process is thus a partial tube, which, projecting above the water, appears to facilitate the entrance of air into the cocoon. Below the expanded base of the spike is a narrow opening through which water passes, and which finally permits the escape of the larvae. The eggs, numbering in one case 107, form a discoid mass surrounded by a loosely-woven silken coat and suspended from the roof of the cocoon. Below, at the sides, and behind the egg-mass, is a space to which water has access; but the silken material above and in front of the eggs is disposed so as to form large cells, and these connect with the air- admitting spike. The chief object of the cocoon, (2) Fullagar, “ Hardwicke’s Science-Gossip,” xv. (1879), pp. 132, 133. (8) Laker, “ Ent>mologist,” xiv. (1881), pp, 82-84, 169 according to this observer, is to ensure a supply cf air for its contents ; and this is done, he says, ‘t by excluding water from, and admitting air into, the upper part of the case” (*). Riley has written on the same subject, confirming Garman’s description. He observes that the cocoon differs from that of Hydrophilus piceus “according to the deserip- tions of this last;” but, when the cocoons them- selves are compared, it is possible that they will be found much alike. Riley gives figures and an ideal section of the cocoon of Hydrophilus triangularis. It consists, he says, of three distinct parts :— “There is first what may be called the floater, which itself is composed of two parts, viz.:— (1) a hard spatulate piece of compact brown silk, smooth externally, and with the two edges of the tapering end curled inside and welded at tip, so as to form a stout point [the spike], and (2) a some- what cuneiform air-chamber. ‘There is, second, the egg-case proper, and, third, the outer bag or covering. The air-chamber has an external slightly bulging covering of the same character as the outer bag, of which it forms a part, but of some- what darker silk, while the inside consists of loose brown silk, forming large cells and connecting with the spine, the hollow parts of which are in fact filled more or less compactly with these silken fibres. The egg-case proper, which is of a white, rather flimsy or paper-like silk, is partially suspended posteriorly from the roof of the outer bag hy white loose silk, but is principally attached to the interior side of the air-chamber.” Between the egg-case proper and the outer covering is the space to which water is admitted ; and the larvae, Riley states, breaking through the eyg-case proper, remain for a day or two within this space, issuing ultimately through the rent at the foot of the spike. When the cocoon is floating, the spike is directed upward, most of the * floater” being out of the water. The eggs, though bathed in water, are thus freely aerated, the function of the cocoon being, no doubt, to secure a supply of air, and at the same time to protect the eggs and newly-hatched young from numerous enemies (°*). The contrivance is clearly a complicated and curious one; and it is obvious that the spinning instincts of these beetles are of no mean order. Cocoon-spinning is not confined to Hydrophilus, naturalists having long known it to obtain in the allied Hydrocharis, as well as in many of the smaller Hydrophilid-beetles, of which, perhaps, our little Hydrubius fuscipes is the best known. Among recent writers, Perkins notes the finding of nests of Hydrocharis caraboides. He states that the insect, rolling up a leaf, lines it with a thick cottony web-like substance (*), Laker, who writes of the egg-cocoons of Hydrobius fuscipes, compares them to the relatively gigantic structures of Hydrophilus ; but they are flattened on one side, (4) Garman, “ American Naturalist,” xv. 601. (5) Riley, ‘“ American Naturalist,’ xv. (1881), pp. 814-817, (6) Perkins, “ Entomologist,” xii. (1879), pp. 214-216. (1881), pp. 600, “No: Go 170 and have no spike. They are about the size of a pea, and are attached to the underside of floating (not detached) blades of grass. As in Hydrophilus, the young, on hatching, do not immediately emerge(*). The cocoons of this beetle have also been described by W. F. Baker, who states that they are found in abundance at or near the surface of the water in shallow grassy ponds, attached to leaves of water-plants, blades of grass, etc. Being partly filled with air, they float when detached. ‘They are formed of silken threads woven together in various degrees of closeness. One end, that first formed, is firm and smooth; but the other end (that at which Hydrophilus waakes its spike) is loose, irregular,. and furnished with a flap, by which the cocoon is fastened to the objects upon which it rests. ‘The beetles begin to spin a cocoon within three weeks after emerging from pupae: and, at intervals of about a fortnight, each female makes three or four (*). (7) Laker, 7. ¢. (8) Baker, “Na uralist.’” 1894, pp. 327-333; and in Miall, op. cit., pp. 88-30. BUTTERFLIES OF THE SCIENCE-GOSSIP. Baker mentions further that the Hydrobius Suscipes Tay sometimes be found with an un- finished cocoon attached to her body; and it is interesting in this connection to note that in Spercheus emarginatus, and some other Hydro- philids, it is the rnle that the female thus carries her cocoon until the larvae hatch. The Spercheus was supposed to be extinct in this country until Billups rediscovered it in 1878-9. Many of the females taken at that time were carrying egg- cocoons. These were of a silky material, pale brown in colour, very closely spun, and slightly inflated like the egg-cocoon of a spider (°). Fowler, placing specimens of this beetle in a globe of water, found after a day or two that one had developed a cocoon. It was formed of a tough whitish membrane, and covered the whole of the under-side of the abdomen ; after some days it disappeared, about 100 larvae having hatched ('"). (9) Perkins, 7 c. (10) Fowler, ** Entomologist’s Monthly Magazine,” xix. (1882=— 1883); and “ British Coleoptera,’ i. (1887), p. 233. (To be continued.) PALAEARCTIC REGION. By HENRY CHARLES Lanc, M.D., M.R.CS., L.R.C.P. Lonp., FES. (Continued from page 144.) Genus 12. ZHGRIS Rambur. Small butterflies having somewhat the aspect of the orange-tipped species of Anthocharis. An- tennae shorter and with thicker and more rounded clubs. Head more hairy and with shorter palpi. The f.w. are tipped with orange in both sexes, but the orange patch is completely surrounded by dark shading and is proportionally much smaller than in Anthocharis. Larva as in Pieris. Pupa enclosed in a thin cocoon and attached at both ends with threads. 1. Z. pyrothoe Ey. Nouv. Mém. Mose. 1832, 302, 1.- 20, 3,4. Le. By EB. p. 42; pl. xi fics 1 (Buchloe pyrothoé). 29—36 mm. Wings white. Apices of fiw. rather pointed and with a more or less oval orange patch bordered with black; at the costal edge of the patch is a white spot. Black discoidal spot crescent-shaped: H.w. white. showing the markings of us. U.s. fw. as above, but the tips are greenish and the orange patch very indistinct. H.w. bright green with well-defined pearly white spots, few in number, some sub-marginal and of an oblong form, some central of a circular or ovoid outline. @ slightly larger than g, with the orange apical patch less extensive and more strongly marked with white. Hap. S. Russia, Orenburg, Kirghis Steppes, Kouldja district, Margellan, Turkestan. Those from Kouldja are larger than specimens from the other localities. IV.—Y. Z. pyrothoe has long been placed in the genus Anthocharis or Huchloe. But 1 have for a con- siderable time considered that, given the propriety of separating this group from the foregoing genus, this species ougat to go with it, and as I now find that in the Brit. Mus. collection it is reckoned as a Zegris, | have no hesitation in placing it in that genus. 2.%..eupheme Esp. 113, 2, 3. Lg. B. E. 43, pl. x. fig. 2. 40—46 mm. Wings white, sometimes with a very slight yellowishtinge. F.w. witha black crescentic disc. spot. At the apex is a black patch dusted with yellow on its outer side, and enclosing a bright orange oval-shaped blotch, above this a white spot. H.w. white, blackish at base. showing the pattern of the u.s. faintly through. U-s.f.w. white, disc. spot more V-shaped than above, apices greenish yellow, slightly orange about the centre of the patch. H.w. green mixed with yellow, with five or six rather large white spots arranged somewhat as inAnthocharis euphenoides. Thorax and abdomen black above and covered with white down. An- tennae white above. black beneath, clubs white. 2 has the apices of f.w. lighter, the orange blotch smaller, and the white spot aboye it larger, SCIENCE-GOSSTP. 171 HAb. Sarepta, $.H. Russia, Crimea, Askabad, Syria, Lepsa, Central North ‘Tianchan, Byschtan and Tschaptschatschi .on the Lower Volga, the Ural River, Amasia. IV., V. LARVA. Yellow, with a white lateral band and large black points arranged in threes on the sides On Sinapis incana and other Asia, of each segment. Crucifers. Pupa. Whitish, not boat-shaped. a. ab. tschudica W. 8. 449, 450. Smaller than type. Pure white above. U.s. h.w. wth large white spots; orange apical patch very HAB. Sarepta. b. var. menestho Mén. Cat. Rais. p. 245. A large form of the species. The disc. spot f.w. is narrower and often divided into two; the greenish-yellow colouring of the u.s. is lighter and more extended. Has. Amasia, Syria. IV. ¢c. Ivar. meridionalis Led. Z. b. v. 1852, p. 30. Lg. B. HE. p. 44, pl. x. 3 (Z menestho). Larger than Z. eupheme. Vw. with the dark shading at the apex more strongly marked; disc. spot large and doubled, especially in 2, in which sex the orange is almost absent from apex. U.s. h.w. deeper yellow than in type. Has. Spain—Leon, Anda- lusia, Castile. Larva, according to R. H., greenish yellow, sometimes entirely suffused with red, finely pilose, with black lateral spots. On Sinapis, Ra- phanus, and Brassica. If this form is co-specific with 7% eupheme, and not distinct from it, it is remarkable that it should present so striking a solution of continuity in the distribution ; for whilst 7. ewpheme is confined to the extreme S. E. of Europe and W. Asia, the form meridionalis is found nowhere but in Spain, and no other Huropean country has a Zegris amongst its fauna. It is quite possible that this is really a distinct species, though in appearance it differs from 7. ewpheme only by slight characters. 3. Z. fausti Christoph. Hor. Ent. Soc. Ross. xii. pl. v., Lg. B. EK. p. 69. 35—37 mm. Wings pure white, ¢ f.w. with apices bright orange, almost scarlet, and very slightly black at small. Z. fausti. outer edge, but with a broader, blacker, and straighter internal band than that seen in Z. eupheme. Disc. spot larger and less crescentic. U.s. h.w. green, with large silvery spots and no yellow colouring. 9 with apex f,w. less brightly red and with more black. HAB. ‘Turkestan (not Amur), Krasnowod:k, Kisil-arwat, Ferghana, Osch. IV., V. This is a well-marked and beautiful species, quite distinct from any of the forms of 7. ewpheme. By an error on p. 334 this species is stated to occur in the Amur. It seems to be confined to Turkestan, in the neighbourhood of the Caspian, and not to occur eastward of that region. I was misled in 1884 when I gave Siberia as a locality for this species. Genus 13. LYUCOPHASTIA Steph. Head moderately large, eyes large and promi- nent, palpi longer than the head and covered with Antennae of moderate length, fur- nished with a flattened oval club. Abdomen very slender, reaching beyond h.w. Wings white, rounded, and elongated. Discoidal cells very small. Subcostal nervure five-branched ; all the branches are given off beyond the cell. Larvae pubescent, tapering at the ends. Pupa angular, not boat- shaped. strong hairs. 1. lL. sinapis L. Syst. Nat. x. 648. p. 45, pl. x. fig. 4.‘ Wood-white.” 35—40 mm. Wings white, f.w. with a circular blackish blotch f.w. faintly yellowish-grey along H.w. yellowish streaked with Le. B. E. at apex. U-s. costa and at apex. erey. HAB. Europe (except the Polar portion). In Britain chiefly in the south and west, but also in the Lake District and other places. On the Con- tinent it is common and widely distributed, in England very local. It extends throughout West- ern Asia, and occurs in the Amur, Corea, and Japan. LV., V.—ViL., VIL. LARVA. Green with a darker dorsal stripe: be- neath this is a yellow stripe. On Vicia, Lotus, Lathyrus, and other Leguminosae. Pupa. Yellowish-green er grey rusty on the sides and wing-cases_ VI. and IX. This species presents marked seasonal variation. There seems to be some difference of opinion respecting the nomenclature of the various forms. I subjoin them as they are given by R. & H. a. var. lathyri Hub. 797-8. Gen. I. The ws. h.w. shows a darker green colour. Flies with the type in 8.. Europe and Western Asia. IV., V. b. ab. 2 erysimi. Bkh. i. 32. Wings entirely white above. Hab. Occurs with type throughout Europe. A dimorphic form of @ found with l. and II. generations. c. var. diniensis Bdv. gen. 6. Apex of f.w. rather less rounded than in type. Wings entirely white beneath Apex of f.w. above varying in the in- tensity of the black patch. Occurs as a variety of the second generation. HAs. Principally in 8. Europe. d. var. sartha H. R. p. 143. 40—45 mm. F.w. more elongate than in type, with rounded apices. G 4 172 U.s. f.w. with a yellowish-green apical patch square in outline. H.w. entirely yellow-green with dusky suffusion. Has. S. Europe, Asia Minor. 2. L.amurensis. Mén. Schrk. p. 15, t. i. 45. L. Sinapis var. d. Stgr. Cat. 1871, p. 5. 45—50 mm. A much larger species than Z. sinapis, from which it is quite distinct. Wings pure white. F.w. slightly angulated at apex and having an apical circular patch of deep black in 6, lighter in 9°, L. amurensis. sometimes in that sex almost absent. U.s. f.w. very faintly yellowish at apex and along costa. H.w. white, with a very indistinct trace of a dusky transverse band. Hap. Ask., Chab., Vladimar Bay, and other places in the Amur, also Japan. Y. and VIII. a. var. vernalis Graeser, R.H. p. 143. 35—40 mm. Smaller than type; ground-colour yellowish- white, with the black apical spot less marked and less defined in outline. Amur. YV. 3. L. duponcheli Ster. B.E. p. 46, pl. x. fig. 5. 36—38 mm, Differs from Z. sinapis as follows: Apex f.w. less rounded ; apical spot less defined at inner edge, extending much further in a downward direction. H.w. greenish-grey, with two white blotches ; bases decidedly tinged with yellow. U.s. h.w. quite different from those of Z. sinapis, uniform greenish- grey, with two white blotches, one central, the other marginal; both triangular in shape. Clubs of antennae blacker than in Z. sinapis. Has. 8. France, Italy, Asia Minor. a. Var. aestiva KR. H. p. 143. The summer genera- tion. Apical blotch. f.w. paler in colour and less extensive, shaped more like that in ZL. sinapis. HAB. as type. VII. I have taken both Leucophasia duponcheli and var. acstiva at Digne, where the species is common. The difference between them appears to be marked and constant. This species is very distinct from LL. sinapis, but is very local and of limited dis- tribution. The two species, Z. sinapis and L. duponcheli, fly together at Digne; but the flight of the latter is stronger and more sustained. By this character they may be distinguished when on the wing with some amount of certainty, Cat, 1871, p. 5. Lg. Ie, We SCIENCE-GOSSTP. Genus 14. 7HRRACOLUS Swainson. Antennae rather short and thick, with a broad blunt club. First and subcostal nervules of f.w. close together. Colour of wings white, orange, or yellow. This genus contains a number of species of widely differing appearance, some of them having the aspect of Anthocharis, and others that of Colias. They are mostly African or South- western Asiatic. ‘These species, however, extend into the Palaearctic region. 1. T. fausta Olivier, Voyage en Syrie, pl. 33. 4. Ldmais fausta Stgr. Cat., et al. auct. 35—40 mim. Ground-colour of wings a peculiar light reddish- yellow, very difficult to describe. Shape of wings resembling that of Colias hyale. ¥.w. with a double row of narrow black marginal spots ex- tending from the costa nearly to the an. ane. There is asmall and indistinct black discoidal spot. A black wavy band begins at the outer third of costa and reaches to the first median nervule. Immediately about the submedian nervure in the g is a small patch of thickened scales. H.w. without markings, excepting a row of five very small marginal black spots. @ less brilliant in T. fausta, colour than ¢g, but with all the black markings stronger and much more pronounced. U.s. very light yellowish-orange, especially the h.w., which are nearly white in g. ‘There are no proper mark- ings except a very faint trace of a narrow central band of yellow on the h.w. The dark markings of the upper surface show through more or less. HAB. Syria (Beirut, Jaffa), South of Caspian, Ferghana. IV., V., Osch, Turkestan, Persia, Steppes of Schurab. 2. T. phisadia Godt. Enc. Méth. ix. p. 132, n. 40 (1819). (ldmais.) var. palaestinensis. Ster. in litt. 30 mm. F.w. salmon-colour, black at base and along costa, with a broad black marginal band containing three spots of the ground-colour, two near the apex and one in the centre; discoidal spot black and distinct, but touching the black costal shading. H.w. white with a broad black unspotted marginal band. U.s. light yellow dusted with grey. No marking except on f.w. Disc. spot and three blackish spots pear an. ang. Iam unable to give SCIENCE GOSSIP. 173 any further account of this beautiful little species, which has the appearance of a diminutive Colias. The type of this species inhabits India and Arabia ; the var. palaestinensis is found in Palestine. I have received a specimen from Dr. Staudinger, which is here described. 3. T.nouna Luc. Expl. Alg. Zool. iii. p. 350. n. 14 (1849). Anthocharis nouna. Stgr. Cat. ete. 30—42 mm. Wings pure white. F.w. somewhat pointed with bright yellowish orange tips and without spots H.w. white with some indistinct marginal spots. Qlarger than 2, f.w. with some brownish black on outer edge of orange tip h.w. with distinct triangular spots. U.s. h.w. white without markings. Has. Algeria (Oran) in the early part of the year and in September. Probably a variety of the Arabian and East African T. evagore Klug. Genus 15. CALLIDRYAS Boisd. Antennae shorter and thicker than in Pieris, but longer than in Colias, gradually thickened into C. pyrene. a club; generally of a reddish colour. Wings ample. F.w. pointed at apex and h.w. near an, ang. Colour usually white or yellow. Males with a tuft of hair-like scales near the base of the inner margin of f.w. This genus inhabits the tropical portions of both hemispheres, but the species here given occurs in Syria, and therefore comes within the Palaearctic region. 1. ©. pyrene Swains. Zool. Ill. i. t. 51 (1820). 58—62 mm. Wings pale yellow or greenish-white. F.w. with a few reddish or dusky marginal spots. Discoidal spot small and black. There are no other mark- ings. U.s. h.w. with discoidal spots sometimes marked with silvery. HAB. Syria. (To he continued.) IRISH PLANT NAMES. By JOHN H. BARBouR, M.B. (Contintied from page 147.) ROSACEAE. CRAN AIRNE or AIRNEAD. airne, ‘“sloes.” DRAIGNEAC or DRAIGNEAN. draigean, ‘a thorn” ; draig, “ dragon.” Prunus spinosa. sloe-tree. scrogs. CRAN SIRIS. Prunus cerasus. wild cherry. MoRGRAIDEAN. MEIRIN NA MAG, “field fingers,” or “gladness.” natural history of ‘Ireland. The work is preceded by a table arranged in columns, giving the Eng- lish and Irish names of the birds, with the pro- nunciation and their meaning. ‘These are printed in the Celtic characters. There is another valu- able table giving the distribution of the species of birds which have bred in Ireland in the nineteenth century. The main body of the book is occupied by, notes on each species. These are copious, and deal not only with the distribution, but also with habits and other features connected with each ‘species. The nomenclature followed is that adopted in the second edition of Mr. Howard Saunders’ “Tllustrated Manual of British Birds.” The coloured frontispiece represents half-a-dozen hand- some varieties of peregrine falcons’ eggs from The photographic plates are of subjects well taken, and beautifully reproduced. One of the most’ remarkable of these is by Mrs. Wynne, of Castlebar, representing cormorants’ nests in trees. This appears to us to be of exceptional interest, and a not .generally known habit in these birds. Reports of the Moss Euchange Club, “Edited by the Rev. C. H. eae and Mr. J. A. WHELDON. (Stroud: J. Elliott. 1900.) These reports - the fourth and fifth issued by this society, applying to the years 1899-1900—show the character and extent of the very useful work being done by its members, in the list of whom for 1900 we regret to notice a slight falling off in numbers as compared with that of the previous year. That 5,300 specimens of mosses and hepaticae should in two years have been distributed among the members is pleasing evidence of the increasing interest now taken in this fascinating branch of botany. We are glad to notice that there has been instituted a beginners’ section of the club, with the nominal subscription of one shilling per annum. The hon. secretary for this department is Mr. E. C. Horrell, 49 Danby Street, Peckham, London, 8.E. This should be a material help to all who, starting on the study of mosses and liverworts, find diffi- culty in ascertaining whether their specimens are correctly named, or in getting types of the prin- cipal genera as a starting-point for individual re- search. A very important feature of the reports is a statement that an arrangement has been made for every specimen of moss or hepatic to be ex- amined by experts, and the nomenclature checked. This of course entails much labour on the dis- tributor, but is invaluable in eiminating error and its perpetuation. ‘The members ought. to be, as they doubtless are, grateful for live ayshantieasnile manner in which the Moss Exchange Club is con- ducted by its hon. secretary, the Rev. C. H. Waddell, SCIENCE. GOSSIP. B.D., Saintfield, Co. Down, and the hon. distributor, Mr. J. A. Wheldon, of Liverpool. ‘The notes upon species that have passed through the club are valuable, and show that this modestly conducted society is one of the most scientific in Britain. The Loyal Observatory, Greenwich. By &. WALTER MAUNDER, F.R.A.S. 306 pp., 8 in. x 54 in., with 54 illustrations. (London: The Religious Tract Society. 1900.) 5s. his is one of the most pleasing popularly written books on a scientific subject that we have met with for some time past. Its object is to give a simple description, understandable by the multi- tude, of one of the most important institutions in 3ritain, and of world-wide celebrity. The author’s literary work in connection with the science of astronomy is so well known that it would be r/9 Object Lessons in Elementary Science for Standards l..11.and ITT,, By A. H. GARLIC, B.A., and 'T.F.G.. DrExTER B.A., B.Sc. New edition. ix +254 pp., 7% in.x5 in., illustrated. (London: Longmans, Green & Co.) 1s. 6d. each. These three little books will doubtless be found useful under the présent objectionable system of primary education, wherein the most rudimentary knowledge is crammed into children with the hope that at some future time they may take an interest in the knowledge. The information appears to be correct, as far as it in these volumes. Of course we cannot expect detail, as they only deal with object-lessons ; but, as the subjects are most diffuse, the chief fear is that the teachers will stop, in most instances, at these suggested lessons and not carry the teaching any further. foes, DOUBLE STAR OBSERVATION WITH THE SOUTH-EAST EQUATORIAL. (From Maunder's “ Roual Greenwich Observatoru.”) _Supererogation to say more than that he has ex- celled in the pages before us. They contain not only a history of the Greenwich Observatory, but also a popular description of its interior and the many beautiful instruments which are used by the author, and the other astronomers of the general staff. The illustrations, commencing with a por- trait of Flamsteed, the first Astronomer Royal, are chosen with good judgment. ‘They carry the reader from early days to the present time, show- ing the remarkable progress in optical science since the days of the first Astronomer Royal. We have the pleasure, by permission of the publishers, of reproducing one of the plates, showing a portion of the South-East Equatorial. Coral Reefs. By CHARLES DARWIN. xx + 549 pp.. 7# in. x 5 in., with portrait, 7 plates, and 40 illus- trations in text. (London: Ward, Lock & Co.. Limited). 2s. This cheap reissue of Darwin's classic on the structure and distribution of coral with geological observations on the volcanic islands and parts of South America visited during the voyage of H.M.S. Beagle, cannot fail to make the work better known among the general public. ‘The portrait chosen as frontispiece has been copied from the painting in the National Portrait Gallery by the Hon. John Collier. The work is prefaced by a critical introduction by Professor John W. Judd, F.R.S. reefs, 180 Design in Nature's Story. By WALTER Kipp, M.D. F.Z.S. 165 pp.,8in. x 5in. (London: James Nisbet & Co., Ltd., 1900.) 3s. 6d. net. The author has written what appears to have been intended as an essay upon the whole plan of Nature, with the result that he has produced half- a-dozen pleasantly-written chapters that will doubt- less find numerous readers among those who do not care to dive too deeply into abstruse subjects. Guide-Book to Natural Hygiene. By StpNEY H. BEARD. 103 pp., 7 in. x 5 in., illustrated. (Paign- ton: Order of the Golden Age. 1900.) Is. net. The attractive cover of this little book is sugges- tive of pleasant reading within. We find, however, that it is chiefly occupied with recipes for cookery of the kind that is apt to leave one hungry, unless associated with more substantial things than vege- tables. ‘There are, however, a good many useful hygienic suggestions in the pages, though one is not much encouraged by the heading: ‘“ A Blood- less Menu for Christmas.” Dartmoor and its Surroundings. By BEATRIX F. CRESSWELL. 144 pp., 74 in. x 42 in., with ilJustra- tions and maps. (London: St. Bride’s Press. 1900.) 6d. This is a second edition of a prettily illustrated euide-book to a beautiful country. Itis Number 8 of the Homeland Association’s handbooks. It contains much information which is indispensable to those who first visit the district. ‘The edition before us is considerably improved, and has the advantage of having had the supervision of the United Devon Association. There is a chapter on Dartmoor Fishing by Mr. Edgar Shrubsole. Brain in Relation to Mind. By J. SANDERSON CHRISTISON, M.D. Second edition. 143. pp., 8 in. x 53 in., illustrated (Chicago: Meng Pub- lishing Co. 1900.) The author, who is already known by a book on ‘‘Crime and Criminals.” was for some time con- nected with the New York City Asylums for the Insane. His chapters deal with the subject entirely from a phys‘ological point of view. As might be expected, the pages bear evidence of his professional association with defective minds. ‘The book con- tains a good deal of information which will be found useful. Elements of Phys‘ces and Chemistry. Third stage. By R. A. GREGorY, F.R.A.S., and A. T. StuMons, B.Sc. viii + 114 pp., 7 in. x 43 in., with 53 illus- trations. (London and New York: Macmillans. 1900.) Is. 6d. Professor Gregory and Mr. Simmons, both gentle- men with experience as teachers of higher class science, have succeeded in getting together some useful experiments and information, which will lead their students to take an interest in science for its own sake. This primer can be recommended for its simplicity and general correctness. It is quite a book that may be used in the family circle without the aid of a professional teacher. Contributions to Photographic Optics. By Dr. Orro LuMMER. ‘Translated and augmented by SILVANUS P. THompson, D.Sc., F.R.S. xi+135 pp., 9 in.x 6 in., with 55 illustrations. (London and New York: Macmillans. 1900.) 6s. net. This is an important and highly scientific treatise upon photographic optics. and Dr. Silvanus Thomp- son deserves thanks for rescuing Professor Otto SCIENCE-GOSSIP. Lummer’s essays from a German magazine, They will be found to give in concise form information not to be found elsewhere. ‘his knowledge is placed before us in so logical and so direct a manner as to be sure to command the attention it should receive. In these pages are contained an exposition of the remarkable theories of Professor von Seidel, of Munich, whose work on geometrical optics in relation to the aberrations of lenses is not sufficiently known. Chapters XII. and XIII, dealing respectively with ‘Some Kecent British Objectives” and “ Tele-photographic Lenses,” are by Professor Silvanus Thompson and are valuable additions, as are several other portions of the work from his pen. Bacteria. By GEORGE NEWMAN, M.D., F.R.S.E., D.Ph. Second edition. xvi+397 pp., 84 in. x 54 in., with 94 illustrations. (London: John Murray. 1900.) 6s. We have already had the pleasure of noticing -the first edition (SCIENCE-GossIP, N.S., vol. vi., p. 85), and it is satisfactory to find that a second edition is required within twelve months of the first issue. In this there have been made a number of necessary corrections, and much new matter added. Among the latter information are ar- ticles on ‘The Bacterial Treatment of Sewage,” “Industrial Applications of Bacteriology,” and “Tropical Diseases.” In this edition are fifteen micro-photographs of actual organisms, taken expressly for the book hy the celebrated specialist in the photography of bacteria, Mr. E. J. Spitta, M.R.C.S. An extended knowledge of the influence of bacteria on human existence, is so important that this most useful work cannot be too widely known. One Thousand Objects for the Microscope. By M. C. Cooke, M.A.,, LL.D., A.L.S. x.+179 pp., 74 in. x 43 in. 13 plates, containing over 500 figures, and 38 woodcuts. (London: Frederick Warne & Co.) 2s. 6d. net. Dr. M. C. Cooke’s unpretentious little book has long been a favourite with amateurs, and we are glad to find that the publishers have recently re- issued it in a new dress. Originally a list of popular microscopic objects, with brief explanatory notes attached, the book has now received an addition in the form of some fifty-six pages dealing with the purchase and management of a suitable microscope, pond and field collecting, and mount- ing. The treatment of the part dealing with the microscope itself appears to us to be somewhat inadequate to the importance of the subject, though we heartily sympathise with Dr. Cooke’s advice in favour of a simple rather than an elabo- rate instrument. The beginner’s difficulties, for instance, with regard to the management of his . condenser and its accessories are barely alluded to in his pages. On the other hand, the remarks on pond and field collecting, and on simple preparation and mounting for the microscope, though brief, are eminently practical and to the point. The plates, illustrating about half of the objects described, are apparently the original ones, and the descriptive letterpress thereon, with its practical notes and clear instructions as to where to find and how to deal with these objects, is also unaltered. A new frontispiece has been added, representing typical radiolarians, which is apparently a reduction, un- fortunately not equal to the original, of one of the plates in Messrs. Warne’s “Royal Natural History.” SCLENCE-GOSSIP. The book is well printed, and handsomely bound in cloth, and our most serious criticism would be its issue, as a scientific book, without any date on the title-page. A book like this contains a wealth of suggestion that should help to make many a dilet- tante owner of a microscope an earnest student of nature.—F. 8. S. A Monagraph of the Land and Freshwater Mol- lusca of the British Isles. By JOHN W. TAYLOR, F.L.S. Part VI. pp. 321-384. 103 in. x 63 in., with 108 illustrations. (Leeds: Taylor Bros. 1900.) 6s. With the present instalment Mr. Taylor brings to an end the consideration of the shells and soft parts of the molluscs. It appears, however, from an announcement to the subscribers, that yet an- other part will appear before volume I. is completed. In this will be discussed the important subjects of distribution in time and space, as well as the para- sites attacking molluscs and the uses of the latter to mankind. The pages which we have here to consider touch upon some of the most interesting points in connection with mollusca. Under the 181 adductor muscles, but it may be pointed out that the investigations of Mr. 8. Pace upon the pearl oyster point to the fact that abnormal conditions in the mollusc itself play a much more important part in the production of pearls. Mr. Pace was able to infect healthy oysters and so obtain pearls from them, ‘The biological remarks upon colora- tion, though little fault can be found with them, demonstrate how much work there remains to be done upon this fascinating part of the subject. In other places Mr. Taylor discusses molluscs gene- rally ; here, however, and perhaps wisely, he con- fines his attention to the species strictly included under the title of his monograph. Excretory organs, lymphatic glands, and the muscular system are described and illustrated. Finally, the repro- ductive organs and development bring structural considerations to a close. Among the illustrations kindly lent by Mr. Taylor, we show the love-darts and the annulus which supported one, in a speci- men of Helix aspersa. Some species spend a con- siderable time over their courtship, and one of our pictures shows the love-making of a sinistral and a The courting of a sinistral and a dextral specimen of Helix aspersa. (From Taylor's * Monograph of Land and Freshwater Shells.”) heading of glands and secretions the attachment threads (byssus) are described; the embryonic ~ Seperate; a b. a. Love-dart of Helix hortensis. b. Love-dart of Helicigona lapicida, shell is mentioned, while the three pages devoted to pearls are welcome reading. ‘The author alludes to pathological causes giving rise to pearls in the dextral example of the common snail, 1. aspersa. From one’s personal observation one would say that important parts of the drawing illustrating the pairing of Limaw maximus require to have more detail introduced, and here one misses the C ad, c. The annulus of a dart from Helix aspersa. d, Egg-capsules of Valvata cristata, series of sketches by Mr. Lionel Adams in the “ Journal of Conchology” in 1898, leading up to the final position, alone depicted by Mr. Taylor. Numerous figures elucidate the remarks upon development, which, if we except a page and a half of supplementary bibliography, bring to a close a number not descending everywhere perhaps into such detail as in its predecessors, yet well worthy to take its place with them.— W. MW, 182 G Se Mime thts 0? | URES Apne S all PROFESSOR H. J. Topp, having given up the directorship of the United States “ Nautical Al- manac,” has been succeeded for the time being by Professor $8. J. ee of the Naval Observatory, Washington. WE observe, in the list of papers to be read before the Royal Geographical Society during the coming session, there will be one by Mr. Vaughan Cornish, giving a further account of his important studies in ‘‘ wave forms.” WE regret to hear that the eminent lepidopterist, Dr. Staudinger, has died suddenly while visiting Lucerne, in his seventy-second year. Dr. Stau- dinger had been in feeble health for some time past, which has been the reason for the delay of the long-promised revision of his standard syno- nymic list of Palaearctic Lepidoptera. We are not aware that this important work has been com- pleted. THE official journal of the Khedival Govern- ment has announced that from 1st September last universal time was adopted in Heypt, and that mean noon of the 30th meridian east of Greenwich is given as noonday signal. There are now eight meteorological stations daily communicating weather reports to the central office, and others are being fitted with automatic registering instru- ments for early observations. These will “probably constitute links of a chain of observatories extend- ing from the North of Europe to Capetown. WRITING to our contemporary, “ Nature,” Mr. R. Paulson draws attention to a destructive fungus attack on birch-trees in woodlands around London. The fatal effects have become especially apparent during the past year, when, he states, many healthy trees have died in Epping Forest, on Chislehurst, Hayes, and Keston Commons, where no signs of the disease were evident last spring. Mr. Paulson thinks the trouble is the result of a micro-fungus, Melanconis stilbustoma Tul. Have any of our readers noted the same fatality in other parts of the country ? THROUGH the energy of its Committee and Secretary and the help of a public benefactor, the Essex Field Club has arrived within at least one goal of its ambition. On October 18 there was opened the Passmore Edwards Museum at Strat- ford, which houses the biological and other collec- tions of the Essex Club. The building, which has cost about £4,000, presented to the “borough by Mr. Edwards, has been erected in connection with the West Ham Municipal Technical Institute. Thus the students at the Institute have the advan- tage of the contents of the adjoining museum for reference and study. A feature of importance about these collections is that they are chiefly from the County of Essex, so not only arousing interest among the visitors with regard to their Surroundings, but placing on record examples for future comparison. SCIENCE-GOSSTP. THE Moss Exchange Club, whose reports we notice under ‘“ Books to Read,” has distributed a list of the British Sphagna, accompanied by one of. those mosses occurring in Hurope, after Warnstorf, and corrected up to April of this year. THE Geological Survey of Western Australia sends us its fourth bulletin. It is a voluminous essay on the mineral wea!th of Western Australia by Mr. A. Gibb Maitland, F.G.8., the Government geologist, occupying 150 closely-printed pages, illustrated by maps. WE have received from the Division of Biological Survey, U.S. American Department of Agriculture, number 18 of the North American Fauna. This is devoted to a revision by Mr. Wilfred H. Osgood of the pocket mice of the genus Perognathus. Also a report upon the food of three kinds of birds —namely, the bobolink, blackbirds, and grakles, all more or less destructive of agricultural crops. SOME of our readers will be glad to have their attention called to the bargains in a number of standard scientific books offered by Mr. H. J. Glaisher, of 57 Wigmore Street, London. Mr. Glaisher purchases the majority of the remaining copies of such works from the publishers, and is thus enabled to dispose of them at an exception- ally cheap rate, although they are quite new copies, UNDER title of ‘“‘ The South-Hastern Naturalist” are now published the “‘ Transactions of the South- Eastern Union of Scientific Societies for 1900,” under the honorary editorial care of Mr. J. W. Tutt, F.E.S. The first thirty-two pages are devoted to the business and official notices of the Union. The remainder consists of the presidential address, and papers read before the last congress. Several of these are of considerable importance. Mr. JoHN NiMMO announces a new and revised edition of a Handbook of British Birds by Mr. J. HE. Harting, F.L.S8., F.Z.S., with 35 coloured plates from original drawings by the late Professor Schlegel. The price will be two guineas net. It. will be remembered that Mr. Harting edited the * Zoologist ” for twenty years, and for a still longer period was connected with the natural history columns of the “ Field” newspaper. A new monograph of the Homopterous insects included in the group Membracide is in preparation by Mr. George Bowdler Buckton, F.R.S., F.L.S., F.E.S. The author appeals to entomologists and others who have specimens, to confer with him, as there must be many species still unknown to science. The work will be published by Messrs. Lovell Reeve & Co., Limited. Mr. Buckton’s ad- dress is Weycombe, Haslemere, Surrey. THE admirable Society for the Protection of Birds, whose offices are 3 Hanover Square, London, is offering two prizes, the particulars of which may be obtained from the Honorary Secretary. The prizes are for £10 and £5 respectively, for the best papers on the protection of British birds. The mode of dealing with the subject is left entirely to competitors, but among the points suggested for treatment are the utilisation and enforcement of the present Acts and County Council Orders ; the modification or improvement of the law ; educa- tional methods ; and the best means of influencing landowners and gamekeepers, agriculturists and gardeners, collectors, birdcatchers and birdnesters. Essays are to sent in by November 30th next. SCLENCE-GOSST/P. 183 oe SOAT YI}: CONDUCTED BY F. SHILLINGTON SCALES, F.R.M.S. MosQquirors AND MALARIA.—The evidence in support of the theory that malarial infection is due to the bites of mosquitoes (see SOIENCE-GOSSIP, Vol. vi., p. 182), themselves already infected, seems now to have put the matter beyond a doubt. Drs. Sambon and Low have deliberately taken up their residence in the most unhealthy and fever-stricken spot in the Roman Campagna, a place situated in the heart of the swamp, among the haunts of mosquitoes of the genus Anopheles, and of which the few dwellings near at hand are inhabited by peasants who are constant victims to malaria. These daring investigators have shown that by avoiding mosquitoes they avoid malaria, but a son of Dr. Manson has given an even more striking example of enthusiasm in the cause of science by allowing himself to be bitten by mosquitoes which had been fed on the blood of a sufferer from malaria in Rome. The mosquitoes were sent to London by Professor Bastianelli. and received early in July. The patient, after being bitten, developed well- marked malarial symptoms, though he has never been in a malarial country since he was a chila. He has now recovered, but has thus supplied evidence of the positive kind, as Drs. Sambon and Low did of the negative kind. A letter from Mr. H. J. Elwes, F.R.S8., to the British Medical Journal, calls attention now to the necessity of finding out under what conditions mosquitoes do not produce malaria, and mentions that whilst in certain dis- tricts in India he escaped malaria by protecting himself by mosquito curtains, whilst other members of his party who omitted these precautions were attacked, yet in other districts where mosquitoes abound malaria is almost unknown, and these pre- cautions were unnecessary. Amongst recent litera- ture dealing with the subject we may mention a paper on the life-histories of mosquitoes of the United States, published in one of the Budletins of the U.S. Department of Agriculture, and con- tributed by Dr, L. O. Howard, State entomologist. Descriptions, with illustrations, are given of all the members of the group met with in the United States, with especial reference to members of the genus Anopheles, to which suspicion most strongly points. Dr. Howard advocates the use of kerosene for the destruction of the larva, and. calls attention also to the agency of fish in this connection. The July number of the Quarterly Journal of Micro- scopical Science contains also a number of plates and diagrams by Major Ross and Mr. R. Fielding Ould, of the Liverpool School of Tropical Medicine, illustrating the life-history of the parasites of malaria. Before leaving the subject we may mention that the second malarial expedition from Liverpool has telegraphed home from Bonny, in Nigeria, news of the discovery of another parasite, found in the proboscis of mosquitoes, which causes elephantiasis. Our readers will be aware of the terrible scourge this disease is to millions of natives 3) in tropical countries, and that it is due to a small worm which lives in the lymphatic vessels. We understand that the discovery has been simul- taneously made in England by Dr. Low, and in India by Captain James. PARASITE FROM HUMBLE-BEE.—I was much interested in the notes inthe microscopical section of the September SCIENCE-GossIP, especially those on the parasite of the humble-bee. Last year I mounted some parasites from a humble-bee which PARASITE FROM HUMBLE-BEE, may possibly be identical with those referred to. The size, however, is an objection, this one being still larger than the specimen you comment upon. The length, measured to the tip of the extended jaws, is 15 mm. The length of the jaws, however, JAWS OF PARASITE. would vary, as they seem to be retractile. I enclose a sketch which may be sufficient for identification. —W. Cran, Mains of Lesmoir, Rhynie, Aberdeen- shire. Mr. C. BAKER’S NEW CATALOGUE.—Mr. Chas. Baker has sent us his new catalogue, which is increased in size by about twenty pages. It con- tains particulars of his latest instruments, such as the R.M.S. 1:27 microscope, the D.P.H. Nos. 1 and 2, the Diagnostic, and the Plantation microscopes, all of which received notice in SCIENCE-GossIP when they first came out for sale. The newest pattern microtomes are also included. ‘The list of stains, mounting media, and other accessories, is exceptionally complete and well arranged. ‘Two or three pages are devoted to pond-life apparatus. but the extra pages are mainly taken up with lists of microscopic slides, arranged mostly in series at a moderate price, though the price of individual specimens seems rather higher than usual. The lists of bacteriological and diatomaceous slides call for special notice. We have already drawn atten- tion to Mr. Chas. Baker’s excellent slide-lending department. . 184 SCIENCE-GOSSIP. R. & J. BECK’S NEW ‘‘ LONDON” MICROSCOPE.— In design of microscopes our English makers have always taken the lead, but the cheaper kind of Continental stand has had a large sale here, espe- cially amongst our medical and other students. Recognising this, Messrs. Beck, by laying down new plant for displacing hand labour by machinery in accordance with the practice of the day, have been able to put upon the market a new stand in which sound workmanship is combined with cheapness. The stand follows largely the Con- tinental model, but is sold at a considerably lower figure than any similar Continental stand known to us. ‘The essential features are as follows:—The stand is of the horse-shoe form, but the central pillar is placed farther forward under the stage so as to give greater facility when the microscope is in a horizontal position. The base itself actually rests on three inserted cork pads, which not only give steadiness, but prevent any possibility of scratching the table. The coarse adjustment is by spiral rack and pinion, whilst the fine adjustment is of the NEw “ LONDON” MICROSCOPE. micrometer screw type, in which, however, a pointed rod impinges upon a hardened steel plate, which is itself attached to the limb of the micro- scope and works upon a triangular upright rod. In the larger model the milled head of the fine adjustment is graduated and furnished with a fold- ing pointer. The body tube is designed for use with objectives corrected forthe Continentallength of tube, but carries a draw tube capable of vari- ation from 140 to 200 millimetres. The stage is square and the upper surface is faced with ebonite. In the larger model it measures 4x4 inches. In the least expensive model a ring, of the Society size, is fitted beneath the stage to carry the iris diaphragm and condenser. ‘he latter is specially arranged to fit above the iris diaphragm, and the arrangement is both effective and cheap. In the larger models, or those fitted with more elaborate sub-stage arrangements, the usual form of Abbé condenser is provided for in this instrument. Messrs. Beck make their ‘‘ London” microscope in two sizes. ‘he smaller size with sub-stage ring and iris diaphragm, but without objectives, eye- pieces, or condenser, costs, with mahogany case, only £3 5s. 6d. The addition of a swing-out and spiral focussing sub-stage increases the price to £4. ‘The larger model, similar to the last described, costs £5 5s,, or with rack and pinion focussing sub- stage £6 10s. The necessary eyepieces cost 5s. each, the condenser in its simplest form 10s., whilst the objectives are of Messrs. Beck’s well- known and moderately priced series. ‘This micro- scope has, like all apparatus mentioned in these columns, been submitted to our personal inspection, and we congratulate Messrs. Beck on its produc- tion. We illustrate the smaller stand herewith. EXTRACTS FROM POSTAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY’S NOTE-BOOKS. [Beyond absolutely necessary editorial revision, these notes are printed as written by the various members, without alteration or amendment. Corre- spondence on these notes will be welcomed. ‘These extracts were commenced in the September number, at page 119.—ED. Microscopy, Science-Gossip. | Notes BY WM. H. BURBIDGE. DEVELOPMENT OF BALANUS.—On the rocks of the southern and western coasts of England, when the tide is out, we observe that their surface is roughened up to a certain level with an innumer- able multitude of brownish cones. Each appears as a little castle built of strong plates that lean towards each other but leave an orifice at the top. Within this opening we see two or three other pieces joined together in a particular manner, but capable of separating. These are Barnacles, class Crustacea, division Cirripedia (from cirrus, a curl, and pes, a foot), order Balanidae (from balanus, an acorn). Fixed and immovable as the barnacles are in their adult stage, they have passed by meta- morphosis through conditions of life in which they were roving little creatures, swimming freely in the sea. It is in these conditions that they pre- sent the closest resemblance to familiar forms of carapace. \ caudal Spine. labrum, Fic. 1. Nauplius stage of Balanus. crustacea. Fig. 1, represents the Nauplius stage of the barnacle. It has a broad carapace, a single eye, two pairs of antennae, three pairs of jointed, branched and well-bristled legs, and a forked tail. The skin is cast twice, considerable change of figure resulting. Atthe third monlt it assumes the cypris stage as represented by fig. 2, and is enclosed in a bivalve shell, with the front of the head and the antennae greatly developed, the single eye SCIENCE-GOSSI/P. having become two. In this stage the little creature searches for a suitable spot for a per- manent residence. ‘he two antennae which pro- ject from the shell pour out a glutinous gum which hardens in the water and fixes them. Another moult takes place, the bivalve shell is thrown off, the carapace is composed of several pieces, whilst the legs are modified into cirri and made to execute their grasping movement. Fig. 3 shows the mature barnacle with cirri. Nothing can be more effective or beautiful than the manner in which the cirrus obtains its prey. The cirri are alternately thrown out and retracted with great rapidity, and when fully expanded the plumose conjpound Nauplius FiG. 2. Ventral view. Cypris stage of Balanus. and flexible stems form an exquisitely beauti- ful apparatus, admirably adapted to entangle any nutritious atoms or minute living creatures that may happen to be present in the circumscribed space over which this singular casting-net is thrown, and drag them down to the vicinity of the mouth. This action may be easily seen if a small portion of rock be chipped off, having barnacles on it, and placed in a glass with sea- water. A hand-glass will show the beautiful little hand with twenty-four long fingers, the net with which this fisher takes his prey, busily at work. Care must be taken that there are living barnacles eee atlachinje if. Mature Balanus and cirri. Fic. 3. on the piece of rock, as many are but empty shells. An interesting slide is Obelia geniculata (fig. 4). It has double and alternate generations. The polyp bears urn-like reproductive capsules which discharge large numbers of medusiform zooids. Like miniature balloons they float suspended in the water for a while, and then suddenly start into motion with a series of vigorous jerks. They may be considered as swimming polypites with the arms united by a contractile web. They mature and disperse the generative elements, and, having thus fulfilled their function, perish. ‘The ova, 185 after fertilisation, become ciliated embryos, and when affixed rapidly grow into the plant-like zoophytes we see. Sertularia pumila—another hydroid zoophyte—is a very common species, though it makes a beautiful microscopic object. Almost every broad-leaved seaweed has greater or lesser numbers of this zoophyte growing on it. gonotheca. ‘ medusid bud el OG oe A Liv ~ > y i J ie polypite. Fic. 4. Obelia geniculata, portion of frond. Coryne vaginata (fig. 5) is one of the Athecata— that is, without any theca or calycle. The capitate tentacles bear on the summit a globular head con- sisting of a collection of thread cells, a vigorous battery of offensive weapons. They occur in astonishing profusion, and consist of minute sacs Stinging . threads. Tentacles. Fig 5. Corune vaginala. embedded in the flesh, filled with. fluid, which con- tain along delicate thread capable of being pro- jected with considerable rapidity. Corydendrum parasiticus is a similar creature to the last, but the tentacles are not capitate. There is something singular about the stems that support the poly- pites ; they look as if they acted as capsules and held ova. This is a foreign species, and I cannot find any description of it. I believe Mr. Sinel told me it came from the Mediterranean. Pennaria carolina is also a foreign species. Some of the polypites bear gonophores. the buds in which the reproductive elements are formed. (To be continued.) 186 MICROSCOPY FOR BEGINNERS. By F. SHILLINGTON SCALES, F.R.MLS. (Continued From p. 154.) IN using glycerine mounting media it is well to remember, as pointed out by Dr. Carpenter, that they largely increase the transparency of organic substances; and though this is often ad- vantageous, it may also sometimes result in so great a diminution of their reflecting capacity as to make them indifferent mounts. We have given such instructions in elementary mounting as will, we think, enable a beginner to makerapid progress in the art if he is gifted with only a small amount of perseverance and patience, but it must not be forgotten that the actual mounting is but a part of the work required. Numerous subjects will need very careful preparation beforehand, and on the methods adopted and the skill and judgment with which they are carried out will depend much of the result. Many objects will need dissecting. In one of our previous papers (SCIENCE-GOSSIP, vol. vi., pp. 280-1) we gave a description of a home-made dissecting stand with supports for the hands, and of the necessary apparatus for the pur- pose. Their uses areself-evident. We may say here, however, that most dissections, and especially delicate dissections, are done under water, with perhaps a little methylated spirit added if the object has previously been soaking for some time in methylated spirit or alcohol. In some cases it will be necessary to fasten the object down, and this may be done with pins on a weighted piece of cork placed inside the dissecting dish, or by running paraffin or some such compound into the bottom as already explained. Watchglasses with flat bottoms make useful dissecting dishes. Two or three needles set in light wooden handles will be required, with both straight and bent points, and these can readily be manufactured at home, or purchased fora few pence. In buying dissecting Knives, we strongly recommend that those with ivory handles be chosen; they only cost one shilling and ninepence each, as against eighteen- pence for the ebony-handled ones, while the latter are so brittle as to break with very little pressure. There are a good many shapes of blades sold, but perhaps the most generally useful are the usual scalpel forms, the spear, and the spatulate-shaped ones. Forceps may be either steel, brass, or nickel, but we prefer the steel, which should, of course, be carefully kept clear of rust. A few camel-hair brushes are also necessary, and a pair of fine scissors. Insects generally require soaking in a ten per cent. solution of sodium or potassium hydrate (caustic potash), for periods varying from an hour or two up toa week. Too much soaking will destroy the object and also render it too transparent after mounting, whilst too little may leave it hard and difficult to deal with. A little thought and attention will therefore be necessary, and a slight pressure with a blunt needle will tell whether the object is sufficiently soaked. In the case of large insects, like cockroaches. we should soak them for several days until they begin to give off an unpleasant smell. The alkali must then be removed by soaking in several changes of clean water. The inside of the insect can be got rid of by gentle treatment with the camel-hair brushes. Plant subjects are best softened by long soaking in water. (To be continued.) SCIENCE-GOSSIP. GEOLOGY. CONDUCTED BY EDWARD A. MARTIN, F.G.S. By the resignation of the chair of geology at University College, London, so long held by the Rey. Thomas George Bonney, D.Sc., LL.D., F.B.S., a scientific prize will fall to someone after Christ- mas next. Professor Bonney, who is Hon. Canon of Manchester and Fellow of St. John’s College, Cambridge, has held the professorship he will so soon vacate for upwards of twenty years. He was born at Rugeley in 1833. Some DEEP LonpdoN Borincs.—The following particulars of borings in London, which have been made into the Chalk, are in continuation of those given in the July number of ScIENCE-Gossip. The same remarks there made will now apply, and the depths there assigned to the ever-changing Terti- aries may be liable to future correction. For these details I am again indebted to Messrs. Isler & Co., the well-known well-sinkers of Southwark :-— 2 ype 2 2s a | 2 a se Is =. Ss 1S |g ae edie | Place of Boring @°) F/G |S | & Ss jes i . fons = ales tas So | meals 3 Ses ae Nene S123 188! Sele lec eel iS [athe bees dee A |sl/Sl{Flaelolal= Ea Clapham Road, ft. ft. ft. |ft & ft ft ft 139(Causton) 28 77 4% 473 38 230 425 12,000) 54 Croydon (Steam : Laundry) .-... 19 | 47 16 36 57 75 250 1,000) 66 | Forest Gate i (Upton Lane) 28 25 — 23 2931444250 2,340) 27 Gray’s Inn Road } i (Perkins) .... 12. 56 — 457 28 147 300 3,000, — Great Dover St.. / S.E. (Groves) 49 — —, 62 39 129 279 — | 60) Hackney Road ; (Chandler).... 123 40 — | 77 | 17 253 400 10,000) 93 ! London Bridge 1 (Hibernia i Chambers) 21 77 — | 444 56 1013300 | 1,000 95 | Hornsey Road | | | { (Baths) ... 131043 — 281 572258 450 10,000 165 | Lambeth (Daun | i & Valentine).. 314 903 — 493 433105 320 4,000) 81> Latimer Rd., W. | | {Phoenix Brewery) 22 126 — 52 22 178 400 4,500 80 | Mitcham— | i (Camwal) ....' — | — | —* — | — 333 333 | 1,000) 19} Mitcham— / (Gas Works} .. 1483 22 — 383 303118$350 3,500 20 Mitcham— (Thunder & Little) 26 67 15 39 39 174 340 2,000 — Nine Elms— : ( (Thorne).... 22 | — | — 151 | 39 139 351 1,500: 54 | Peckham— | (Rye Lane).... 23 2 17 18% 303 33 124 1,000 40 Regent’s Park— (Zoo) ....-...)178 | — ) — | 23 | 12 239 452 | 8,000 — j Romiord Road, | (242), E.. 22; — | 11 | 27 | 44 146 250 | 4,200 30 | Rotherhithe ‘St. (PIN) “Saeeeeee 117 | —|—)— _ 7 139 \263 | 2,580 45 }j Waddon— if (Croydon) .... 4:— — — | — 296 300 10,000 423 SCIENCE-GOSST/P. Me ‘at CONDUCTED BY F. C. DENNETT. Position at Noon. 1900 Rises. Sets. RA. Dec. Nov. hm. hm. hem. eat) S7U/D an vate 7.4 am... 4.24pm... 14.45 .. 15.56 S. 16) 2. 7.21 oe 49 . 15.25 .. 18.42 26 .. 7.37 +. 8M po WE oo PANES Rises. Souths. Sels. Age at Noon. Noy. hm. him. hem. d. him. Moon.. 6 .. 4.0 p.m... 11.44 p.m. .. 6.20a.m... 13 22.33 16... WV.U39am... 7:28am. .. Isl pm... 23 22:33 26... 10.51 am... 3.24pm... 8.5 pm... 4 4.43 Position at Noon, Souths. Semi- R.A. Dec. Noy. him. diameter. h.m. Oe MER Tag oo 3 56 dbill Tym oo BRS” Go WGI Go PELE ISE WGN) OL22 prmiire | 408/652 er) 20-2918: 3 G5 WOH Ban, oo CSI On alban Se alliesie/ Sh UGS oo o6 Ooo Bll eatds oo VAN oo, We! og WhIG ING WG go Sallis yt, oo (REY og mPa gg hile Sy NS oo SPB at, oo PO 56 TRH ool EEG IS, HWURS ~ 50 00 IG 6g GRD mete 64 BM G5 IK) OG IEEPAL IN, MYT 60. sae UB oa TEI To, Bg WER og UGB Go PRs Sh Saturn do UG os MBt0) Tom, 4, TOI So alba G5 PRS OPRAH 65° on M5 G5 MAD yo G4 | NS Se AYA) 55 PRO (Se Weptune’s. .. 16) 3. 14:0) arm. 3. assy. 5.54.2 22012 0N. Moon’s PHASES. him. him. TU eeaeN ON Obed Le Ol pss amar INOVs 4.) 22dGranme New co 6g OR ag Ulli Bans I OR » 29 ., 5.385 p.m. In perigee November 5th at 4 p.m.; and in apogee on 17th at 7 a.m. METEORS. hm. ©) Nov. 2-3 .. e Taurids Radiant R.A. 3.40 Dec. 9 N. 3, 10-23. v Cancrids A aa 8.52 ,, 31 N. 5 13-16 .. Leonids Py - 10.0 5) 2 ING » 138-28 .. Leo Minorids 3 ip NO ) 40) NG > 20-28 .. e Taurids fe a AUT Se PP IN; » 23-27 .. Andromedids a FA 400. 5, %43° IN. LrEontIps.—In spite of the brilliant moonshine, watch should be kept from 11 p.m.on November 14th until sunrise on 15th, and also from 11 p.m. on 15th till sunrise on 16th, in the hope that the Leonids may make an appearance this year. The Radiant point near the middle of the “sickle” in Leo rises in the north-eastern heavens at about 10.15 p.m. and reaches the meridian at about half- past 6 in the morning. A star map, such as “'The People’s Atlas of the Stars,” published by Gall & Inglis, and costing only one shilling, or some such cheap one, should be on a table at hand, with a pencil and ruler to mark down the paths of any meteors observed, and the exact time of each should also be noted. CONJUNCTIONS OF PLANETS WITH THE Moon. ° / Noy. 14 ie Marst s. DO DM... blanet! 7.39 N- uy Ste Venust aT seers BAIT ING Spee WISER Ga. WM 46 . 1.39 N. Ay ee ie Jupiter} Soe ORG G6 a ies} Sp »» 24 Satunn ) en 2) pm. 6 a2 Ses + Below the English horizon. “erosses Southern 187 OCCULTATIONS AND NEAR APPROACHES. Angle Angle Magni- Dis- from Re- trom Nov Star. tude, appears. Vertex. appears. Vertex, him. : hm. : 7 p’Arietis 55 44 1.47 a.m. rt PIRI WT Sy HKG 7 13 Tauri 54 .. 6.21pm... 27 Near approach. 9.. x'Orionis 17 .. 9,53 p.m. .. 220 .. Near approach. WO bo Be op 48 .. 2.51am.., 184... Near approach. SO) je KEISCIIMS VOLO ee Oslilnp-ms) ..° 20. hell Me eel | THE SuN has during October been showing greater activity. On 22nd the disturbed area was 120,000 miles in length, and covered no less than 2,500,000,000 square miles, MERCURY is an evening star at the beginning of the month, but rapidly nears the sun, coming into inferior conjunction at noon on 20th, after which it becomes a morning star. VENUS is a morning star all the month, rising near 3.a.m. at the beginning of the month, and a little over an hour later at the end of November. MARS rises about 11.18 at the beginning of the month, and nearly three quarters of an hour earlier at the end, but its apparent diameter, though in- creasing, is only 7°'’8 on the 30th, and therefore not much can be seen with ordinary telescopes. NEPTUNE is now becoming favourably placed for observation, rising a little after 7 p.m. at the beginning, and a little after 5 at the end of the month. ANNULAR ECLIPSE OF THE SUN.—On the early morning of November 22nd there is an eclipse, unfortunately invisible at Greenwich. ‘The line of central eclipse begins in the South Atlantic Ocean, Africa, the Southern Indian Ocean, and a portion of Australia. A REMARKABLE SUNSET was noted on Septem- ber 5th by observers in places so far separated as Barnsbury (London), Bridport, Oxford, the South Coast of England, and Criccieth in Wales. Just after sunset a column of rosy light rose vertically some 20° or 30° above the horizon just ahead of the place where the sun had sunk. The width of the column along its entire length was about 30’ or 40’, and it remained visible for more than half an hour. The observer on the Welsh mountains saw most of the phenomenon, a second bright ray crossing the first at right angles, doubtless form- ing part of a circle or halo around the sun. OPPOSITION OF HRoOs.—The distance separating the sun and earth is now known with great exact- ness, but it is hoped that the observations now being made on Eros, the new minor planet whose orbit lies in great part within that of Mars, will give still more accurate knowledge. When in opposition, on Novemper 12th, he will be some 39,000,000 miles from us, but, from the great eccentricity of its orbit, it will not be so near to us then by about 10,000,000 miles as it will be at the beginning of the new century. Measurements are being attempted with the micrometer, the heliometer, and by aid of photography. Observa- tions are being made in Europe and America, as well as in the Southern Hemisphere. A NEW VARIABLE STAR.—Mrs. Fleming, ex- amining the Draper Memorial photographs, has found a previously unknown variable in the con- stellation Aquila, R.A. 19h. 15 m., N. Dec. 9° 41’. It varies from 7th magnitude to 11°5 in about a year. Its spectrum has been found by Professors KE. C. Pickering and Wendell to be monochromatic, like those of the gaseous nebulae. 188 CONDUCTED BY E. FOULKES-WINKS. [WE have the pleasure to announce that Mr. B. Foulkes-Winks has kindly undertaken the post of honorary departmental editor for Photography in “ SCIENCE-GossiIP.” He is agentleman of great experience in every section of the art, so that our readers may expect to gain much instruction from hiscolumns. Mr. Foulkes-Winks will shortly com- mence a series of articles on Photography, dealing with the subject from taking the negative, and gradually leading-up to the finished print. He will also from time to time give particulars of new apparatus, and any interesting feature that may be of value to our readers working at scientific or artistic photography.—ED. §.-G. | THE ROyAL PHOTOGRAPHIC Socrery.—The most interesting item at present in the photo- graphic world is undoubtedly the annual exhibi- tion of the Royal Photographic Society at the New Gallery in Regent Street. The exhibition was opened to the public on October Ist, and will remain open until November 3rd. The annual soirée was held on September 29th, when there was a large gathering of the members and their friends, who were cordially received by the Pre- sident of the Society, assisted by the members of the Committee. ‘The exhibition is a distinct ad- vance on all previous shows, and the Society is to be congratulated on the very fine and compre- hensive exhibits it has gathered together. In previous years the exhibition was held at the rooms of the Society of Artists in Water Colour in Pall Mall, where every class of work, apparatus, etc., was crowded into one room, and many a good picture was rejected solely for want of space. At the New Gallery there is ample room, and what should be highly appreciated by exhibitors is the fact that there are separate galleries for each class. Thus we have the large centre hall devoted to trade exhibits, and they are very tastefully arranged. Here, on our left, we have an artis- tically arranged stall by Wellington & Ward, with some fine specimens of bromide work. One picture, on rough drawing paper, and toned a warm sepia, is especially fine. This firm also shows samples of their new films. Opposite the entrance is the stall of Messrs. Goerz, where are exhibits of very good work done with the Anschutz camera, an interesting album of a series of views showing the manufacture of their lenses; here also may be seen some very fine stereoscopic views. The London Stereoscopic Company have a stall on which most of the firm’s specialities can be seen. Specimens of work in lenses, cameras, etc., are also shown by the well-known firms of Ross, Ltd., Dallmeyer, Ltd., W. Watson & Sons, and Beck & Co., the last-named firm showing their new ‘ Frena” folding camera, a very neat and complete instrument for hand or stand; and we understand that, in addition to the firm’s new Beck-Steinheil lens, SCIENCE-GOSSIP. any other lens can be fitted and the camera used for varying foci. Messrs. Griffin & Co. show the working of their Velox papers, and the Platino- type Company exhibit specimens of platinotype printings on their several grades of paper. Among the many beautiful examples of this work, we would draw special attention to a splendidly executed picture in sepia platinotype by Van Mureke, also the practical demonstrations that take place every evening at 7.30 and 8.30 P.M. Kodak, Ltd., show samples of their various cameras, etc., foremost in interest being their a new ‘‘ Panoram,” which, by the way , has been awarded the gold medal of the Society. This camera is certainly very simple and unique in construction, and no doubt will become very popular as an addition to the photographic outfit, as it is most useful for certain subjects where an ordinary camera would be practically useless. We must not pass on to the Pictorial Section with- out mentioning the most interesting exhibit of colour work by Messrs. Sanger Shepherd & Co, In the Pictorial Section, there is such a wealth of good things that it is impossible to even mention many of the best. The two pictures that have been awarded medals—‘“ The Orchard,” by W. T. Greatbatch, and ‘‘Venice,” by Percy Lewis, are undoubtedly amongst the best at the exhibition, but the Judge must have had a most difficult task to decide which were the two best out of some twenty exhibits, all of which are of equal artistic and technical excellence. Amongst these we would class such work as ‘‘The Rivetters” and “Warm Work,” by John H. Gash ; ‘* The Madonna,” by Rudolf HEckemeyer ; ‘‘The Water Carrier,’ by James A. Sinclair; ‘‘Clearing the Weeds,” by W. Thomas; “Off to the North,” by G. H. Faux; “In Adell Woods,” by Dr. Llewellin Morgan ; and “'The Wind Bloweth from the Sea,” by James Burn. The predominance of carbon and platinotype this year is a healthy sign, and we sincerely hope these processes will continue to hold their own against all less artistic and less permanent methods, Surely, one would suppose that any negative con- sidered good enough to print from for exhibition purposes would be worth the time and trouble of printing in carbon or platinotype. We would strongly advise all intending exhibitors to select one of these methods for such work. Of course we do not wish to disparage the usefulness of P.O.P. and bromide for home work and quick results. For example, we cannot help regretting that such a subject as “The Wind Bloweth from the Sea” was not finished in a carbon process. The scientific, technical, and photo-mechanical exhibits will be found in the gallery of the exhibition, and here the student of science will find many items of interest, even though he is not interested in photography: such, for instance, as photographs of the Great Nebulae in Orion and Andromeda, with other astronomical subjects ; also several frames of zoological subjects are shown, and photographs of flying bullets and exploding shells. There are thermometric and barometric photographic records and photo-micrographs. Then we have examples of some exceedingly fine photo- eravures by. Pellissier & Allen. T. & R. Annan & Sons are awarded a medal for some of the finest photogravure reproductions of paintings it has ever been our pleasure to examine; whilst Rathby, Lawrence & Co. show some beautiful specimens of their three-colour printing.~and the ‘“Joly- McDonough ” process is well represented. SCIENCE-GOSSIP. CONDUCTED BY HAROLD M,. READ, F.C.S. ARTIFICIAL SILK.—During recent years an industry which shows signs of being considerably developed in the near future has sprung up in the manufacture of artificial silk. Although the idea of making this article dates back to Réaumur in 1734, it took no practical shape until the demand arose for filaments for incandescent lamps. At the present time there are four main classes of artificial silk on the market :—(1) That made by denitrating nitro-cellulose, the denitrating being usually car- ried out with sulph-hydrates as originally recom- mended by Béchamp. The product thus obtained is highly lustrous and supple, resembling silk in its affinity for basic colours, and cotton in its composi- tion. (2) “Glanzstoft” or lustre-cotton, made by dissolving cellulose in ammoniacal copper, and precipitating by the addition of an acid. (3) Lustre-cotton, made by treating cellulose with caustic soda, washing, dissolving in zine chloride solution in the cold, and then precipitating. (4) Viscose Silk, the cellulose xanthate patented by Cross & Bevan, made by treating sodic cellulose with carbon bisulphide. ‘The viscose is forced through capillary holes into ammonium chloride solution, and the thread wound on to reels In this connection it is of interest to note Dr. Lieb- mann’s remarks at the recent Bradford meeting of the British Association. Dealing with the danger likely to ensue from the extremely ready com- bustion of artificial silk, he pointed out that this drawback has now been overcome, and at the same time the lustre even surpassed that of natural silk. Unfortunately the use of the artificial product is still limited ; for example, dress goods made entirely of this article are very brittle while damp, and it cannot be used for warps, but as yet only as weft for silk and cotton fabrics. SYNTHETIC PERFUMES.—The artificial produc- tion of the odorous constituents which characterise both the animal and vegetable worlds goes on apace ; and while, from a chemist’s point of. view, the compositions of both pleasant and disagreeable perfumes are equally important, from the popular and money-making side the preparation of the agreeable odours places the chemist’s aspect of the question in the shade. A few years ago Tiemann succeeded in building up chemically ionone, the perfume of orris root, while the recent litigation through the rival claimants to the synthesis of musk is still fresh in our memories. ‘he latest addition is artificial “ otto” of rose, which appears on the market simultaneously with a paper in the Berichte of the German Chemical Society by Walbaum and Stephan. ‘The research has been carried out in the laboratories of Schimmel & Co., and it appears that German otto of rose consists essentially of a mixture of nonyl-aldehyde and laevo-citronellal with the aldehydes and alcohols normally occurring in such perfumes as bergamot, cassia, and others. 189 A New Inpicaror.—In a recent issue of the Zeitschrift fiir Analytische Chemie a new indicator for both acids and alkalies is described under the name of “Alizarin-green B.” It occurs as a greenish-black powder, easily dissolving in water, and belongs to the @roups of the thiazines. On the addition of acids to the green solution there is produced a fine red coloration, which reverts to green on the addition of traces of alkali. THE NATURE or ALLOYS.—The report of the committee appointed to consider the nature of alloys presented its report to the British Associa- tion at its recent meeting at Bradford. Up to within quite recent years the great difficulty in proving the formation of the definite compounds which most chemists considered present has been the abstraction of the particular compound. Ordi- nary chemical methods are of no avail; fractional solution has been partially successful, such distinct compounds as copper-tin, platinum-tin, zinc-copper having been isolated. Professors Roozeboom and Le Chatelier have now shown that careful deter- minations of the ‘ freezing-point,” supplemented by examination under the microscope, reveal the presence of compounds whose existence was hitherto unknown. A long list of known and supposed alloys was given, and it was stated that the ordinary atomic relations do not hold in the case of alloys. THE UNIVERSAL EUDIOMETER.—A new eudio- meter is described in a recent number of the Chemical News. It has been designed by Dr. G. Woollatt, and has been found to be of great advantage in lecture demonstrations, giving accu- rate results with very little trouble and over a wide range of conditions. There is certainly much to commend it, and it is suitable not only for the demonstration of Boyle’s and Charles’ laws, for which it was primarily designed, but also for the analysis and synthesis of gases. We recommend it to the notice of lecturers. It is being made by John J. Griftin & Sons, Limited, of London, W.C. EXPLOSION OF MAGNESIUM.—From time to time we are startled by the want of care on the part of experimenters ; one of the most recent instances occurred on September 8rd at the offices of the Photo- Programme, 29 Rue du Mail, Paris. It appears that M. Jean Larcher (director of the Programme, which is a well-known illustrated review) was engaged with two assistants in developing some negatives ina dark-room attached to his offices. One of them carelessly struck a match to light a cigarette. He happened to be near a big jar of powdered magnesium, and the latter exploded. The house was shaken to its foundations, all the windows were blown out, and a perfect panic seized the inhabitants of the house, as well as the neighbours, for the Rue du Mail is a narrow thoroughfare in a busy quarter, and all the houses are five or six stories high, and let off in flats. When assistance came the men were discovered severely injured, and they were conveyed to the nearest hospital. The other people who suffered personal injuries by the explosion were a M. Pozi- monin, who was passing the house and received broken glass on his head. A tenant, Mme. Charlotte, happened to be standing at a window when the accident happened, and she was knocked down and sustained some nasty bruises, but a clerk who was in the next room to that in which the explosion occurred was lucky enough to escape with no injury beyond the shock. x me Ss ——— CONDUCTED BY JAMES QUICK. EXTENSION OF WIRES.—A useful arrangement tor the measurement of extension of wires has recently been described by G. F. C. Searle in the Cambridge Philosophical Societys Proceedings. Two similar wires side by side have fastened to their ends small rectangular brass frames 11 cm. lons. The stretching weighis are placed below these frames. A sensitive level is placed between the latter, resting at one end on a micrometer screw which reads to =4,th mm. This reads off the length by which the loaded wire is stretched. RONTGEN RAys.—An advance has been made in the production of these rays by Trowbridge in America. He has lately installed an equipment of no less than 20,000 storage cells in the Jefferson Physical Laboratory. By this means he has at his disposal an electromotive force of over 40,000 volis. and moreover a iairly steady current through a large resistance. He has succeeded in obtaining Roéntgen rays of exceptional brilliancy with the aid o? this E. M.F., which yield negatives of great con-. trast. One great advantage of this new method of generating the rays is the possibility of exactly regulating the current and electromotive force which is necessary to excite the rays. This has not hitherto been possible. When the X-ray tube is first connected to the battery terminals no current flows. The tube must be heated with a Bunsen burner. At a certain critical temperature the tube suddenly lishis up with a vivid fluorescence, and the rays are then given off with great intensity. RADIO-AcCTIVE Bopies.—The radio-activity of these bodies has now been tested at low tempera- tures, and M. Curie has found that at the tempera- ture of liquid air they continue to excite fluorescence in uranyl-potassium sulphate. Radio-active barium chloride becomes more luminous at that tem- perature. Radium has also been tested at the above temperature by Behrendsen, using the electrometer method. Im this case, however. it was found that cooling the preparation reduced its radio-activity by more than one-half. On heat- ing it up again to the normal temperature, a slight increase Oi radio-activity was discovered. GaLToN’s WHISTLES.—In a modified form of Galton’s whisile, devised by Mr. T. Edelmann, the blast of air from a ring-shaped mouthpiece im- pinges upon the sharp edge of the pipe, which is econd. By making the diameter of the pipe as mall as 2mm., Edelmann has succeeded in con- ructing pipes giving the very high pitch of 70,000 vibrations per second. mh th hb ct — SCIENCE-GOSSIP. ATMOSPHERIC ELECTRICITY.—Some work has been done by M. Brillonin upon the nature of positive and negative electrifications in the atmo- sphere. It is well known, from the researches of J. J. Thomson and others, that ultra-violet rays exert a discharging effect upon negative electrifica- tion, and Brillouin has found that cold, dry ice is very sensitive to this action; in fact, about one- tenth as much so as zinc. Water is not so at all. Dry crystals of ice floating in an electric field would become charged positively and negatively, but the negative charges would escape under the influence of sunlight. The air remaining an in- sulator, the surrounding air becomes negatively charged. When the ice crystals forming the cirrus cloud moves away from this air, it bears a positive charge, and if it evaporates, the air now surround- ing it becomes positively charged. When the negatively charged air descends, it charges the earth negatively. At sea the negatively charged air. on expansion, forms negatively charged cu- mulus clouds. The effects of the travel of these masses of air may explain many of the phenomena of storms; and the blending of the positive and negative charges by night, when there has been no such travel, probably accounts for auroras. Inminous clouds, and diffused illumination of the sky on summer nights in our latitudes. TELEPHONY OVER TELEGRAPH LINES.—Various methods are now being adopted whereby telephonic messages can be sent over single telegraphic lines simultaneously with telegraphic signalling. This possibility is realised by the use of condensers, interposed in the circuitin such a way that the slow telesraphic impulses do not affect the rapid tele- phony waves. At each station the telephone is con- nected between line and earth through a condenser. The telegraph instrument is connected between line and earth with no condenser. The capacity of the condenser used need not exceed 0-2 micro- farad, and in place of a tin-foil *‘ plate ” condenser it is found better to use one formed of parallel insulated wires bound together on a bobbin. For this purpose the wires may be 0-1 mm. diameter, copper, double silk covered, each of the wires having a resistance of approximately 800 ohms: Plate condensers are found to transmit waves more loudly but less distinctly than these wire con- densers. Ii is, however, suggested that loudness and clearness might possibly both be attained by a continuation of a plate condenser and a wire condenser. The Morse-key contacts are made of carbon, to avoid abrupt changes of cnirent, which would affect the telephone circuit. Another way of bridging the difficulty would be to connect permanenily a resistance bobbin between the contacts of the key. When there are inter- mediate telegraphic stations between the two stations that are to communicate by telephone, each intermediate telegraph instrument must be bridged over with a condenser. So far as the telephone circuit is concerned, this is equivalent to cutting oui the resistance of all the intermediate telegraph instruments. In addition to the above, each telesraph instrument, including the terminal instruments, must be provided with an inductive resistance of about 500 ohms, to act as a choking coil for the telephonic circuits. This system is applied to the fire-alarm service in Berlin, and by means of a portable telephone apparatus com- munication can be made with the central fire station from any of the 800 fire-alarm posts. SCIENCE-GOSS/P. 19I aS me th BIRD-LOUSE CHANGING Hosts.—In August last I captured a specimen of the parasitic fly, Orni- thomyia avicularia, as it was leaving a recently- shot blackbird. On examination I found hanging on to it, likea bulldog, a bird-louse which is ficur ed in Denny’ s monograph of the Anoplura as Nirmus merulensis, one of the species of lice stated by him to be peculiar to that bird. Both species were present on the bird in question, the Mirmi being on the quills of the wing-feathers. This is the second instance of a Virmus merulensis attaching itself to an Ornithomyia which has come to my notice. In each case the Mirmus was hanging on to the posterior portion of the abdomen. — Mr. Enock, who has seen the two insects mounted in position for the microscope, believes, I am informed, that the bird-louse takes hold of the Ornithomyia with the view of being transported to a fresh bird-host. In that case it might find itself conveyed to a thrush or starling: “for, as far as I can see, the Ornithomyiae parasitic on the three kinds of birds are identical. His view is probably correct; the more so that the chitinous integument of an Ornithomyia is exceedingly tough, and it is doubt- ful if the biting organs of the Mirmus would be able to penetrate them. It is also well known that Chelifers (pseudo-scorpions) attach themselves to the legs of flies, presumably for transport. One of them was lately found hanging on to the leg of a hive-bee. Mirmus merulensis is about three times the size of an ordinary Chelifer.—H. J. O. Walker (it.-C€ol.), Lee Ford, Budleigh Salterton. ABNORMAL CLOVER FLOWERS.—Pupils of mine, Miss Esplin and Miss Meyer, have drawn my atten- tion to the following variations in flowers of the white clover. These variations may be of common occurrence, but I have not seen them alluded to anywhere. The plants were found growing on the chalk, about a mile to the east of Brighton. On certain heads some of the flowers had the ordinary short pedicels, while others had much larger ones, in some cases measuring as much as 18mm. On some heads all the pedicels were abnormally long. Foliaceous calyx was found to be of common occur- rence ; sometimes the calyx was larger than the corolla, and this, combined with the lengthened pedicels, gave the plant somewhat the appearance of certain kinds of rush. The carpel was replaced by leaf in the centre of a number of the flowers where unmodified leaves were observed. ‘These were seldom sessile, sometimes having petioles 8 mm. long. In some flowers the leaf was un- divided, in others there were two, three, four, five, or even six leaflets. ‘The flowers exhibited other peculiarities, but these do not show up so clearly in the dried specimens I have before me. —/orence Rich, Roedean School, near Brighton. CATOCALA FRAXINI IN KEN?T.—A specimen of C. fraxini (the Clifden Nonpareil) was taken by Mr. G. Grey and his brother at treacle at Eltham, Kent, on September 3rd last.— A. J. Poore, 47 Griffin Road, Plumstead. Serrugineum Vr THE BRITISH MycoLocicaAL Socitery.—The annual week’s fungus foray of this society was held at the Boat of Garten from September 17th to the 22nd, 1900, and by a happy coincidence the Cryptogamic Society of Scotland had also arranged their annual foray in the same locality. ‘The members of the two societies assembled at the Hotel, Boat of Garten, on Monday, September 17th, where they found awaiting their inspection many interesting specimens collected lony ADJe,. (Gp B Plowright. ‘The hon. secretary also exhibited: a specimen of Strobilomyces strobilaceus Berk.. gathered that day by him in the policies of Murthly Castle, and which he understood was of uncommon occurrence in Scotland. On Tuesday, September 18th, the early train was taken to Aviemore, from whence the members proceeded, under the leadership of the Rey. Dr. Keith, Presi- dent of the Cryptogamic Society of Scotland, to the Dell of Rothiemurchus Forest. Here the members collected specimens of the excellent edible Hydnum imbricatum Linn., the pretty rosy Armillaria robusta A.& §., several species of the genus Zricholomata, T. equestre Linn. being characterised by its bright yellow gills and stem, 7. portentosum Fr. and 7. virgatum Fr. by their sombre colour. Cortinarius (Inoloma) traganus Fr. was abundant amongst the heather, and its unpleasant smell was only too evident. The rich-coloured Cortinarius (Inoloma) tophaceus Fr., C. (Dermocybe) orellanus Fy., were secured amongst many others of this interesting genus. Pawillus atrotomentesus Fr., the sweet- scented Hygrophorus agathosmus Fr, the yellow- milked Lactarius scrobiculatus Fr., Hydnum fragile Fr., H. scrobiculatum Fr., and H. compactum Pers. were added to the list. The walk was then con- tinued to the hospitable shelter of the Rev. — McDougal, the members gathering on the way specimens of the destructive parasite Trametes pint Fr. On Wednesday, September 19th, the Rev. Dr. Keith conducted the members into the adjacent Forest of Abernethy and round to Loch Garten, which is beautifully wooded and stands out in pleasing contrast to the neighbouring mountains. Dr. C. B. Plowright secured the pretty Hnxtoloma erophilum Fr., new to the British Fungus Flora, and some very yellow examples of Stereum sowerbeii B. and Br. Professor H. Marshall Ward found a large quantity of the weird-looking parasite Cordyccps ophioglossoides Fr. growing on Llaphomyces variega- tus Vitt. Sistotrema confluens Pers. was fairly common amongst the pine needles. and Stropharia secobinacea Fr., Flammula scamba Fr., and Hydnuin were collected. In the evening Professor H. Marshall Ward, president of the society, delivered a very instructive and sugges- tive address, entitled ‘'The Nutrition of Fungi.” On Thursday the Rev. Dr. Keith led the members to Columbridge and Loch-an-eilan. Many inter- esting specimens were gathered on the way, including the pretty blue Lntoloma blorami Berk., the golden sqnarrose Pholiota flammans Fr. the 192 scaly Cortinarius (Inoloma) pholideus Fr., Lactarius hysginus Fy., Pleurotus mitis Pers., and Naematelia encephala Fr. In the evening the business meeting of the Society was held. Professor H. Marshall Ward, D. Sc., F.R.S., F.L.S., etc., was unanimously re-elected president, and Mr. C. Rea hon. secre- tary and treasurer for the ensuing year. Their fel- low-member Mrs. Montague’s invitation to hold next year’s foray in the woods near Crediton, with Exeter as headquarters, was unanimously accepted, and the date was fixed for the last week in September. Professor H. Marshall Ward gave a valuable paper of original research on ‘* Naematelia,” which should be read by all mycologists in the Society’s Trans- actions. Mrs. Carleton Rea exhibited drawings of two new species, Collybia veluticeps Rea and Mycena carneasanguinea Rea, which would be shortly described in full. On Friday, September 21st. the members proceeded to the woods to the west of the Boat of Garten, but little of any consequence was found beyond a Boletus thought to belong to the Gyrodon group, so in the afternoon the members again searched Abernethy Forest, obtaining specimens of Tubaria paludosa Fr. and Omphalia umbratilis Fr. On Saturday, Septem- ber 22nd, many of the members dispersed, but a few ardent ones remained and took the mid-day train to Aviemore, from whence through birch-clad hills they walked to Lynwilg and on to a pine wood about a mile further southward, and on the right of the road to Kingussie. This wood was found to be the veritable home of the larger Hydnei, and the collection soon included H. imbricatum Linn., H. fragile Fr., EH. compactwm Pers., H aurantiacum A. & §., H. zonatum Batsch, H. nigrum Fr., and H. melaleucum Fr. So terminated a most enjoyable foray, which was chiefly remark- able for the number of Cortinarii and Hydnei that were found.—Cuarleton Rea. Hon. Sec. British Mycological Society, 34 Foregate Strect, Worcester. NOTICES OF SOCIETIES. Ordinary meetings are marked +, excursions * ; names of persons following excursions are of Conductors. Lantern Tlustra- tions §. MANCHESTER MvsEuM, OWENS COLLEGE. Noy. 3.—“Life on the Earth.” Prof. W. Boyd Dawkins, E.R.S. s, 10.—* Central Britain.” Prof. W. Boyd Dawkins, BS. +, 17:— Continental Britain.’ Prof. W. Boyd Dawkins, BRS. » 24.—“TInsular Britain.” Prof. W. Boyd Dawkins, F.R.S. SourH LonDON ENTOMOLOGICAL AND SOCIETY. Noy. 8.—7 Special Exhibition of Varieties. + 22.—f Desultory Days at Dawlish in August.’ Henry J. Turner, F.E.S. SELBORNE Socrery. Noy. 1.—7 “ Nature at the Seaside.” NATURAL HISTORY Edward A. Martin, F.G.S. NortH Lonnon Naruratn History. Socrery. Noy. 1.—;“ Notes on Natural History of Guildford District.” _G. B. Bishop. op eget eee ora Ext actions Species. G.O'N. Wadding- on. HULL SCIENTIFIC AND FIELD NATURALISTS’ CLUB. Noy. 7.—7 “Epidemics.” Dr. J. Hollingworth. » 21.—§* Reptiles.” H.M. Foster. LAMBETH FIELD CLUB AND SCIENTIFIC SOCIETY. Noy. 5.—f “ pone Properties of Light and Lenses.” James S. ough, ., 17.—* “South Kensington Science Collections.” F.R,A.S. » 19.—-+ “ Food and Digestion.” J.J. Hall, E. J. Davies. SCIENCE-GOSSIP. NOTICES TO CORRESPONDENTS. To CORRESPONDENTS AND EXCHANGERS.—SCIENCE-GOSSIP is published on the 25th of each month. All notes or other com- munications should reach us not later than the 18th of the month for insertion in the following number. No communications can be inserted or noticed without full name and address of writer. Notices of changes of address admitted free. EDITORIAL COMMUNICATIONS, articles, books for review, instru- ments for notice, specimens for identification, &c., to be addressed to JOHN T. CARRINGTON, 110 Strand, London, W.C. SUBSCRIPTIONS.—The volumes of SCIENCE-GossIP begin with the June numbers, but Subscriptions may commence with any number, at the rate of 6s. 6d. for twelve months (including postage), and should be remitted to-the Office, 110 Strand, London, W.C. Noricr.—Contributors are requested to strictly ob:erve the following rules. All contributions must be clearly written on one side of the paper only. Words intended to be printed in italics should be marked under with a single line. Generic names must be given in full, excepting where used immediately before. Capitals may only be used for generic, and not specific names. Scientific names and names of places to be written in round hand. THE Editor will be pleased to answer questions and name specimens through the Correspondence column of the magazine. Specimens, in good condition, of not more than three species to be sent atone time, carriage paid. Duplicates only to be sent, which will not be returned. The specimens must have identify- ing numbers attached, together with locality, date, and par- ticulars of capture. THE Editor is not responsible for unused MSS., neither can he undertake to return them unless accompanied with stamps for return postage. € EXCHANGES. ScIENCE-GossrP (old series), 1865 to 1893, part bound. Wanted, botanical or entomological books, collection of British moths or plants.—W. R. Hayward, 28 Princess Road, South Norwood, S.E. OFFERED.—Cypraea fusco-dentata, Calliostoma layardi, Colum- bella filmerae, and other South African marine shells for other marine, freshwater, or land shells. Send lists —H. Becher, M.D., Grahamstown, South Africa. WANTED, good lantern, in exchange for volumes of SCIENCE- Gosstp, old and new series, and British land and freshwater shells.—A. Alletsee, Claremont, Randall Road, Clifton, Bristol. FcR EXCHANGE, daplicate specimens and micro-slides of typical British rocks, chiefly Lake District; own collection Also fossil ceal-plants. List—W. Hemingway, 170 Old Mill Lane, Barnsley. OFFERED.—Vols. I. and II. of “ Insect Life,’ profusely ilus- trated, value £2: several microtomes and a large collection of current microscopy literature, Geological Survey Memoirs of Lincolnshire, Yorkshire, etc. Wanted, among other desiderata, a good pair of field-glasses by maker of repute.—J. Cooke, 19 Ravenswood Road, Redlands, Bristol. CONTENTS. PAGE SCENERY OF LLANBERIS Pass. By F.E. FILER. Jilus- trated .. oe at 40 20 oe 6 ae Kel THE PHOTOGRAPHY OF CoLoUR. By E. SANGER SHEP- HERD. Illustrated .. ae 50 25 S60 -. 163 Noves oN Atypus. By FRANK PERCY SmitH. Jilus- trated .. c oe oe sic 36 oc -. 165 AN INTRODUCTION TO BRITISH SPIDERS. By FRANK Percy SmirH. Illustrated a6 ou ots >* May 6th, 10 h. 20 m., G.M.T, Drawn by Rev. Theodore BE. R. Phillips 3 inches aperture will show much of the beauty of the belts if the airis good and a power of from 130 to 180 employed. (To be continued.) CONDUCTED BY F. SHILLINGTON SCALES, F.R.MLS. Royal MicroscopicaL Society. — Decem- ber 19th, William Carruthers, Esq., F.R.S., in the chair. Notice was given on behalf of the Council that at the next meeting of the Society the name of Dr. C. T. Hudson would be submitted for elec- tion as an Honorary Fellow. Mr. E. M. Nelson exhibited a small pocket microscope made by Dr. Gilbertson, of London. of unknown date. Dr. Hebb read the list of nominations by the Council for election at the Annual Meeting on January 16th, as follows:—As President, Mr. William Car- ruthers; as Vice-presidents, Dr. Braithwaite, Messrs. Michael, and Nelson, and the Right Hon. Sir Ford North; as Treasurer, Mr. J. J. Vezey: as Secretaries, Dr. Dallinger and Dr. Hebb ; as Coun- cil, Messrs. Allen, Beck, Bennett, Browne. Rev. E. Carr, Messrs. Dadsweli, Disney, Karop, Plimmer, Powell, Professor Urban Pritchard, and Mr. Rous- selet ; as Curator, Mr. Rousselet. Mr. Barton, on behalf of Messrs. Ross, Limited, exhibited some new forms of lanterns which could be used for ordinary projection purposes either with or without the microscope. The first was constructed so as to exclude all light from the room except what passed through the lenses; the second was larger and more complex, and could be used for all pur- poses, including enlargements. Both gave excel- lent definition. Mr. Barton also exhibited and described several new forms of microscope with detachable circular staging and new form of electric arc lamp for lantern use. A new form of limelight was also exhibited which attracted much attention from its great brilliancy and steadiness. and the silence with which it burned. These effects were produced by causing the gases to im- pinge upon each other previous to their entrance into the mixing chamber, and by the construction of the chamber itself, JOURNAL OF THE QUEKETT MICROSCOPICAL CLUB.—We regret that space. has prevented our noticing earlier the November issue of this inter- esting journal. which contains the index for the volume comprising this and the preceding five numbers. The present number contains an article by Mr. T. B. Rossiter on the anatomy of the tape- worm Dicranotaenia coronula, with two excellent plates; a note on four rare British fungi by Mr. Ernest S. Salmon, with one plate; and another note by Mr. E. M. Nelson on Actinocyclus ralfsii, with special reference to the cause of the colour exhibited by this diatom when examined with low- and high-angled lenses respectively. Mr. R. T. Lewis adds a most interesting contribution to the life-history of Ixodes reduvius, also with a plate. which we recommend to the notice of the many readers of SCIENCE-GossIP who were interested in Mr, E. G. Wheler’s recent articles (S.-G. vol. v. N.S. pp. 5, 46, 108) on “Ticks and Louping Ill,” and which is a further elaboration of the life-history SCIENCE-GOSSIF. dealt with therein. These articles were sub- sequently published in a more extended form in the Journal of the Royal Agricultural Society, and have been since reprinted for private circula- tion. Mr. A. A. Merlin deals with the structural division of the endoplasm ebserved by him in the bacilli of bubonic plague and of other microbes: Mr. Chas. D. Soar contributes a list of fresh- water mites found near Oban, N.B.: and Mr. D. J. Scourfield, the editor of the “Journal,” adds a note on the swimming peculiarities of Daphnia and similar Entomosiraca, with some original and very practical hints as to examining living specimens. Several minor notes, reviews of books, and the usual reports of the proceedings of the Club make up a most interesting number. BawscH & LoMB’s NEW CATALOGUE.— We desire to say that since the appearance last month of our notice of Messrs. Bausch & Lomb’s new catalogue we have received from their London agents, Messrs. Staley & Co., 35 Aldermanbury, a copy of the same catalogue specially prepared and priced for the Eng- lish market. Itisnotfor us to enter here into political and fiscal matters, but it is worth noting that the heavy import duties in the United States appa- rently represent a difference of about 25 per cent. in favour of the English buyer. The prices in the English catalogue, accordingly, compare favourably with those current in America and on the Continent. We take the first opportunity of making the neces- sary correction. Our notice, of course, was of the American catalogue, which had been sent to us direct from America, NOTES ON CRUSTACEANS.—Professor G. S. Brady has kindly sent us reprints of two papers read by him and reprinted from the “ Natural History Transactions of Northumberland, Durham, and Newcastle-on-Tyne.” One of these contains a new description of J/yopsyllus coriaceus, a remark- able little crustacean notable for its_ brilliant colour. eel-like movements, and peculiar mouth- parts. The almost obsolete mandibles, and the reduction of all the other mouth-apparatus— maxillae and maxillipedes—to a very few minute filaments or setae, preclude its coming into line with any of the three divisions established by Thorell. The author proposes, therefore, to esta- blish a new section for the reception of slyopsyllus under the name of Leptostomata. The divisions of Copepoda, based upon the structure of the mouth-organs, would then stand as follows: Gnathostomata, Poecilostomata, Leptostomata, and Siphonostomata. In the same paper is given a list of littoral forms of crustacea collected by the author at Alnmouth, in Northumberland, such as Paratylus uncinatus, Apherusa borealis, Siriella norvegica, and S. armata, which are considered by Dr. Norman to be new to the local fauna. Some new forms are descrived in Cyclops salinus, Ectinosoma melaniceps, Stenhelia limicola, Echino- cheres violaceus, and Cyclopicera herniciensis, all of which are illustrated by plates. The author notes that Acartia clausii is infested with what is probably an immature fiuke, of which the dab (Limanda limanda), for instance, may be the final host. NATURE AND ORIGIN OF FRESH-WATER FAUNAE.—The other paper deals with the nature and origin of fresh-waterfaunae. Professor Brady points out that, accepting the orthodox zoological theory that life originated in the sea, we may sup- eed OO ea SG agp <— shialeeeeieeniaiederhiiees ono a A e « SCIENCE-GOSSIP. pose that the first tentative efforts at life occurred in the shallow littoral region where warmth, shelter, and the action of the tides would greatly favour both animal and vegetable growth. He reminds us of the fact that one very important group of marine animals, the Echinoderma, is altogether absent from fresh-water fauna; and that another large group, the Coelentera, is very feebly represented. Only two classes have a pre- ponderance in fresh water, the Amphibians (frogs, newts, and the like), which are altogether ter- restrial or fresh-water in habitat, and Insects, which, although not largely represented in fresh water, are even more scarce in the sea. Protozoa, however, as represented by Radiolaria and Forami- nifera, are almost exclusively marine, though they are near relatives of Amoeba, which is ubiquitous in fresh water. Foraminifera, though abundant in estuaries and even in pools of marshes where the water is only very slightly saline, do not seem to be able to penetrate further than this, and even in such localities they are invariably depauperated, the tests becoming thin and de- ficient in lime. Professor Brady adds the natural reflection that it is possible that absence or di- minished quantity of lime in the water may be a chief cause of the absence of Foraminifera, just as the sub-acidity and “softness” of the water of peat-mosses seem to render it unfit to support Microzoa with calcareous shells, while those with merely chitinous valves are often abundant. Sponges are almost wholly marine in their distri- bution, of the forty odd families only one being found in fresh water. Of the Coelentera (jelly- fishes, zoophytes, etc.) only three families out of about seventy are represented in fresh water, these being the well-known Hydra and Cordylophora, and two small and comparatively infrequent Medusae. The heterogeneous group Vermes in- cludes many fresh-water forms, but the larger and more important section Arthropoda is very imper- fectly represented. Of this division the micro- scopic Entomostraca are the only crustaceans found abundantly in fresh water, except the com- mon crayfish ; the Spiders, on the other hand, are absent from the sea, except the Mites and Pycno- gons. Centipedes are wholly terrestrial, and insects almost wholly so. The Mollusca are chiefly marine, though some families are largely repre- sented in fresh water. Of aquatic vertebrates, fishes are, of course, the most important, and of these, of 137 families, 35 only are found in fresh water, and many of these but sparingly. The Amphibians are, as already mentioned, entirely absent from the sea. This is an interesting epitome, and Professor Brady refers to a paper published fourteen years ago by Professor Sollas for the following principal causes why compara- tively few animals have been able to establish themselves in fresh water:—Firstly, the prevalence among marine animals of larval forms so feeble as to be unable to withstand river currents ; secondly, prejudicial fluctuations of temperature in fresh water ; thirdly, disturbing physical causes, such as floods, droughts, upheavals and depressions of surface, etc.; and to this Professor Brady himself adds the question of the non-salinity of fresh water. In this connection he quotes the well-known ex- ample of the transmutation of Artemia salina into A. miilhausenti, but this result has been much criti- cised and has recently been discredited, (See a note in this journal, on p. 151 of the present volume.) 283 Ross’s NEw “STANDARD” MIcROscopE.—The popularity of the Continental form of stand in our hospital laboratories and medical schools, alluded toon p. 184 in a recent notice of a new micro- scope by Messrs. Beck, is further evidenced by Messrs. Ross’s latest stand, especially designed for this and similar classes of work. ‘his stand has the usual Continental form of horseshoe foot, but with the pillar brought as far forward as possible with a view to obviating the want of steadiness so characteristic of this type of foot. The coarse adjustment is the usual diagonal rack working at the end of the limb in a cylindrical slide, and the other end of the limb, also in accordance with Continental practice, is borne upon a triangular bar and actuated by a direct-acting micrometer screw. One drawback to this arrangement, what- ever may be its advantages, is manifestly that the whole weight of body-tube and limb is borne by Ross’s “ STANDARD” MICROSCOPE. the fine adjustment, and that the limb the position of which makes it peculiarly liable to strains and ill-usage, is not rigid. Opinions, however, differ on this as on other points connected with the design of microscopes. ‘The stage in the various models varies in size from 3 inches to 4} inches square, and is covered with vulcanite. The sub- stage in its simplest form is represented merely by a ring beneath the stage, but in the more ex- pensive stands by a rack and pinion sub-stage. An iris diaphragm is fitted immediately beneath the stage in the cheaper instruments, an arrange- ment which, whilst effective with low powers, is manifestly not advantageous when a condenser is being used. The length of the tube is 160 milli- metres, which in the larger stands extends to 250 millimetres. The cheapest stand is priced at £4 10s., whilst the one illustrated costs with eye- 284 piece £6, or with racked sub-stage 25 shillings extra. The addition of an Abbé condenser adds a further 25 shillings. The objectives supplied with the stands are a 2-inch of N.A. 26, and a 24-inch of N.A. 65, priced at 25 shillings and £2 respec- tively. Both of these are excellent lenses, of good definition, and arranged so as to work approxi- mately in the same focal plane when rotated on a nosepiece. EXTRACTS FROM POSTAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY’S NOTEBOOKS. [These extracts were commenced in the Septem- ber number at page 119. Beyond necessary editorial revision, they are printed as written by the various members.— ED. Microscopy, 8.-G. | Noves By F. PHILLIPS. The twelve diatom slides referred to in these notes will probably form a pleasant change. Diatoms are a family of confervoid algae of very peculiar shape They are found in almost every pool of fresh, brackish, or salt water, sometimes forming a yellow or brown layer at the bottom of the water; at others, attached to various plants, or Hd. Campy do Avs eurb Covtatis i SCLENCE-GOSST/P. few washings, then treat in a similar manner with nitric acid ; wash repeatedly with distilled water until perfectly free from acid. Separate the various diatoms according to their different specific eravities by allowing them to pass through water in the following manner :—Take along glass tube, about two feet in length and half an inch in diameter, fitted at the bottom with a stopcock to facilitate the letting out of some of the diatoms at any stage of the process; place a drop onthe slide and examine. If suitable for mounting, proceed as follows :—Fix a needle obliquely through a collar of cork which is itself fitted to a low-power objective, and to the end of the needle cement a bristle, preferably one from a rat’s tail. The end of the bristle can now be focussed along with the diatom. and brought in contact with the latter. The diatom will adhere to the bristle, and can be raised and transferred to a clean slide. In this manner any single diatom can be selected out of a gathering and mounted sepa- rately. Of course great care and patience are requi- site, but practice and perseverance in this, as in everything else, will bring good results in course of time. The following brief description of the characteristics of the individual slides may be of further interest :— One, (EG Ms #.0- DIATOMS (Prom Drawings by Miss F. Phillips.) on stones and decaying plant-stems—in fact in almost any moist place. The individual cells are called frustules, and are furnished with a coat of silica, noteworthy on account of its beautiful mark- ings, which take the form of bands or lines, either parallel, radiate, or crossing each other; also of dots. These markings however cannot be seen until the diatoms have been properly cleaned. When the diatoms have been collected, one of the most troublesome operations is freeing them from impurities. Several text-books give different methods, but the following is the one I adopt. Place the diatoms in a test-tube with strong hydro- chloric acid and boil for five minutes ; after allow- ing the boiling to subside, get rid of the acid by a Campylodiscus costatus (fig. 1): frustules saddle- shaped and contorted, valves circular with radi- ating channels, the centre minutely dotted ; found principally in boggy pools. Swrirella striatula (fig. 2): frustules somewhat wedge-shaped, margins produced into a kind of wing with distinct and parallel channels, valves ovate and striate; found in brackish water. Navicula firma (fig. 3): valves narrow, gradually tapering to the rounded ends, a longitudinal line near each margin, central nodule conspicuous, striae fine; common in ditches. Tsthmia enervis (fig. 4): frustules depressed, valves of a reticular or cellular appearance, uniformly covered with depressions; found in salt water only. Coscinodiscus robustus (fig. 5): frustules SCIENCE-GOSSIP. 285 free, single, disc-shaped, valves circular, flat or slightly convex, exhibiting a cellular or areolar appearance, no internal septa nor late- ral processes; marine and fossil. TZerpsinoe musica (fig. 6): frustules faintly punctate, front view rectangular oblong, side view equally inflated in middle and at the ends, nodules separated by septa; found in salt water only. Arachnoidiscus ehrenbergii (fig. 7) : frustules adherent, dise-shaped, valves plain or slightly convex with radiating and concentric lines (rows of dots) and a central pseudo- nodule; marine only. Trinacria regina (fig. 8): frustules with three broad bispined, equal-lengthed processes, margin pearly, angles naked ; marine only. Heliopelta leewwenhocchii (fig. 9): frustules single, valves circular with imperfect radiating septa, markings absent in centre, but as many large submarginal apertures present as there are rays, and numerous erect opposite submarginal spines on each side; the spines connect the pairs of young frustules; fossil. _—— — Grimaldi abt Copernicus Mare Imbrium Plato Photo, at Lick Observatory. (From Sir Robert Ball's “ Primer of Astronomy.”) first part of his volume is devoted to an outline of morphology of vertebrates, based upon embry- ology, and the remainder presents an outline of the classification of vertebrates—a subject, as Pro- fessor Kingsley reminds us, that has in recent years been too much ignored in college work. For this purpose reference is made to fossil as well as recent forms, since the existing fauna of the earth should be studied in the light of the past. In the classification the author differs in some points from other students, and inregard to nomenclature he prefers to keep well-known generic names: in spite of the law of priority. There is some com- fort in this—at any rate, till some recognised inter- ample of the illustrations, a picture of the moon at full, as photographed at the Lick Observatory. This little work is sure to largely increase the popular knowledge of celestial bodies. ‘THOMPSON? with por- Paris, New Ltd. 1901.) Michael Faraday. By Si VANUS P: D.Se., F.R.S. ix+308 pp., 7din. x 5 in., trait and 22 illustrations. (London, York, and Melbourne: Cassell & Co., 2s. 6d. This constitutes a volume of the ‘* Century Science Series.” Professor Silvanus ‘Thompson has been successful in giving in his pages a history of the life and work of this eminent scientific worthy. 308 SCIENCE-GOSSTIP. Of course many biographical works on Faraday have already appeared, and the author has had not only the advantage of them for reference, but also permission of the Royal Institution to take hitherto unpublished extracts from Faraday’s note-books. Further, he has examined a number of his private papers, by permission of Miss Jane Barnard, and some extracts from these appear in the pages before us. The whole book is exceedingly enter- taining and pleasantly written. In Natures Workshop. By GRANT ALLEN. viii + 240 pp., 74 in. x 5 in., with 100 illustra- tions by F. Enock. (London: Geo. Newnes, Ltd. 1901.) 3s. 6d. On examining this book we are reminded of the hand that is passed away, and the many pleasant chapters written by the late Grant Allen. His popular writings on natural science subjects always commanded attention, even if in some cases accuracy was sacrificed to the picturesque. Still such works are exceedingly useful in drawing attention to the odd sides of Nature. ‘The addi- tion of Mr. Enock’s beautiful drawings to the pleasant pages of this book makes it oneto be re- commended to the general reader, who prefers to be amused while instructed. Modern Astronomy. By HERBERT HALL TURNER, E.R.S. xvi + 286 pp., 74x 5 in. With 30 illustra- tions. (London: Archibald Constable & Co., Ltd., 1901.) 6s. net. This is an account of the revolution of the last quarter-century in instruments, in methods, and in theories. It is an expansion of three lectures given at the Royal Institution in February, 1900, and- is written with an accuracy worthy of the Savilian Professor of Astronomy at Oxford. It is given in such a manner that all may understand, so that it should be a welcome addition to the shelves of every student and of every public library.—/.C. D. Inorganic Chemistry. By RAPHAEL MELDOLA, B.C.8. Revised by J. CastELL Evans, F.I.C. xvi + 320 pp., 7in. x 43 in. Illustrated by 36 figures. (London: Thomas Murby. 1900.) 2s. net. The fact that Professor Meldola’s work has reached a fifth edition speaks well for its use amongst the students of schools. It made its first appearance more than twenty years ago. The present edition has been brought up to date by Mr. J. Castell Evans, a co-worker with Professor Meldola at the City and Guilds of London Institute and Technical College. Itis somewhat changed in the sections treating of the metallic elements. These have been arranged in accordance with Mendelejeff's law.—H. M. R. Modern Chemistry. By WILLIAM RAMSAY, LL.D., IDISGo, IPMID., IIR, IOS B27 joo. wa 2 wolle, Vol. I., Theoretical Chemistry ; Vol. II., Systematic Chemistry. (London: J. M. Dent & Co. 1900.) 1s. per vol. Ifthe publication of text-books be any criterion as to the popularity of any subject, we may safely assume that the growth of chemistry is at last becoming real; for not only does the issue of new -works on the subject show no signs of abatement, but there is, on the contrary, a steady increase. Moreover, the increase is not altogether devoted to advanced theories on the science, but more to a consolidating and retrospective treatment, which is further enhanced by the introduction of the essentially new ideas which took their inception from the masterly applications of Van t’Holff and Ostwald. As one of the foremost of English chemists, Professor Ramsay’s work is naturally regarded with interest. It would be invidious to describe it as good. Clear and concise, it bears on every page the impress of a master- hand. ‘The enormous amount of fact and theory condensed into two such small volumes is hardly noticed, so flowing and well organised is the language, until one pauses to review his read- ing of each chapter. The whole treatment of the subject is refreshing, for Professor Ramsay leaves the beaten track followed by the majority of former writers. From the standpoint of the periodic law and the reactions of ions he impresses on the reader the importance of the acidic as well as of the basic radicles. The ionic hypothesis should now be no stumbling-block to the average student. Its im- portance to the proper understanding of chemistry is so self-evident that it is hard to understand why it was, till within recent years, considered both impractical and too advanced. ‘The printing is excellent, and the work is much embellished by the two very good portraits of Dalton and Boyle which appear as the frontispieces to the two volumes. One or two manifest errors, such as ‘“‘ chloride” for “chlorate” at the bottom of page 117 of the first volume, and the formula ‘“‘ Mt,” for nitrogen given on page 32 of vol. ii., will no doubt be corrected in the next edition. It would be of advantage, too, if the “ equals” sign were printed in thicker type, as it would not then be confused with the expression of a dyad bond.— 7. MW. R. Introduction to Modern Scientific Chemistry. By Dr. LassArR-CoHNn. ‘Translated by Professor Patterson-Muir. viii + 348 pp., 73 in. x 5 in., with 58 figures. (London: H. Grevel & Co. 1901.) 6s. Dr. Lassar-Cohn is already known to the majority of English general readers through his ‘‘ Chemistry in Daily Life.” The present work will not appeal so directly to so large a class as did the former, yet none the less its educational value is sure to be considerable. As the author remarks in his pre- face, “‘the book can be followed easily by anyone who takes a serious interest in natural science,” while the younger of our teachers of chemistry will undoubtedly be aided by the presentment of the various branches which is here adopted. The only points calling for alteration are the illustra- tions, which could be vastly improved, and the outer cover rather belies the word ‘“ Modern.’—H. M. R. History of Chemistry. By Prof. LADENBURG. Translated by Dr. LEONARD DOBBIN. xiv +373 pp. (Edinburgh: The Alembic Club. 1900.) 6s. 6d. net. We are reminded by Professor Ladenburg of the earlier days of chemistry, when modern theories were in their infancy, old theories were “ dying hard,” and the discussions of questions were not carried on in so scientific a spirit as is usually met with in these days. Dr. Dobbin’s translation is good, while Professor Ladenburg’s remarks which wind up each chapter are valuable, and serve to broaden the interest that the reader has already begun to feel. The author's re- mark as to the priority in the discovery of oxygen, and his statement in this connection that ‘‘ Lavoisier repeatedly tried to appropriate to himself the merits of others,” are of great interest to Englishmen, whose claims on behalf of Priestley have not always been so openly acknowledged by our Continental fellow-workers.—/7. MW. R. SCIENCE-GOSSIP. CONDUCTED BY B. FOULKES-WINKS, M.R.P.5. EXPOSURE TABLE FOR MARCH. The figures in the following table are worked out for plates of about 100 Hurter & Driffield. For plates of lower speed number give more exposure in proportion. Thus plates of 50 H. & D. would require just double the exposure. In the same way, plates of a higher speed number will require proportionately less exposure. Time, 10 A.M. to 2 P.M. Between 9 and 10 A.M. and 2 and 3 P.M. double the required exposure. Between 8 and 9 A.M. and 3 and 4 P.M. multiply by 4. F.16) F.22|F,32 F.45|F.64 SUBJECT irpjpeeaie| \F.5°6) F. 8 | F.11 Sea and Sky.. | <35 | ato | xia | 60 au || as | 7 | | OpenLandscape } 1) 1 | a | a 1 it hon and Shipping ) {[ 220| Gt | $2 1 8 4 2a dark _ fore- | | ground, Street -3s | as 3 He Wa il 2 4 Scenes, and Groups Portraits in | Landscape,with | | | | | | | | | | Rooms ae \+ LightInteriors|} 4 | 8 | 16 | 32/ 1 | 2/ 4] 8 | | Dark Interiors | i! ne _ 1 4 2 4 | 8 | 16) 32 The small figures represent seconds, large figures minutes. The exposures are calculated for sunshine. If the weather is cloudy, increase the exposure by half as much again ; if gloomy, double the exposure. ROYAL PHOTOGRAPHIC SocrETY.—The annual general meeting was held on Tuesday, February 12th, at 66 Russell Square, London, when the result of the election of officers for the year was made known. Mr. Thomas R. Dallmeyer was elected President. The Vice-Presidents are the Right Hon. the Earl of Crawford, Messrs. Chap- man-Jones, J. W. Swan, and General Waterhouse ; Treasurer, G. Scamell; members of the Council, A. Cowan, T. Bolas, F. A. Bridge, E. J. Wall, J. A. Hodges, W. Thomas, J. Spiller, H. Snowden-Ward, G. B. Wellington, A. Mackie, J. W. Marchant, R. Meldola, J. A. Sinclair, E. 8. Shepherd, Rev. F. C. Lambert, H. V. Hyde, W. B. Ferguson, P. H. Emerson, T. Bedding, and C. H. Bothamley. The following gentlemen were also elected to act as judges in the Technical and Scientific Section of the Autumn Exhibition :—General Waterhouse, Messrs. Chapman-Jones and EK. J. Wall. The judges for the Pictorial Section will be Colonel Gale; Messrs. G. A. Storey, A.R.A., P. H. Emerson, J. B. Wellington, and F. M. Sutcliff. The Council is strong, and under its guidance the Society will doubtless make the same satisfactory progress it has done during the past year or two. We must, however, regret that Messrs. W. E. Debenham and J. J. Vezey are no longer on the 399 Council. ‘The meetings for March are :—5th. Lan- tern meeting, an illustrated lecture on ‘* Rome,” by Mr. W. B. Ferguson, K.C., M.A.; 12th, Dr. Harting will read a paper on “‘ Recent Rapid Lenses”; 19th, a paper by Mr. Chas. B. Howdill, A.R.1.B.A., entitled ‘“ Photographing Stained Glass by the three-colour Process”; 26th, ‘Some Improvements in Optical Projection,” by Mr. J. H. Agar-Baugh. PHOTOGRAPHIC DiARy.—We have just received a copy of Wellcome’s ‘ Photographic Exposure Record and Diary for 1901,” published by Messrs. 3urroughs, Wellcome & Co. It is produced in very attractive pocket-book form, and contains much useful information. Development with the different “Tabloid” developers is very fully treated in a thoroughly practical way, showing clearly the many advantages claimed for this method of development. We can speak from experience of the great convenience of this system of carrying the developer, &c., when on tour; also of the accuracy in the proportions of the various chemicals used. Amongst other information, there is a most useful series of “‘ Tables of Exposure,” dealing with light values, lens aperture, subject-matter, and plate speeds. ‘These are arranged ina manner somewhat similar to that at the beginning of this article. The section devoted to recording the number of plates exposed is neatly arranged with the fol- lowing headings: No. of Slide, Plate, Subject, Date, Time of Day, Light, Stop, and Exposure. There are also several pretty little illustrations as samples of subject-matter. We do not know of a more useful note-book and guide to exposure than this, and we would recommend all our photo- graphic friends to obtain a copy. HAMPSTEAD SCIENTIFIC Society. —In the spring of last year the Council of this Society authorised the formation of a photographic sec- tion. ‘The first Hon. Secretary of this section was Mr. F. Lubbock Jermyn, but as he has recently been obliged to retire, his place has been taken by Mr. Philip Joshua. Several indoor meetings have been held, when demonstrations have been given on photographic subjects. Mr. T. Manly gave a lecture in October on “ Ozotype,” the new printing process, and Mr. F. L. Jermyn one on the History of Photography. ‘wo outdoor excursions also took place—one to Tring and Ashridge, and the other on Hampstead Heath. ioe) _ ie} PHOTOGRAPHY FOR BEGINNERS. 3y B. FOULKES-WINKS, M.R.P.S. (Continued from page 278.) Section I. CAMERAS (continued). ViEW-FINDERS.—The camera should be fitted with properly adjusted view-finders, one to show the picture horizontally and one vertically. ‘There are three distinct makes of view-finders in general use, viz., the ground-glass finder, the “ Brilliant” or concave lens finder, and the “ Real Image Brilliant ” finder. Of the three patterns the ground-glass finder is the most perfect instrument, and can easily be made to give an absolutely correct representation of the picture, as it will be seen on the negative. Were it not for the difficulty of seeing the image on the ground glass in a bright light, it would be far and away the most perfect finder yet invented. It has, unfortunately, the very serious drawback that in certain lights it is almost impossible to see the picture in the finder. This, however, is over- come to some extent by sinking the finder in a kind of well, or by supplementing the finder with a rising hood, so as to prevent the light falling directly on to the ground glass. The concave-lens finder we do not recommend, as it is most difficult to judge the exact amount of picture embraced, or whether the same picture seen in the finder will be on the resulting negative. The cause of this is that the angle of view varies accord- ing to the distance of the eye from the finder, also the view included alters according to the position of the eye with regard to right and left. The third type of finder, viz., the ‘‘ Real> Image Brilliant,” if correctly made, is one that should embrace the advantages of both the former. It is constructed solely of convex lenses, and therefore gives a real image which is not movable, as is the case with the concave-lens finder. It is also very brilliant, and the picture can be seen in the brightest light. Those with three lenses can be so adjusted as to represent the angle of view of any particular lens. There are, however, many of these finders on the market which do not repre- sent the picture given by the lens with which they are sold, and are therefore very misleading. Under these circumstances we strongly recommend that the ground-glass finders should be selected, except where the triple convex-lens Brilliant finder can be secured, and can be relied upon as having been properly adjusted to represent the picture given by the lens upon the plate in conjunction with which it is to be used. FOLDING PockET CAMERAS.—The No. 3 Folding Pocket Kodak shown on page 277 is for 3} x 44 rollable films—that is, the ordinary plate size. It will take spools of 12, 6, or 2 exposures; measures only 13x 43x72; weight. 22 ounces. It is fitted with a five-inch rapid rectilinear lens, Brilliant finder, and focussing arrangement; has three stops, working at about F. 8, F.11,and F.16. The whole camera is covered in black leather, with nickel bright parts. The shutter is an ever-set one, giving both time and instantaneous exposure. A very similar camera, but with single lens, is made in the following sizes: 3} x 24, 34x 34, and 44x 232. Any of these cameras, when folded, can easily be carried in the pocket. The No. 2 “ Bullet Kodak” (See p. 277, ante) is a fair type of the box fcrm of hand-camera for roll- SCIENCE-GOSSIP. able films. The one illustrated is for taking pictures 33 x 33; it can also be adapted for taking plates 3+ 3%, if this is desired All that is necessary is to procure some double-plate holders, made for this purpose by the Kodak Company. The camera is fitted with time and instantaneous shutter, and single achromatic lens of 43-in. focus with three stops. This camera is made in two qualities, and also in 5 x 4 size, the. best quality of which is fitted with rapid rectilinear lens, iris diaphragms, time and instantaneous shutter, also rackwork focussing arrangement. It has two Brilliant finders, and can be used either for roll- able films or plates. There is also the folding “ Cartridge Kodak,” of a slightly different type of camera, although built very much upon the same lines, but better finished anda more complete instru- ment. The No. 3is for pictures 34 x 4}; the No.4 is for pictures 4 x 5;and the No. 5 for 7 x 5 pictures. These are all fitted with best rapid rectilinear lens, time and instantaneous shutter, iris diaphragms, rising, falling, and sliding fronts, two finders, rack focussing, and socket for tripod screw. ‘They are very compact, and most suitable for carrying on a bicycle. The ‘Cartridge Kodak” can be fitted with a wide angle lens if required. This will be found a very useful addition, and should always be carried. The other makes of cameras of this firm are the ‘“‘ Panoram”:-—No. 1, for panoramic pictures 7 x 24, capacity six exposures; No. 4, for panoramic pictures 12 x 33, capacity five exposures. The No. 3 and No. 4 Zenith Cameras; the No. 3is for +-plate pictures, and the No. 4 is for pictures 5x 4. We show an illustration of the No. 1 ‘‘ Panoram Kodak” for pictures 7 in.x 2% in. It will be understood from this measurement that the size of No. 1 “PANORAM KODAK.” the picture renders this camera exceedingly useful for such subjects as river scenery and open land- scapes ; also for very open street views, such as public buildings, squares, etc. The twelve-exposure spool made for the “ No. 1 Folding Pocket Kodak ” is used for this camera, which will give six ex- posures just double the size of the F.P.K. picture. The exposures are made by the lens rapidly moving across the field of view, thus acting as the shutter with which two speeds can be given. The firm also make a Cartridge Film Roll Holder which can be easily fitted to almost any existing camera without interfering with the camera or plate-holders. It carries a spool of film sufficient for twelve exposures, and forms a very useful addition to any camera to which it can be fitted. They are made in vertical and horizontal forms; the Vertical Roll Holder is the one that is usually adapted to field cameras and most hand-cameras ; but for some forms of hand-cameras, such as the “Zenith,” the horizontal will be found the more convenient. The prices of ** Kodaks” range from 5s. to £7 Ts. ee SCIENCE-GOSSIP. can 4 Oy eed As We have to express our thanks to Mr. Harold M. Read for having undertaken in this volume the honorary departmental editing of the subject of Chemistry. Mr. Read now retires in con- sequence of his professional work fulty occupy- ing his time. We are pleased to announce that Mr. C. Ainsworth Mitchell, B.A. (Oxon.), F-.I.C., F.C.S., Member of Council, Soc. of Public Analysts, has kindly undertaken the duties of Honorary Departmental Editor for this section, and will commence his duties with the April number. CAPTAIN ABNEY’s invention of an apparatus for measuring the luminosity of colours will probably have an important effect on the progress of photo- graphy in colours. The result is attained by rotat- ing cliscs. “THE theory, founded upon researches on the ocean floor during the ‘‘Challenger” expedition, that chalk is absent in great depths has been dis- turbed through the discovery by the Prince of Monaco of calcareous mud at soundings of 600 to 3,000 fathoms, or 18,000 feet below the surface. ARRANGEMENTS are being made for creating another National Park in North America. The district chosen is of great anthropological interest, being the region of New Mexico so rich in Com- munal dwellings and their remains. One of these groups is said to contain no less than fifteen hundred rooms. WE would draw attention to the greatly im- proved tone of the ‘* Entomologist’s Record.” The two last numbers are most interesting to those who study entomology. The January number contains a masterly summary by various writers on the entomological work of the past century. It is notable that the science of entomology has been raised from one subject to sneers, to a place among the most scientific of studies. THE Provisional International Committee ap- pointed at the Conference held in London in June, 1900, to undertake the preliminary work of publish- ing a complete catalogue of all the scientific literature of the world has recently issued its report. It is proposed that the annual cost of a set of seventeen volumes shall be £17. Several countries have already subscribed for sets on this basis. The United States of America takes sixty- eight copies. M. ADOLPHE CHATIN, the well-known French botanist, died on January 13th at Essarts-le-Roi, near Rambouillet. His contributions to science have been of great value in helping to revive the study of plant anatomy, which now occupies an important position as a factor in the evolution of a natural system of plant classification. M. Chatin did not, however, confine himself to the study of botany. He published papers on the results of some important investigations, espe- cially on the occurrence of iodine in air and water. 31! HASLEMERE has been selected for the next annual congress of the South-Eastern Union of Scientific Societies, which will take place in the first week in June. Proressor P. G. TAIT, author of “The Unseen Universe” and one of the founders of the meteoric hypothesis in astronomy, has been for sometime past engaged on a biography of his friend Lord Kelvin. Professor Tait is retiring from the Chair of Natural Philosophy in Edinburgh University, so will have greater leisure for extending his general scientific work and conducting his literary labours. LEPIDOPTEROLOGY is the poorer by the loss through death, after a long and painful illness, of Herbert Williams of Southend-on-Sea. He was a painstaking investigator, and successful in rearing British butterflies through all their stages. At one period he was honorary secretary to the South London Entomological Society. Mr. Williams was only 32 years of age when he died, on January 5th. WE have received a copy of the ‘‘ Natural Science Gazette” or Journal of the Streatham Science So- ciety. It is a remarkable literary production, edited by Mr. Fred. G. Palmer, being all in that gentleman’s handwriting. The cover is illustrated also by his pen. The amount of work necessary to produce each number must be indeed great, and shows much enthusiasm on the part of the Society and its editor. THE last meeting of the Entomological Club was held on January 15th at the Holborn Restaurant, Mr. G. H. Verrall being in the chair. Mr. Verrall, who was then President of the Ento- mological Society of London, afterwards enter- tained some sixty or so of the leading ento- mologists of this country at supper. These charming meetings, when at Mr. Verrall’s invita- tion, are too well known to describe; but it ought to be stated that they are among the most valuable and pleasant factors that at present exist for encouraging entomology. THE eminent European entomologist, Baron Michel Edmond de Selys-Longchamps, was born May 25th, 1813, in Paris, and died in December last, at his son’s house at Liége, where he was visiting. His literary productions were consider- able, a list of over 250 articles having been printed. His chief work was among the neuroptera and orthoptera, though other subjects relating to birds, mammals, fishes, and reptiles were also considered, as well as scientific agriculture. He was an hono- rary member of many of the societies devoted to natural science throughout the continent of Hurepe. AMERICAN women are becoming recognised as workers at the biological laboratories of Europe and the United States of America. In the latter country a society of considerable importance exists for maintaining women at the zoological stations of Naples and Woods Hall, also for encouraging ladies to conduct scientific research. The associa- tion offers a prize of $1,000 or over £200 for the best thesis presented by a woman on a scientific subject, embodying the results of her independent laboratory research, in any branch of biological, chemical, or physical science. It must be in the hands of the secretary before December 31st, 1902, who is Florence M. Cushing, 8 Walnut Street. Boston, Mass. Biz Proressor G. H. Bryan. F.R.S., has been awarded a gold medal for his paper, read last year before the Institution of Naval Architects, upon * Biloe Keels.” THE extensive museum of curiosities and natural science exhibits, with the building containing them and surrounding ground, near Forest Hill, in the southern suburbs of London. formed by Mr. Frederick John Horniman, M.P., has been pre- sented by him to the London County Council, with other property as an endowment. On January 21st there died Elisha Gray, the eminent American electrician, who succumbed to heart disease. He was inventor of the telephone, electro-harmonic telegraphy and telautography, also lately renowned for researches on submarine signalling by sound. Elisha Gray was a self- educated man. and originally a working engineer: AT a meeting of the Royal Meteorological Society. held on February 20th, Mr. E. Mawley presented his report on the phenological observa- tions for 1900. During the greater part of the winter and spring the “weather proved cold and sunless, but in the summer and autumn the temperature was as arule high. and there was an unusually good record of bright sunshine. As affecting vegetation, the two most noteworthy fea- tures of the phenological year ending November 1900 were the cold, dry, and gloomy character of the spring months and the great heat and drought in July. Throughout the whole of the flowering season wild plants came into blossom much behind their average dates; indeed, later than in any year since 1891. Spring migrants, such as swallows. cuckoos, and nightingales. were also later than usual in visiting these shores. THE Fifth International Congress of Zoo- logy will be held in Berlin in August of this year, the opening meeting being on the 12th of that month. Professor Dr. K. Mobius will be President, and Professor Dr. F. E. Schulze repre- sentative of the President. The following are the names of some of those who have undertaken to give addresses at the general meetings :—Professor Dr. W. Branco, of Berlin; Professor Dr. O. Butschli, of Heidelberg; and Professor Dr. A. Forel, cf Morges; Professor Dr. Yves Delage, of Paris, who will read a paper on ‘“‘ The Theories of Fertilisa- tion”: Professor Dr. G. B. Grassi will contribute one on ‘*‘ The Malaria Problem from the Zoological Standpoint”; and Professor Dr. E. Poulton, of Oxford, on ‘‘ Observations in Mimicry and Natural Selection.” Those interested in zoology may be- come members of the Congress by paying twenty inarks, or one pound sterling, which will also in- clude a report of the Session. Ladies visiting in the company of a member may become Associates on the payment of ten marks, which will entitle them to attend all the meetings and receptions. Applications tor tickets should be addressed to Praesidium des V International Zoologen-Congresses, 43 Invaliden- strasse, Berlin N. 4. The programme as at present arranged includes visits to many places of interest in Berlin and elsewhere, among others to the Zoological Museums and Institute, the Geological- Palaeontological Mining and Metallurgy, Patho- logical, Botanical and “Ethnographical ” Museums, the two Anatomical Institutes, the Botanical and Zoological Gardens, and the Treptow Observatory. Excursions will also be made to Potsdam, Ham- burg, Heligoland ete. SCIENCE-GOSSTIP. THE astronomical observatory of Seeberg, near Gotha, was destroyed by fire on February 19th. This institution was known for the work done there by the astronomers Encke, Zach, and Lin- denau. THE study of the rotifera appears to be ex- tending. We notice that Mr. Abraham Flatters, of Longsight, Manchester, is issuing, by request of students of the group, a series of photographs of species that have been described since the publication of the great work by Hudson and Goss on these interesting animals. The price appears to be exceedingly low. ABOUT twenty leading Australian ornithologists dined in Melbourne a short time ago under the appro- priate chairmanship of Dr. Charles Ryan, ‘‘ Consul for Turkey.” After disposing of the main business of the evening, which was an appreciation of Mr. D. le Souéf, assistant director of the Zoological Gardens of that city, it was proposed to form an Australian Union of Ornithologists, with the hope of possessing its own organ. to be entitled “ The Emu.” A committee was formed for carrying out the proposal. For some time past most sensational paragraphs have appeared in American and some European newspapers with regard to the effect of the use in large quantities of common salt by human beings for the sake of health and longevity. These theories were attributed to some extent to Professor Jaques Lobb, of Chicago University Laboratories. It is needless to say he has denied the story, which was hardly necessary ; for, as he himself says, no one there takes any notice of “science” in American newspapers. We fear, in some instances, the same may be said of some of those in this country. WE have received intimation that a proposed scientific expedition will leave Boston, U.S.A., on June 26th and return in September. It is under the auspices of the Harvard University, but par- takes of a public character, as any person with slight scientific knowledge may join on payment of $500; half on application before March 15th, and the rest by June 1st next. The steamer will visit Labrador, Greenland, and Iceland, and opportunity will occur for about three weeks’ hunting on shore in Labrador and Greenland. Explanatory lectures will be given by the leader of the expedition. Applications for membership are to be made to Mr. R. A. Daly, Department of Geology, Harvard University, U.S.A. WE may mention that we have received a copy ot the ‘“ British Weather Chart, 1901,” by B. G. Jenkins, F.R.A.S., being the fifteenth year of publication. By this chart we are to understand approximately the kind of weather to be expected during the coming twelve months. The author claims that his forecasts are based on some “important features resulting from a lengthy investigation as to the variation of actual baro- metric and thermometric readings from those predicted by calculation.” Also, that “as the weight of evidence appears to indicate that the barometric movements of the atmosphere are, as a rule, about four days later than the corresponding thermometric.” Mr. Jenkins’ forecasts have been revised accordingly. We would suggest that, as the chart only costs 64d., post free, our readers interested in meteorology should obtain a copy and study it for themselves. It may be had from R. Morgan, 65 Westow Street, Upper Norwood, S.E. SCIENCE-GOSSIP. Tk = aw A KH A CONDUCTED BY F. SHILLINGTON SCALES, F.R.M.S5. RoyaL MIcROscoPIcAL SociETy.—Annual meet- ing, January 16th, 1901, William Carruthers, Esq., F.R.S., President, in the chair. Mr. Hugh M. Leake exhibited a new form of rocking microtome, designed to cut perfectly flat sections. Dr. Hebb said it seemed to remedy certain defects of the ordinary rocking microtomes, it appeared to be easily manipulated, and was very stable and solid in construction. The President said Mr. Leake had taken great pains to bring this instrument to perfection, and it appeared to be very efficient. Dr. Hebb read the report of the Council for the year 1900, and Mr. Vezey, the treasurer, read the annual statement of accounts and balance-sheet. The President announced that the whole of the Fellows nominated for Officers and Council had been duly elected, and expressed his thanks to the Fellows of the Society for again placing him in the position which he had occupied during the past year. He congratulated the Society upon the improved conditions indicated in the report. The library had been gone through carefully, and much that was useless was eliminated. Their thanks were due to Mr. Radley for the great pains he had taken in preparing the card catalogue. Their col- lection of instruments had also been put into excellent order. He congratulated the Fellows upon the state of their funds. The President then read the Annual Address, which consisted chiefly of an interesting epitome of the life and work of John Ellis—known in his time as ‘Coralline Ellis.” Mr. A. D. Michael in asking the Fellows to give their thanks to the President for his Address, said he had unearthed one of those attractive bye-paths of science which, when brought to light, so often proved to contain lessons that all might learn with advantage. Ellis, originally attracted by the pic- turesque side of the subject, was gradually drawn on toward the scientific, and then endeavoured to turn that scientific knowledge to the benefit of the human race. There was no field of research more enticing than that border-land which lies between the animal and vegetable kingdoms, and the steps by which the existing knowledge on this subject had been acquired were of the greatest interest. From the growth of knowledge the gap between the lowly hydrozoa and the highly-organised polyzoa seemed a wide one, but the keen insight into Nature shown by the man or men who first appreciated the differences between these very similar groups of creatures went far to show how great an observer Ellis really was. PosraL MICROSCOPICAL Sociery.—The annual report of this Society has reached us. It contains the report of the Hon. Secretary, Miss Florence Phillips, of Hafod Euryn, Colwyn Bay, the financial report, rules of the Society, and list of members. The Secretary's report contains a reference to the late Mr. Alfred Allen, of Bath, to whom the Society owed so much from its first inception, and alludes B23 to the new step in advance taken by the Society's recent connection with ScleNcE-GossiP, which now regularly publishes excerpts from the note- books circulated by the members as accompaniment to their boxes of slides. The President for the year is Sir Thomas Wardle. ‘The balance-sheet shows a satisfactory financial position, but we could wish to see the number of members largely increased. ‘There must be many of the readers of this journal who could both receive help from and give help to a Society such as this, and though we are glad to know that several of our readers have recently joined we cannot help thinking that others are deterred by a too modest consciousness of their own shortcomings. Briefly put, the method of working is to divide the members into circuits of six members and the secretary, and to circulate amongst each circuit boxes of slides accompanied with descriptive notes, elaborate or simple, original or gathered from others, as the owner’s knowledge warrants. Each member provides twelve slides per annum, and the notes for them. The slides are not always original. At the end of their travels the books and slides belong to the original owner, and the former are generally enriched by the notes and queries of the other members of the circuit. No attempt whatsoever is made at fine writing or description. or at pedantry. The Society exists solely to help and encourage, and the present writer can say frankly that in all his examination of the books incidental to the work of making the necessary selections likely to interest the readers of this journal he has not come across a single un- pleasant remark or discouragement of a beginner. We make this observation thinking that there may be amateur microscopists who are deterred by some such thought from joining a Society which could help them in so many ways. The annual subscription is so small as to be within the reach of all. FORMALIN AND ALCOHOL AS PRESERVATIVES FOR ZOOLOGICAL SPECIMENS.—The Journal of the R.M.S. briefly alludes to a discussion by Mr. J. Hornell, the well-known preparer of slides of marine zoology, as to the respective values of formalin and alcohol as preservatives for museum specimens. Mr. Hornell expresses the opinion that the best effects of formalin are seen with Medusae and Tunicata, and says that most animals should be mounted in formalin-alcohol after previous fixation. For some animals which contain lime salts, such as echinoderms and crustaceans, formalin is un- suitable, as it slowly decalcifies them and renders them very brittle. In collecting trips formalin is more useful than alcohol, as in its concentrated form it does not occupy so much space, and is, therefore, more easily stowed. In microscopical technique, maceration of the objects, sections, etc., may be obviated by the use of a two per cent. solu- tion, either as an addition to staining solutions, or to replace pure water in washing out fixatives. FORMALDEHYDE AS A KILLING AND FIXING AGENT.—Formalin, formic aldehyde, or formal- dehyde, which are all practically the same thing, are now so generally used for killing, fixing, and preserving that the following formula, as used by Prof. T. P. Carter for killing and fixing, and given by him inthe American Monthly Microscopical Journal, may be of service to some of our readers. It is as follows: Formaldehyde, 40 per cent. solution, 50 cem.; distilled water. 50 cem.; glacial acetic acid, 5 ccm. By this solution tissues are killed and 314 fixed in from six to twelve hours, but the immersion may be continued for twenty-four hours without damage. ‘The pieces are then transferred to 50 per cent. alcohol for one hour, and afterwards to 75 per cent. and 95 per cent. alcohol for half an hour each. NEW ;5-INCH IMMERSION OBJECTIVE.—Messrs. Watson & Sons have sent us for inspection a new ¢s-inch oil-immersion objective of their ordinary or ““Parachromatic” series. The aperture is only moderate, i.e. 1:10 N.A., but this is no disadvantage for ordinary work, whilst it enables the cost of the objective to be proportionately reduced. The lens submitted to us was an early one, but we can speak highly of its performance. It was unusually flat in the field, its definition was excellent, andit bore high eye-pieceing well. The corrections were for the short tube-length. The cost of the objective is only £4. New MACERATION MEDIUM FOR VEGETABLE TissuE.—Herr O. Richter finds that strong am- monia will macerate vegetable tissue without injury to the cell contents, such as starch and aleurone grains, chlorophyll granules. ete. The fluid was used boiling, cold, and at a temperature of about 40° C. The rapidity of the maceration depends on the temperature. [For further articles on Microscopic subjects see pp. 294, 296, 303 and 305 in this number.— ED. Microscopy. 8.-G.] ANSWERS TO CORRESPONDENTS. W. D. N. (Kirkcaldy).—The condenser you allude to at 17s. 6d. is an optical part only, and would cost 32s. 6d. with mount complete. The other condenser is, I think. complete, and being made by the maker of your instrument would be preferable. I believe I answered some queries on this matter on a previous occasion. A camera lucida is used at a distance of 10 inches from the table, because that is the normal visual distance : but if the image is too large you can reduce this distance, or preferably you can use a lower power objective. It is not easy for me to advise you as to a course of work, but I sympathise with your desire to devote your time and your microscope to more definite study. As you take an interest in botany I think you could not do better for a beginning than obtain a book on practical botany and work steadily through it, say Strasburger and Hillhouse’s ** Practical Botany,” published by Swan Sonnenschein at 10s. 6d. A new edition has recently been issued, or you could pick up a cheap second-hand copy in the booksellers’ shops in Lothian Street and George IV. Bridge, Edinburgh, for about half this amount. Try. for instance. William Bryce, 54 Lothian Street. This book is eminently practical, and contains clear elementary instructions on the use of the microscope and mount- ing; so would serve admirably. If you were to work through such a book, mounting your slides as you went on, you would gain a knowledge of botany and provide yourself with an occupation that would never weary. but lead you on to further interests. It is a mistake, too, to suppose that botany cannot be pursued in winter. It is equally a mistake to idly examine many diverse things, with no aim or object in view. VY. T. (Chorley).—Of the specimens of pond life which you send me, No. 1 is a Turbellarian worm, SCIENCE-GOSSI/P. a Planarian. ‘he green forms to which you allude are possibly Vorter viridis; No. 2 is a young leech; No. 3 isa larva of one of the Nemocera, pro- bably Yanypus maculatus; No. 4 is a polychaete annelid in an immature stage. For Nos. 1, 2, and 4 the readiest book of reference would perhaps be the ‘‘ Cambridge Natural History,” vol. ii., and for No. 3 the same work, vol. vi., pp. 468-9, or Prof. Mialls «Natural History of Aquatic Insects.” You could refer also for No. 1 to the * Encyclo- pedia Britannica” article * Planarians.” EXTRACTS FROM POSTAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY'S NOTEBOOKS. [| These extracts were commenced in the Septem- ber number at page 119. Beyond necessary editorial revision, they are printed as written by the various members. - ED. Microscopy, 8.-G.] NOTES BY JOHN T. NEEVE. MARINE ALGAE.—Odonthalia dentata (fig. 1). with tetraspores: this species is found on Fic. 1. Odonthalia dentata with tetraspores. Scottish coasts, and does not occur south of Berwick, except occasionally as a derelict cast up on the shore. I have not found it myself, but have received a few specimens from Arbroath, where it grows in abundance. The frond, as its name indicates, is tooth-branched and of a deep- red colour, from four to twelve inches high. Rhodomela subfusca (fig. 2), with tetraspores: this plant is abundant with us in the south, and is often cast up on shore after a storm. The fronds are filamentous, rather brown in colour, drying to a black and uninteresting specimen; but the SCIENCE-GOSSTP. 315 reproductive organs are beautiful, the tetraspores, like the preceding species, bearing a hand-like resemblance. ‘They are found thus only in winter. Harveyilla mirabilis (fig. 3): this tiny plant grows on the previous species in the form of a very minute globose body, looking to the naked eye nny eae Dl Har 1D) 11 Pb Hd Segre i) Vail Fp “4 ed. Mf gf tM) AIAG AS Fie. 3. Harveyilla mirabilis. like a fruit of its host. I have observed it in various stages of growth, and have found all three reproductive organs. he larger plants prove only to be vegetative after having fulfilled their pro- pagation. Certain sections in the slide show tetra- spores. The larger cells are part of the filament of the host. Bryopsis plumosa belongs to the Fic. 4. Polusiphonia nigrescens. Chlorosperms, or green sea-weeds, and is an object of great beauty when seen in the tide pools, looking like minute green feathers. Reproduction is by the direct change of the endochrome into zoospores. Polysiphonia nigrescens (tig. 4), P. atro-rubescens (fig. 5), and P. brodiaci (fig. 6), are three species of a very interesting order of sea-weeds, which I have put in to show the structure of the so-called siphons. [These would be only shown in a cross- section of stem; see Mrs. Major’s note. —Ep. Micro- scopy, 5.-G.] In P. nigrescens and P. atro-riuhescens tetraspores are seen, whilst P.brodiaci has beautiful urn-shaped cystocarps. Callithamnion corymbosum does not occur on our coast at Deal, but is found : Fie. 5. P. atro-rubescens. on the Devon and Cornish coasts, and is a most beautiful microscopic object. Delesseria sanguinea (fig. 7): having found the reproductive organs this winter, Iam sending them in as fresh a state as possible. I am of opinion that another mode of reproduction exists, as I have found old plants with young fronds as perfect as their parent fronds were when in their summer beauty. REMARKS.—I must apologise for having kept the box past the allotted time ; but these special series are of exceptional interest to me, and the system is well worthy of imitation. In the specimens re- ferred to, will be remarked the special inclination of the marine algae for the tetraspore or vegeta- tive form of reproduction. When one considers the vast volume of the surrounding water one cannot help marvelling at the immense numbers of Zr So ——E Fic. 6. P. brodiae?. antherozoids, or better pollinoids, which must be produced in order to: keep up the intermittent sexual generation. Probably many millions of pollinoids are wasted for every one that fulfils its life’s object, whilst every tetraspore that is cle- tached has a jgood chance of becoming a perfect 316 plant—provided, of course, that it escapes the clutches of the more highly-organised inhabitants of the ocean. —Thomas S. Beardsmore. I wish I could be as successful in preserving the colour of my sea-weeds as Mr. Neeve has been. He has a great advantage in living near the sea, and thus being able to mount his specimens in fresh condition, whereas mine have always been kept some time before mounting. I cannot find Harveyilla mirabilisin Harvey’s “* Phycologia,” and should like to know to which class it belongs. I suppose it has been added to the list of marine flora since that book was published. I would suggest that these beautiful slides deserve a better finish, and I trust Mr. Neeve will forgive me for making the following suggestions: i.e. the first coat of the ring should be of brown varnish or thick gold size, to secure the cover-glass, and the white zine cement used is too thin. The mounting mediumappears to be glycerine jelly.—T. A. Skelton. The forms of fructification of marine algae are well exhibited in these slides, and are worthy of careful examination. I hope Mr. Neeve may con- tribute a further series upon this subject. Miss Phillips isto be congratulated upon her very suc- cessful illustrations. ‘To draw microscopical pre- parations is excellent practice, as it helps, more than any other method, to fix in one’s mind the characters and minute differences which exist between allied species. I have added a small Fic. 7. Delesseria in winter. drawing (fig. 7) from a well-known illustration of the naked-eye appearance of Delesseria in the winter. It may be of service to members not having such an illustration in helping them to understand from whence the leafy sporophylls which are shown in the slides are obtained. The branches are the midribs of fronds from which the membranous part has decayed or fallen away. These midribs are clothed with tufts of the sporo- phylls or leafy lobes containing the tetraspores. I should have liked to have added some illustra- tions of Callithamnion, but feared to detain the slides. This slide is a very pretty one, and shows well the branched feathery fronds composed of a single row of tubular cells. Tetraspores arranged in berry-like receptacles and having lateral attach- ments to the branches (ramuli) may be well made out with a }-inch or 2-inch objective. Antheridia may also be observed —J. R. L. Dixon, MR.CS., LG THOS There are beautiful figures of sections of Poly- siphonia polymorpha in Sowerby’s “English Botany,” showing the “siphons” alluded to.—F.. C. Major. [We do not think the foregoing notes call for any particular editorial comment. Figs. 1 to 6 are by Miss Florence Phillips ; fig. 7 is by Dr. J. R. L. Dixon.—ED. Microscopy, 8.-G. ] SCIENCE-GOSSTP. LARVA OF PIERIS RAPAE IN JANUARY.—On the 21st of January last I found a half-grown larva of this species at rest in our garden. Mr. Barrett mentions in his “ British Lepidoptera” that ‘the larva has been found feeding even into December, but always passes the latter part of the winter in the pupa state.” Ido not recollect any record of a partly-fed larva so late in the winter as this.— 1. H. Mead-Briggs, Rock House, Lynmouth. WOODPECKER FEEDING ON GROUND.—Whilst watching on December 16th last the movements of a pair of woodpeckers (Gecinus viridis Lin.) on Wimbledon Common, near London, a friend and I were surprised to see one of the birds settle on the ground. There it searched for worms and insects, and we observed it consuming some of each. Presumably the bark of the trees did not yield sufficient food, so the bird was forced to thus deviate from its usual arboreal habits.—John E. S. Dallas, 19 Ulwerscroft Road, East Dulwich, SL. SPARROWS IN FRostT.—On a shady piece of gravel walk hard with frost I noticed half a dozen sparrows, both males and females, apparently try- ing hard to get a dust bath. They opened their wing's, pressed their bodies close to the ground, and shuffled along like creeping mice for about six or eight inches at a time; then, getting up, shook themselves, frequently repeating the process. I thought for a moment that it might be a sort of love-dance, but the cocks and hens were equally engaged, and I saw nothing to indicate that it was more than an attempt at a bath; but as there was certainly no dust, one would think it must have been an unsatisfactory performance—f. 7. Mott, Birstal Hill, Leicester, Keb. 1901. NATURE PICTURES OF LEPIDOPTERA.— Refer- ring to the last June number of SCIENCE-GOSSIP (p. 32), in which Mr. Verity asked about impres- sions of butterflies’ wings, I recently came across the following extract from “The Home Naturalist”: “Spread a thick solution of gum arabic over a sheet of fine paper, so that it readily adheres to the finger. Take off the wings of a dead butterfly and lay them carefully on the gummed paper, spread out as in the act of flying. Place another sheet of paper over the wings, andrub them gently with the finger, or the smooth handle of a knife. The wings” (? impressions) ‘ will then be left on the paper. Afterwards draw the form of the body, with the head and antennae in the space between the wings.” Another way I have seen is to gum some tissue paper all over, and also gum the page of the book, or sheet of paper, whichever one may use, placing the wings on the latter and putting the former over them. This has the disadvantage, however, of making the book bulky, as the wings are left in; and also of not being able to see the colours as brightly as one could wish, because, however fine the tissue and clear the gum, there is always a deadening effect on the colours.—/. 1. Wright, 18 Chorley Old Road, Bolton. SCIENCE-GOSSIP. ASTRONOMY, wah CONDUCTED BY F. C. DENNETT. Position at Noon. 1901 Rises. Sets. RA. Dec. Mar. hm. him. hem. Bow Sun .. 6 .. 6.38 am... 5.46 p.m. .. 23.6 5.49 S. 16 .. 6.14 a.m... 6.4 p.m... 23.42... 1.64 S. A oo BYE) Bam oo CDi Go WHE) 56 Phat INT Rises. Souths. Sels. Age at Noon. - Mar him. hm. hem. d. hm. Yoon 6 7.31 p.m. .. 0.338 am... 63lam... 15 9.15 = 5 WG 55 BHO Em oo BIS pam 66 Halen oo 26) EbItb) 5 23.7 26 .. 9.36 am... 5.45 p.m. M0) Barns So 3. Position at Noon. Souths. Semi- R.A. Dec. Mar hm. diameter. h.m. on Mercury... .. 6 .. O15 pm... 5:3 .. 23.9 1.30 S. NG oo Wiley Bat, oo GRY 95 BREAD os IIIS, 26 .. 10.32 a.m. .. 4:4” .. 22:45 .. 8.188. WEDS oo 56 @ 65 We eam 55 SAY og PREIS oo PAID ISS WG oo TUS egims oo | GAY oq PR oa HOTS, 26 .. 11.85 am... 5:0” .. 23.47 .. 2.568. WEIS 59 90 @ oo Iba RR RG GY! Go WOKS a5 WD) ING UA G5 MOP ion GE BE GG AEE INS FB oo She¥bioas ca BOY oo OES oo MGS ING SUPIUETE rer ale) LO) eeteey Molilura Weipa LOO s en hG.4oi ee 22.ollN SS. SVT 55 oo WS 20 BR Bae nn REY 65) IGS a5 PPA} Se OTROS 35 bo WG Gm GeBhO) Glam 54 IY Be i} G5 PRS) IS WADI no 56 WG 65 COMO faeng gg TIE og GREY Go PPP) NG Moon’s PHASES. him. him. Full =) Mar oe.) 8:4 asm.) 37d) O75 Mari 3) 2) 16) p:ms New AW 5g 6 OB DN, IG OR 4, SH on GheO) Ban. In apogee March 9th at 10 a.m.; and in perigee on 2lst at 10 a.m. METEORS. hm. © Mar. 1 ¢. (« Persei) Radiant R.A. 3.10 Dec. 45 Ne 1-4 -. 7 Leonids = e 11.4 Le 5 N. 1-28 .. «Cepheids 35 Be 203 2 EL ODN: 11 to May 31 Draconids <5 as WA 55, GAO) INa 14 -. (v Virginis) - 2 4 Oe OPN 24 -. £B Ursids 2 a 10.44 ,, S8N. 27 (» Cor. Bor.) ., 5 WBA ~ go SOW, 28 * (26 Draconis) oF UGB pg, OPN CONJUNCTIONS OF PLANETS WITH THE Moon. Os, Mar. 4 Mars*+ -» lO am. .. Planet 9.53 N. » 14 Jupitert 50 MIE yh,” 56 x ote) Sb 9 BY 5 -. Saturn* so SBT An a BHA ISS ay IB) o Mereury* 6am. .. 7” 3.47 S. » L9 Venus} > Hil pM Ge Os olese ol -. Mars -. 3am. > 906 N. * Daylight. + Below English horizon. OCCULTATIONS, AND NEAR APPROACH. ‘ Angle Angle Magni- Dis- trom Re- From Mar. Star. tude. appears. Vertex. appears. Vertex. him. S hm. 2 2-3 -- eCancri 5°0 ..1046p.m... 116 .. 0.3 25 ..d Tauri bYby Go VRPT, oo 1 6A 26 ..71 Orionis - 571 ..11.11 p.m. .. 150 am... 267 7.42 p.m .. 245 .. Near approach. THE SUN now appears in a very quiescent state, but observation should not be relaxed. Spring is said to commence at 7 a.m. on March 21st, when the Sun crosses the equator and enters sign Aries. STs MerrcurRY is in inferior conjunction with the Sun at 3 p.m..on March 7th, after which it be- comes a morning star, but is poorly placed for observation. VENUS too near the Sun for observation. Mars in Leo is well placed for observation all night, but its diameter is only 13°8’ at the be- ginning, decreasing to 11°6’ at the end of the month. JUPITER and SATURN are near together, in Sagittarius, both morning stars rising in the south- east about three hours before sunrise. URANUS is at a similar low declination, preceding Saturn by about two hours. NEPTUNE must be looked for early in the evening, as it is on the meridian at sunset near the middle of the month. ComMET ¢ 1900 was only visible with quite large telescopes on favourable occasions, its faint nucleus being less than twelfth magnitude. It must have passed its perihelion on December 3rd, 91,000,000 miles from the Sun. Its orbit is elliptical, and its period about seven years. New Minor PLANEtSs.—Already five have been discovered this century by Professor Max Wolf of Heidelberg, on January 9th, 16th, 17th, and 18th. Herr Carnera was assisting on the 17th at the time of the discovery. There is thought to be a mistake about those reported to have been discovered by Professor W. R. Brooks. Two new variable stars have been discovered by Mr. R. T. A. Innes at the Cape Observatory, to be called 24,1900, Arae, and 25.1900, Octantis. The former is remarkable for the shortness of its period, which amounts to only 0% 3115, or 7 h. 28m. 34s. ; its magnitude changes from 8-9 to 9°75. The magnitude of the latter varies between 77 and 10:3. THE GOLD MEDAL of the Royal Astronomical Society was this year awarded to Professor E. C. Pickering, of Harvard College Observatory. and presented to the American Ambassador. Mr. Choate, on behalf of the recipient, at the annual general meeting at Burlington House on Feb- ruary 8th. Moon’s PAtH.—There are some phenomena connected with the earth and moon which, as popularly understood, are not correct, and with the favour of your permission are therefore open to discussion. The moon does not describe a circular path in revolving round the earth, but an irregular zig-zag track; and, in consequence, this irregular movement is at variance with the law affecting the inertia of matter. The earth, in its annual circuit round the sun, has in round numbers a daily course of about 2,000,000 miles, and the moon has a daily course of about 56,000 miles round the earth. Now at full moon the moon is carried forward in space the sum of these two velocities, while during the last quarter it is propelled in front of the earth’s path 2,000,000 miles a day, and has at the same time a lateral motion of its own of 56,000 miles a day. Again, at new moon its direction is changed, and has now a retrograde motion of 2,000,000 miles a day, less its own circuit motion of 56,000 miles. If a line be traced showing the path of the moon in its orbit round the earth, it will be seen to be a zig-zag course. The only force of which we know connecting the moon to the earth is the force of gravity, which acts in a straight 318 line between their centres. What explanation can be given of the fact of the moon being impelled at an enormous speed in front of the earth’s path against the force of gravity?—John Clark, Birmingham. THE real daily motions of the earth and moon are about 1,600,000 miles and 55,000 miles re- spectively. Mr. Clark’s difficulty seems to me met by the fact that we must not regard the path round the sun as that of the earth, but as that of the earth and moon. The true orbit of the system is that of the common centre of gravity of the two bodies. Both the centre of the earth and the moon travel along zig-zag courses, being now accelerated, now retarded, in their motions as seen from the centre of the system, which, by the way, whilst it is within the sun, is not the centre of the sun. The sun’s direct attraction on the moon is more than twice that of our earth. The lateral motion of the moon is so slight that she is always travelling along a path concave to the sun.—f. C. D. SPECTROSCOPES.—These instruments are of two classes, which are alike in having a fine slit admitting the light it is sought to analyse, and a collimating lens to render the rays of light from the slit parallel. After being spread out into a spectrum it is usual, except in pocket instruments, to have a small telescope with an astronomical eye- piece to observe the lines, if any, which are shown. The difference of the two classes is the means used to effect the dispersion of the spectrum. In one class it is a prism, or prisms, employed, and the light rays of the various wave-lengths are refracted to a varying extent, the result being the beautiful spectrum with which most of us are familiar—if not in practice, at least in book illustrations. In the other class a diffraction plate takes the place of the prisms, having upon it a series of parallel lines, some thousands to the inch. An expensive H G iy E D CBA HH: B H G FE E D Cc B A Rowland plate, ruled at the Johns Hopkins Univer- sity, may be employed, or a copy of the same pre- pared by Mr. Thos. Thorp, of Whitefield, Manchester. These diffraction gratings give greater dispersion of the red rays than do prisms giving a spectrum of the same length. This is shown on the diagram, where A represents the position of the principal Frauenhofer lines in the prismatic spectrum, and B the same lines in the diffraction spectrum. The spectra given by the gratings are known as “Normal,” because the exact wave-length of every line may be measured ; whilst measures made with the prismatic spectrum are simply arbitrary, and differ with every variety of glass used. A prismatic spectroscope needs more prisms to produce greater dispersion, but with the diffraction grating a spec- trum of adifferent order, obtained by a slight motion of the grating, gives the dispersion required. A Thorp transmission grating, 14,500 lines to the inch, in my possession, without any observing tele- scope separates quite widely the D lines in the solar spectrum. A plate of this description is valued at only a few shillings; whilst prisms, to produce equal dispersion, would cost pounds. A solar spectroscope on this plan, though lighter than SCIENCE-GOSSTP. a prismatic one, costs less than a quarter of the money—a consideration to many people. A grating used without a slit, but with a cylindrical lens, will show the lines in the spectra of the brightest stars even with an instrument so small as the 83-inch Wray SCIENCE-GossIP telescope. Mr. Thorp has a form of grating mounted on a prism which gives a very brilliant direct-vision spectrum of great dispersion, separating the D lines well. This latter is useful in spectroscopes of the miniature class where a maximum of dispersion is desirable combined with a minimum of bulk —a class of instrument we have found most useful at times. especially for studying the spectra of Aurorae, or showing the true character of a brightening in the northern sky. CHAPTERS FOR YOUNG ASTRONOMERS. By Frank C. DENNETT. (Continued from p. 281.) JUPITER. SOMETIMES most rapid changes have been noticed on Jupiter. With the achromatic telescope at the Dearhorn observatory its greatest diameter has been found to be not always identical with the equator, and to vary in direction some five degrees in the course of a week. The spectrum shows the presence of watery vapour in the atmosphere of Jupiter, which how- ever does not appear to be quite identical with our own. This will be seen by the somewhat rough copy taken from Sir William Huggins’ map from the ‘Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society ” for May 1864. Low Sun Sky Jupiter Although Jupiter does not exhibit well-marked phases like Mars, if examined when near quadra- ture it shows a very evident shading-off of the limb farthest from the sun. The first known observation of Jupiter was made at Alexandria about 6 a.m. on September 4th, B.c. 240, when it occulted the star 6 Cancri. Castor was also occulted on November 22nd, 1716, as witnessed by Pound. It is thought to be very probable that Jupiter, instead of being a dark body like the earth or moon, gives out a certain amount of light to its satellites. Most useful work can be done in noting the exact time at which the various markings, bright spots, dark spots, belt ends, or broadenings, cross the central meridian. Calculate the longitude, then the exact relative motions on the planet’s sur- face can be learnt when observation is compared with observation. (To be continued.) ToraL ECLIPSE OF THE SUN in next May should be seen well in Sumatra, where Professor E. Barnard intends to go. An expedition is also to be sent from the University of California at the expense of Mr. W. H. Crocker of San Francisco. SCIENCE-GOSSZP. CAA WA CONDUCTED BY EDWARD A. MARTIN, F.G.5. A LONDON GRAVEL SECTION.—A gravel section in London Wall, in the City of London, has been laid bare prior to building operations, by the de- molition of a large number of warehouses. Beneath some eight feet of made ground was found about ten feet of dark carbonaceous clay containing freshwater shells—such as. Planorbis, Cyclas, etc., and numerous traces of vivianite. Lower is a thin bed of broken bones, these resting on gravel to a thickness of about ten feet, below which a shaft had been sunk for some distance in London Clay. The layer of bones, which seem to have been deliberately broken out of all recognition, was extremely puzzling. To whatever cause they are to be attributed, they were laid there before the water flowed in, in which the clay was afterwards deposited. We have here, in fact, a natural deposit resting upon an artificial one. Stowe says that in Moorfields there were numerous brickfields, the brick-earth being excavated for brick-making. The water then accumulated in the low-lying spots which were thus made, these afterwards being favourite skating-grounds. We can scarcely think that the clay could have been formed in the com- paratively short period since Stowe’s time. I regard the layer of bones as of older date. There must have been some reason for the breaking of the bones. Perhaps the layer here exposed may represent the floor of Roman wild-beast dens, in which case there would have been ample time to allow of the deposition of the clay. Opinions on this interesting section would be valuable.—Z#. A. Martin. INDURATED CHALK.—In reference to Mr. E. R. Sawer’s remarks, ante, p. 201, about the induration of chalk, may I point out that beds of indurated chalk occur at Corfe, in Dorsetshire? The rock is so hard that it is used for mending the roads in some parts of the neighbourhood. ‘The cavities which occur in this chalk contain crystals of calcite, and the same mineral may be found as veins traversing the mass. This is not a case of ‘“ con- tact-metamorphism.” The alteration in the cha- racter of the rock was probably induced during the uplifting of the beds through heat generated by pressure. If water were present, hydrothermal action may have produced some changes ; but I do not remember that there was sufficient visible evidence in support of the hydrothermal theory to the exclusion of others.— Cecil Carus- Wilson. GEOLOGICAL SociETyY oF LoNpDoN.—At the annual meeting, held on February 15th, Mr. J.J. H. Teall was re-elected president, and Messrs. J. E. Marr, H. W. Monckton, Professor H. G. Seeley, and W. Whitaker vice-presidents of the Society. Messrs. R. S. Herries and Professor W. W. Watts remain as secretaries, and Mr. W. T. Blandford as treasurer. The report of the Council showed a total fellowship of 1,334 at the end of 1900. The Wollaston Medal was awarded to Professor Charles org 3arrois, the Murchison Medal to Mr. A. J. Jukes- Browne, the Lyell Medal to Dr. R. H. Traquair, and the Bigsby Medal to Mr. G. W. Lamplugh. DIRECTOR-GENERAL OF GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.— It is with considerable regret one hears of the forthcoming retirement on March Ist of Sir Archibald Geikie from the Director-Generalship of the Geological Survey. It is forty-six years since Sir Archibald’s first official connection with the Survey, and he is still in the possession of a valuable store of energy and enthusiasm. We are not, therefore, surprised to hear that he has at present no intention of laying aside his unofficial work, and we trust he will continue to wield both pen and hammer for many years to come. ‘Those who have heard him speak or lecture must have been struck by the originality of his descriptions, and by the intelligible manner in which he has placed his facts and opinions before the audience. It is intended, as mentioned in SCIENCE-GOssIP last month, to entertain Sir Archibald early in March at a complimentary dinner. INsEcT WING FROM CARBONIFEROUS ROCKS.— Owing to the rarity with which insect remains have been found in our carboniferous rocks, special interest attaches to a short article in the “ Geo- logical Magazine,” by Mr. H. A. Allen, describing portion of a wing, with a neuration apparently differing from any hitherto obtained. This has come to light from the top of the four-foot seam in the Lower Coal Measures of Llanbradach Col- liery, Cardiff. The specimen was obtained by Mr. G. Robbings, and has been provisionally placed in the genus Mouquea, as FB’. canbrensis. DEEP COLLIERY SHAFT.—A shaft is shortly to be sunk to a depth of 1,850 feet at Lyktrens in Pennsylvania, and from the bottom of the shaft a tunnel will be driven 1,200 feet long, in order to reach the anthracite seam. At present the deepest shaft in that region is at Wadesville, which is 1,600 feet deep. UINTACRINUS IN CHALK.—The remarkable free- swimming crinoid, Uintacrinus, discovered twenty- five years ago in the Niobrara chalk of Kansas, and almost at the same time in the Lower Senonian of Westphalia, promises, after all, to be one of the commonest crinoidal forms in the Marsupites zone of our own English chalk. U ?ntuerinus is a stalk- less crinoid. A complete morphological description of U. socialis will be found in the “ Proceedings of the Zoological Society for 1893” (pages 974-1004), by Dr. F. A. Bather. Since this description was written Mr. Bather has explored the cliffs east of Margate with complete success, and he finds that, next to columnals of Bowrgueticrinus, cap-plates and brachials of (intacrinus are the most common fossils. Other parts of Kent besides Margate have produced similar evidence. Mr. C. Griffith has found similar plates at Grately, near Andover. The Recklinghausen glauconiferous sandstone has been also searched by Dr. Bather, and he finds that the genus is as plentiful there as at Margate. CHARNWOOD ForREsT.—The Quarterly Report of the Leicester Literary and Philosophical Society for October 1900 contains in the geological section three interesting photographs of Charnwood Forest, showing a quarry between High Sharpley and Cademan, a band of grit in the Blackbrook series, and the Hanging Rocks, Woodhouse Eaves. ‘The paper is by Professor W. W. Watts, M.A... F.G.S. ie) to ie) NOTICES OF SOCIETIES. Ordinary meetings are marked 7, excursions * ; names of persons follewing excursions are of Conductors. Lantern MMlustra- tions §. GEOLOGISTS’ ASSOCIATION. March 1.—7 “The Post-Pliocene Non-Marine Mollusea of the Sonth of England.” A. S. Kennard and B. B. Woodward, F.LS., &c. » 1.—it“The Pleistocene Fauna of Sussex.” J.P. Johnson- » 2.—* Natural History Museum, Cromwell Road. Henry Woodward, F.B.S., F.G-S. ss. 23.—Royal College of Surgeons, Lincoln's Inn Fields. Proiessor Charles Stewart, F.R.S. MANCHESTER MUSEUM, OWENS COLLEGE. March 2.—$ “ Monotremes.” Proiessor S. J. Hickson. = .—7 “Our Neolithic Ancestors.” Proiessor W. Boyd Dawkins, F.R.S. - 10—7;* Hyaena-Dens in Britain.” Dawkins, F.R-S. PRESTON SCIENTIFIC SOCIETY. March 6.—; “ Seeds and Germination.” Miss Holden. . 13—7* Architecture and the Evolution of the British Nation” E. H. Turner, A.C.A. + 20.—7“ Nuits.” H. Barbour. « 27—7 “ Liqnii Air.” R. Wallace Stewart, D.Sc. NORTH LONDON NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY. March 7.—7 Short Papers on “ Scientific Progress in 1900.” = 21.—§ “ Pictures of Bind-Liie” O.G. Pike. 30.—* Visit to Epping Forest Museum. West Wittering, Professor W. Boyd SoutTH LoxDON ENTOMOLOGICAL AND NATURAL Society. March 14.—§“ The Life History of a Dragon-fiy.”- Lueas, B.A., F.ES. ~ 28.— “The Lepidoptera of the Guildford E. B. Bishop. BIRKBECK NATURAL History SOcIetyY. March 9.—* Geological Ramble round Dford. Martin A. C. Hinton. = 9.—; “The Palaeolithic Inhabitants of Valley.’ Martin A. C. Hinton. HULL SCIENTIFIC 4ND FIELD NATURALISTS’ CLUB. March 6.—§ “ The Grave-Mounds of the Yorkshire Wold: and their Contents.” T. Sheppard, F.G-.S. > 20.—4§“* A Trip to Portugal to see the Eclipse of May 28, 1900.” Rev. H. P. Slade, M-B.W.A. SELBORNE SOCIETY. March 7.—$ “ The Wealden Formation and its Wonderful Con- tents.” E. A. Martin, F.G.S. LAMBETH FIELD CLUB AND SCIENTIFIC SOCIETY. March 4.—} “ Early English Architecture.” C. H. Deiman. HISTORY. \"aedlE Disirict.” the Thames > 16.—* Visit to Westminster Abbey. E. W. Harvey Piper. , 18.— “A Chat on the Mycetozoa.’ F. W. Evens. STREATHAM SCIENCE SOCIETY. March 2.—; “ British Reptiles.” M_.G. Palmer. ~ 16.—;“ Bombyces.” P. Humm. NOTICES TO CORRESPONDENTS. To CORRESPONDENTS AND EXCHANGERS.—ScCIENCE-GOSSIP is published on the 25th ot each month. All notes or short com- munications should reach us not later than the 18th of the month for insertion in the following number. No communications can be inserted or noticed without full name and address of writer. Notices of changes of address admitted free. BUSINESS COMMUNICATIONS.—AIl business communications relating to Sclence-Gossip must be addresse] to the Manager, Sctence-Gossip, 110 Strand, London. SUBSCRIPTIONS.—The volumes of ScieNcE-GossiP begin with the June numbers, but Subscriptions may commence with any number, at the rate oi 6s. 6d. for twelve months (including postage), and should be remitted to the Manager, ScIENCE- Gossip, 110 Strand. London, W.C. EDITORIAL COMMUNICATIONS, articles, books for review, instru - ments for notice, specimens for identification, etc., to be addressed to JouN T. CARRINGTON, 110 Strand, London, W.C. Notice.—Contributors are requested to strictly observe the following rules. All contributions must be clearly written on one side of the paper only. Words intended to be printed in walics should be marked under with a single line. Generic names must be given in full, excepting where used immediately before. Capitals may only be used for generic, and not specific names. Scientific names and names of places to be written in reund hand, SCIENCE-GOSSI/P. ANSWERS TO CORRESPONDENTS. J. R. (Beith).—The specimen enclosed is one of the small tortoiseshell butterfiy (Vanessa urticae). Tt is not unusual to find them in winter, if disturbed, as they hibernate in the imago or periect state. C. E. S. (London).— We fear you will not obtain, at the price, all you require. Consnli for trees, in the reading-room at the British Museum. Bloomsbury, Loudon’s “ Arboretum et Fraucti- cetum Britannicum ; or, Trees and Shrubs of Britain.” It costs £4 to buy. To givea list of insects inhabiting each would consti- tute a great work: so you had better consult books on the different orders of insects inhabiting Britain with regard to their arboreal habits. EXCHANGES. NotTiceE.—Exchanges extending to thirty words (including name and address) admitted free, but additional words must be prepaid at the rate of threepence for every seven words or less. WANTED io exchange, Kodak or i-pl Mahogany Siand Camera, for a 3- or 4-wick Oil Lantern.—A. Nicholson, 67 Green- bank Road, Darlington. WANTED, a Miniature Speciroscope, with adjusiable slii. Offered, a good inch micro-objective.—F. Compion, care of ScTIENCE-Gossip Office, 110 Strand, W.C. OFFERED, good cluiches of curlews’, arctic terns’, stockdoves” (C. oenas), and other eggs. Wanied, woodlark, black guillemot, woodpeckers’, and many others—E. G. Potter, 14 Bootham Crescent, York. “ECROPEAN Butierflies and Moths,” W. F. Kirby, Paris 1-43. in 6d. parts : “European Ferns.” James Britten, Paris 1-26, in 7d. parts. Exchange. What oiter? Hand-camera preierred.— E. S. Sugden, 48 Victoria Road W\., Sonthsea. WANTED, about fifty each of Periplaneta americana and Blaita orientalis ; also some larvae of cockchaiers, alive or dead, preferably the former.—Frederick J. Bridgman, 4 Avenue Road, Highgate. WaxTeD. London Catalogue, Ed. IX.,. Nos. 6, 39,136, 181, 297, 342. ete. Offered, 264, 298, 331, 716, 826, 833, 870, 1186: many others. Lists exchanged —A. Hosking, 48 Norwich Streei, Cambridge. OFFERED, magazine hand-camera, “Zenus~: good condition ; cost when new 46s.; in exchange ior good collection of foreign stamps.—R. Clapperion, 23 Albert Place, Galashiels. Fossits.— Crag, London Clay, Upper and Lower Greensand, and Wealden wanted in exchange for Palaeozoic and Jurassic species.—Dr. Brendon Guabbin, 15 Redland Grove. Bristol. OFFERED. Exotic Buiierflies, Ornith. miranda M. dohertyi, eroesus (both sexes of each); also fine specimens in papers irom Mexico, Peru, Brazil, and Australia, in exchange for other exotic diurnals.—W. Dannatt, Donnington, Vanbrugh Park, Blackheath, S.E. Fossits.—Permian and Jurassic duplicates offered in ex- ehange ior others. List.—Harold Tarbuck, Land and Mine Surveyor, The Chestnuts, Ryhope. ria Sunderland. OFFERED, Wray’s 63” x5" R.R. Lens, with exira tmbe to con- vert into 10’x8". Wide angle. new condition,in part ex- change ior Waitson’s “ Fram” or “ Student's ~ microscope stand. —Thomas Peters, 45 Lord Street. Leigh, Lancs. CONTENTS. PAGE Some BerrisH Divinc BEETLES. By E. J. BURGESS Sopp, F.R.MetSoc. Illustrated .. a5 =o ie a5 BE) BRIT.SH FRESHWATER Mites. By C. F. GeorcGeE. M.B.C.S. 293 EXPERIENCES IN FLOATING FORAMINIFERAS. By Dr. G. H. Bryay, FBS. .. ae = 2 ae -. 296 SENIC AND ARSENIC-EaTERS. By C. A. MITCHELL, B.A. 298 BUTTERFLIES OF THE PALAEARCTIC REGION. By HENRY Caries Lanc, M.D. Iilustrated sc so td) REPTILES IN WINTER. By GERALD LEIGHTON, MB. .. 300 LaND AND FRESHWATER MOLLUSCA OF HAMPSHIRE. By LioveL E. ADAMS, B.A., assisted by B. B. Woop- WARD, F.LS... sc ot 2c 5 ae OL AN INTRODUCTION TO British SPIpERS. By FRANE Perey SwaTe. IJilustrated ne es oo -- 303 MecHanics oF CONDUCTION OF Sap. By HAROLD A. HalG .. 25 24 2 sc =5 =: -- 305 Trish PLaNt Names. By Joun H. Bargour, M.B. .. 306 Boogs TO ReaD. I/ustrated—PHOTOGRAPHY -. 307, 309 Scriexcr Gossip—Microscopy. Illustrated .. Sy Bulb, su NOTES AND QUERIES—ASTRONOMY ax ne eet lb. oly GEOLOGY—NOTICES AND EXCHANGES .. 319, 320 SCIENCE-GOSS/P. ws i) NEW, OR TEMPORARY STARS, By FRANK C ROM time to time mysterious stars have been noted in the heavens that after glowing brilliantly for a time have gradually dwindled away. ‘The first of these of which we have any record appeared between 8 and p Scorpii so long ago as B.C. 134, whilst the last is still shining in DENNETTY. Ma-tuan-lin also tells of a star blazing out in our era A.D. 173 between «and 8B Centauri. In April! A.D. 386 one appeared between A and > Sagittarii, and is said to have remained visible and stationary until July. Another, rivalling Venus, came into view in 889, near a Aquilae. and was secn for three POSITION OF ‘rite New Star, Nova Perser, 1901. the constellation Perseus. ‘The first rivalled Venus in lustre, and helped to stimulate Hipparchus of Nicaea, in Bithynia, to set about constructing a catalogue of 1,022 stars. Chinese records, too, tell of this star, as well as of another between a Her- culis and @ Ophiuchi, in A.p. 123. Apnrit 1901.—No, 83, Vor. VIT. The Chinese: weeks. During the reign of the Emperor Otho, A.D. 945, a star surpassing Venus in brilliance is said to have appeared in the part of Cassiopeia bordering on Cepheus. In December 1230 another appeared between the. constellations Serpens and March 1231. Published March 25th, 1901. Ophiuchus, remaining visible until B22 ‘In the year 1264 an eminently bright star” burst out in Cassiopeia, also near Cepheus, “ which kepi itself in the same place. and had no proper motion.” There has been doubt as to whether the stars of 945 and 1264 were not really comets, but the evidence seems rather in fayour of their being stars. We enter upon an era of greater exactitude when the great star of 1572 in. Cassiopeia forced atten- tion. Schuler of Wittemberg is said io have observed if upon August 6th. though Dr. Halley writes that Cornelius Gemma did not see it on November 8th, when he considered that part of the heavens in a very serene sky, and saw it not; but that the next nighi, November 9th, it appeared with a splendour surpassing all the fixed stars.” Tycho Brahe was at the time staying with an uncle ai the monastery of Herritzwadt, working in the chemical laboratory until the evening. In coming home on November ilth his ‘attention Was atiracted by the brilliant visitor in R.A. Oh. 19-2 m., Dec. 65° 35’ N. (1890), about equal io Sirius. It became brighter even than Venus. and was then visible in daylight. At this time lis colour was white: but it quickly began to lose its brilliance, at the same time becoming yellow. and, as it diminished. reddish. and finally tinged with blue. Hind and Plammer found a small variable 10-ll-magnitude star within 1’ of its place. In 1604 the pupils of Kepler, John Bronowski and Mostlin. whilst observing Mars. Jupiter. and Saturn. then in close proximity in the constellation Ophinchus. were interrupted by bad weather for a day or two, but on resuming work on October 10th they were surprised to find a star in brightness between Jupiter and Venus situated RA. 17 h 25 m.. Dec. 21° 23’ S. 890). Tis scintillation was exceptionally great, but iis actual colour does not seem to have changed like that of 1572. Tt soon faded. By January 1605 it had fallen below the brightmess of Arcturus, and in March was described as of third magnitude. Between February and March 1606 it became invisible. At the present time there appears io be a variable star of about the iwelith magnitude at this place. On June 20th. 1670, a Carthusian monk named Anthelm found a third-magnitude star in the head of Vulpecula, not far from 6 Cygni, which by August 10th had fallen to the fifth magnitude. After three months it disappeared ; but on March 17th, 1671, it reappeared as a star of the fourth magnitude, and a month later Dominique Cassini found it very variable in brightmess. After ai length reaching the third magnitude it faded and Was missing during February 1672; but at the end of March it brightened to the sixth magnitude. though it was not afterwards seen. Its position was R.A. 19 h 43°5 m.,- Dec. .27° 1’ N., and close to this spot there is an 11-12 macniinde which is said to be decidedly variable, and some- what hazy-looking. SCIENCE-GOSSTP. After the lapse of 178 years J. Russell Hind found a reddish-yellow fifth-magnitude star in Ophiuchus, R.A. 16 h. 54 m, Dec. 12° 45’ S. (1590) on April 28th. 1848, where he was ceriain no star exceeding ninth magnitude could have existed on April 5th. Ii remained steady uniil May 9th. By the 10th it had increased to fourth magnitude ; but by the 15th had fallen to the sixth, from which it gradually receded to between the eleventh and iwelfth magnitudes, and still so remains, showing a very slight variation. In 1866 the celebrated “ Blaze Star.” T Coronae Borealis, made its appearance near e in the same constellation, R.A. 15h. 55-3m., Dec. 26° 12’ N. (830). Professor Julius Schmidt of Athens found no trace of it, at a little after 9 pm, on May 12th, or of any star of more than fourth Magnitude in its place. but a little before midnighi Birmingham at Tuam in Ireland found the place occupied by a second-magniiude siar. Through a telescope it appeared nebulous, and looked like a yellow star seen through a blue film. On May 14th ii Was seen in America, and observed by Baxendell oi Manchester upon the 15th io have already fallen to the fourth magnitude. By May 24th it was only 55, and afterwards fell to ninth magni- tude. After the 25th the blue tinge was losi, and the star passed through the many tints of orange and yellow. On June 26th it appeared as of tenth magnitude, and so remained until August 20th, then commencing to steadily increase to between the sixth and seventh magnitudes on Sepiem- ber 15th, continuing steady uniil November 9th. when it began to decrease till the tenth magnitude was reached. Its colour in September was a pretty bright yellow, but at last assumed a dullish white. Before the “blaze” traces of variation had been shown, for Sir John Serschel found it 6-3 magnitude in 1842, whilst in 1855 Argelander found it 9-5 in magnitude. Since the previous Nova a new insirumeni had come into use, the spectroscope. and Sir William Huggins and Dr. A. Milier on May 16 commenced to study the nature of the light. Like other stars it was converted into a rainbow band crossed by- black absorption lines. but with this difference, the lines that showed the presence of hydrogen were reversed, bright instead of dark. By some means there was a large accession of heat, and a great atmosphere of hydrogen was rendered in- candescent. This is the first step towards the knowledge of the nature of these phenomena. Quite early in the evening of November 24th, 1876, Schmidt had his attention attracted by a third-magnitude star appearing in Cygnus, R.A. 21h 37:3 m, Dec. 42° 23’ N. (1890). Only two nights previously he had been examining this very region, and was positive no bright star was then im the position. At midnight it was decidedly yellow. News was sent io Paris and Vienna, but until December 2nd the weather proved — i e SCIENCE-GOSS/)’. bad, and by then the magnitude had fallen to the fifth. Cornu, with the 15-inch Paris achromatic, found its spectrum faint, only containing several bright lines, eight of which he succeeded in mea- suring, and found to be due to incandescent sodium (or more probably helium), hydrogen, and magne- sium, the atmosphere being almost identical with that of our own Sun. Hind found its light reduced to seventh magnitude by December 12th, and by January 10th, 1877, it had fallen another magni- tude. At the end of December 1876 the tint was described as deep red in colour, but the object now appears to be a tiny nebula. In 1885, on August 22nd, a star was simultane- ously discovered by Mr. Isaac Ward, of Belfast, and a Hungarian lady, the Baroness de Pod- maniczky. It was in, or in front of, the great nebula in Andromeda, which is believed to have exhibited unusual brightness for some days previ- ously. The star seems to have reached its greatest brilliancy, sixth magnitude, about the 3lst, but by the end of September had fallen to the tenth, and eradually vanished from view. The spectrum of this star appeared to be continuous. An unsigned postcard to Dr. Copeland, at the Royal Observatory, Edinburgh, on February lst, 1892, called attention to a new star of fifth magni- tude in Auriga, not far from the star x. The message came from Dr. Anderson as _ after- wards transpired, a gentleman of whom it was recently said that it was believed he knew the sky so well he could detect a new fifth-magnitude star in almost any part of the heavens. Professor KE. C. Pickering, of Harvard College, U.S.A., had latterly begun setting his “‘ policeman” to “ patrol the heavens” on every fine night., This is a small photographic transit instrument which auto- matically sweeps the meridian, recording all visible stars. The instrument gave evidence to the effect that it had seen this new comer in R.A. 5 h. 25 m., Dec. 30° 21’ N., on thirteen occa- sions between December 10th, 1891, and January 20th, 1892, but it was certainly not so bright as the eighth magnitude on December 8th. It re- mained fourth or fifth magnitude through February, then rapidly fell to the twelfth by the end of March. On April 26th it was found to be sixteenth magnitude, in August brightening to the tenth, but afterwards falling to the twelfth magnitude. The spectrum was interesting, showing both bright bands and black lines close to them, on the violet side. The various substances seemed to each give two sets of lines, one bright, displaced towards the red, one dark, displaced towards the violet. ‘The amount of displacement showed a relative velocity of about five hundred miles a second, as if a solid globe or a great mass of meteors moving from us had plunged into a nebulous mass moving towards us. It now appears as a nebulous star, and gives a similar spectrum to those objects. In 1893 Mrs. Fleming, on: Red Violet From a Photograph taken at Stonyhurst College Observatory, England, SPECTRUM OF Nova PERSnEI. 3rd, 8 P.M., 1901, March 324 SCIE NCE-GOSSIP. October 26th. found Nova Normae, of the seventh magnitude, which gave a spectrum that is practi- cally the duplicate of Nova Aurigae. and now also appears to be nebula. The same lady discovered another in Carina in 1895, which in three months fell from the eighth to the eleventh magnitude. having a similar spectrum and finally a similar ending. In the same year, on July 8th, she dis- covered another of seventh magnitude in Centaurus, R.A. 13h. 343m.. Dec. 31° 8’ 8., which whilst it gave a somewhat different spectrum became nebula. The next, and last Nova that demands our attention is that in Perseus. which was discovered by Dr. T. D. Anderson, of Edinburgh, the dis- coverer of Nova Auriga, on the early morning of February 22nd, when the star had a very low altitude. Its colour was then bluish-white, and its magnitude 2‘7: but the same evening, just before seven o'clock, Dr. Copeland found it brighter than Aldebaran, and little more than an hour later con- sidered it equal to Procyon, which it resembled in colour. Twenty-four hours afterwards Dr. Halm found it 0°2 magnitude brighter than Capella, or brighter than any temporary star since that of 1604. On this evening the spectroscope was brought to bear. At Potsdam it was described as like that of Rigel, the spectrum having no bright lines. At Edinburgh with a direct vision prism on the 6-inch refractor it appeared to have a perfectly continuous spectrum ; but with a larger spectroscope, on the 15-inch achromatic. Drs. Halm and Copeland found about half a dozen delicate dark lines from near DtoF. The same evening, but presumably a few hours later, Professor Pickering, of Harvard Col- lege Observatory. recorded many bright lines, but on the 25th he telegraphed: “S. greatly changed, now resembles N. Aurigae.” By this time its light had begun to decrease. but on that evening its position at Greenwich was found to be RA. 3h. 24m. 28:21's., Dec. 43° 33’ 54-8 N.. a place where no star previously appears on the map. The district had been photographed at Harvard on February 19th, at which time it certainly could not have exceeded eleventh magnitude. So late as midnight on February 21st it is said that it cer- tainly could not have been so bright as third magnitude, as an English observer was examining that region of the sky. On and after the 27th the colour of the star became of a warm yellow or reddish tint, the spectroscope showing the reason, as the brilliant C line of hydrogen was most vivid. On March 3 I turned our 3-inch *‘ Wray Science- Gossip” achromatic telescope on the newcomer. It was an ordinary-looking. golden-yellow star, quite sharp, surrounded by diffraction rings. like any other. When, however, the cylindrical lens and prism were used its brilliant red line was most striking; with the Thorp diffraction grating, the rest of the spectrum became visible. six broad bright lines, especially C (red) and F of hydrogen, the yellow helium and green magnesium lines being readily seen. On the violet side of each bright line there was a black line visible. At this time the Nova was barely brighter than Algol (B Persei). On the same evening the Rey. Walter Sidgreaves, of Stonyhurst College Observatory. obtained a photograph of the spectrum, which he has kindly permitted us to reproduce. ‘The ex- treme brightest broad line,” he writes, “is Hf.” There is first to be noted the broad bright lines of great width which Sir Norman Lockyer has found, from comparison with the spectra of other stars, to occupy about their normal position in the spectrum, indicating a condition of rest. Next there is a spectrum of dark lines violently dis- placed towards the violet, so much so as to indicate that the matter yielding it is rushing towards us with a velocity of about 700 miles a second. There is yet another point of interest in the spectrum. Nearly down the centre of each bright line of hydrogen and calcium, but probably too delicate for reproduction, there is a fine dark line—most likely a reversal—which Sir Norman considers will be of great service in accurately determining the wave-length of the other bright lines. The star is still fading ; as I write on March 11th it is between third and fourth magnitudes, but, although less vivid, its spectrum appears to be much as on the 3rd of the month. The cause of the outburst would seem to be a mass or swarm of meteoric matter crashing into nebula, the force of the collision producing the great amount of heat necessary to raise both a quantity of the solid matter as well as of gas toa condition of incandescence. Already we see the cooling in progress, and probably after a few months it will relapse into the condition of a minute faint planetary nebula. Doubtless there will be many watchers to see if this really occurs. Perhaps we may wonder when the collision took place. Many months must elapse before we can get any definite, or even indefinite, knowledge on this point, not until it can be known whether the object yields a sensible parallax. It is probable that at the least a century has passed since the outburst occurred, probably longer ; and seeing that all this time light has been travelling earthward at a rate of 11,179,800 miles per minute, the real dis- tance is entirely beyond the human mind to grasp. One most remarkable fact is to be noted, which is that nearly all these temporary stars make their appearance within the bounds, or upon the borders, of the Milky Way, the reason being not at present known. Perhaps our last visitor may help to throw some light on this interesting subject. The new star appears to have also been dis- covered simultaneously by Herr Grimmler, in Bavaria, and a lady student at Vassar College. In conclusion I desire to express my thanks both to Sir William Huggins and to Father Sidgreaves for their kindly help. London, March 1901. SCIENCE-GOSSI/?. 325 SOME “BRITISH DIVING BEETLES. By KE. J. Burcess Sopp, F.R.Met.Soc., F.E.S. (Concluded from page 293.) HE wings (fig. 7) of both sexes of Dytiscus are — when forty-five miles distant from land, and it not well developed and of ample proportions, infrequently happens during the summer and early which enable the insects to change their habitation autumn evenings that a water-beetle, probably Bia. 2. BRITISH DYTISCI. Drawn bu BE. J. Burgess Sopp 8. Dutiscus punctulatus Bab. Female, showing black under side. 9. D. cireumyleaus Fab. Male. 10. ). circwmflecus Fab. Male, showing markings on under side. 11. D. cireumcinelius Ahr. Female, showing narrow border round eyes. 12. /). punctulatus Fab. Female. 13. D. lapponicus Gyll. Male, under side with lateral markings. 14. )). dimidiatus Berg. Male. at will. This they do towards dusk or after night- mistaking the light for the reflection of moonlight fall,in common with many other of the Dytiscidae. on water, flies into a house through an open door Darwin, in his “ Origin of Species,” makes mention ~ or window. ‘The insects usually ascend a water- of a Colymbetes flying on board H.M.S. “Beagle” plant or other elevation from which to start on 326 their aérial journeys, although in captivity they occasionally demonstrate that they are not entirely dependent upon such aids to the successful spreading of their wings. I have known both Dytiscus punctulatus and D. marginalis to escape during the evening from their glass jars and fly from an upstairs room down to the lighted hall below. They make a loud buzzing sound during flight. heard at a considerable distance. In common with many other imagines and some few larvae they stridulate when at rest: generally towards nightfall, the notes produced partaking of two very distinct sounds—the one a harsh “shrill,” and the other a lower humming or ‘*buzzing” sound. which some authors have asscciated with the peculiar alulae or winglets situated under the base of the elytra, the use of which is not apparent. The mode of stridulation in the genus can, however. scarcely be said to be satisfactorily solved beyond question. The opinion has been expressed that the “shrills” - are generated by the rubbing of the underside of the elytra against the end of the abdomen (Miall) : but if these areas are examined stridulating organs are not easily perceptible. Mr. C. J. Gahan made no allusion to the Dytisci in his exhaustive paper “On the Stridulating Organs in the Coleoptera,” read at a recent meeting of the Entomological Society of London, for the reason, he tells me. that up to that time he had*been unable to detect with certainty the presence of stridulating organs in the genus. Since then Mr. Gahan has brought to my notice an article by Hermann Reeker, “ Die Tonapparate der Dytiscida,” in which it is stated that stridulation in Pelobius, Dytiscus. and others of the Dytiscidae is generated by rubbing one of the large wing nervures against the elytra. The transverse ridges on these nervures are certainly very noticeable, and according to Reeker are also more numerous in this family than amongst the generality of the coleoptera. Mr. Gahan. however, calls attention to the fact that many beetles that are not known to stridulate. as well as others which are well known to stridulate in a different way, “‘ have the corresponding wing ner- vures just as prominent and as strongly ribbed across,” and he is of Dr. Sharp’s opinion (* Camb. Nat. Hist.”) that Reeker’s explanation is certainly erroneous as applied to Pelobius, although it may possibly be correct with regard to Dytiscus. Whether the Dytisci, like the Gyrini or ** Whirli- gig Beetles.” stridulate previous to flight I do not know, but am personally of opinion that they do, since the cries are almost invariably emitted during the evening, at which time the insects also fly. In captivity, when placed for a change in an ordinary 6-foot bath, transformed by the arrange- ment of water-plants into a natural pool, I have known the males to crawl up a protruding rush and stridulate during the twilight for eight or ten - minutes at a time. SCIENCE-GOSS/P. In Dytiscus the two terminal spiracles are con- siderably larger than in other members of the family Dytiscidae; this exceptional development being, in fact, one of the distinguishing features of the genus. They are of great service to the beetle in its peculiar method of breathing, for, poising itself, with posterior legs at right angles to the body and tail upwards at the surface of the water, it is able to bring them at once into direct contact with the atmosphere. In addition to pro- tecting the more delicate under-wings beneath, the elytra also render valuable service by forming a reservoir for air into which the spiracles lead, these being in this genus more dorsally situated than in the majority of the coleoptera (fig. 5). For, although fitting perfectly to a portion of the body, there is left towards the apex, between the flattened back of the insect and the concave wing-covers. a hollow water-tight compartment: which, when stored with fresh air, enables the diver to remain submerged for a considerable period. This reservoir renders the posterior por- tion of the beetle doubly buoyant, so that. if re- maining still and unanchored, being lighter than the water, it rises to the surface tail upwards, in the right position for aération. This is effected by slightly raising the wing-covers and first ejecting any used air they may contain. The males are more active and breathe more frequently than the females, a fact easily perceived by keeping speci- mens of both sexes under observation. From experiments carried out by Dr. Sharp, our greatest authority on the carnivorous water-beetles, he found that in Dytiscus marginalis the average time passed under water bore to the time the beetles were exposed to the surface for aération a ratio of about 12 to 1. In less highly developed species the period is very much greater, amounting in the case of Pelobius hermanii, one of the most primi- tive types of the family, to as much as 375 to 1. Dr. Sharp's communication to the Linnean Society in 1876 “‘ On the Respiratory Action of the Carnivorous Water-beetles (Dytiscidae) ” contains -so much interesting information that I cannot refrain from quoting a short summary of his observations bearing on the genus under considera- tion. After giving various details in extenso, he says:—‘‘ The male of Dytiscus marginalis rose on an average once in about 84 minutes for breathing, and remained on an average about 54 seconds at surface for each respiration. The longest interval it was observed to pass without breathing was 19 minutes. The duration of a respiration varied from 5 seconds to 300 seconds, and the time it was ex- posed bore to the time it was quiescent a ratio of ioe eons The female D. marginalis rose on the average once in about 122 minutes for breathing. and remained on an average about 553 seconds at surface for each respiration. The longest interval it was observed to pass without breathing was 323 minutes. The duration of a respiration was from SCIENCE. GOSSIP. 327 3 seconds to 280 seconds, and the time it was exposed bore to the time it was quiescent a ratio On Lae The female of D. punctulatus (fig. 12), although generally spending more time at the surface than D. marginatis, occasionally remains submerged for longer periods, sometimes refraining from aéra- tion for considerably over 40 minutes. She also swims nearer the surface than our commonest species, spending a great deal of her time with a portion of the back slightly protruding from the water. In very severe winters the Dytisci probably bury themselves in the mud; but retirement from an active piratical life is of short duration, and a slight rise in the temperature suffices to again bring the insects abroad in their favourite haunts. In mild winters it seems unlikely the beetles hibernate at all. Both at Ferndown, Dorset, in the south, and at Hoylake in the north-west of England, I have taken our two commoner Dytisci throughout the winter months, even when the weather has been decidedly cold. Our beetles of the genus Dytiscus may be con- veniently divided into two groups, in one of which the underside is black and in the other some shade of yellow or yellowish-red. To the first of these groups belongs one species. Dytiscus punctulatus Fabr. (figs. 8 and 12) is a flattened, long-oval insect, measuring from an inch to aninch and one-eighth in length, by about half an inch in breadth (26-29 mm. by 12-14 mm.). The general form is narrower in proportion to its length than is that of our following and commoner species. The upper surface is black, with just the slightest tinge of brown, which is usually more apparent in the females, the lateral margins of the thorax and elytra being bordered with yellow. The clypeus is yellow,as in all our British species, and the antennae reddish. The underside is black and polished, the pitchy legs slender and furnished with brown hairs, and the coxal pro- cesses rounded at the apex. ‘The upper surface of the males is smooth and shining, there being but slight punctuation, and that mainly towards the apical area of the elytra. The females are duller, and have their wing-cases deeply furrowed from near the base to beyond the middle, there being ten grooves on the basal portion of each elytron, the remainder of the wpper surface being finely and somewhat closely punctured. D. punctulatus is a native of Northern and Central Europe. In Britain it is a local insect in some districts, although widely distributed through- out the kingdom. It may be taken at all periods of the year, excepting during severe frost, in similar situations to J). marginalis, but is also stated by Dr. Hofmann to be “chiefly found in running water.” To our second group belong the five remaining’ British Dytisci. All of these are easily distin- euished from the foregoing species in having the underside other than black the thorax dis- tinctly bordered on more than two of its margins. 3, and 4), although varying considerably in size, is on an and Dytiseus marginalis Linn. (figs. 2, average larger than the preceding beetle, ranging from an inch and one-eighth to an inch and three- eighths in length, and from five-eighths to three- quarters of an inch in breadth (25-34 mm. by 15-18 mm.). The upper surface is olivaceous or greenish-black, with the lateral margins of the elytra and the whole of the thorax bordered with yellow. The antennae and lees are red, and the underside of a uni-colorous yellow, with the coxal processes both shorter and more pointed than in the former species. The males are highly polished; but in this and the three following species is pre- sented to us the peculiar and as yet unexplained circwnstance of the females assuming two distinct and well-known forms, whilst very rarely specimens have been captured which may be said to occupy the position of ‘‘ missing links ” between them ('). In the first and commonest type the insect is dull and deeply furrowed, as in the preceding species ; whereas in the second it is smooth and shining, like the male, save that it has slight punctuation on the thorax and a rather more liberal allowance towards the apical area of the elytra than is to be met with in the opposite sex. D. marginalis is widely distributed over the middle and northern portions of Europe, Asia, and America. It has also been recorded from Japan, and ranges from Geneva to well within the Arctic Cirele. Itis by far the commonest of the British Dytisci, being generally distributed in stagnant water throughout the kingdom. Dytiseus ecircumflexus Fabr. (figs. 9 and 10) is on an average rather longer and more slender than our last beetle (27-35 mm. by 15-17 mm.). The upper surface is olivaceous or black, with a more or less greenish tinge, both the size and calour of this insect varying considerably. ‘he antennae and legs are red, and the margins of the thorax and elytra are bordered with yellow, as in J. margin- alis. This species is, however, easily separable from the latter beetle, on account of its yellow underside being boldly decorated by black mark- ings (fig. 10). ‘The coxal processes are, moreover, longer, narrower, and sharper, and the scutellum often exhibits a reddish tint. The sexes differ as in the last beetle, the females being similarly dimorphic. D. cireumflexus is a native Southern Europe and Northern Africa. northern range the sulcate form of female pre- dominates, the insects exhibiting also a broader form and darker hue than those of Spain, Algeria, of Central and In its more (1) “In Dr. Power's collection there is a female 7. cireum- cinetus that comes between the two forms, the sulci being only rudimentary but distinetly traceable.”—-Fowler, “ Col. Brit. Is.,” 1, 205. 328 SCIENCE-GOSSIP. etc., where the smooth type of female is more generally abundant and of a brighter green colora- tion. In Britain the species is decidedly uncommon, and confined chiefly to the London district. Dytiscus circumeinetus Abr. (fig. 11) is less variable in size than is our Commonesi species, to which it bears a sirong resemblance. Jt measures about one and a quarter inches in length and five- eighths of an inch in breadth (51-35 mm. by 15-16 mm.). The colour of the upper surface. is greenish-black, with the wing-cases and thorax bordered as in the last two species; antennae and lees red. From JD. marginalis it may be distin- enished by having the coxal processes more elongate and sharp. and from D. -circumflezus by the absence of the black markings on the underside. whilst it diifers from both oi these species in having a narrow yellow border round the eves. The sexes difter as in D. marginalis, the males being glabrous and the females dimorphous, either dull and sul- cate, or smooth and polished, but with more punctuation towards the apex of the elytra’ than the males. This msect is a native of North-Wast Europe and North America. In Britain it is decidedly rare, but the fact of its having been recorded from localities as widely separated as Eastbourne. the Cambridge- shire fens, and Askham Bog near York (“ Col. Brit. Is.”). should stimulate ardent coleopierisis to. en- deavour to locate it in intermediate districts. Dytiscus lapponicus Gyll. Gig. 13) is one of our smaller species. Although very variable, its general average size is scarcely so large as that of D. punc- julaius (23-28 mm. by 12-15 mm.). Im form it is slightly more oval than the latter beetle. and on account of the thorax being narrower in propor- tion, especially at the base, the general outline of the insect is less continuous than that of any of our other species. The colour of the upper surface is pitchy or blackish-brown; the fact that the elyira are finely striped with longitudinal yellow lines also imparts to the beetles a generally lighter appearance than is presented by other members of the genus. The underside is yellow with black markings along the lateral edges (jig. 15). the coxal processes being long and sharp. This species may be distinguished from D. marginalis and D. circumflerus by the broad yellow border round the eyes. and irom D. cireumcinetus by the black markings on the abdomen. The males are smooth and shining, with the elytra punctured towards their apex. the females being. as a rule. dull and deeply furrowed. althongh occasionally resembling the stronger sex. D. lappoicus extends from Central Russia and Germany throughout Northern Europe and Siberia. With us it is a very local insect, and confined for the most part io the Highlands of Scotland and Ireland. Yet. although usually a scarce insect. it has not infrequently occurred to collectors in con- siderable quantity. Mr. James J. F. X&. King. of Glasgow, to whom I am indebted for my British specimens, obiained it in Mull in September 1899 in great number. : Dytiscus dimidiatus Berg. (fig. 14) is the last and largest of our indigenous species. Ii ranges in size irom one and a quarter to one and a half inches in length, whilst attaining a breadth of about three-quarters of an inch at the broadest part of the elytva (82-37 mm. by 17-18 mm.), which is situated rather farther back towards the apex in this than in others of the genus. The upper side is pitchy-black; the antennae and legs red; and coxal processes blunt. The underside is somewhat darker, and exhibits a more ruddy appearance than in any of the preceding insects. WJ. dimidiatus differs from the rest of the group in having only the side margins of the thorax broadly bordered with yellow. a narrow streak being also traceable along the anterior edge. Like D. punctulatus, the females of this species exhibit but one form. being always deeply sulcate from near the base to just beyond the middle of the elytra; the males. as in the other species. being smooth and polished. D. dimidiaius occurs on the Continent and in Asia Minor. and was formerly plentiful in the fen districts of England; but, notwithstanding that a recently published encyclopaedia brackets it with D. marginalis as one of our two commonest British species, there is little doubt that this beetle is now by far the rarest of our indigenous Dytisci, and bids fair to occupy a2 place ere long in the growing list of our extinct insect fauna. The Dytisci are easily kept in captivity, and make interesting pets. becoming in time so tame that they do not appear to mind being lifted out of the water and examined in the hand. Im their natural element their movements are varied and marked by extreme gracefulness; whilst at times. particularly in some of the cat-like methods of cleaning themselves, their performances become amusingly grotesque. The naturalist who is pos- sessed of an aquarium. or who is sufficiently handy with his tools to fabricate one after the manner described in an early number of SCIENCE-GOSSIP _ (January 1886). will find much to learn from a study of the habits and actions of these interesting insects. Especially will this be so if able to arrange a bath or other large receptacle for water, as previously described (aztec. p. 326). s0 as to give the beetles ample room and opportunity to display themselves to advantage. Then they will be fouad to prove much more insiructive and educating than goldfish, or the generality of the usual occu- pants of our private aquaria. Saxholme. Hoylake. + THE CAMBRIAN NATURAL OBSERVER” for January and February 1901 is to hand, and con- tains much that is interesting. including a history of the Astronomical Society of Wales, of which it is the organ. The Society appears to be making good progress. SCIENCE-GOSSIP. 329 MECHANICS OF CONDUCTION OF SAP. By HAROLD AW SH EUATGs (Concluded from page 306.) Tse us now inquire more closely into the nature : of both cell-wall and parietal protoplasm ; the former of these is, in the root-hairs, composed entirely of cellulose, the molecules of which are of a considerable size. It has been supposed that between certain groups of these molecules there exist spaces, the so-called ‘micellae”” which are Fic. 1. A root-hair, showing :—a, cell-wall ; 6, protoplasm ; c, nucleus ; d, vacuoles ; e, original cell from which hair arose. of a size comparable with the molecular group. Between the constituent molecules of each group still smaller spaces are supposed to exist, these being the ‘‘tagmata” of certain botanists. It is quite reasonable to suppose that these spaces do exist; at any rate, the micellae are probably present, and the supposition affords a ready ex- planation of the absorption of salts and water ; but some salts that are positively injurious to such a cell-wall or to the protoplasm, or substances which have a very large molecule (colloid), do not appear to have the power of getting through a membrane of cellulose. It is, in fact, only salts with a molecule comparable in size with the micellar spaces or the tagmata that can get through, and so be submitted to the discriminative power of the primordial utricle. As far as the intimate structure of this latter layer goes, but little is known, except that it is made up of two parts—one, the ‘“ ectoplasm,” being that nearest the cell-wall, and which probably exercises the power of selection; the other, the “endoplasm,” that is connected with the nutrition of the cell. Whether, however, spaces comparable with those in the cell-wall really exist, or whether a real affinity is exerted in the case of the ecto- plasm, is not known. It is conjectured, however, that a sort of sifting process also goes on here, but there has not been much recent research upon the subject. The actual process will not be elucidated except by the aid of extremely refined experiments. It is probably due to that ‘ vital activity ” which is supposed to exist in all plants. We must now answer the question, What hap- pens after this raw sap has been taken into the root-hairs and other epiblemal cells in their Fic. 2. Trans-section across young stem (cucurbita), to show arrangement of the vascular elements :—ep., epidermis; co/., collenchyma ; co7., cortex (these three constitute the ‘ bark)” ; b., bast-fibres; end., endodermis; ph., phloem; x. cambium ; “y., Xylem (reticulate and pitted vessels); p.vr., protoxylem (annular and spiral tracheides). vicinity ? The problem will be found to resolve itself into the task of determining the nature and structure of the other elements occurring both in root, stem, and leaves. These elements constitute what is known as the “vascular system” of the plant, and are contained in the fibro-vascular bundles which in Dicotyledons (') are composed of the two (1) It does not matter whether we take Monocotyledons or Dicotyledons ; the essential elements are of course present in both. M 3 Soe, containing portions, “xylem” or wood, and phloem, with a layer of meristematic tissue, the cambium, between. Of these the xylem forms the tissue which conducts the raw sap upwards towards the leaves ; the phloem forming a tissue whose function is to distribute the elaborated sap from the leaves to the cortex and other parts of the plant. In the ultimate ramifications of the roots, the raw sap passes from the root-hairs to the central cylinder of the root by a process of osmosis, and here gets through into the elements of the xylem. These are in young roots of a simplified nature, and consist for the most part of elongated elements with spiral or annular thickenings upon the walls (see figs. 2 and 3). Further up we get, on account of secondary thickening, additional xylem elements of many kinds, such as the forms with pits, reti- culated walls, and others. All these fall into the category of ‘“tracheides,’ and are designated as annular, spiral, or reticulated, as the case may he (see fig. 3.) We must consider, How is the raw sap able to pass up this long line of xylem elements? The answer is that the xylem, with its system of tracheides, many of which possess numerous pits in their walls, affords a transmitting channel for the sap. It was formerly thought that the walls of the tracheides were traversed by the fluid, but this has been proved not to be the case. It passes by meaus of the spaces, and by them only; more- over, it has been shown (*) that the air in these spaces exists there under a negative pressure, so” that by means of certain other forces that will be mentioned later (root-pressure and transpiration) the sap easily penetrates from one space to another, and so upwards. Tf we take a short piece of hazel stem, cut both ends flat, and block out the pith at either end by means of some impermeable varnish, we can «demonstrate the extreme facility with which water passes along the wood. Immerse one end in some water, and observe the other end closely. In less than one minute, if the piece is not too long (10 cm.), the cut surface will become wet and small drops of water will appear. If the piece is taken out and held upside down, the water re- maining on the uppermost surface will sink down and appear on the lower surface, being, in fact, aided in this case by gravity. We thus see that the wood is highly permeable, and the fact that the spaces in the xylem elements contain bubbles of rarefied air, surrounded by a thin aqueous film, would of itself be sufficient to explain the rapid upward suction or attraction by means of the sur- » face tension force called into play. Moreover, the existence of a large number of pits between adjacent elements forms a great factor in the upward conduction. These pits, it must be re- membered, are not actual apertures, but are closed by the thin “middle lamella” that is present between (2) Detmer and Moore, “ Practical Plant Physiology.” SCIENCE-GOSSTP. adjacent cell-walls. ‘This thin lamella is highly permeable to a watery solution of salts. With regard to the physical forces brought into play in aiding the rapidity and continual upward flow of raw sap, two, namely ‘‘root-pressure” and ‘“‘ transpiration,” must be especially mentioned. The first of these is dependent upon that pressure that is set up during osmosis, and known as “ osmotic pressure,” which in itself is dependent upon the partial semi-permeability of the cell-wall and ecto- plasm. It has, moreover, been supposed that at certain points in the upward progress certain cells exist whose upper wall is more permeable than the lower wall to the same solution, and that these form fresh relays, whereby new force of pressure is attained.(*) The best way of demonstrating root-pressure is to procure a rapidly growing plant ina pot and cut off its upper foliage. To the end of the cut stem affix by means of a short rubber tubing a mano- meter, the space between cut surface and mercury being filled with oil. Ina few hours the level of the mercury in the two limbs will be found to be different, indicating an increase of pressure on that side connected with the cut stem. The ex- periment is easy to perform, and shows us what a considerable force may be obtained from this pressure, a force that is constantly employed in the forcing-up of sap. Although root-pressure forms a powerful factor in sap transmission, “‘ transpiration ” is even more efti- cacious. To study this we must first of all examine the terminations of the fibro-vascular bundles in the leaves, which are the main organs of transpiration. A section across the lamina of a leaf near its junction with the petiole will cut across several of the leaf-bundles as they come up from the stem. It will be seen on microscopical examination they are of a simpler formation than those in the stem or root, the xylem consisting of merely a few scattered annular or spiral tracheides, situated towards the upper surface of the leaf, and a small mass of succulent phloem on the under surface (see fig. 4). A thin layer of cambium may be present if near the petiole. The ultimate termina- tions in the mesophyll of these bundles consist of a few spiral tracheides, surrounded by a layer of elements that resemble embryonic phloem-cells; and these tracheides stretch in amongst the succulent, turgid cells of the middle layer, or “spongy parenchyma” of the leaf. In order to fully understand the process that goes on during transpiration we may inspect fig. 6, in which A represents a cell of the spongy parenchyma; B, C, D, and E are single elements of a fibro-vascular bundle, B being the terminal tracheide ; and F is the soil, with its dilute solution of salts. Let us now start with an equally concentrated solution of salts in all these receptacles. A is ex- (3) The fact that in the ultimate rootlets the cells become turgid also constitutes a great aid to root-pressure. SCIENCE-GOSSI/P. posed to the air, and as it presents a large surface evaporation takes place, and some of the water is withdrawn from the liquid in that part. In conse- quence more water will be taken in from B, the fluid in which will in turn become more concen- trated ; and the process extends through ¢, D, and rE. The result of this is that the liquid at F, which remains at the same concentration, will be con- tinuously drawn up towards A, and an upward flow of liquid is thus produced. The same process goes on in the plant, the water evaporated from the Fic. 3. Separate elements of the xylem and phloem :—, f, /,, pitted and reticulate tracheides ; a.¢., annular tracheide with ring-like thickenings; s.f., sieve-tube from the phloem: s. pl., sieve-plate, the lower one seen in surface view, the upper in section ; p., protoplasmic contents, etc., of the tube in a coagu- lated and shrunk condition. 8 leaves being Feplaced by some more of the dilute solution of earthy salts. It is this that constitutes the transpiration current. We see, then, that the two chief factors in the upward conduction of sap are root-pressure and Fig. 4. Trans-section across a blade of a leaf in region ot midrib :—ep,, epidermis; p., palisade parenchyma; sp., spongy parenchyma ; 0, bundle, with xylem on upper phloem on under aspect ; s¢., stomata. Ar transpiration from the green parts of a plant. Transpiration occurs in any part of a plant that possesses stomata (see fig. 5) in its epidermis; for it is through these that the evaporated water 331 escapes. At the same time, it must not be sup- posed that the rate of transpiration remains con- stant for any o6ne plant. It varies naturally with the hygrometric conditions of the air, more water Fic. 5. Section across a stoma :—v., the vestibule; ¢., epi- dermis; g., guard-cells; 7.c., respiratory-cavity ; sp., spongy parenchyma. being evaporated into “dry” air than into “ moist ” air. In this way the transpiration current varies also in rate, and it will be found that plants will only flourish in air that exactly suits their hygro- metric conditions, although they may to some extent become adapted to abnormal states of the atmosphere. It is found also that even root- Fic. 6. Diagram to illustrate the mechanics of transpiration ; for explanation see text. m,m are the walls of the tracheides that are adjacent to one another. pressure varies periodically, the flow being more active shortly after midday, and least in the early hours of the morning. The elaborated sap in the cells of the mesophyll of the leaf is conducted away from the leaf by means of the phloem elements on the under side of that organ, and, reaching the phloem of the stem, part of it is directly distributed by osmotic pro- cesses to the outlying cortex, another part being conducted and stored by some peculiar elements M 4 335) of the phloem strand known as the “ sieve-tubes” (see fig. 3). Each sieve-tube is an elongated cell, with its end walls thickened and perforated by a number of holes, through which at certain times of the year a direct protoplasmic and structural con- tinuity is established. ‘There is in each element a layer of parietal protoplasm, in which are nume- rous drops of mucilage; and adjacent to each adult sieve-tube is another elongated cell of smaller calibre, the ‘“‘ companion-cell,’ which is full of a granular protoplasm and has a_ well-defined nucleus. The sieve-tubes act chiefly in the dis- tribution of the organic food-material of the plant, the mucilage containing much proteid that gives a brownish coloration on addition of iodine. At certain times in the year the sieve-plates are closed on either side by a thick cushion of callose, the “callus,” and it is at these periods that the storing function of these elements comes into play. Inthe spring these cushions are dissolved, and the organic materials pass on and are further distributed. The downward progress is aided COLOURING OF WATER By JAMES T is well known, not alone to microscopists, that large or small bodies of water are some-- times coloured by the presence of various organ- isms, either animals or plants, often of microscopic size. Every roadside pond is liable to become of a thick soupy appearance and green colour from the multiplication in it of the very common Luglena, or some other of the unicellular algae, such as Protococcus. Frequently portions in similar locali- ties appear pink or red, owing to the existence in them of immense numbers of some of the Daphniae or water-fleas. In the two cases now to be de- scribed, the colour, though extremely marked and characteristic, was the result of the presence of less common organisnis. Early in October the ornamental water in the Botanical Gardens, Regent’s Park, appeared of an almost uniform pale green. On close examination this was seen to be due to some minute bodies diffused through the water; they were not merely floating on the surface, but seemed about equally distributed at all visible depths. Every twig and thread of water-weed, etc., at the margin was covered with what looked to the unassisted eye like tiny green balls, while in the quiet corners and backwaters towards which the breeze was blowing, the same bodies were collected in such quantities as to resemble thick light-green paint. Under the microscope it was found that the tiny balls were of irregular outline, and consisted of small algae in colonies of various sizes, formed of SCIENCE-GOSSIP chiefly by the pressure of turgescent cells in their immediate vicinity. There exist also sieve-plates on the side-walls of each sieve-tube, and by means of these organic material passes into the companion-cell, or else- where, where it is again dissolved, and passes, probably in some other form, by osmosis into the surrounding cortex or the cambiui. We have now studied some of the chief methods in which the nutrient fluids, the raw and elaborated sap, of a plant are conducted and distributed. During our observations we have seen that many physical forces or processes are brought into play, such as osmosis, evaporation, and capillarity. An exhaustive study of these various methods is re- quired in order to fully understand the true relations between physical forces and vital activity, and it must not be here supposed that the former are the only agents. In fact, the two classes aid one another in the furtherance of all these phenomena. 53 Ordnance Road, St. John's Wood, London, N.W. BY MICRO-ORGANISMS. BURTON. more or less spherical groups. These were made up of very numerous individuals, oval or pear- shaped, so minute that the green colour noticeable in the aggregations was not distinguishable in them. The groups were hollow and surrounded by a thin layer of jelly or mucilage. In many cases there seemed to be spines radiating from the individuals, but these have no real existence, and the appearance is probably due to the mucilage composed of the swollen outer cell-walls of the separate members not having yet entirely coalesced. : The colonies, I think, have no motion within themselves, but, being of nearly the same specific gravity as the water, are very readily moved about by any slight current, such as would be set up by wind, or by the sun shining on the surface and causing a difference of temperature between dif- ferent layers. Owing to the disengagement of gas under the influence of light, there is a tendency in the organisms to rise to the surface, while the gelatinous envelopes make them cling to one another and to any object with which they come in contact. Thus are larger and more noticeable masses formed, which, however, have very little cohesion, and disperse again readily. My some- what doubtful identification of Coelosphaeriam hutzingianum was confirmed by an authority who ° kindly took the trouble to examine specimens. A figure is given in Dr. Cooke’s “Introduction to Freshwater Algae,’ and the size of the individual SCIENCE-GOSSIP. cells is stated to be 2 to 5 w, and that of the families 60 wand more. The alga is probably not rare; but as if was not recognised by two or three microscopists to whom it was shown, it is most likely seldom noticed, and certainly does not com- monly occur in such numbers as to give any tint to the water it inhabits. Attempts to mount these algae in several pre- parations of glycerine were not successful, the groups breaking up. Chlor-zinc-iodine (Schulze’s solution) gave better results. So did some other fluid media; but the distinctive characteristics are hardly likely to be enduring. A somewhat more remarkable instance, both as to the colour and its cause, came under notice in January, 1898, in a farm pond at Hampstead. When first seen the water appeared of a rosy-pink tint, owing to a growth which had formed on dead leaves and debris of various kinds. About a week later, however, the pond presented a striking as- pect. When some distance from it, the water seemed to be of a beautiful intense red-purple, so exactly resembling what might be reflected from the sky in a fine winter sunset that I involuntarily turned round as I approached, almost expecting to see the sun setting behind. On closer examination it was seen that every leaf and twig at the bottom was of this brilliant tint. Some floating patches of Confervae looked like masses of vivid purple, without a particle of their normal green being visible. ‘The organisms producing this effect were spread in a thin layer over everything, and also formed delicate filaments lightly attached, which, however, were dissipated by the slightest move- ment. On agitating the Confervae or leaves, the colour-containing matter was at once diffused through the water. Under the microscope it was found to consist of exceedingly minute bodies, so small that a definite outline could scarcely be made out with a power of 500 diameters. These were surrounded by a thin layer of mucilage, and mostly aggregated into hollow spheres ; many were solitary, but some were gathered in masses. ‘The filaments it was almost impossible to examine in their original form, but they were composed of the same minute bodies disposed more or less in line. A friend kindly brought the matter under the notice of a professor of botany, who at once identified the organism as a bacterium now named Beggiatoa rosco-persicina. He referred me to a paper by Dr. Lankester, pub- lished in ** The Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science” for 1873, N.S., vol. xiii. Dr. Lankester there describes, under the name of Bacterium rubescens, an organism he discovered in some jars containing putrescent remains of animals and plants which had been undisturbed for a short time. The point to which he pays most atten- tion is the remarkable colour of the “ plastids,” which he considered characteristic of the species. There is little doubt that it is the 222 III same mentioned by Dr. Cooke in his “ British Freshwater Algae” as Plewrococeus rosco-persicinus Rabh., with the remark that it is “ certainly not a good pleurococcus.” He gives the size of the individual cells as ‘0015 to ‘004m. It is not mentioned in the same author’s “ Introduc- tion to Freshwater Algae.” Ido not see the reason for classing this bacterium with Geggiatoa, as to me it seems it would be more correctly considered as a Micrococcus. Apart from the colour, the most interesting fact about these lower forms of life is that, while ordinarily present to a small extent, occasionally, owing to favourable conditions of environment and food supply, they multiply so enormously as to have the effect described. Thus giving a visible example of what must occur invisibly during epidemics of diseases, such as influenza and plague, which, according to modern science, are caused by micro-organisms clistantly related to them. species 20 Fortune Green Road, West Hampstead, London, N.W. INTRODUGIION Te BRITISH {SoPIDERS: SMITH. AN By FRANK PERCY (Continued from page 304.) Tapinocyba incurvata Cb. (Walckenaera zncurvata in ** Spiders of Dorset.”) Length of male 1.7 mm. Cephalo-thorax yellow-brown, with a green tinge. Legs pale yellow, the femora being somewhat darker. Abdomen black, marked with numerous impressed dots. Tapinocyba dolosa Cb. (WNeriene dolosa in “« Spiders of Dorset.’’) Length of male 2 mm. The abdomen is of a globular form. extremely rare spider. Said to bean Tapinocyba ingrata Cb. (Walckenaera in- grata in ‘* Spiders of Dorset.”’) Length of male 1.5 mm. Cephalo-thorax dull yellowish-brown. Legs reddish- brown. Abdomen blackish-brown, tinged with green. A very rare spider. Tapinocyba subitanea Cb. (Walckenaera subitanea in ** Spiders of Dorset.”’) Length of male 1.2 mm. Cephalo-thorax brown. Abdomen blackish-brown, tinged with olive. Tapinocyba praecox Cb. ( Walckenaera praecox in ‘‘ Spiders of Dorset.”) Length of male 1.7 mm. Very similar to Z. swbétanea, but the curve of the posterior eyes is considerably stronger. 334 Cnephalocotes elegans Cb. Cnephalocotes laesus L. Koch. cotes tnterjectus Ch.) (Cnephalo- Cnephalocotes curtus Sim. Cnephalocotes silus Cb. Drawings of structural details will be given for the differentiation of these closely allied species. RSG G 2 AY (fa ie . Oh UN BiGy i. RaviaL Jotnrs or Mare Papi. a. Tapinocyba pallens, from above. b. T. subaegzualis, ditto. c. T. inmcurvata, side view. d. 7. subitanea, from above. e. T. praccox, ditto. f, Cnephalocotes obscurus, ditto. g. C. elegans, ditto. h. C. curtus, side view. 7. C. laesus, from above. 7. C. silus, ditto. -&. Troxochrus ignobilis, ditto. Z. Styloctetor broccha, ditto. m. S. broccha, n. S. penicillatus, ditto. o. S. penicillatus, above. Pp. Metapobactrus proninulus, ditto. 9. Pocadicnemis pumi- lus, ditto. +. P. pumilus, side view. s. Araconcus huntilis, from above. 7. A. crassiceps, ditto. u. A. vaporariorumt, ditto. v. Peponocranium ludicrum, ditto. w. Lophocarenum nenorale, ditto. x. L. parallelum, ditto. y. L. blackwallii, ditto. 2. ZL. mengei, side view. : side view. from Troxochrus ignobilis Cb. zgnobilts in ** Spiders of Dorset.”) Length of male 1.25 mm. Cephalo-thorax dark brown. Legs reddish-brown, the femora being the darkest. Abdomen sooty black. A rare species. ( Walckenaera Troxochrus hiemalis Bl. Length of male 1.7 mm., female 1.75 mm. The general colouring of this species is very similar to that of Z. zenobil/s. t is, however, con- siderably larger. SCIENCE-GOSSTIP. Araeonecus erassiceps Westr. affinitata Cb.) Length of male 1.7 mm. The caput is raised and overhangs the clypeus. (Walchkenaera Araeonecus vaporariorum Cb. In this species the caput is far lower than in A. crassiceps. The radial joint of the male palpus is extremely large, and projects greatly over the digital joint. GENUS PEPONOCRANIUM SIM. The posterior row of eyes is very strongly curved. The tibial spines are rather long, and are placed towards the end of the joint. Peponocranium ludicrum Cb. ( Walckenaera ludicra Bl.) Length. Male 1.5 mm., female 1.6 mm. In this species the cephalic eminence of the male is very large and conspicuous, sloping backward from the lower edge of the clypeus. Near the apex of this CEPHALO-THORACES OF MALE SPIDERS IN PROFILE. Fic. 2. a. Tapinocyba pallens. 6. T. subaequalis. c. T. incurvata. ad. T. subitanea. e. T. praecox. 7. Cnephalocotes obscurus. g. C. elegans. h. C. laesus. 7%. C. silus. 7. Troxochrus scabriculus. k. T. ignobilis. ¢. T. hiemalis. m. Metapo- bactrus prominulus. mn. Pocadicnemis pumilus. o. Arae- oncus humilis. p, A. vaporariorum. g. A. crassiceps. prominence are situated the posterior central eyes, the remaining eyes being placed in a transverse group some distance lower down upon its front part. (Zo be continued. ) SCIENCE-GOSSTP. THE ZEM-ZEM WATER ios) io) wn OF MECCA. By C. AINSworTH MITCHELL, B.A. (Oxon), F-.J.C. TP\HE Zem-zem well of Mecca is probably the most celebrated well in the world. ‘To all Mohammedans it is an object of especial venera- tion, whilst among Europeans it has the reputa- tion of having been the means of disseminating more than one outbreak of cholera. It is pointed to as the identical well from which Hagar filled her bottle of water when driven forth with her son into the wilderness, though the tradition appears to-have a modern origin. Various derivations of the name “ Zem-zem” have been given. According to some it is a word formed in imitation of the splashing of its waters; whilst others attribute its origin to “Zam! zam!” ‘Fill! fill!”), Hagayr’s exclamation at the well. Others again connect it the analysis of the Zem-zem water shows extreme pollution, or that the well has been the medium of spreading infection far and wide. The water is not only drunk in Mecca, but is exported to all parts of the world for the use of the faithful. and a great trade is done in the sale of bottles and vessels to the pilgrims. The curious tin bottle shown in the accompany- ing sketch is one of several brought back from Mecca by Sir Richard Burton in 1853, and given to the present writer by Lady Burton shortly before her death. Readers of Burton’s * Pilgrimage to Mecca ” will remember how, disguising himself as a Mohammedan dervish, and risking his life, he succeeded in making his way to Mecca and taking Tix BorrLE or WATER FROM HE HOLY WELL, MECCA. ACTUAL SIZE 34 IN. DIAMETER X 2 IN, WIDTH. with the mythology of the old fire-worshippers. Be this as it may, the well has long been regarded as peculiarly sacred, and miraculous properties are attributed to its water. Each pilgrim to Mecca makes a point of drink- ing and bathing in it; andas the supply is naturally limited, an Arab stands on the parapet of the well and draws up the water. A pilgrim then advances and receives the contents on his head. He drinks what he can, and the remainder of the water flows down over him and falls through a grating into the well, whence it is again drawn, to be poured over succeeding pilgrims. When we consider that this practice has been going on year after year, it is not surprising that part in all the ceremonies at the tomb of the prophet. One of the objects of his pilgrimage was to see the Zem-zem well and obtain some of its water, and his account of its properties is well worth quoting :—‘‘ The produce of Zem-zem is held in great esteem. It is used for drinking and religious ablution, but for no baser purposes. and the Meccans advise pilgrims always to break their fast with it. It is apt to cause boils, and I never saw a stranger drink it without a wry face. Sale is decidedly correct in his assertion : the flavour is a salt-bitter, much resembling an infusion of a tea- spoonful of Epsom salts in a large tumbler of tepid water. Moreover, it is exceedingly ‘ heavy ” to the digestion. For this reason Turks and other e) strangers prefer rain-water collected in a cistern, and sold for five farthings a gugglet. It was a favourite amusement with me to watch them whilst they drank the holy water, and to taunt their scant and irreverent potations.” It is interesting to compare with this account the results of the analysis made by the writer. On opening the bottles, which were hermetically soldered, they were found to be filled with water in which were suspended beautiful silken crystals, _ which proved to be a compound of tin, evidently derived from the action of the water upon the interior of the vessel. On filtering the water a clear and colourless filtrate was obtained, whilst the crystals and some earthy matter were left on the filter. The water had a slight odour, which was more perceptible on gently warming. The amount of solid matter left on evaporation was in the proportion of 219-5 grains per gallon. If this be compared with Thames water, which contains about 29 grains per gallon, or with New River water, with 25 grains, some idea will be obtained of the large proportion of salts which this figure represents. It was typical of a strongly saline mineral water. The chlorine, largely present in the form of common salt, was 69:3 grains per gallon, with which again compare Thames water with 1-4 grain and New River water with 18 grain. A large proportion of this chlorine was probably derived. from the soil; but at the same time it is not going too far to attribute some of it to the pilgrims, seeing that salt is excreted by the human skin. A water containing as much as 9 grains of chlorine per gallon is looked upon with suspicion, unless it is satisfactorily accounted for by the known nature of the bearing strata. The quantity of magnesium, which was probably all present in the form of magnesium sulphate or Epsom salts, was not so large as might have been expected from the descriptions which have been given of the taste of the water. It amounted to 6°6 grains per gallon. The degree of hardness was determined by the well-known Clarke’s test. In this the water is shaken with a solution of soap of known strength, which is added in gradually in- creasing quantities until a permanent lather is obtained. This does not happen until the whole of the carbonate of lime or its equivalent in other salts has been neutralised by the soap. The amount of soap solution used is expressed in terms of carbonate of lime, each degree corresponding to 1 grain per gallon. The hardness of the Zem-zem water was 43°, as against 17° for Thames water and 15° for New River water. Hence it will be seen that it was excessively hard. A very important test for judging the character of a water is the determination of the amount of “free” and organically combined ammonia. A large proportion of the ammonium was present in the form of salts, probably combined with part of the 336 SCIENCE-GOSSIP. chlorine, as ammonium chloride or sal-ammoniac. The combined organic ammonia amounted to 2-2 parts per million. A good drinking water does not contain as much as 0-1 part per million of such ammonia, and the high proportion found here is what one would expect in a highly contaminated water. The amount of nitrates was also indicative of pollution. The following table gives the quantity of the chief constituents of the water :-— Per cent. Per cent. Alominilmieeme 20) OS Potassium .. 243 Caleium SMT 8 5 to 1155) Ammonium .. 53 Silica BAY of Be ROU Chlorine... .. 69°3 Magnesium .. .. .. 6°6 Sulphates so GAthy/ Sapte oa do 84 ets) Nitrates... .. 19:9 It is interesting to note that on bacteriological examination the water was found to be absolutely sterile, though this is not surprising when we re- member that it had been sealed up in an air-tight vessel and in total darkness for over forty years. I have to thank Mr. Frank Percy Smith for having kindly made the excellent drawing from the original tin flask, illustrating this article. 57 Chancery Lane, London, March 1901. BUTTERFLIES OF THE PALAE- ARCTIC REGION. By HENRY CHARLES LANG, M.D., M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P. LonD., F-.E.S. (Continued from p. 300.) Genus COLIAS (continued). In the second section of Group I., about to be described, we have several species that are quite as brightly coloured as those of the first section ; and, as in the case of Colias regia and C. eogene, some that reach the maximum of intensity in the coloration of the genus. They are all charac- terised, however, by the absence of the basal patch on the h.w. of the ¢. 10. C. romanovi Gr.-Gr. Rom. Mem. vol. iv., 1890. 46—50 mm. g deep orange, with borders very much as in Colias aurora, but the nervures are not black. The border of the f.w. is not sharply defined at its inner edge, but shaded or streaked. It has a few yellow rays near the apex; there are also very frequently to be seen upon it some traces of yellow spots. In spite of this last character C. romanovt must come into this group; first, because the spotted border in the male does not seem to be the normal condition of the species, though four out of five males in my collection possess it. Indeed, the name maculata is sometimes given to this form. Secondly, because of its proximity to C. aurora and the allied species. Gr.-Gr. says of be ee SCIENCE-GOSSTIP. it, ‘ Elle se distingue de celles-ci par un trait fort caractéristique, c’est Vabsence des taches em- pesées.” It is so like C. aurora that the absence of the costal patch is the best distinguishing cha- racter. 9 greatly resembles the Q of C. aurora, but the light spots on the marginal border are not so large nor so distinct. ‘There is not so much basal shading, and the neuration is not black. It is quite possible that previously to 1890 this insect was confounded with C. aurora, especially as the ¢ often has a patch of light-coloured scales at the base of h.w. beneath the subcostal nervure. This, however, on a merely casual examination, will be seen to differ entirely from the structure found in the last group. Fringes orange-red mixed with yellow. Has. Turkestan, Pamir, Transalai. VI.—VII. e. Flies rapidly in rocky places. (R. & H.) Male. C. romanovi. 11. C. pamiri Alph. Rom. Mem. vol. iv., 1890. 49-52 mm. 3 very like C. myrmidone above, both in colour and markings, but f.w. have the borders less sharply defined internally, and more deeply in- dented; there is some yellow striation near the apex between the nervules. H.w. marginal border more indented than in C. myrmidone, and the sex mark absent. @ closely resembling that of @. myrmidone, but the ground colour is deeper orange. H.w. clearer orange and not shaded towards the base as in that species. The yellow spots are smaller, deeper yellow, and more completely placed within the black border. Disc. spot in both sexes rounded. U.s. f.w. with a white centre to disc. spot. H.w. more velvety in appearance, and of a green tint. Disc. spot smaller and bordered with rosy red, somewhat as in (. ficldii. HAB. Pamir. In marshy Alpine meadows, at considerable elevations. 12. C. regia Gr.-Gr. 45—50 mm. 3 not unlike C. myrmidone in the general cha- racter of the markings, but the ground colour of the Wings is deeper than in any other Colias, being of so deep an orange tint that it may almost be described as red, with violet reffection. @ varies greatly as regards the yellow spots on the black Sof border; there are at most four near the apex, but generally only yery slight traces of spots. U.w. with the marginal border broadly black, the basal the disc. spot large and deep orange. all the U.s. f.w. with central area red- area of wings more shaded than in 2. Fringes of wings bright red. dish-orange, costa and ou. mare. light green ; disc. spot white centred. spots. H.w. uniformly green, not,very dark. Disc. spot large and silvery. HAB. Turkestan, 'ransalai, Alai. VII. Flight impetuous and jerky, only in precipitous rocky places where vegetation is absent. (R. & H.) An ante-marginal row of black 13. C. thisoa Mén. Cat. Rais. p. 244, myrmidone var. Ld. Ann. Soc. Belg. xiii. pp. 20, 21. Le. B. HE. p. 57, pl. xiii. fig. 3, ¢ and 9. 40 —42 mm. 6 very greatly resembles C. myrmidone g, but besides the absence of the sex mark on the h.w. the marginal band of f.w. is of more even width throughout its whole length, and is more dis- tinctly veined with yellow, especially towards the apex. @ much more distinct from C. myrmidone, the ground colour of the wings is much deeper orange, the marginal bands are broader and more even, the spots upon it are fewer, smaller, and of a deeper yellow. H.w. always more shaded than in C. myrmidone, bat very variable ; some specimens resemble C. vomanovi in coloration; others have the h.w. very dark, sometimes almost entirely black. The discoidal spot is conspicuous ancl of a reddish- orange colour. U.s. f.w. orange with a white- centred disc. spot. Ou. marg. greenish-yellow, with three black spots. H.w. greenish-yellow with a pearly disc. spot, and some reddish marks at the base, and parallel to ou. marg. Fringes not very conspicuously red, in some specimens being even light yellow, especially on h.w. HAB. Caucasus, Ararat, Turkestan, Altai, Ala- Tau-Kuldja, Tarbagtai, and Tianschan Mountains. At elevations of 7,000 and $,000 feet. VI.—VIII. (To be continued.) OBJECT LESSONS IN ScCHOOLS.—The Board of Education has issued a circular giving special courses of object lessons on common things. ‘These have been sent to the masters of schools in country districts. ‘They are only suggestive, and much is left to the masters with regard to their adaptation. The object of these lessons is to introduce to rural children instruction upon common things with which they meet every day. Some of the subjects suggested are: “ Birds and their Habits.” ‘* Life- History of Common Insects,” ‘* Growth and Habits of some Wild and Garden Flowers,” * Trees and the Commoner Kinds of Timber,” ** Living Things in Still and Running Water,” ‘Soils, Mud, Sand, Clay, and Gravel,” ‘‘ Air, Weather-Charts, Rainfall, Frost and Heat, Ventilation,” ‘Breathing, the Heart and Blood,” ‘Clothing and Warming,” ‘‘ Chemistry of Food of Man, Beast, and Plant,” ** Levers and Pulleys,” ‘* Natural History Calendars,” ‘* Outdoor Studies in Geography and Land-Measuring.” LAND AND FRESHWATER SCIENCE-GOSSIP. MOLLUSCA OF HAMPSHIRE. By LIONEL HE. Abams, B.A., WITH KIND ASSISTANCE OF B. B. WooDWARD, F.L.8., F.G.S. (Continued from page 303.) Buliminus montanus Drap. Selborne (W. J.). Buliminus obscurus Mill. Generally distributed. Var. albina Moq., Winchester (J. W. Taylor); Ventnor (A. L.). Cochlicopa lubrica Mill. Common. Var. lubricoides Fér., Christchurch (C. A.); var. hyalina Jeff., Isle of Wight (A. L.). Azeca tridens Pult. No type recorded. tallina Dup., Petersfield (C. A.). Caccilianella acicula Mill. Above chalk-pit, Afton Down, Isle of Wight. Also from Holocene deposits in the Test Valley, at Ventnor and at Totlands Bay. Pupa secale Drap. A colony on the face of the cliff near Blackgang Chine (A. L.). Pipa cylindracea Da Costa. Common and very fine in woods near Winchester (L. E. A.) ; Christ- church (C. A.); Isle of Wight (A. L.). Var. albina Moq., Christchurch (C. E. W.); Isle of Wight (A. L.). See also Proc. Malac. Soc. i. 296. Pupa muscorum Linn. North Hants, rare (H. P. F.) ; Christchurch (C. EH. W.); Hengistbury (C. A.) ; round Havant (C. E. W.); Isle of Wight (A. L.). Vertigo minutissima Hartm. Ventnor (C. A.) ; subfossil in calcareous loam, Isle of Wight (A. L.). Vertigo antivertigo Drap. Christchurch (C. A.); Ventnor, rare (A. L.). Vertigo pygmaca Drap. Highcliff and Hengistbury, a few (C. A.); Ventnor (A. L.). Vertigo moulinsiana Dup. Near Bishopstoke. Balea perversa Linn. Isle of Wight (C. A.); round Havant on flint walls (C. E. W.); frequent in New Forest (C. A.). Var. simplea Mogq., two specimens, Havant (A. L.). Clausilia laminata Mont. North Hants, common (H. P. F.); Winchester (lL. E. A.); Havant (C. EH. W.); Isle of Wight (A. L.). Clausilia bidentata Strom. Common. Var. albina Mogq., Christchurch (C. A.); Havant (A. L.). Clausilia rolphit Gray. Common in woods near Winchester, Petersfield (L. E. A.); Racton, Finch- dean, abundant (C. E. W.). Succinea putris Linn. Common. Succinea elegans Risso. Common. Carychium minimum Mill. Common. Leuconia bidentata Mont. Whitecliff Bay. Ancylus fluviatilis Mill. North Hants, common (H. P. F.); Christchurch in Avon and Stour (C. A.). Var. albida Jeft., Somerford Brook (C. A.); var. stricta Morch. Velletia lacustris Linn. Hayling (W. J.); Havant (C. E. W.). Var. albida Jeff., River Stour, from Christchurch, where only a white form is found (C. A.); Hayling (W. J.). Var. crys- Limnaea auricularia Linn.; Christchurch, in both rivers, never fine (C. A.). LTimnaea pereger Mill. Common in North Hants. Limnaea stagnalis Linn. North Hants, common (A. P. F.): Christchurch, in R. Stour (C.A.). Limnaea palustris Mill. Widely distributed. Var. elongata Moq., Isle of Wight (W. J.); var. lacunosa Ze. (J. W. Taylor). Limnaea truncatula Mill. Widely distributed. Limnaea glabra Mill. Holmsley (C. A.). Planorbis corneus Winn. Christchurch (C. A.) Itchin at Winchester (IF. J.). Planorbis nautileus Linn. Type not recorded. Var. crista Linn.; moderately abundant in Somerford Brook (C. A.). Planorbis albus Mill. Widely distributed through- out the county. Planorbis carinatus Mill. North Hants, common (H. P. F.); common in south of county. Planorbis marginatus Drap. Common in south of county, but not mentioned in list for north. Planorbis vorter Linn. Much less local round Christchurch than P. spirorbis (C. A.); Lang- stone (C. E. W.). Not included in Mr. Fitz- gerald’s list for North Hants. Not noticed in Isle of Wight (A. L.). : Planorbis spirorbis Linn. Widely distributed throughout the mainland and also in the Isle of Wight. Planorbis contortus Linn. Langstone (C. EH. W.) ; Gal, 1, 15) Planorbis fontanus Lightf. North Hants, rare (H. P. F.); Christchurch, rare (C. A.). Physa fontinalis Linn. Sandown, Isle of Wight (A. L.); rare in North Hants (CH. P. F.); Havant (C. E. W.); Christchurch and district, common (C. A.). Physa hypnorum Linn. Only two examples at Christchurch (C. A.); Langstone (C. E. W.); Havant (A. L.). Paludestrina stagnalis Bast. Southampton (J. C. Melvill’s Coll. fide E. R. Sykes). Paludestrina jenkinsi Smith. Specimens labelled “ Hydrobia ferrusina, Hampshire, Sowerby,” in the Jeffreys collection at Washington, U.S., prove to be this species. Bithynia tentaculata Linn. Widely distributed throughout the county. Var. albida (Rimmer), North Hants, rare (H. P. F.); Var. producta Menke, Tuckton (C. A.); MZ decollatum (Jeff.), Holmsley (C. A.) Somerford (C. A.); North Hants, common (To be concluded.) SCIENCE-GOSSIP. THE question of the preservation of the stones at Stonehenge has been placed in the hands of the Charities and Records Committee, to whom the subject of ancient monuments has been referred. Mr. FRED PULLAR, who in conjunction with Sir John Murray recently published an extensive survey of the depths of many Scottish freshwater lochs, died at the end of February while rescuing a young lady who had fallen through the ice on Airthrey Loch. It has been decided to erect a marble bust of Dr. Gerhard Armauer Hansen, the discoverer of the bacillus of leprosy, in the Lungegard Hospital, Bergen, on the occasion of his sixtieth birthday in July next. The place chosen is the institution where he discovered the bacillus. WE have received from the University Corre- spondence College Press a copy of the Matricula- tion Directory for 1901. It is a useful guide to those intending to enter for the examination in June or later, as it not only gives a list of text- books, but also clearly indicates the style of ques- tions and answers required. THE well-known botanist Dr. J. C. Agardh, of Lund, sometimes called the Nestor of European botanists, died on January 17th at the age of eighty-seven. He was chiefly known for his work in marine algae, and had been for some years a correspondent of the Section of Botany at the Paris Academy of Sciences. WE have already referred to “Man,” the new monthly magazine issued under the auspices of the Anthropological Institute. The first three numbers are now before us, but considering that each con- tains only sixteen pages of literary matter with one plate, the charge to the public of a shilling per number is decidedly high compared with other magazines. Mr. HARry F. WitHERBY, who has lately made an expedition to the White Nile in search of birds, is commencing in ‘‘ Knowledge” a series of illus- trated articles descriptive of the country, its people, its wild animals, and its birds. In the first instalment the author deals with his journey by river and the Desert Railway from Cairo to Khartoum. Wer have received from Mr. Charles Morley, Museum Press, Lockwood, Huddersfield, twelve sheets of Nature notes for the months of the year. They are sold at one shilling the set. Opposite each date the compiler of these sheets places some Nature note. For instance, January 4th: “Redbreast whistles.” January 16th: ‘“ House sparrows chirp.” February 5th: ** Don’t dig under chestnuts.” February 10th: “Jackdaws frequent church steeples” (presumably because it was a Sunday this year). May 10th: “ Cockchafer flies,” a habit we have also observed on their appearance in certain human beings. 339 His MAsesty THE KING has signified to the President and .Council of the Marine Biological Association his pleasure in becoming the Patron of the Association. WE have received “ Proceedings of the Twenty- first Annual Meeting of the Society for Promotion of Agricultural Science,” held at St. Louis, U.S.A., when Mr. William Trelease reviewed the advantage of public Botanic Gardens, working in conjunction with school plots in rural districts, for educational purposes. It appears that much has already been done in this direction. Dr. HUGH ROBERT MILL, F.R.S.E., lectured be- fore the Royal Meteorological Society at its last meeting upon climate and the effects of climate. He specially drew attention to the difference be- tween weather and climate, and exhibited a number of lantern slides showing the effect of climate in creating land forms. Messrs. ALEXANDER and MARTIN HEYNE, sons of the well-known Leipsic naturalist, Ernst Heyne, have opened rooms at 110 Strand, London, W.C., as an agency for the supply of natural history speci- mens, apparatus, and museum accessories. We understand they have a large stock of insects, especially of Palaearctic butterflies. It will be remembered that the former gentleman was con- nected with the authorship of Riihl’s book on this subject, and other works. FOLLOWING the plan adopted by the Cornell University, which issues ‘“ Nature Study Leaflets,” the Agricultural Education Committee, of 10 Queen Anne’s Gate, London, is now publishing a series of Teacher’s Leaflets entitled ‘‘Nature-Knowledge.” They are edited for the Committee by Mr. Wilfred Mark Webb, F.L.S., and are intended for distribu- tion in schools, especially in rural districts. They are illustrated, and will doubtless appeal to the scholars as well as to the teachers. Four of these have already been published; No. 2, ‘‘ Lilies from Leaves,” being the most interesting. Messrs. N. ANNANDALE and H.C. Robinson, Hon. Research Assistant in the Zoological Department of University College, Liverpool, are about to leave England for a year’s residence in the Malay Peninsula. They intend to reside in the neigh- bourhoods of Patani and Biseret, with the object of making collections in all branches of natural history. Especial attention will be paid to records of pre-Malayan tribes of Negrito origin. On the outward voyage Mr. Robinson proposes to study the plankton of the Red Sea and Indian Ocean by pumping sea water through fine silk nets. THE preparations for the British Antarctic Ex- pedition are now practically completed. ‘The vessel, named the ‘“‘ Discovery,” has been launched in Dundee and is to be equipped in London. ‘The ship has been built on whaler lines, but with con- siderably greater strength than is usual. to with- stand ice pressure. The expedition will leave in July or August, arriving in Melbourne in Novem- ber. Commander R. F. Scott, R.N., is naval officer in charge; the scientific department being under the direction of Professor Gregory, of Melbourne University, assisted by Mr. Hodgson as biologist, and Mr. Schakleton as physicist. Those of our readers who are interested in Antarctic expeditions will find on p. 341 of this number of SCIENCE- Gossip a review of the book by M. Borchgrevink on the enterprise financed by Sir George Newnes. Sh cs eS .. 8.50 am. ©. 2:42 pms seg 20) 23.7 Oy oo MOEAS Bia Ge Calby jot, oo tka Git oe EE Position at Noon. Souths. Semi- R.A. Dec. Apr. him. diameter. h.m. ad WARD 5a 8 65 JKOWRES) Eig oa BHM ca PRINS 2. Oat Re 1G) G5 INOVBIEO Agim, og «CRM 56 (LB 2.31 5S. Ph) a5 WORE Ming og (PHIM oo. Ud bo Sh IN Ig Venus BY 65 JUL paige, EEO EG OBR oc) 22) INE iG) 66. IDLER Bi 65 ESM os WES) 56 SANE PY on JUUEB EY fiji, go CE 64 PH) oo, I Ay ane Mars 5 8.5271 p.m... 56” .. 9.46 .. 16.44N. 1) 56 Shlbel join, 5. Gl” op BEES cou ilt-y IMs 2D teen Ado) Ds ep Aa tates 9:04 coe lokOMN Jupiter .. 15 5.243 am... 185 .. 18.55 .. 22.405. Saturn 15 Bek Bam ag 048" oo MGM Bile {Sp Uranus NBy 65 eee Bat, 5. - UMM! 45 lh oe Rin Se Neptune 13) 55 GENRES) youaa 121! 5.46 .. 22.14N. hm. han. HU See pie ee Le20aems) lanai Apis 2) 2) a.oeaaemn: New ~ Ue oo Bhatieuak We OS = PB) Ge 2 Geile) janie In apogee April 5th at 6 a.m.; and in perigee at 9 p.m. on the 18th. METEORS, hm. 2 Mar.11to May 31 Draconids Radiant K.A.17.32 Dec. 50N. Apr. 5 o 10. Lyrids* a 5 18:3)" 83, ao N- ese) » 12 (42 Herculis) ,, na UBS -g ky Gill IN 5 12 to June3 Coronids 6 5 T5408 62S ING eS MUS » 2d BSerpentids ,, 5 15.24 5, \ 7 N - A) (u Serpentis) ,, on ee Gees 2S. > 20 (€ Hereulis) ,, ¥5 17.57 32 N. 5, 29 to May 6 y Aquaridst ,, 22.28 25. = Principally visible April 17 to 22. + Just before sunrise. = = ) ro) iy CONJUNCTIONS OF PLANETS WITH THE ° / BATTLE voy. .. Jupiter*+.. Noon -. Planet 3.50 8. er at ee po enn aq 7 joeal | Se “0 3.12 S. rage Cmises so | Alero 55 ) Rim Se Cay ets: op US oo co WGMNS of i [Di oc oy ere St oe ee ee ass co A j\Out 2 Ee ae MILs oe, * Daylight. + Below English horizon. OCCULTATIONS, AND NEAR APPROACH. Angle Angle Magni- Dis- from Tie- trom Apr. Star. tude. appears. Vertex. appears. Vertex. him. co hm. 2 4 ..72Virginis 5'5 7.39 p.m. .. 239 near approach. So cour Seayol 44 45 teas 56° il 44 shea 4 Way SP woo! as All Seta) Tam. ao St ee ASDO acre see THE SUN seldom has disturbances visible, but still should be watched. A small interesting group was on the disc early in March. MERCURY reaches its vreatest western elonga- tion, 27° 48’, at 6 a.m. on April 4th, and two hours later attains the part of its orbit most distant from the Sun; yet from the position of the two bodies in the heavens, only 37 minutes elapse between their rising, so that the planet cannot be observed. VENUS is too near the Sun for observation. \ JUPITER and SATURN are both near each other in Sagittarius, and rise in the south-east about two and a half hours before midnight at the beginning of the month and about two hours earlier at the end. Saturn’s rings are still open beyond his poles: on 15th his diameter is 15'"6, whilst the minor axis of his outer ring is 15/'-96. URANUS, still in the southern part of Ophiuchus, rises about two hours earlier than the two brighter planets. NEPTUNE is getting too far to the north-west for very favourable observation, although he does not set until after midnight. MARS is in Leo all the month, a little north-west of Regulus. Its apparent diameter is rapidly decreasing. Two drawings, made by aid of Wray’s 3-inch SCIENCE-GossiIP telescope and the 216 power, are appended to show how much a small good instrument will delineate of Mars, even when unfavourably placed, as he has been during this opposition. The long funnel-shaped dark marking on the second figure was called the Kaiser February 12d. oh. 46m. a.m., 1901. February 2id. sh. 15m., a.m., 1901. Sea by Proctor and Green. but is now known as Syrtis Major. The dark pate h nearest the central meridian, in the southern part of the first figure, is now known as Sinus Sabaeus, but was formerly called Herschel II. Strait. he two long dark markings in the eastern part of this figure an the Indus and Hydaspes. ‘The north Polar Cap is readily visible in both figures. THE New STAR IN PpERSEUS.—Particulars of this interesting object will be found on page 524 in this number of SCIENCE-GOSSIP. THE LEoNIDS—An observer at York Factory : Hudson Bay, on November 15th, 1900, describes a “very general display of shooting stars. Some very big ones, north-west to south- east. Sky full in shoals. November 16, shooting stars seen until daylight.” This communication has been sent to the President of the Toronto Astronomical Society through Mr. R. F. Stupart, Director of the Toronto Observatory and Superintendent of the Meteoro- logical Service of Canada. SPECTRA OF SUN AND JUPITER on p. 318. The double line in the diagram at 1000 should be marked D and the line at 800 C. SCIENCE-GOSSIP. CONDUCTED BY C. AINSWORTH MITCHELL, B.A.OXON., F.I.C., F.C.S. INTERNATIONAL ATOMIC WEIGHTS. -—The Atomic Weights Committee of the German Chemical Society has just issued its report for 1901, in which it has drawn up two tables of atomic weights. In one of these the values are based upon Oxygen = 16, and Hydrogen = 1:008; and in the other upon H = 1,and 0 = 15°88. ‘The Committee suggests that the former shall be termed ‘“ Inter- national Atomic Weights,’ and be used wherever absolute values are required, as in physico-chemical researches. For the second table (H = 1), which, on the whole, is more convenient, especially for teaching purposes, the title ‘‘ Didactic Atomic Weights” is proposed. Argon, helium, kryp- ton, neon, thulium (= 171) and xenon find a place in these tables, which include in all 76 elements. DISADVANTAGES OF ALUMINIUM AND THEIR REMEDY.—The great expectations which were formed of the prospects of aluminium, when first it was obtained at a relatively cheap rate, have, un- fortunately, not been realised. As time went on it was discovered that, contrary to what was first believed, it was readily acted upon by solutions of many salts, by acids, including vinegar, and especially by alkalies, though it excelled copper in the resistance which it offered to nitric acid. To obviate this drawback it is now frequently coated with a layer of silver ; but this in itself is no easy matter, for alunfininm is so porous that it retains water and impurities obstinately, with the result that bubbles are formed in the electro deposit, or that this peels off in the polishing process. ‘The chief remedy is to thoroughly cleanse the alu- minium, and to give it a preliminary coating with another metal, preferably copper, before silvering. Several patents have recently been taken out for processes on these lines. Another great drawback to the general use of aluminium is that it has hitherto been very difficult to unite two separate pieces of the metal. This objection, however, will be probably met by the welding process of Heraeus, which has recently been protected in several countries. In this the welding is so complete that the juncture is practically invisible, and the aluminium can be rolled out to a thin sheet without separating into its component parts. ALLEGED CONVERSION OF PHOSPHORUS INTO ARSENIC.— Some years ago, in an address to the British Association, Sir William Crookes brought forward an ingenious speculation to account for the remarkable relationship which exists between the different elements. He suggested that the whole of these might possibly have been derived from a single primeval element, which as it cooled condensed under recurring conditions (except as to temperature) to form the different substances now known to us as “elements,” 347 beginning with the lightest, hydrogen, and ending with the heaviest, uranium. ‘This process might be compared to the beats of a pendulum in which the elements which condensed at definite points on the forward stroke were allied in their properties to those condensing at the same points in the return stroke. It was also suggested that this primeval ele- ment might be helium, which had not then been clis- covered, and the existence of which had onty been inferred from its absorption lines in the solar spec- trum. Now, in this speculation. for which of course there is no experimental proof, we have something closely akin to the germinal idea of the * philo- sopher’s stone ” of the mediaeval alchemists. It is quite conceivable that it is only for the want of suffi- ciently powerful means, 7.c. the ‘lapis philosopho- rum,” that we are unable to decompose the bodies © we now call “elements” into their hypothetical constituents or to convert them into one another. In fact, during the last few years more than one claim has been brought forward for such a trans- mutation. The American *argentaurum,” which professed to be gold produced from silver, is a case in point, but the examination of the process by other chemists showed that any gold in the final product was there originally. A still more recent instance is the alleged conversion of phosphorus into arsenic. which, as is well known, show many remarkable relationships in their properties. Fittica claimed that when phosphorus was heated with nitre it was partially converted into arsenic. His experiments were repeated by C. Winkler, however, who came to the conclusion that any arsenic found by Fittica must have been present as an impurity in the phosphorus. This is confirmed by Noelting and Feuerstein, who have recently shown it is not an easy matter to obtain phosphorus absolutely free from arsenic, although the latter can be eliminated by distilling the phosphorus twice in a current of steam. ALCOHOL FROM SAwpwts?.—It is generally known, especially since the recent investigations into the cause of arsenic-poisoning in beer, that starch is converted into a fermentable sugar, glucose, when treated with dilute acid. Dr. Simonsen, of Christiania, has recently solved the difficult problem of obtaining a similar product from sawdust. Cellulose, which is one of the principal constituents of sawdust, is closely allied to starch, but all attempts to “invert” it with sulphuric or hydrochloric acid had previously proved unsuccessful. The first experiments were made with cellulose (paper). which was treated with dilute acid under pressure. The conditions for the best yield of sugar were thus obtained. Then, basing his process on the results of ex- periments on both a small and manufacturing scale, Simonsen succeeded in obtaining about 22 per cent. of fermentable sugar from sawdust, the inversion being made in a closed boiler under a pressure of about eight atmospheres. The sugar was apparently entirely derived from the cellulose, the allied compound. lignin, being unaffected by the treatment. The vield of sugar from pine sawdust was greater than from fir saw- dust, but the largest quantity (about 31 per cent.) was obtained from birch sawdust. Of this sugar about 75 per cent. was fermentable, and the spirit distilled from the fermented liquid was remarkably pure and of good flavour. About 12 gallon of absolute alcohol was obtained from 225 lbs. of sawdust. 348 SCIENCE-GOSSIP. CONDUCTED BY B. FOULKES-WINKS. M.R.P-S. EXPOSURE TABLE FOR MARCH. The figures in the following table are worked out for plates of about 100 Hurter & Driffield. For plates of lower speed number give more exposure in proportion. Thus platesoi 50 H. & D. would require just double the exposure. In the same way, plates of a higher speed number will require proportionately less exposure. Time, 10 A.M. to 2 P.M. Between 9 and 10 a.m. and 2 and 3 P.M. double the required exposure. Between 8 and 9 A.M. and 3 and 4 P.M. multiply by 4. SUBJECT F.5°6; F.8 F.11| F.16, F. 22) ¥.32 | F.45| F. 64 SenpnUS S75 || soo |) See | ea || So | ee t Open Tanaceapel oa 1 1 1 1 xt st 1 and Shipping | j r20, 60 32 6 5 a z Landscape,with dark fore- ground, Street -3s ids “s i z 1 2 i Scenes, and | | Groups ) Pee eget 2h este fel, |. 22] — |i LightInteriors| 4 | 8 161 32/1/;2 41 8 Dark Interiors | 16 32 1 2 4 8 16 30 The small figures represent seconds. large figures minutes. The exposures are calculated for sunshine. If the weather is cloudy, increase the exposure by half as much again ; if gloomy, double the exposure. ROYAL PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY.—At the annual general meeting held on Tuesday, February 12th. 1901, in the Societys Rooms at 66 Russell Square, W.C., Mr. Thomas R. Dallmeyer, F.R.A.S., the President. in the chair, the Society’s ‘Silver Progress Medal’ was formally presented to Dr. R. L. Maddox. Mr. Bedding, Editor of the ** British Journal of Photography.” received the medal on behalf of Dr. Maddox, who was unfortunately unable to be present, owing, we are sorry to say, to age and infirmities preventing him travelling to London. The President expressed the pleasure it gave him at being privileged to make this presenta- tion. Dr. Maddox has devoted much time and study to Photomicrography, of which he was a very brillant exponent: but the reason the Society had awarded him this Progress Meda] was for the introduction of the gelatino-bromide of silver dry plate. Of photography it might truly be said that the introduction of the gelatino-bromide dry plate had done more for the art than had anysingle step of progress since the days of Daguerre. Of the many thousands who practise the art to-day, from the operator in the studio to the amateur who is satisfied with a little ‘“‘snapshotting” on his or her holiday tour, all are more or less indebted to Dr. Maddox. The “Journal” of the Society is just to hand, and we see that as yet there are only two meetings down for April: they are April 2nd, Lantern meeting, when Mr. Charles Reid will give an illustrated lecture entitled ‘‘ Animals and Birds in their Native Haunt”; and April 9th, an ordinary meeting, when Mr. Wm. Webster will read a paper entitled ‘* Notes from Five Years’ ;Work with X- Rays.” TELEPHOTO-LENSES.—Messtrs. Staley & Co. have submitted to us for inspection and trial a new tele- attachment, made by Bausch & Lomb, of Rochester. U.S.A. The leading feature of the attachment is that it can be fitted to any existing lens of a given focus. ‘They are made in various sizes and nega- tive power, so that all that is necessary is to send through a dealer the focal length of any lens that it is desired to convert into a telephoto-lens, and a suitable attachment can be supplied. These are so made that they may very readily be attached to a lens, and as easily detached when not in use. They are of moderate magnifying power, enlarging from two to four and a half times, and can be used on any ordinary camera with moderate amount of extension. These attachments are very low in price. varying from 40s. upwards, according to the focal length of lens to which they are to be at- tached. We understand that these lenses can also be supplied as a complete telephoto-lens and shutter; that is to say. a rapid symmetrical lens, with Bausch & Lomb shutter and negative attachment. price complete for }-plate being 75s. At the usual distance the lenses commonly em- ployed for photography are all that is necessary for satisfactory results. When, however, it is impossible to approach close enough to the object to secure an image of the desired size with the ordinary lens the telephoto-lens is the only re- source. The amateur of experience knows how often this happens. NOVELTIES.—Mr. Arthur Rayment, of Forest Gate, E., has introduced several novelties in con- nection with folding film cameras. The “ Adapter Guénault ” is a small metal dark slide that enables the possessor of a film camera to use ordinary glass dry plates or cut films. It is easily adapted, and requires no alteration to the camera, the dark slide being held in position merely by friction. We are convinced that this simple little arrangement will prove a real boon to users of folding Kodaks. who will now be enabled to make one or two exposures, and to develop them at once, with- out having to wait until a whole spool of film is exposed before development is pos- sible. Mr. Rayment is also adapting to folding - Kodaks the ‘“ Steinheil Anastigmat” lens working at F. 6-3, and fitted to Steinheil’s time and instan- taneous shutter. Thus the value of a folding Kodak can be greatly increased and its efficiency modernised. We must not overlook that useful little novelty of Guénault’s, a pneumatic shutter release, which can be rapidly applied to any fold- ing Kodak, and acts in conjunction with the shutter supplied with the camera. This will be found especially valuable to amateurs who have a difficulty in holding the camera steady during exposure. It will be useful also for time exposure. for it obviates the necessity of touching the camera. Whilst on the subject of folding Kodak cameras we would remind our readers that the Kodak Company are now supplying spoois with four exposures in two separate pieces, permitting two exposures to be made. These two can be removed from the camera, and another two-ex- posure film remains in the camera for future use. SCIENCE-GOSSIP. PHOTOGRAPHY FOR By B. FoutKeEs-Winks, M.R.P.S. BEGINNERS. (Continued from page 310.) SECTION I. CAMERAS (continucd). AUTOMATIC CHANGING CAMERAS.— Our next illustration is representative of a very large class of hand-cameras, all more or less alike, but varying’ in price according to finish and quality of lens and shutters. The “Midge” (see ante, p. 277) is a very cheap camera of this type; it is fitted with single lens, has a time and instantaneous shutter, and two Brilliant finders; capacity twelve j-plates and register for number of exposed plates. This camera is manufactured by Messrs. Butcher & Son, of Blackheath, the retail price being a guinea. It is also made in three other qualities, all fitted with rapid rectilinear lenses, ranging from £2 10s. to €4 4s., according to quality of lens and general finish. The *Salex” hand-camera is another .type of automatic changing hand-camera. It is well made, and has a very good rapid rectilinear lens fitted with Bausch & Lomb ‘ Unicum” time and instan- taneous shutter, iris diaphragms, rack focussing, ig. 1. Tim “SALEX.” and two special Brilliant real image finders. ‘This pattern is manufactured by the City Sale and Ex- change Company, price £5 5s. No. 2 “Salex” is fitted with “Cooke” lens working at 63, and has rising front each way. Price £10 10s. The “ Bullard” camera is quite a new system of automatic changing, and is of American manufac- ture. Itis made only for 5x4 plates, and has a IG. 2: Tne 5 x t “ BULLARD.” capacity of 18 plates of that size. The changing is very rapid and sure, and each plate is registered as itis exposed. ‘The front of the camera, carrying -in the diaphragm slot of the 349 lens and shutter, is made to fold, and when closed up forms a neat leather-covered box. ‘The lens is of the rapid rectilinear type, and the shutter is a Bausch & Lomb time and instantaneous. with pneumatic release. The camera is fitted with a reversing finder, thus enabling it to be used vertically or horizontally. Price ¢+ 15s. The “Tella” is an automatic changing flat film camera, and is of an exceedingly neat appearance. It is very small and compact. The changing is one of the most ingenious inventions that we have seen applied to cameras. ‘The films are inserted in the chamber at the back of the camera in packets of twenty-five, the film chambers being made to hold any number up to fifty. There is a small cellu- loid separator between every film. Each serves to separate a film from the rest as it becomes the front one. This film is then isolated by means of a septum that is automatically inserted between the first film and the remainder, thus preventing THE “ TELLA.”’ Fic. 3. the light acting upon any but the one film exposed in front of the septum. After this film has been exposed, it is passed away into a chamber for exposed films, ancl the number registered, whilst by the same action another film is brought into posi- tion for exposing. In connection with this changing system, there is a very pretty device which shows the operator whenever there is a film ready for exposure. ‘The films may be purchased in packets of twenty-five, and the parcel inserted bodily. They may be also purchased in packets of twelve of any manfacture, in which case they are inserted into the camera one at a time, and a small separator placed between each. ‘Thus it will be seen that any make of film may be used. The shutter is a very efficient one, and works lens. It is a pneumatic regulation shutter, with a range of speed from 54, to 5 a second and time. ‘The finders are of the ** Real Image Brilliant” type, and are very carefully adjusted. The ;-plate “Tella,” fitted with an ordinary . 8 rapid rectilinear lens, costs £7 17s. 6d. The No. 3 ‘ Tella,” 4-plate size, fitted with the ‘* Cooke ~ anastigmat lens, working at F. 6°3, and having risine front for both vertical and _ horizontal pictures, is priced £14 14s. The No. 4 “Tella” for 5x 4 films, and fitted with 6-inch Cooke lens, is £19 19s. All these instruments are beautifully finished, and for flat film cameras are undoubtedly the best on the market. The “Frena” is another form of hand-camera for use with cut films. ‘The films are inserted in the camera in packets of twenty, the capacity of each 3D camera being forty. or two packets. In this system the films are notched along each side, and a piece of mill-board is packed between each film, which is also notched so as to alternate with the notching on the film, and it is upon this notching that the whole system of changing the film depends. This is an exceedingly clever device, and, if the instructions are followed, the changing is both rapid and sure. The “Frena” is made in box form, in several sizes and types; also as a folding camera, with detachable box. Fic. 4. THE * FRENA.” The No. 00, memorandum size, viz. 34 x 22 in., is the smallest size made, and is very useful for travellers, where bulk is a consideration. Although the picture is small, it is a very pretty size, lend- ing itself admirably for enlargement purposes. The lens is a * Beck” 43-in. achromatic, working aye 1, IL, IDL IG, IR, Be, eral WL Movs Siliemne Frena” has a fixed focus; that is to say, every object over 14 ft. distance will be fairly in focus. It is fitted with time and instantaneous shutter, working from 3, to 2 of a second and time. There is an indicator to record how many films have been exposed ; it is also fitted with a swing back. and with two fenders. one vertical, the other horizontal. The price of camera fitted with forty films is £2 18s. 6d. The No. 0 * Frena” is similar in every respect to the No. 00, except that it is fitted with Beck's “ Autograph ” Rapid Rectilinear lens, with a work- ing aperture of F. 8. The price. with forty films, is £5 5s. The No. 2 * Frena” is for 4+ x 3% in. films, and is fitted with a 53-in. single achromatic lens work- ingfrom F.11. ‘The other details are as in No. 00. The price, with forty films, is £5 8s. 6d. The No. 2 “ Frena” is the same as No. 0, except in size of film, which is 3} x 44, or ordinary $-plate size; price £8 t7s. 6d. when charged with 40 4-plate films. The No. 3 ** Frena ” is for 5 4 in. films, and is fitted with a 63-in. Beck Autograph Rapid Recti- linear lens, with a working aperture of F. 8. Magnifiers may be fitted to all the types of “ Wrena” cameras. These are a series of single lenses which fit on to the front of the permanent lens, by which means objects near to the camera may “be photographed. Thus, for example, the nearest object that can be sharply photegraphed with the No. 2 “Frena” would be 20 ft. away. whilst by the addition of suitable magnifiers objects may be taken as near to the camera as 4 ft. These magnifiers are generally sold in sets SCIENCE-GOSSTP. of four, which will bring an object in focus at the following distances: No. 1, 27 to 9 ft.; No. 2, 10 to 6 ft.; No. 3, 6 to 43 ft.; and No. 4, 43 to 3d ft. “These cameras may now be had fitted with the Beck-Steinheil orthostigmat lens for an additional cost of from £3 to £6. The new folding ‘“ Frena” is an adaptation of the box form of camera, having precisely the same changing arrangement, but in which the front of the camera carrying the lens and shutter is made to fold, thus reducing the size of the instrument very considerably. This alteration also carries with it the additional advantages of allowing lenses of different foci to be used, and permits of focussing the image on a ground-glass screen or to scale, and allows the use of a rising front for both vertical and horizontal views. Another great convenience in this new form of ‘*‘ Frena” is that ? 2-PLATE PICTURE TAKEN WITH No. 2 “ FRENA.” the whole film-changing portion of the camera may be removed, and leave a complete camera which can be used with double dark slides, thus enabling the possessor of such an instrument to use either films or glass plates. The folding “ Frena” cameras are made in three classes—Nos. 6, 7. and 8—and range in price from £11 18s. 6d. to £317s. The No. 8, which is the best: of this class, is fitted with a Beck-Steinheil 2-foci ortho- stigmat lens, 43%-in. focus in combination, and 82-in, focus when used as a single long-focus lens. The full aperture of this lens is F. 6:3, (To be continued.) SCIENCE-GOSSTIP. 351 AN ABNORMAL NEW2.—When dipping in a pond about three years ago for creatures to stock my aquarium I caught a newt which seems to be different from any of those that I have seen described in books. It was found under the roots of an osmunda fern that was growing on the border of a small pond about twenty yards by ten yards in extent. ‘This pond contains great numbers of the palmate newt, ZLophinus palmatus, in the early SE Pia. 1. part of the summer, but I have never found any other species there. I thought that this newt was the larva of the great water-newt, Triton cristatus, and so took it home and kept it in an aquarium 2 ft. by 1 ft. in size, with about seven inches of water. The newt had well-developed gills, which I expected it would absorb in the autumn, on leaving the water and taking refuge on an island arranged in the centre of the aquarium. ‘To my IG. 2; surprise, however, it never left the water at all, but remained in the larval condition with its gills nearly as well developed as when first caught. This interesting creature has hardly grown half an inch during these three years, and except for this small increase in size has not altered in any way. The food on which the newt feeds consists of the smaller inhabitants of the aquarium—such as water-mites, young leeches, hydras, and many © RiGenos others—but when these are scarce I give it worms and flies. When I agitate the surface of the water it comes for the flies; but finds some difficulty in seizing them, asthey are so buoyant on the surface. In warm weather the newt often stays on a rock with its nose just out of the water and the rest of the body submerged, and this seems to show that it has developed lungs, as does also the fact that — it is very fond of giving up bubbles of air. There are three gills on each side, one pair being much. smaller than the others. ‘They are capable of movement, as sometimes they are carried well for- ward and at others lying back against the sides. Another remarkable feature of this newt is the great prominence of the under lip, which would lead one to suppose that it was the straight-lipped newt. The colour, generally, is dark brown on the dorsal surface, shading into silvery grey ventri- cally, while the whole surface is slightly mottled. The crest on the tail always remains the same height through summer and winter. Very often there are tears in its edge, made, I think, by the larvae of dragonflies which live in the same aquarium. At the end of the tail is a short fila- ment about half the length of that on “4. palmatus. The length of the newt is within an eighth of an inch of three inches. The figures of explanation are: Fig. 1. An outline drawing of the newt as seen when lying at the bottom of a dish; the legs are thus spread out in their natural positions. Wig. 2. A side view taken through a glass vessel. Fig. 3. This shows the protruberence of the under lip. Wig. 4. A shaded drawing to show the general character of the markings.—A. 7. Mundy, Corn- wood Vicarage, Ivybridge, Devon, March 1901. WOODPECKER FEEDING ON GROUND.—It is no uncommon sight to see woodpeckers feeding on the ground, particularly when there are ants’ nests about. It is curious to see them drive their beaks into the ground in search of the ants and their pupae.—D. Wilson-Barker, Greenhithe. WOODPECKER FEEDING ON GROUND.—With regard to the note of Mr. Dallas (ante, p. 316), this is not such an uncommon circumstance as many persons imagine. Ant-hills are very favourite hunting-grounds for these birds. I have often watched them at work: they penetrate with their strong bills deeply into the ant-hill in order to obtain the pupae, or so-called ant-eges, as well as ants themselves. I have seen specimens of these birds with the breast quite stained with red earth, among which they had been searching for ants.— HH. Wheeler, 71 Queen's Road, Clifton, Bristol. FORMALIN AS A PRESERVATIVE FOR PLAN?TS.— The use of formalin for the preservation of zo0- logical specimens is now very general, and its advantages were mentioned in the last number of this journal (ante, p. 313). Its application to the preservation of plants and flowers, however, is quite new, and the experiments of Mr. J. W. Peck, which are described in the ‘“ Pharmaceutical Journal,” are extremely interesting and suggestive. The most satisfactory results were obtained with a 5 per cent. solution of formaldehyde, 7.c. an eighth of the strength of the commercial formalin, which contains 40 per cent. of formaldehyde. The flowers and portions of plants immersed in this and kept in the dark remained intact, whilst the tissues became more or less translucent, showing the structure. After seventeen months yellow calceolaria flowers had lost but little of their colour, whilst a tulip and hyacinth had _ lost 332 about 50 per cent. A pansy exposed to diffused light in a 5 per cent. solution was rapidly bleached. with the exception of the lower yellow petal. A white tulip became translucent, but retained its external form perfectly. The odour of mignonette was still perceptible after four months, notwith- standing the penetrating odour of the formalin itself. Unfortunately the solution soon bleached blue colours. A blue hyacinth became opaque white in two days and translucent in six months. Green leaves became only slightly translucent, and were otherwise unchanged. In order to prevent the bleaching action of sunlight it was found essential to keep the specimens if as dark a place as possible. The preservative action of the forma- lin is due to its destroying all external micro- organisms, and preventing the inter-action of the plant-cells by contracting their protoplasm. C@. A. Witchell, Chancery Lane, London. A SECTION IN WESTMINSTER.—The workmen employed in the excavations for the foundations of the new Government offices in Parliament Street. Westminster, have brought to light several finds of considerable interest. The section, which attained a depth of 30 ft.. showed made ground containing old-fashioned tobacco pipes, pottery. etc., overlying alluvial peat with Pleistocene river drift below. In the peat. which contained numerous mollusca. several human remains were found—namely, a frontal bone, a portion of a tibia. and several vertebrae, ribs, and metatarsals. The peat also yielded a complete lower jaw and two horn-cores of Bos primigenius. a horn-core with a portion of the skull of B. longifrons, a complete skull of Eguus caballus, two incisor teeth of Sus scrofa,and a skull of a horned sheep. The only mammalian remains obtained from the drift were a single molar of the Elephas primigenius and an antler of the reindeer (Rangifer tarandus). They were both in excéllent preservation.— Gilhert White, 31 North Side, Clap- ham Common, SW. NOTICES OF SOCIETIES. Ordinary meetings are marked 7, excursions * : names of persons Jollewing excursions are of Conductors. Lantern Tlustra-= tions §. i NortH Loxpon Natctrat History Socrery. April +4.—S “ Some Notes on British Spiders.” Frank P. Smith. + 18.7 ~The Tree in its Relation to Primitive Thought.” Mrs. H. M. Halliday. + 2%.—* Visit to Royal Botanic Society’s Gardens. SoutH LoxpoN ENTOMOLOGICAL anD NatTcRAL HIStory Society. April 25.7 “ Birds and their Nests.” R. Kearton, F.Z.S. BIRKBECK NATURAL History Socrery. - April 13.—* Natural History Museum, Sonih Kensington. A. B. Rendle, M.A.; D.Se., F.L.S. ; LAMBETH FIELD CLUB AND SCIENTIFIC SOCIETY. April 1.—§ “ The Natural Beanties of Crohamburst.” §.—* Effingham and Bookham. E. A. Martin, F.G.S. 20.—*- Crohambhurst. ” >) LONDON GEOLOGICAL Fretp CLass. April 27.—* Nutfield to Caterham. Anticlinal of the Weald. (Weald Clay to Chalk.) Professor H. G. Seeley, FRS. Camera CLUB. 4pril 1— Discussion : * The Development of Rollable and other Films.” 18.—j “ Man's Place in Nature.” Percy Ames. NOTTINGHAM NATURAL ScrENcCE RAMBLING CLUE. April 6.—; “ The Teachings of Geology.” 20.—f “ Meaning of the Colours on a Geological May.” SCIENCE-GOSSTP. PRESTON SCIENTIFIC Sociery. April 10.— “ Peculiarities of Animal Forms.” James Harrison, A.R.G.S. 24.— “The Origin of the Higher Vertebrates: a Study in Evolution” James Marsden. MANCHESTER MUSEUM, OWENS COLLEGE. April 8.—j * Selection.” W. E. Hoyle. NOTICES TO CORRESPONDENTS. To CORRESPONDENTS AND EXCHANGERS.—SCIENCE-GOSSIP is published on the 25th of each month. All notes or short com- munications should reach us not later than the 18th of the month for insertion in the following number. No communications can be inserted or noticed without full name and address of writer. Notices of changes of address admitted free. BUSINESS COMMUNICATIONS.—All business communications relating to ScleNcE-Gossip must be addressed to the Manager, ScIENCE-GossL, 110 Strand, London. EDITORIAL COMMUNICATIONS, articles, books for review, instru- ments for notice, specimens for identification, etc., to be addressed to JoHN T. CARRINGTON, 110 Strand, London, W.C. SUBSCRIPTIONS. —The volumes of SCiENCE-GossiP begin with the June numbers, but Subscriptions may commence with any number, at the rate of 6s. 6d. for twelve months (including postage). and should be remitted to the Manager, ScrencE- Gossip, 110 Strand, London, W.C. Norice.—Coniributors are requested to strictly observe the following rules. All contributions must be clearly written on one side of the paper only. Words intended to be printed in italics should be marked under with a single line. Generic names musi be given in iull, excepting where used immediately before. Capitals may only be used for generic, and not specific names. Scientific names and names of places to be written in reund hand. CHANGE OF ADDRESS. J. Burton, from 33 Ingham Road to 20 Fortune Green Road, West Hampstead, N.W. EXCHANGES. NoticE.—Exchanges extending to thirty words (including name and address) admitted free: but additional words must be prepaid at the rate of threepence for every seven words or less. AgBovutT 300 specimens of Helix nemioralis, 12 varieties, and 100 H. aspersa for dried specimens of Foreign Planis—F. T. Mott, Birstal Hill, Leicester. WANTED, a bit of Sugar Cane, fresh or dry: also, when in season, a few fresh stems of Equisetum hyemale. Botanical or insect slides offered in exchange.—W. White, Litcham, Swait- ham. WANTED to correspond with Collectors abroad for the ex- change of land and marine shells, crustacea and echinoder- mata.—H. W. Parritt, 8 Whitehall Park, London, N. EXCHANGE —Fifty-one micro-slides in pine box for well-set British Lepidoptera.—Edward Kitchen, 116 Eversleigh Road, Battersea, London, $.W- WANTFD, wild flowers (fresh or pressed) in exchange for microscopical material, &c.—A. Nicholson, 67 Greenbank Road, Darlington. CONTENTS. PAGE New or TewPorsRy Srars. By Frank C. DENNETT. Tilustrated .. 2: 25 ne ac: 55 co, SoZ Some British Divine BEETLES. By E. J. BURGESS Sopp, F.R.MetSoc., FES. Jilustrated .. ot Pe oo 320- MECHANICS OF CONDUCTION OF Sap. By HarRonmp A. Haic. Illustrated .. 55 se = 5 «s 829 COLOURING OF WATER BY MicrRo-ORGANISMS. By JAMES BURTON =e = 25 as 30 = -- Baz An INTRODUCTION TO BRITISH SPIDERS. By FRANK IMustrated = 25 os os PERCY SMITH. =: By C. AINSWORTH Tue ZeEM-ZeE4 WATER OF MECCA. MITCHELL, B.A. IJllusirated 5 - 2 -- sed BUTTERFLIES OF THE PALAEARCTIC REGION. By HENRY CHARLES LanG. M.D. Jiiustrated <0 : «ciao LAND AND FRESHWATEK MOLLUSCA OF HAMPSHIRE.. By LioNeL E. ApaMs, B.A., assisted by B. B. Woop- : “i ae 55 5 te) S05 WARD, F.L.S... ScIENCE GossIPp—Books TO READ. Ji/ustrated .. 339, 340 Microscopy. IJilustraied 35 so 55 50 -- 342 ASTRONOMY as se =5 se os ac -- 346 CHEMISTRY—PHOTOGRAPHY. Illustrated .. oe 347, 348 NOTES AND QUERIES. Jilustrated .. sc “5 .. dal NOTICES aND EXCHANGES ae ac a: a2 302 SCIENCE-GOSS/P. THE NATURE OF ANIMAL FAT. By C, AINSWORTH MITCHELL, B.A. (Oxon.) ATE owe to the distinguished French chemist Chevreul our first insight into the chemistry of fats and oils. His classical work “ Recherches sur les Corps Gras,” published in 1823, was supple- mented, and to some extent corrected, in numerous investigations—notably by Liebig and his pupils, and more recently by von Hiibl, Hazura, Hehner and many others. Notwithstanding all this re- search, however, the subject remains obscure in many respects, and presents numerous problems which will only be solved when more accurate methods of analysis have been devised. What is popularly known as the “fat” of an animal is really part of the connective tissue con- taining cells, in which the original protoplasm has been gradually displaced by the true fat leaving the, cell walls intact. These cells are usuaily grouped together and supported by the fibrous Fia. 1. CRYSTALS PROM Mrxep LARD AND Breer Far. substance of the connective tissue, as is shown in figs. 3 and 4. In order to separate the fat from the tissue the cell walls must be broken down, and in manu- facturing processes, such as the rendering of lard, this is done by means of heat. The isolated fat of most land animals consists essentially of compounds of various acids, known as fatty acids, with elycerin, these compounds being termed “ elycerides.” If we boil a fat with a strong solution of soda or potash, decomposition takes place, the fatty acids combining with the alkali to form soap, whilst the glycerin is set free. On now treating the soap solution with hydrochloric acid the soap is decom- posed, and a mixture of different fatty acids rises to the surface of the liquid. May 1901.—No. 84, Vou. VIT. N The nature of these fatty acids varies with the particular fat, but the mixture usually con- sists of palmitic, stearic, and oleic acids, with, at all events, in some cases linolic and linolenic acids. Palmitic acid derives its name from being a chief constituent of palm oil. Itis a white, soft, soapy solid, practically without taste or odour. Stearic acid, from oréap, otherwise tallow, is, as its name suggests, an important constituent of tallow. In its general properties it resembles palmitic acid, but melts at a higher temperature, and is less soluble in alcohol and other solvents. A mixture of palmitic and stearic acids recalls the behaviour of an alloy of different metals, the mixture having a lower melting point than either of its constituents. Until recently there was no exact method of quantitatively separating these two acids. FIG. 2. ORYSTALS FROM BEEF Far, Oleic acid, from olewm, otherwise oil, is a colour- less liquid when pure. It also differs from the preceding acids in being unsaturated. Thus, on treatment with a solution of iodine it absorbs a large proportion of that element, yielding a definite compound, Linolic acid ‘and linolenic acid derived their name from linseed-oil—olewm they were first discovered. They resemble oleic acid, but are still more unsaturated—linolenic acid much more so than linolic acid. The drying properties of linseed-oil are attributed to linolenic acid. linitum—in which The manner in which the glycerin is combined with these various acids is not known with cer- tainty. Glycerin has three available groups that enter into combination, so that there are numerous Published April 25th, 1901. 354s possible glycerides. Thus the fat may consist of tri-glycerides such as :— Stearic A. Palmitic A. Oleic A. Glycerin Stearic A. G.€—Palmitic A. G.€—Oleic A. Oleic A. These compounds have been artificially prepared, Stearic A. Palmitic A. and are known as stearin, palmitin, and olein. Or tiiere may be a series of mixed glycerides such as :— Stearic A. Stearic A. Palmitic A. G.Stearic A. G.——Palinitie A. G.— Oleic A. Palmitic A. Oleic A. Linolie A. There is evidence that in some cases, at all events, such mixed glycerides do exist. When we examine the mixed fatty acids obtained from any fat we are met by an initial difficulty. There is no exact method of separating the solid acids from the liquid or unsaturated acids, and we have in most cases to be content with drawing inferences from the percentage of iodine absorbed, by the mixture, or its incompletely separated frac- tions. In the case of stearic acid, however, Mr. Hehner and the present writer have devised the following means of effecting a quantitative sepa- ration. Strong alcohol is saturated with pure stearic acid, and the flask containing the solution left all night ina mixture of ice and water, the clear liquid being filtered off next morning from any deposit. On treating the mixed fatty acids with this saturated solvent, and cooling the flask overnight in ice-water, the alcohol, having already been saturated with pure stearic acid, is unable to dissolve any more, although it can take up all the other constituents. The liquid is filtered off by means of the appa- ratus shown in fig. 5, and the deposit in the small flask weighed. ‘The filter is the thistle-funnel, the mouth of which is covered with linen and immersed in the flask, and a suction pump is attached to the indiarubber tube fixed to the side tubulure of the large flask. By this method light has been thrown on many obscure points, as, for instance, the nature of fat crystals. If we dissolve a fat in ether and allow it to crystallise, characteristic microscopic crystals are frequently obtained. ‘ihus lard yields straight crystals with chisel-shaped ends, whilst if beef-fat be taken, the crystals have the form shown in fig. 2. A mixture of lard with about fifteen per cent. of beef-fat gives crystals of inter- mediate character (fig. 1), the grouping resembling those of fig. 2, and the chisel-shaped ends those of ordinary lard. In certain cases lard from the flare of the pig yields crystals closely resembling those in fig. 1, and the explanation of this was found in the following experiment: A lard containing sixteen per cent. of stearic acid was dissolved in ether, and yielded an abundant deposit of crystals with the characteristic chisel-shaped ends, which were SCIENCE-GOSSIP. found to contain thirty-two per cent of stearic acid. This deposit was again crystallised from ether. The crystals were then needle-shaped, but had distinct chisel-shaped ends, as in fig. 1. They contained forty-seven per cent. of stearic acid. For a third time the deposit was recrystallised. The percentage of stearic acid had now risen to fifty-nine per cent., and the crystals were hardly distinguishable in form from those of beef-fat (fig. 2). It thus appears that the difference in form between the two kinds of crystals is solely due to a larger proportion of stearic acid, and that in exceptional cases the fat from certain parts of the pig contains more of that acid, and thus yields pointed crystals in one crystallisation. Experiments were next made with fat from different parts of the same pig, and the following amounts of stearic acid were found: head, 9; ham, 9; breast, 11; flare, 15; and back, 9 per cent. In a similar series of determinations with sheep- fat the results were: back, 25; neck, 16-4; breast, 1; ham, none; and kidney, 27 per cent. of stearic acid. The ham fat, which contained no stearic FAT. CELLS. ty gnss22 B25, ‘S7eQUT Onss2p aAIZIIUOD Fic. 3. FaT-CELLS FROM RABBIT. acid, was liquid at the ordinary temperature, and that of the breast nearly liquid. a A specimen of beef-fat, which was very hard, was found to contain fifty per cent. of stearic acid. These results show that there is a relation between the consistency of the fat and the pro- portion of stearic acid. Some interesting observations on the variations in the consistency of the fat from different parts of several animals have recently been made by Henriques and Hansen. They have found that the fat gradually varies in composition from the exterior to the interior parts of the body. The fat immediately below the skin has the lowest melting-point, and that in the centre of the body the highest, whilst the melting-point of the fat in the intermediate parts varies with its distance from the interior. SCIENCE-GOSSIP. 355 It is curious that horse-fat derived from any part of the animal is soft and of about the con- sistency of butter. Even that from the kidneys is semi-fluid and quite different from the kidney fat of the sheep, which is hard and tallow-like. The food of an animal appears to have a con- siderable influence on the consistency and com- position of its fat. It is well known that the fat of American pigs is much more fluid and capable of combining with more iodine than that of Euro- pean pigs. This is possibly due to the presence of a larger proportion of the more unsaturated linolic acid derived from the oil in the maize on which American pigs are frequently fed. The effect of captivity on the fat of wild animals is shown in a series of interesting results obtained by Amthor and Zink. The amount of liquid fatty acids (oleic, linolic etc.), as measured by the proportion of iodine with which they could combine, was found to be lower in the fat of domestic animals than in that of the corresponding wild animals, and the more fluid character of the fat was also indicated by its higher melting-point, as shown in the following table :— ; Per cent. of Hat. Melting-point Todine OO}, absorbed. Domestic Cat 06 - o9—40 .. 54.5 Wild Cat .. ne ae oi —S oe EOS Tame Rabbit Wild Rabbit AHP no GRHS 35—38 .. 99.8 Goose 58 50 56 Tet O2 —3 48 iret een: Wild Goose .. . 60 as so. ORO Wild Goose (2 years’ captivity) .. —- SOTEO) Duck 56 on Bo e050 DOLD, Wild Duck .. — Te O426 In the case of birds, the fat of the domestic goose, duck and hen resembled lard, whilst that of the related wild birds was oily. The fat of the wild boar was found to differ from Fic. 4. FAT-CELLS, SOME SHOWING NUCLEUS, AND ONE FAT-CRYSTALS, ordinary lard in possessing more liquid fatty acids, and especially in having drying properties. This remarkable property of drying, which has never been previously recorded of any animal fat, was also possessed by the fat of the hare and wild rabbit, and to a lesser extent by that of the black- cock. The fat of the polecat was quite liquid, whilst that of the dog and the cat resembled lard in appearance and general characteristics. Fox-fat was like that of dog, but more liquid. The fat of marine animals and of fishes has been less studied than that of land animals, and many of the results which have been published require confirmation. Speaking generally, they are oils that contain very unsaturated liquid fatty acids, and some je a eae \ —— 4 J We y >) | ‘ Fie. 5. APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING STEARIC ACID. of which resemble linseed-oil, though without possessing its drying properties. I have to express my thanks to Messrs. Chas. Griffin & Co. for permission to use the blocks in figs. 8 and 4, and to Dr. Sykes, editor of the ‘“« Analyst,” for the loan of the block of fig. 5. 57 Chancery Lane, London, W.C. ALGOL..—Professor A. A. Nijland, of Utrecht, finds that the light curve of this star during decrease, is not so regular as is usually described, but in reality shows a marked break. FLyInG FisH.—From time to time a question interesting to naturalists is raised as to the mode of flight of the “ flying fish.” Does it really fly as do birds, or is its passage through the air simply a blowing along by the wind in conjunction with the impetus given by its leap from the water? I believe that close and constant observation would prove that the pectoral fins of the fish do not vibrate, and that they are incapable of flapping as the wings of birds flap; also that the fish does not “fly” in calm weather. Further, that it generally “flies” up the wind, and that the fact of its rising above the waves in a forward movement is due to the upward direction of the wind from the waves. The flight of the fish resembles in many particulars the soaring flight of oceanic birds; a rapid vibratory motiou of the anal fins is sometimes very noticeable. It would be interest- ing to hear other opinions on this point, and I should personally be much obliged for any informa- tion or for photographs showing the fish in the act of flight.—D. Wilson Barker, Greenhithe. N 2 350 SCIENCE-GOSSIP FRUITING OF LESSER CELANDINE. By CHARLES E. BRITTON. ses has been a long-accepted belief concerning this plant, not in this country alone but also upon the continent of Europe, that there is a vital defect in its sexual organisation of sucha character that reproduction in the normal manner of flower- ing plants, by formation of seed, is rare. This sterility, partial or more complete, is accompanied and compensated for by the formation of tubers, a non-sexual means of reproduction which occurs. at the underground part of the plant, appearing as thick, fleshy, root-like swellings, or are formed above the soil in the axils of the stem-leaves. The function of the subterranean tubers is essentially to serve as a means of conveying the life of the plant over to the next period of growth ; besides which, however, by the annual increase of tubers, the species is propagated. It is chiefly owing to these root-tubers that the individual plants of Ranunculus ficaria grow in clumps, which are again associated in larger communities. The stem- tubers, from their place of formation in the axils of the leaves, are capable, according to the in- fluence of various agents, of spreading the species into areas in which it may be unrepresented. At’ the conclusion of the period of flowering, leaves, stems, and roots disappear, and early in the follow- ing year the tubers give origin to new plants. In recent years at least two series of observations have been made upon the lesser celandine—one by Mr. I. H. Burkill, who published in the ‘‘ Journal of Botany” for 1897 some studies in the “ Fertilisa- tion of Spring Flowers on the Yorkshire Coast.” As regards the species under consideration, this investigator paid special attention to the number and variety of the insects visiting its flowers, and came to the conclusion that “ R. ficaria, which so extremely rarely sets seed, is an enigma. This failure in seed-production cannot be due to want of fertilisation, for the flowers are visited by a considerable variety of insects, though not very freely.” Professor Federico Delpino also studied the lesser celandine, and came to the rather startling conclusion that our familiar plant is the dwarf functionally female form of the stouter, larger-flowered R. caltheafolius, a Continental piant with a rather restricted- range, in this manner accounting for the sterility of the pollen, and the readiness in which the species is propagated asexually. It is no new theory that the South European plant just named is, indeed, closely allied to the lesser celandine, and at one time it was expected that it would reward search directed for it in this country. Having occasionally encountered RF. ficaria bear- ing fruit, I was inclined to regard with suspicion so sweeping a statement that seed-production is a rare phenomenon in this species. In 1898 the opportunity occurred of paying some attention to this question, as on a certain occasion in May abundant fruit was observed in North Middlesex and South Hertfordshire. The amount of seed borne by plants of the lesser celandine in the neighbourhood of Potter’s Bar, South Mimms, North Mimms, and Shenley was sufficient to dis- pose of the question of the rarity of seed-produc- tion. During the same month of May the species was observed fruiting on Great Bookham Common and near Ockham, Surrey. On this occasion the conclusion arrived at was that fruit, if not freely produced, was by no-means rare. In the extreme south-east corner of Surrey abundance of fruit was observed in one locality. From one clump were gathered twelve heads of well-developed fruit and nine heads with undeveloped carpels occurring with the almost mature achenes. After May I failed to‘observe other instances of seed-production, but during the next year followed up the subject. In late April and early May of 18991 was at Mid- hurst, in Sussex, and during my walks in the neigh- bourhood noted twelve localities in which 2. ficaria was bearing fruit either plentifully or abundantly. In June fruit was being produced at the foot of the downs near Brook, in Kent. During the first fortnight in May, 1900, the species was noticed fruiting well near Westhumble, Westcott on road- side banks, New Oxted on dry banks. West Horsley on roadside bank, and abundantly at Chipstead Bottom, all these localities being in the county of Surrey. During the same period the production of fruit was observed in various places in the neighbourhood of Fawkham, Kent. The enumeration of these localities does not exhaust the list of places where the lesser celandine was observed in fruit. It may also be as well to mention that these observations were made during the course of general botanising. Seeing that a certain amount of fruit is produced, the question arises as to its origin. bearing in view the alleged sterility of the pollen. Obviously examination of the pollen of #&. (ficaria is quite as important as observations directed to the frequency of seed-production. The pollen- grains are yellow, spherical. or tetrahedral in a younger state, with densely granular protoplasm. Sometimes a proportion consists of shrivelled, imperfect grains, the percentage of which varies, SCIENCE-GOSSIP. occasionally being considerable, and at other times less so. _ During the late spring of 1898 I prepared about eight cultures of pollen, in water and in sugar- and-water, with the result that no examples of emission of pollen-tubes were noticed. Strangely enough, not even in the case of pollen selected from plants bearing fruit was germination ob- served. This negative evidence did not, however, lead me to assume that seed is produced partheno- genetically without the influence of the male element. The following spring gave very satis- factory results as to the capability of the pollen to germinate. Usually the grains germinated more readily in the water cultures than in the sugar- and-water preparations. In the case of pollen taken from a cultivated plant, which the previous year was found bearing fruit at Shenley, more germinating grains were observed in the sugar- and-water preparations than in the water cultures, The observations of 1899 were made on pollen obtained from plants flowering from March to June, and some of the pollen was obtained from plants bearing fruit. Apart from germination, the chief noticeable feature of most cultures of pollen was that the proportion of imperfect pollen-grains was much smaller than in the pollen-cultures of the previous year; in fact, the shrivelled pollen-grains were scarcely present. An exception was in the case of pollen taken from plants growing in a damp situation by a stream near Theydon Bois in Essex. The proportion of imperfect grains was there as much as about six to every eight regularly formed grains. Continued observations during the spring of 1900 were as successful as those of the previous year. In one instance only did the grains fail to germinate, and in these preparations most of the pollen-grains absorbed water to such an extent as to burst the membranes. In all preparations of pollen, it is but a minority of the grains which emit pollen-tubes. Some of the pollen-tubes reach a great length in comparison with the size of the grains, beine twenty or more times as long as the diameter of the grains from which they originate. A portion only germinate, and I think these alone possess the power of emitting pollen-tubes. It is well, however, to retain in view that the conditions presented by water and sugar-and-water cultures are vastly different from those occurring in nature. It may perhaps not be out of place to mention here that seed of the lesser celandine procured at Shenley and in Surrey germinated readily in the year following gathering. The imperfect character of these observations upon #. ficaria is very apparent, and from them it would be extremely unwise to draw con- clusions as to the general behaviour of the species. Further, the results of observations, however ex- tensive, of one observer only can never be taken as | 357 characteristic of the species under investigation. To achieve this end it is necessary that observa- tions of many investigators should be pieced together into one continuous whole. Personally, I entertain the opinion that fruit of the lesser celandine, if not generally produced, is by no means rare, and can, when looked for, usually be found. ‘To the habit of the plant is due the fact that fruit, even when produced, is apparently absent. Usually after flowering, the peduncle of a plant is strengthened in order to support the maturing fruit. This is not so in &. ficaria, in which species the fruit-stalks are flaccid and lie low among the leaves. Occasionally, the stalks become curved as much as is the habit among the water crowfoots, and the. heads of achenes seem almost to burrow into the soil. This depressed habit of the fruit-bearing stalks, together with the large achenes and the formation of tubers, are probably the causes of the plants being gregarious. That there is an undoubted connection between the formation of tubers by which asexual repro- duction is effected and the producticn of seed is evident. Usually in seed-bearing plants of the lesser celandine the production of tubers is not marked on the parts above the soil. That a plentiful formation of axillary tubers. is preju- dicial to the production of seed is suggested by the circumstance that in one locality near South Mimms, in 1898, where the plants were abundantly producing axillary tubers, one or several together, only two plants could be found bearing seed, and this so small in quantity that it was limited to two stalks, each with five well erown carpels among the undeveloped ovaries. If, as is likely to be the case, the two methods of reproduction cannot very well exist side by side, it may be that, in localities where the chief mode of propagation is by means of tubers, there is this inability, not from any defect in the sexual consti- tution, but by reason of the plastic food materials being diverted from the perhaps fertilised ovaries towards the tubers. It may be thought that dryness of situation, in a measure, affects seed- production, though my observations do not lead to such a conclusion. It is true fruiting plants have been met with in dry situations; but, on the other hand, such plants have been found in damp places, such as at the base of hedge-banks and by ditches. In 1898 a locality where fruit was produced abundantly was in a wet, clayey field; and the instance mentioned of tuber-forma- tion near South Mimms occurred on a very dry, sandy bank. Especially wet situations, as by watercourses and streams, may favour tuber forma- tion, to the detriment of the sexuality of the plants, for in such places the chances of the flowers perfecting seed may be considerably lessened. It may have been due to the influence of the surroundings that failure attended my 358 observations directed to ascertain the capability of the pollen to germinate, when pollen was pro- cured from plants growing in situations as above indicated. One cause that may contribute towards the conclusion as to the rarity of seed-production is that situations such as hedge-banks, where R. ficaria is most evident, support a much stronger general vegetation towards the close than at the prime of the flowering period of our plant, which, like other low-growing herbs, suffers the risk of being obscured by its taller neighbours. Flowering at a time when few other plants are in bloom; having few competitors possessing flowers of a similar organisation; making a great display of colour; affording abundant pollen and honey to its insect-visitors, which are fairly SCIENCE-GOSSIP. numerous in kind and in number, and some, as I have observed, are very assiduous in their atten- tions to the flowers ; possessing a peculiar sensitive- ness of the floral envelopes, which open or close according to variations in the temperature of the atmosphere; if, with all these advantages, the flowers nevertheless extremely rarely set seed, then, indeed, as Mr. I. H. Burkill says, &. ficaria is an enigma. If more attention is given by observers to the question of seed-production in the lesser celandine, it will be found, I anticipate, that the species is, after all, not such an enigma, and that fruit is more generally produced than is thought. 35 Dugdale Street, Camberwell, London, S. E. February 27th, 1901. AN INTRODUCLION TO. BRITISH, SPIDERS: By FRANK PERCY SMITH. (Continued from page 334.) GENUS LOPHOCARENUM MENGE. The posterior row of eyes is strongly curved, its convexity being directed- backwards. The tibial spines are very small, and those of the fourth pair of legs are situated near to the middle of the jomt. The abdomen has upon its upper side a scutum, or shield, which is furnished with numerous distinct punctures. Lophocarenum nemorale Bl. nemoralzs Bl.) Length. Male 1.5 mm. The caput of the male is furnished with a large prominence upon which the posterior central eyes are placed, the remaining eyes being placed in a trans- verse group near the junction of this lobe with the cephalo-thorax. ( Walchenacra Lophocarenum parallelum Bi. acra parallela BA.) Length. Male 1.5 mm., female 1.75 mm. This species is very similar to the last, but the cephalic lobe of the male is not nearly so prominent, it being low and rounded. As in Z. nxemorale the posterior central eyes are placed upon the front surface of this lobe. ( Walcken- Lophocarenum blackwallii Cb. The radial joint of the male palpus when viewed from above is seen to consist of two long unequal branches, almost parallel to each other. Lophocarenum mengei Sim. The caput is distinctly elevated, forming a some- what rounded lobe. Walckenaera turgida Bl. is probably referable to this genus. GENUS SAVIGNIA Bl. The small spider upon which this genus is founded was, when first described by Blackwall, stated to possess but six eyes. The two small eyes upon the front part of the cephalic eminence were soon dis- covered, and the spider removed to the genus Walckenaera. Jt has since been included in the genera Prosoponcus Sim. and Diplocephalus Bertkau ; but as it appears to possess characteristics sufficiently distinct to warrant the formation of a separate genus for its reception, the above name is here adopted. Savignia frontata Bl. in ‘* Spiders of Dorset.’’) Length of male, 2 mm. The curious form of the caput, which will also be figured in profile, will at once distinguish this species, which is not rare. ( Walckenaera frontata Fig. I, page 303. GENUS ZNTELECARA SIM. :. The anterior row of eyes is curved, the convexity being directed backwards. The tibiae of the first pair of legs have each two fine spines, and are longer than the metatarsi, which latter are distinctly longer than the tarsi, in the proportion of about 4 to 3. Entelecara acuminata Wid. (Walckenaera altifrons Cb.) Length of male, 1.7 mm. The caput is very high, and when viewed from in front has the appearance of a cone surmounted by a sphere. Entelecara flavipes Bl. ( Walckenaeraimplana Cb.) Length. Male 1.5 mm., female 1.7 mm. SCIENCE-GOSSIP. Cephalo-thorax blackish brown, minutely punc- tured. Legs pale yellow. Abdomenblack. 24.—* New Forest. R. W. Robbins. > 27.—*Cuxton. J. A. Simes. LAMBETH FIELD CLUB AND SCIENTIFIC SOCIETY. May 6.—$‘“ Wild Flowers at Home.” Edward Step, F.L.S. , 11.—* Epping Forest. C.H. Cooper. s, 18.—* Box Hill and Leatherhead (Geological). > 2/.—* Oxted and Limpsfield. W. Rivers. NOTTINGHAM NATURAL SCIENCE RAMBLING CLUB. May 4.—* Stapleford. MANCHESTER MUSEUM, OWENS COLLEGE. W. E. Hoyle. May 27.—7 “ Evolution.” GEOLOGISTS’ ASSOCIATION. May 4.—*Swanscomb. A. E. Salter, B.Sc., F.G.S. » 11.—*#Leighton Buzzard. A. M. Davies, B.Sc., F.G.S. >» 18.—* Grays. M. A. C. Hinton and A. S. Kennard. >» 25.—* The New (G.W.R.) line from Wootton Bassett to Patchway. Rev. H.H. Winwood, M.A., F.G.S. s, 29.—* Bristol and Dundry Hill. Rey. H. H. Winwood. PRESTON SCIENTIFIC SOCIETY. May 1.—7 “Flora.” W. Clitheroe. LONDON GEOLOGICAL FIELD CLASs, May 4.—* Arlesey. Professor H. G. Seeley, F.R.S. », 11.—* Gomshall. Professor H. G. Seeley, F.R.S. >, 18.—* Aylesford to Maidstone. Professor H. G. Seeley. NOTICES TO CORRESPONDENTS. To CORRESPONDENTS AND EXCHANGERS.—SCIENCE-GOssIP is published on the 25th of each month. All notes or short com- munications should reach us not later than the 18th of the month for insertion in the following number. No communications can be inserted or noticed without full name and address of writer. Notices of changes of address admitted free. BUSINESS COMMUNICATIONS.—All business communications relating to SCIENCE-GOssIP must be addressed to the Manager, ScrENcE-GossiP, 110 Strand, London. EDITORIAL COMMUNICATIONS, articles, books for review, instru- ments for notice, specimens for identification, etc., to be addressed to JOHN T. CARRINGTON, 110 Strand, London, W.C. SUBSCRIPTIONS.—The volumes of SCIENCE-GossIP begin with the June numbers, but Subscriptions may commence with any number, at the rate of 6s. 6d. for twelve months (including postage), and should be remitted to the Manager, SCTENCE- GossIP, 110 Strand, London, W.C. EXCHANGES. NorvicE.—Exchanges extending to thirty words (including name and address) admitted free; but additional words must be prepaid at the rate of threepence for every seven words or less. OFFERED.— Collection of English wild plants, mounted on cartridge paper, also small collection of West Australian flowers. Several * Hobbies.” What offers ?—Miss Graham, 42 Tisbury Road, Hove, Brighton. OFFERED.—Clau. dubia, Sph. lacustre, Cy. elegans, Hel. erice- torum, H. rupestris, Cardium echinatum, etc. Wanted, Kalmia and Prunus cuttings, young greenhouse plants and bulbs. No shells. —A. Whitworth, St. J Fohn’ s, Isle of Man. WANTED.—* Science-Gossip,” Nos. 13 to 24, 205 to 216, 229 to 240 (o.s.), and Nos. 21, 22, 24 to 28, 38, 41, 47,and 75 (N.s.). Full value given in British L., F.W., and Marine Shells—W. Hy. Heathcote, F.L.S., Preston. WANTED.—2 or 24 inch Telescope with Astronomical Eye- piece. Offered, Heads or Horns of South African Antelopes.— J.G. Brown, Pell Street, Port Elizabeth, South Africa. WANTED. —Geological material for Microscopic mounting in exchange for sawn sections or mounted sections, or would saw sections of material to share mutually.—A. Stott, Five Ways, Aldridge, Walsall. CONTENTS. E PAGE THE NATURE OF ANIMAL Fat. By C. AINSWORTH MITCHELL, B.A. Oxon. IJ/lustrated 5D > -. 30d FRUITING OF LESSER CELANDINE. By eaten E. BRITTON 50 5 Ac a ot . 306 AN INTRODUCTION TO BRITISH Sue By RRANE Perey SmirH. Jilustrated aS -. 398 BUTTERFLIES OF THE PALAEARCTIC Hucron By ee CHARLES LANG, M.D. Illustrated -. 360 LAND AND FRESHWATER MOLLUSCA OF SLs By LioNEL E. ADAMS, B.A., and B. B. WooDWARD, TS Se : 50 BA . 362 CLASSIFICATION OF BRITISH TICKS. By ‘Epw ARD G. WHEELER. Jillustrated .. -. 363 IRISH PLANT NAMES. By JOHN H. Eiger MB. -- 365 Books TO READ. Illustrated .. os ae 50 - 367 CHEMISTRY—SCIENCE GOSSIP... as 35 se 369, 370 Microscopy. IJilustraied P : ; a so carfl ASTRONOMY =: ae ze ee aS So -- od PHOTOGRAPHY. Illustrated ae Ae se ote Souesex irs CORRESPONDENCE—N OTICES 379, 380 | [